LIST OF CONSULTANTS - Connecticut...LIST OF CONSULTANTS Architect TSKP STUDIO, LLC 146 Wyllys...

msahin

Image

LIST OF CONSULTANTS

Architect TSKP STUDIO, LLC

146 Wyllys Street, Suite 1-203 Hartford, CT 06106

Civil Engineers Fuss & O’Neill, Inc 146 Hartford Road Manchester, CT 06040

Structural Engineers Michael Horton Associates, Inc. 151 Meadow Street, #2 Branford, CT 06405 MEP/FP Engineers Kohler Ronan, LLC Consulting Engineers 93 Lake Avenue Danbury, CT 06810 Well Consultant Lenard Engineering, Inc. 2210 Main Street P.O. Box 1088 Glastonbury, CT 06033

Owner’s HazMat Consultant Langan Engineering &

Environmental Services, Inc. Long Wharf Maritime Center 555 Long Wharf Drive New Haven, CT 06511

Net Zero Consultant CMTA 10411 Meeting Street Prospect, KY 40059 Landscape Architect Richter & Cegan, Inc 8 Canal Court, #B Avon, CT 06001 Geotechnical Welti Geotechnical, P.C. 227 Williams Street P.O. Box 397 Glastonbury, CT 06033

Kitchen & Food Service Food Service Design Collab., LLC 10 Middle Drive Windsor Locks, CT 06096 Owner’s Commissioning Agent Consulting Engineering Services 811 Middle Street Middletown, CT 06457

MANSFIELD ELEMENTARY SCHOOL

SEALS

State Project No. 078-0068N, Phase 2 of 3

000000

BUILDING OFFICIAL FIRE MARSHALL

HEALTH INSPECTOR APPOINTED 504 OFFICIAL


TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 of 7


TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 3 CONSULTANT

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING/CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

000000 – Advertisement for Bids CPL

000001 – Instructions to Bidders A701-2018 TSKP

000002 – Prevailing Wage Rates TSKP

000003 – Bid Form 1 of 3 (Stipulated Sum, Alternates, etc.) TSKP

000004 – Bid Form 2 of 3 (Unit Prices) TSKP

000005 – Bid Form 3 of 3 (CHRO Statements) TSKP

000006 – Contractor’s Qualification Statement A305-2020 TSKP

000007 – Bid Bond A310-2010 TSKP

000008 – Form of Agreement A101-2017 CPL

000009 – Insurance and Bonds A101-2017 Exhibit A CPL

000010 – General Conditions of the Contract A201-2007 CPL

002213 – Supplementary Instructions to Bidders TSKP

003132 – Geotechnical Data WELT

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

007300 – Supplementary General Conditions TSKP

011000 – Summary

012200 – Unit Prices

TSKP

TSKP

012300 – Alternates TSKP

012500 – Substitution Procedures TSKP

012900 – Payment Procedures TSKP

013100 – Project Management and Coordination TSKP

013116 – Coordination Drawings Procedure TSKP

013200 – Construction Progress Documentation TSKP

013233 – Photographic Documentation TSKP

013300 – Submittal Procedures TSKP

014000 – Quality Requirements TSKP

015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls TSKP

015150 – Indoor Air Quality Construction Plan TSKP

015639 – Temporary Tree and Plant Protection R&C

015713 – Construction Activity Pollution Protection F&O

016000 – Product Requirements TSKP

017300 – Execution TSKP

017413 – Project Cleanliness TSKP

017419 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal TSKP

017700 – Closeout Procedures TSKP

017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data TSKP

017839 – Project Record Documents TSKP

017900 – Demonstration and Training TSKP

018113 – Sustainable Design Requirements TSKP

019113 – General Commissioning Requirements CES

019119 – Facility Shell Commissioning CES




DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024113 – Selective Site Demolition F&O

024116 – Structure Demolition TSKP

028200 – Hazardous Building Materials Abatement & Demolition LANG

028213 – Asbestos Abatement LANG

028313 – Lead Based Paint Awareness LANG

028416 – Universal Waste Removal and Recycling LANG

028432 – PCBs Greater Than 50 PPM Remediation LANG

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 – Cast in Place Concrete MHA

034500 – Precast Architectural Concrete TSKP

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

042000 – Unit Masonry TSKP

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 – Steel MHA

051213 – Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing MHA

052100 – Joists MHA

053000 – Metal Decking MHA

054000 – Cold Formed Metal Framing TSKP

055000 – Metal Fabrications TSKP

055113 – Metal Stairs and Railings TSKP

055213 – Exterior Pipe and Tube Railings R&C

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTIC AND COMPOSITES

061053 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry TSKP

061063 – Exterior Rough Carpentry R&C

061500 – Wood Roof Decking MHA

061600 – Sheathing TSKP

061753 – Pre-Fabricated Wood Trusses MHA

061800 – Glued Laminated Construction MHA

064000 – Architectural Woodwork TSKP

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

070800 – Thermal and Moisture Protection Systems

Commissioning

CES

071113 – Bituminous Damproofing TSKP

071310 – Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing TSKP

072100 – Thermal Insulation TSKP

072726 – Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers TSKP

074113 – Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels TSKP

074213 – Sheet Metal Panels TSKP

074600 – Wood Siding TSKP

074646 – Fiber-Cement Siding TSKP

075323 – Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing TSKP

076200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim TSKP




077123 – Gutters and Downspouts TSKP

077200 – Roof Accessories TSKP

078413 – Penetration Firestopping TSKP

078446 – Fire-Resistive Joint Systems TSKP

079200 – Joint Sealants TSKP

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

080671 – Door Hardware Schedule TSKP

080800 – Openings Systems Commissioning CES

081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames TSKP

081416 – Flush Wood Doors TSKP

083113 – Access Doors and Frames TSKP

083326 – Overhead Coiling Grilles TSKP

084113 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts TSKP

084413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls TSKP

085113 – Aluminum Windows TSKP

086200 – Unit Skylights TSKP

086300 – Overhead Doors TSKP

087100 – Door Hardware TSKP

088000 – Glazing TSKP

089000 – Fixed Louver TSKP

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092116 – Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies TSKP

092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing TSKP

092900 – Gypsum Board TSKP

093000 – Tiling TSKP

095113 – Acoustical Panel Ceilings TSKP

095420 – Linear Wood Ceilings TSKP

096466 – Wood Athletic Flooring TSKP

096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories TSKP

096519 – Resilient Flooring TSKP

096566 – Synthetic Athletic Flooring TSKP

096723 – Resinous Flooring TSKP

096813 – Tile Carpeting TSKP

097200 – Wall Coverings TSKP

098433 – Sound Absorbing Wall Panels TSKP

099120 – Painting TSKP

099600 – High Performance Coatings TSKP

099700 – Material List TSKP

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

101100 – Visual Display Surfaces TSKP

101200 – Display Cases TSKP

101423 – Building Signage TSKP

101453 – Site Traffic Signage F&O

102113 – Toilet Compartments TSKP

102123 – Cubicle Tracks and Curtains TSKP

102800 – Toilet and Custodial Accessories TSKP




104413 – Fire Protection Cabinets TSKP

104416 – Fire Extinguishers TSKP

105113 – Metal Lockers TSKP

105123 – Wood Lockers TSKP

107516 – Ground Set Flagpoles R&C

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

111313 – Loading Dock Bumpers TSKP

111319 – Stationary Loading Dock Equipment TSKP

113100 – Residential Appliances & Misc. Equipment TSKP

114000 – Food Service Equipment FSD

115213 – Projection Screens TSKP

116143 – Stage Curtains TSKP

116623 – Gymnasium Equipment TSKP

116653 – Gymnasium Dividers TSKP

116800 – Playfield Equipment and Structures R&C

116823 – Exterior Court Athletic Equipment R&C

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

122413 – Roller Window Shades TSKP

124816 – Entrance Floor Grilles TSKP

126600 – Telescoping Stands TSKP

DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

142100 – Electric Traction Elevators TSKP

VOLUME 2 OF 3

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

210500 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression KR

210513 – Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression KR

210517 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire Suppression KR

210518 – Escutcheons for Fire Suppression KR

210523 – General Duty Valves for Fire Suppression KR

210529 – Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression KR

210548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression KR

210553 – Identification for Fire Suppression KR

210800 – Fire Protection Systems Commissioning CES

211100 – Facility for Fire Suppression KR

211119 – Fire Department Connections KR

211313 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System KR

211316 – Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems KR

213216 – Diesel Drive Vertical Turbine Fire Pumps KR

213400 – Pressure Maintenance Pumps KR

213900 – Controllers for Fire Pump Drivers KR

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

220500 – Common Work Results for Plumbing KR




220513 – Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing KR

220516 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing KR

220517 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing KR

220518 – Escutcheons for Plumbing KR

220519 – Meters and Gages for Plumbing KR

220520 – Protective Cover System for Plumbing KR

220523 – General Duty Valves for Plumbing KR

220529 – Hangers and Supports for Plumbing KR

220534 – Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping – Grease Waste KR

220548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing KR

220553 – Identification for Plumbing KR

220800 – Plumbing Systems Commissioning CES

221100 – Water System Components LE

221116 – Domestic Water Piping KR

221119 – Domestic Water Piping Specialties KR

221123 – Domestic Water Pumps KR

221218 – Underground Potable Water Storage Tanks KR

221223 – Facility Indoor Potable Water Storage Tanks KR

221300 – Sanitary Sewerage F&O

221316 – Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping KR

221319 – Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties KR

221319.13 – Sanitary Drains KR

221413 – Facility Storm Drainage Piping KR

221423 – Storm Drainage Piping Specialties KR

223300 – Electric Domestic Water Heaters KR

223600 – Domestic Heat Pump Water Heaters KR

224213.13 – Commercial Water Heaters KR

224213.16 – Commercial Urinals KR

224216.13 – Commercial Lavatories KR

224216.16 – Commercial Sinks KR

224716 – Pressure Water Coolers KR

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR

CONDITIONING

230000 – General Provisions KR

230130.51 – HVAC Air Distribution Cleaning KR

230513 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC KR

230516 – Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC KR

230517 – Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC KR

230518 – Escutcheons for HVAC Piping KR

230519 – Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping KR

230523 – General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping KR

230529 – Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping KR

230548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping KR

230553 – Identification for HVAC Piping KR

230593 – Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC KR

230700 – HVAC Insulation KR

230800 – HVAC Systems Commissioning CES

230900 – Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC KR




230993 – Sequence of Operations KR

232113 – Hydronic Piping KR

232113.33 – Ground Loop Heat Pump Piping KR

232123 – Hydronic Pumps KR

232300 – Refrigerant Piping KR

232520 – Glycol Feed Systems KR

232913 – Variable Frequency Motor Controllers KR

233113 – Metal Ducts KR

233330 – Air Duct Accessories KR

233423 – HVAC Power Ventilators KR

233600 – Air Terminal Units KR

233713 – Diffuser Registers and Grilles KR

233723 – HVAC Gravity Ventilators KR

234300 – Electronic Air Cleaners KR

237433 – Dedicated Outdoor Air Vents KR

238129 – Variable Refrigerant Volume HVAC System KR

238146 – Water Source Heat Pumps KR

238239 – Unit Heaters KR

VOLUME 3 OF 3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260100 – General Electric Requirements KR

260500 – Common Work Results for Electrical KR

260519 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors KR

260526 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical KR

260529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical KR

260533 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical KR

260543 – Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical KR

260548 – Vibration Controls for Electrical KR

260553 – Identification for Electrical KR

260573 – Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study KR

260800 – Electrical Systems Commissioning CES

262213 – Low Voltage Distribution Transformers KR

262413 – Switchboards KR

262416 – Panelboards KR

262726 – Wiring Devices KR

262816 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers KR

263100 – Photovoltaic Collectors KR

263213.13 – Diesel Emergency Engine Generators KR

263600 – Transfer Switches KR

265100 – Interior Lighting KR

265600 – Exterior Lighting KR

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

270500 – Common Work Results for Communications KR

270526 – Grounding and Bonding for Communications KR

270528 – Pathways for Communications KR




270528.26 – Innerduct for Communications KR

270536 – Cable Trays for Communications KR

270537 – Firestopping for Communications KR

270553 – Identifications for Communications KR

271100 – Communications Equipment Room Fittings KR

271116 – Communications Racks Frames and Enclosures KR

271313 – Communications Copper Backbone Cabling KR

271323 – Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling KR

271513 – Communication Copper Horizontal Cabling KR

272133 – Data Communications Wireless Access Points KR

274116 – Integrated Audio-Video Systems and Equipment KR

275126 – Assistive Listening Systems KR

275313 – Intercommunications Paging and Clock Systems KR

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 – Access Control Software and Database Management KR

281353.10 – Video Intercom System KR

281500 – Access Control Hardware Devices KR

282000 – Video Surveillance KR

283100 – Intrusion Detection KR

283111 – Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System KR

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

311000 – Site Clearing F&O

312300 – Earthwork F&O

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321216 – Asphalt Paving R&C

321313 – Concrete Paving R&C

321400 – Unit Paving R&C

321500 – Aggregate Surfacing R&C

321613 – Precast Concrete Curbing R&C

321723 – Site Painted Pavement Markings F&O

321816.13 – Playground Protective Surfacing R&C

321828 – Athletic Court Surfacing R&C

323113 – Chain Link Fences and Gates R&C

323119 – Metal Picket Fences and Gates R&C

323124 – Solid Cellular PVC Fences and Gates R&C

323223 – Segmental Retaining Walls R&C

323300 – Site Furnishings R&C

329115 – Soil Preparation (Performance Specification) R&C

329200 – Turf and Grasses R&C

329300 – Plants R&C

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

333400 – Septic System F&O

334211 – Stormwater Gravity Piping F&O

337119 – Electrical Underground Ducts Ductbanks Manholes F&O


COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION


210500 - 1

SECTION 210500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Work of this section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor,

equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as

shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and/or as required by job conditions.

B. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate a general arrangement of work. General design

concepts indicated must be followed or bettered. The bid shall include offsets, additional

piping, valves and plumbing equipment and components as required to meet construction

conditions for proper operation. Do not scale drawings. Consult Architectural and Structural

drawings for space conditions and additional fixtures. Develop and submit coordination

drawings as outlined in Division 21 sections.

C. The work under this Section shall include all incidentals, labor, material, equipment, appliances,

services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, consumable items, fees, licenses, and

administrative tasks required to complete and make operable the plumbing work as intended.

D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment as necessary to provide a complete

installation including coordination, system check out and start up on each item and system.

E. This Contractor shall inform himself from the general construction specifications and plans, of

the exact dimension of finished work and of the height of finished ceilings in all rooms where

equipment or pipes are to be placed and arrange his work in accordance with the schedule of

interior finishes, as indicated on the architectural drawings.

F. Manufacturer's qualifications: firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of fixtures,

appliances, pipes and pipe fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

G. Material qualifications: shall conform to all local, state, and national/federal codes and

regulations which may apply and nothing in these specifications shall be interpreted as an

infringement of such codes or regulations.

H. Welding: qualify welding procedures, welders, and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1,

or ASME B31.9, as applicable. Certify welding of piping work using Standard Procedure

Specifications by, and welders tested under supervision of, National Certified Pipe Welding

Bureau (NCPWB).

I. Brazing: certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work.

J. The Contractor warrants that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of

good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that




210500 - 2

the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the

work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to

these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be

considered defective. Contractor shall warranty all work for a period of one year from Owner

acceptance unless specified otherwise in which case longer equipment warranties may apply.

K. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace the following components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period:

L. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion: One (1) year.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Mechanical sleeve seals.

3. Sleeves.

4. Escutcheons.

5. Grout.

6. Fire-suppression equipment and piping demolition.

7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

8. Painting and finishing.

9. Concrete bases.

10. Supports and anchorages.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated

spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.




210500 - 3

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions

and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.

Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: Prepare and make the submissions listed below and in Division 1.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under

this Division.

C. Manufacturer's Drawings.

1. Equipment listed in each section, include material specifications, operating characteristics

and finishes.

D. Installation Drawings.

1. Coordinated scale drawings of equipment including interconnecting piping and

equipment.

2. Coordinate space requirements for equipment and services.

3. Include connections, anchorages and fastenings.

4. Make allowance for clearances for access to and maintenance of equipment.

E. Wiring and Control Diagrams.

1. Electric wiring diagrams and automatic control diagrams and sequences of operation.

The wiring diagrams must be complete and coordinated with the equipment actually

installed.

F. Provide composite shop drawings showing work of all related construction, when required to

ensure full coordination and proper fitting of the work, and when directed by the Architect.

G. Provide drawings showing dimensions and locations of concrete work required.

H. Samples.

1. Color samples for prefinished items.

I. Reports:

1. Manufacturer's certified pressure tests on vessels.

2. Manufacturer's certified performance tests on operating equipment.

3. Field pipe testing reports and certificates of approval including:

a. Main drain test

b. Inspector’s / flow test

c. Backflow full flow test




210500 - 4

d. FDC piping has been tested

e. Air pressure leakage test (For dry systems) 40 psi for 24 hours <1 ½ psi of leakage,

in accordance with NFPA

f. Dry pipe trip test (when applicable).

g. High/low air pressure test (when applicable).

h. Tamper switches have been tested

4. Welder's certificates and field test report.

5. Field operating test results for operating equipment.

6. Performance report on balancing of systems.

7. Performance report and calculations for vibration isolation equipment.

8. Manufacturer's certified reports on motorized equipment alignment and installation.

J. Statement of Compliance

1. Contractor shall submit a letter attesting the fire protection systems have been installed in

accordance with the approved plans, manufacturer’s equipment requirements and NFPA,

any deviations must be clearly indicated.

K. If submissions of catalog cuts of standard manufactured items show different types, options,

finishes, performance requirements, or other variations, those features proposed shall be clearly

identified.

1. If any variations from the catalog description are proposed or required, such variations

must be clearly noted on the cut.

2. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate all details, sectional views, arrangements, working

and erection dimensions, kinds and quality of materials and their finishes, and other

information necessary for proper checking and for fabrication and installation of the

items, and shall include all information required for making connections to other work.

3. Shop drawings shall be numbered consecutively, and drawings related to various units

comprising a proposed assembly shall be submitted simultaneously so that units may be

checked individually and as an assembly.

4. Keep on the site, in good order, a complete up-to-date set of approved shop drawings. All

shop drawings shall be available for inspection by the Architect.

5. On product data submittals, clearly indicate model numbers, dimensions, weights,

electrical requirements, accessories and performance data. Submittals not properly

prepared will be rejected without further review.

6. The review of shop drawings will be general, and shall not be construed as permitting any

departure from the contract requirements other than those specifically brought to the

Architect's attention and so approved.

a. If the shop drawings show any variations from contract requirements because of

standard shop practices or other reasons, such variations shall be clearly identified

on the drawings in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper

adjustment in other work affected thereby.

b. Failure to identify such variations will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility

for executing the work in accordance with the Contract even though such shop

drawings have been reviewed and the work installed.

c. Review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any error in details,

dimensions, etc., that may exist on shop drawings nor for the furnishing of

materials or work required by the Contract and not indicated on the shop drawings.

d. Review shall not be construed as acceptable departure from details or instructions

previously furnished by the Architect.




210500 - 5

e. Review with a requirement for resubmission is a review contingent upon

satisfactory resubmission within 30 days. Failure to comply shall result in a

revocation of the contingent review.

L. Shop Drawing Schedule

1. The Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of the award of his contract, a schedule of all

proposed shop drawing submissions.

2. The schedule shall include the following information.

a. Item to be submitted

b. Date of submission

c. Latest date for review

d. Manufacturers of the specified item.

3. Items not specifically listed as "approved equal" should be listed for consideration at this

time.

4. Shop drawings require a minimum of 10 business days from the date they have been

received by the Consulting Engineer’s office to adequately review the submittal. If there

is any submittal which requires to be expedited sooner than the 10 business days, the

Engineer shall be informed in writing at the beginning of construction with a list of those

submittals.

M. Submittals will be reviewed for conformance with the contract drawings and specifications. The

engineer's review stamp will be affixed to submittals. One of the following actions will be

taken:

1. Reviewed:

a. No comments, corrections, or marks have been made to the submittal. Re-review

by the engineer is not required. The submittal is in general conformance with the

design concept. Construction, fabrication and/or manufacture can proceed subject

to the provision that the work shall be in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Final acceptance of the work shall be contingent upon such

compliance.

2. Furnish As Corrected

a. Comments, corrections, or marks made. Re-review is not required. Submission is

in general conformance with the design concept subject to notations on the

returned Submittal. Construction, fabrication, and/or manufacturer can proceed

subject to the provisions that the work shall be carried out in compliance with all

annotations and/or corrections indicated on the returned Submittal and in

accordance with the Contract Documents. Final acceptance of the work shall be

contingent on such compliance.

3. Revise and Resubmit

a. Significant issues/discrepancies/incomplete information was provided in the

Submittal. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations and

Contract Documents. Resubmit without delay.

4. Rejected

a. Submittal does not meet Contract document intent. Revise or prepare a new

submittal in accordance with the notations and Contract Documents. Resubmit

without delay.

N. A submittal review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and

general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Corrections or

comments made on the shop drawings during this review do not relieve the contractor from




210500 - 6

Compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications. Approval of a specific item

shall not include approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. The contractor is

responsible for: dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the jobsite; information that

pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the means, methods, techniques, sequences and

procedures of construction; coordination of his or her work with that of all other trades; and for

performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Develop and submit coordination drawings as outlined.

B. Sheet metal, plumbing and fire protection shop drawings that have been coordinated with

architectural and structural drawings shall be submitted to engineer for review. Drawings must

be returned from engineer either "reviewed" or "furnish as corrected" prior to being used as

basis for coordination drawings.

C. After sheet metal and piping drawings have been revised per engineers’ comments, reproducible

copies shall be sent to the others trades in the following sequence for the inclusion of their

work:

1. Mechanical sheet metal

2. Plumbing contractor

3. Electrical work

4. Mechanical piping

5. Sprinkler piping

D. After all trades have included their work on the coordination drawing and noted conflicts, all

trades shall meet to resolve conflicts and agree to acceptable solutions. Each trade shall sign

coordination drawings. Items not shown on coordination drawing is responsibility of omitting

contractor and contractor is subject to additional costs incurred by other trades.

E. The architect and engineer are not part of the coordination drawing process. The engineer will

provide assistance for noted conflicts only. Coordination drawings are not to be considered

piping or duct shop drawings. The contractor is required to submit individual piping and

ductwork shop drawings for review by the engineer. Piping and ductwork shop drawings shall

follow the design intent of the contract documents.

F. Submit final signed coordination drawing to engineer for review. Engineer will review

coordination drawings for general arrangement and for noted conflicts only. Specific

installation requirements will be reviewed only in individual trade shop drawings.

G. Any work fabricated or installed prior to sign off by all trades which is deemed to be in conflict

with coordination drawings shall be removed and re-installed in conformance with coordination

drawings.

H. Each contractor (mentioned above) is responsible for the coordination of his sub-contractors.

I. The overall coordination of the coordination process is the responsibility of the contractor. The

engineer is not responsible for the coordination process. The engineer will respond to questions

that arise from the coordination process. Drawings submitted will be reviewed for clearly

identified conflicts only. Solutions to conflicts will not bear additional cost.




210500 - 7

1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide a complete set of as-built drawings reflecting as installed conditions. As-built drawings

shall indicate all installed conditions of systems within this discipline. Drawings shall be of

similar scale as the construction documents and include details as necessary to clearly reflect the

installed condition. Drawings shall be bound in a complete and consecutive set. Supplemental

sketches and loose paperwork will not be acceptable and will be returned for revision. The

contractor shall comply with the engineer’s comments to produce a clear and concise set of

drawings. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (Auto-cad or Revit

version as required by the owner) version. Number of copies of each as requested by the owner.

B. Provide "as-built drawings" indicating in a neat and accurate manner a complete record of all

revisions of the original design of the work. Indicate the following installed conditions:

C. Include all changes and an accurate record, on reproductions of the contract drawings or

appropriate shop drawings, of all deviations, between the work shown and work installed.

D. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered,

Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart.

E. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

F. Approved substitutions, contract modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

G. Contract modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

H. Submit for review bound sets of the required drawings, manuals and operating instructions.

I. Submit a complete maintenance manual of all equipment installed under this contract.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and

connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If

minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with

requirements.




210500 - 8

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place

concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access

that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in

Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

1.11 CLEANING

A. Contractor shall maintain areas control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain in

a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or

remote spaces before closing the space / finishing work in that area.

C. Contractor shall periodically clean interior areas before end of each working day and continue

cleaning on an as-needed basis.

D. Contractor shall ensure that dust and other particulates from their work does not travel into

areas not being renovated.

E. Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily and dispose of

legally off-site. No scrap/debris shall remain inside the building or anywhere on site upon final

acceptance of the project.

F. Final cleaning: at completion of work, remove all remaining waste materials, rubbish, tools,

equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and clean all exposed surfaces; leave project clean

and ready for occupancy.

1.12 TRAINING

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain fire equipment including: fire pumps, riser check valve assemblies,

dry pipe valve assemblies, fire standpipe valves, pressure regulating valves, flow switches, tam-

per switches, etc.




210500 - 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following

requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

manufacturers specified.

B. Obtain all general conformances in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

C. Submit to the Architect for review a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work.

Intent to use exact make specified does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

submitting the required list.

D. Where any specific materials, process or method of construction, or manufactured article is

specified by name or by reference to catalog number of a manufacturer, or other standards, the

intent is not to take precedence over the basic duty and performance specified, noted on

drawings, or as required for intended results. In all cases, verify the duty specified with the

specific characteristics of the equipment offered for review.

E. Equipment of one type, shall be products of one manufacturer.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining

methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face

or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.




210500 - 10

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,

unless otherwise indicated.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Metraflex Co.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type

and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing

element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded

longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain

ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include

clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely

fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers

opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated

finish.




210500 - 11

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-

plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.8 Pipe Painting:

1. Paint all interior piping with two coats of enamel epoxy type paint. Prep, clean and prime

pipe surfaces, in accordance with paint manufacturers specifications / recommendations

prior to installation and final color application.

2. Contractor shall ensure paint and primer are compatible with one another and material

being painted.

3. Paint color shall match existing wall color, coordinate with the Owner’s requirements

prior to installation.

4. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

5. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

6. Piping and fittings exposed to corrosive and/or high humidity areas (i.e. greater than 50%

rh) shall be galvanized schedule 40 steel with epoxy coating similar to Ameron.

Sprinkler heads within these areas shall also be corrosive / moisture resistant (i.e. Teflon

coated). Pipe hangers and components within these areas shall be hot dipped galvanized

steel with epoxy coating. Similar to Ameron.




210500 - 12

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying

piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw.

g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished chrome-plated finish.




210500 - 13

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

i. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw.

k. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Provide listed fire stopping material (coordinated with wall, ceiling etc. rating) for all

penetrations.

O. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof

slabs.

Q. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,

and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings

below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.

c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to

extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or

pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

R. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve

for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.




210500 - 14

S. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal

pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular

clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble

mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten

bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight

seal.

T. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

U. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

V. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09

Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."




210500 - 15

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's

written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete

base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other

equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.




210500 - 16

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 210500


COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT


210513 - 1

SECTION 210513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.




210513 - 2

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.




210513 - 3

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


210517 - 1

SECTION 210517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Sleeves shall be in accordance with NFPA 13

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves.

2. Stack-sleeve fittings.

3. Sleeve-seal systems.

4. Sleeve-seal fittings.

5. Grout.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded

steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc

coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.




210517 - 2

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

2. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping

ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. Metraflex Company (The).

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular

space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.4 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. HOLDRITE.

B. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for imbedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match

piping OD.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=1120

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456816667













210517 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.



other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal

system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.



sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." Fire Seal shall be UL

listed, approved and tested fire and/or smoke sealing material installed in all fire and/or smoke

rated floor and partitions in accordance with NFPA, local code and manufacturers

recommendations. Fire Barrier Sealant shall be compatible with the piping it is installed with

and in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between


2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane

waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200

"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor

level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if

ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.




210517 - 4

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe

penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service

piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for

sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,

assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and

sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a

watertight seal.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel wall

sleeves with Sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves or Galvanized-steel wall sleeves

with Sleeve-seal fittings.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or

Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.






210517 - 5

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system or

Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Concrete Slabs above Grade – VERTICAL PIPING:

a. Piping NPS 6 and Smaller: Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE; Hydroflame Cast-

in-Place Sleeve.

b. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Stack-sleeve fittings.

c. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Stack-sleeve fittings.

5. Concrete Slabs above Grade HORIZONTAL PIPING:

1) Piping NPS 6 and Smaller: Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE; Hydroflame

Cast-in-Place Sleeve.

2) Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.

3) Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Sleeve-seal fittings.

6. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


210518 - 1

SECTION 210518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and

setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip

fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.




210518 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. One-piece type escutcheon, finish shall be determined by architect.

b. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

c. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

d. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

j. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-

plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge.

k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

l. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, 2 piece, with 1-inch vertical adjustment.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.




210518 - 3

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING


210523 - 1

SECTION 210523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION

PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.

2. Check valves.

3. Iron OS&Y gate valves.

4. Indicator posts.

5. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

B. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

C. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.




210523 - 2

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valves shall be UL/FM listed, FM listing is mandatory for FM Global projects

B. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings

listed below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.

a. Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve.

b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.

1) Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control.

2) Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves.

3) Level 3: HMER - Check Valves.

4) Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.

2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.

a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim and Drain.

C. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed

below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:

a. Indicator posts.

b. Valves.

1) Gate valves.

2) Check valves.

a) Single check valves.

3) Miscellaneous valves.

D. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.

E. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

F. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

G. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.

H. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as

required by system pressures.




210523 - 3

I. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

J. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain

valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.

2.2 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS


1. Anvil International.

2. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

3. NIBCO INC.

4. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

5. Victaulic Company.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type),

Class Number 112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated.

7. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.

8. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.

9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

2.3 CHECK VALVES


1. Anvil International.


3. Mueller Co.

4. NIBCO INC.

5. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).



8. Viking Corporation.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210.


3. Type: Single swing check.

4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze.

5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal.

6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.



















210523 - 4

7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.

9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.4 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES


1. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc.

2. Hammond Valve.


4. Mueller Co.

5. NIBCO INC.


B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y-

and NRS-type gate valves).


3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.

7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.

8. Supervisory Switch: External.

9. End Connections: Flanged or Grooved.

2.5 INDICATOR POSTS


1. Clow Valve Company; a subsidiary of McWane, Inc.


3. Mueller Co.

4. NIBCO INC.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 789 and FM Global standard for indicator posts.

2. Type: Underground.

3. Base Barrel Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Extension Barrel: Cast or ductile iron.

5. Cap: Cast or ductile iron.

6. Operation: Wrench.

7. Provide tamper switch and associated wiring to buildings main fire alarm panel

8. Vertical indicator post with cast iron body and cap Similar to STOCKHAM G 951

9. Bronze mounted nonrising stem, solid, wedge disc indicator post flange Similar to

MUELLER® A-20806.
















210523 - 5

2.6 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

e. Potter Roemer LLC.

f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

g. Victaulic Company.

h. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

b. Body Design: Two piece.

c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

d. Port size: Full.

e. Seats: PTFE.

f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

h. Actuator: Handlever.

i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends.

B. Angle Valves:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:


b. Body Material: Brass or bronze.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

C. Globe Valves:


a. NIBCO INC.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:


b. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc Holder and Nut: Bronze.




















210523 - 6

f. Disc Seat: Nitrile.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation requirements

and applications:

1. Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for application of

valves in fire-suppression water-service piping outside the building.

2. Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for application of valves in fire-

suppression standpipes.

3. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in wet-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

4. Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

5. Section 211339 "Foam-Water Systems" for application of valves in AFFF piping.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs

indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.

C. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to

allow easy access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

Provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.




210523 - 7

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 210553 "Identification for Fire-

Suppression Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces

concealing valves; and the NFPA standard applying to the piping system in which valves are

installed. Install permanent identification signs indicating the portion of system controlled by

each valve.

G. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water

supply except from fire-department connections.

H. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of

check valves in potable-water-supply sources.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


210529 - 1

SECTION 210529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.

7. Pipe positioning systems.

8. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze

hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Section 220516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors.

3. Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"

for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Piping etc. shall be independently supported / hung from building structure.




210529 - 2

C. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for fire protection piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain

approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Seismic restraint: Provide seismic restraint of all fire protection equipment and systems in

accordance with NFPA Standards, State Building Code Requirements, ASHRAE, and State of

California OSHPD. Submit shop drawings designed, signed and sealed by a licensed

Professional Engineer registered in the State of the project (which shall be considered the

Engineer of record for the seismic design of components within this section) indicating all

necessary component cuts, plan locations and calculations for a complete system. The

Professional Engineer of record for the seismic design shall at the completion of the seismic

installation visit the site, review and document the installation noting any deficiencies,

corrective measures, and at completion state that the installation is installed in conformance

with his/her design. Refer to other division 22 requirements.

E. Provide necessary additional structural members, hangers and supports of approved design to

keep piping in proper alignment and prevent transmission of injurious thrusts and vibrations. In

all cases where hangers, brackets, etc., are supported from concrete construction, do not weaken

concrete or penetrate waterproofing. All hangers and supports shall be capable of screw

adjustment after piping is erected. All such hangers shall be finally adjusted both in the vertical

and horizontal direction, as required. Hangers in contact with copper or brass pipe shall be

copper plated steel and provided with felt sleeve.

F. No hangers are to be placed off of the deck. All hangers, clamps etc. shall be attached to

structural members. Contractor shall provide and install additional structural supports as

required.

G. Standard environments:

1. All hangers shall be zinc coated. Rods shall be zinc coated, with zinc hardware.

H. Exterior, corrosive and/or high humidity (i.e. greater than 50% rh) environments:

1. All hangers shall be hot-dipped galvanized type. Rods shall be stainless steel, with

stainless steel hardware.



B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for

components:






210529 - 3

3. Fiberglass strut systems.

4. Pipe stands.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support

systems shall be one of the following or engineer-approved equal.

1. Anvil International

2. ERICO, Inc.

3. PHD

4. Hubbard Enterprises

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Un-insulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:

a. Adjustable steel swivel loop (band) hanger.

b. Adjustable steel clevis hanger.

c. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger.

d. Steel insulated split ring hanger.

e. Malleable iron swivel split ring hanger.

f. Malleable iron split ring hanger.




210529 - 4

4. Hangers for un-insulated pipe sizes 2-1/2 inch and larger:

a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger.

b. Adjustable steel swivel loop (band) hanger.

c. Two rod roller hanger.

d. Adjustable one rod roller hanger.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, hot dipped galvanized with stainless steel

hardware.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, hot dipped galvanized with stainless steel nuts, and

washer made

7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

8. Paint Coating: Epoxy.

B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


following:

a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

g. PHS Industries, Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456808509&mf=04&src=wd

















210529 - 5

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,

accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.




6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, hot dipped galvanized with stainless steel nuts, and

washer made

7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized.

8. Paint Coating: Epoxy.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used. Drop in anchors, powder driven anchors are

not permitted.

B. No hangers are to be placed off of the metal deck (expandable sleeve anchors, Sammy X-Press

type not permitted). All hangers, clamps etc. shall be attached to structural members. Metal

deck with poured concrete may be considered structure when approved by structural engineer

and the required concrete depth is coordinated with anchor manufacturer. Contractor shall

otherwise provide and install additional structural supports as required.

C. Seismic approved anchors shall be required in: seismic zones, cracked concrete and as required

by structural engineer

D. All anchors shall be stainless steel / corrosion resistance

1. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners. Model Power-Stud

b. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries Model AWA

c. Hilti, Inc.Model KB

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Model Trubolt

e. MKT Fastening, LLC. Model Sup-R-Stud

E. Zinc plated carbon steel threaded fasteners acceptable for wood attachment

1. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners. Model Vertigo

b. Sammy Screw; Model GST 10

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped

cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.




210529 - 6

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof

installation without membrane penetration.

D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for

roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless steel.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for


2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

F. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from

structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent

stationary roof curb.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.




210529 - 7

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated

trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and

mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for

curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.




210529 - 8

O. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts

of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.




210529 - 9

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel galvanized pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal

framing systems and stainless steel hardware for general service applications.

F. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

G. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.




210529 - 10

H. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes

NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion

support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical

adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical


21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.




210529 - 11

I. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

J. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

16. Top Beam Clamps

a. Carbon steel clamp body with hardened steel cup point set screw and locknut and

galvanized retaining "J" strap (regardless of seismic zone). Body shall be tapped

through to permit extended adjustment of threaded rod.




210529 - 12

b. Galvanized, hot dipped finish.

c. Approved equal to TOLCO Fig. 65, 66, and 69.

L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary, to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


P. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.

Q. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 1

SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

4. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

5. Resilient pipe guides.

6. Elastomeric hangers.

7. Snubbers.

8. Restraint channel bracings.

9. Seismic-restraint accessories.

10. Mechanical anchor bolts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development (for the State of California).


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of vibration isolation device and seismic-restraint component required.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.



AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 2

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data

signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and

operation, due to seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, and due to seismic

restraints.

3. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion

and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring

deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system was

examined for excessive stress and that none exists.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints.

Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and

values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate

association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint

details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in

other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the

basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation and

seismic bracing for fire-suppression piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in

the vicinity, including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 and that

is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 3

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or

preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on

calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing are

preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-

restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to structural drawings for wind speed and seismic design criteria.

B. Importance Factor: 1.0.

C. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.

2. Refer to structural drawings for wind speed and seismic design criteria.

3. All outdoor equipment subject to wind loads must have attachment calculations stamped

by a professional engineer registered in the state that the project is located.

D. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Seismic Design Category (SDC): B

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.185 Second):

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.099

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:


a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

b. Isolation Technology, Inc.

c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

d. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mason Super WM.

e. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

f. Vibration Isolation.

g. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.











AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 4

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

5. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.

6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

8. Sandwich-Core Material: Resilient and elastomeric.

a. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts: .





d. Mason Industries, Inc.;.




2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and

threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to

support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.4 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:





d. Mason Industries, Inc.




2. Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and

opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment

hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.

b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene or other elastomeric

material.



















AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 5

2.5 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a

minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions.

2.6 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post-and-sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable

to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet

location requirements.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods: .







f. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hanger-

rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel

contact.

2.8 SNUBBERS


1. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

2. Mason Industries, Inc.;.

3. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,

and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or

female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.














AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 6

3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch-thick resilient cushion.

2.9 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

2. Hilti, Inc.

3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. Unistrut; an Atkore International company.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating;

rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.10 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES




3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. TOLCO.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted

connections to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers

to rigid channel bracings.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid

equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and

size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.11 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS



2. Hilti, Inc.


4. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mason SAS.


















AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 7

B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within

specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of equipment

supports and roof penetrations.

D. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on fire-suppression equipment mounted on vibration isolators.

Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure.



AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 8

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

E. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127 and NFPA.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c. and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction that provides required submittals for component.

G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

H. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

I. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

J. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate

with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one

supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in

Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes," Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems,"

and Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for piping flexible connections.



AND EQUIPMENT


210548 - 9


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least

seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary

load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by

Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


210553 - 1

SECTION 210553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.



B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to

the following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Craftmark Pipe Markers.







210553 - 2

c. Marking Services, Inc.

d. Seton Identification Products.

2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

3. Letter Color: White.

4. Background Color: Black.

5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

5 by 3 inch.

7. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for

greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size

of principal lettering.

8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were

screws or rivets would void warranty of equipment.

9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

D. All control, drain, and test connection valves shall be provided with permanently marked

weatherproof metal or rigid plastic identification signs in accordance with NFPA 13. Signs

shall indicate portion of system controlled by each valve

E. Contractor shall provide a laminated valve tag schedule indicating: type of valve, location and

tag # for all control valves (including pressure reducing type). Laminated valve tag schedule

shall be located in fire sprinkler room.

F. Contractor shall provide a laminated valve tag schedule indicating: location of all low point

drains on any/all dry systems.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Brimar Industries, Inc.

2. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

3. Marking Sevices Inc.

4. Seton Identification Products.

B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.











210553 - 3

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 5 by 3

inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 2 inch

for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing

distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were screws or

rivets would void warranty of equipment.

I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification

instructions.

K. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


following:





B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Machine printed, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, pipe size, and showing flow direction. Marker/hand written labels

are not acceptable.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of

pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow

direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

E. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.









210553 - 4

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. In accordance with ANSI A13.1 and local fire code requirements

2.4 VALVE TAGS


following:


2. Carlton Industries, LP.

3. Champion America.


5. LEM Products Inc.



B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain with S-hook or jack chain with S-hook.

C. Valve Tag Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, valve number and service.

1. Example: HW

Isolation

001

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2. Valve-tag schedule shall be framed behind glass and located in each mechanical room

2.5 WARNING TAGS


following:





B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 inches high by 7 inches long.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Red background with white lettering.

















210553 - 5

C. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, as well

as dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and other substances that could impair bond of identification

devices.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be installed.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit a view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

8. At all changes of direction.

9. And at all locations required to conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.




210553 - 6

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Coordinate with facility standards. If no facility standards exist or

are not desired, conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007.

D. Install tags on valves and control devices in fire-suppression piping systems. List tagged valves

in a valve-tag schedule.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on all valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves

within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-

watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.

List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. All services: Natural.

3. Letter Color:

a. All services: Black.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

B. Markings shall be provided in locations required by and meeting the color requirements of the

“Safety Code Color for Marking Physical Hazards”, ANSI Z53.1, latest revision.



FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING


210800 - 1

SECTION 21 08 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary


1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 21 – Fire Suppression

B. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning

C. Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements

1.3 REQUIRMENTS

A. The Commissioning process requires the participation of Division 21, Fire Protection, to ensure

that all systems fulfill the functional and pre-functional requirements set forth in these

construction documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed

in Section 019113. Division 21, Fire Protection, shall fulfill commissioning responsibilities

assigned to division 21 in accordance with Section 019113.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS

A. Pre-functional checklists assist in the process to document that the equipment and systems are

installed properly.

B. The contractor will be provided with construction checklists from the CA for completion. The

contractor shall complete the checklists as provide the CA with completed copies in accordance

with 019113.

C. See attached for a sample pre-functional performance test checklist, attached is included only to

provide sample of a typical process and scope.

3.2 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Intent of functional performance testing is to prove thru functional test procedures proper system

operation.

B. The contractor will be provided with functional performance test procedures to perform while

CA witnesses. The contractor shall perform functional tests in accordance with 019113,




210800 - 2

requirements of the specification section, code requirements, or requirements of the authority

having local jurisdiction.

C. See attached for a sample functional performance test checklist, attached is included only to


3.3 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND FUNCTIONAL PREFORMANCE TESTING

A. Pre-Functional Checklists and Functional performance testing procedures will be performed on

the following system types. (Pre Functional and Functional performance testing requirements are

in addition to and do not replace any testing required elsewhere in Division 21 or by applicable

codes.) Equipment specifically marked as such below shall be provided with start-up of

equipment by factory-authorized service representative.

1. Fire Protection System and equipment; fire alarm system interfaces with HVAC systems

3.4 SAMPLE CHECKLISTS

A. See Attached.

End of Section




210800 - 3

Sample Only – Actual Functional Test Sheets shall be developed from contract documents

Contractor Checklist and Functional Test Procedures

FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

1. Participants

Discipline Name Company

CxA

Mechanical

Controls

TAB

Plumbing

Electrical

Fire Protection

Date Returned to CxA

2. Prerequisite Checklist

Check Description

☐ The above equipment and systems integral to them are complete and ready for functional testing.

☐ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable per

contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor

calibrations completed.

☐ All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected.

☐ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed.

☐ Schedules and reviewed

This checklist does not take the place of the manufacturer’s recommended checkout

and startup procedures.

Items that do not apply shall be noted with the reasons on this form (N/A = not appli-

cable, BO = by others).

Contractor’s assigned responsibility for sections of the checklist shall be responsible to

see that checklist items by their subcontractors are completed and checked off.




210800 - 4

3. Installation Checks

Check if Okay. Enter comment or note number if deficient.

Check

Zone Valves

Sealed ☐

Locked ☐

Tamper Switches ☐

Position ☐

Operation ☐

Supervisory ☐

Alarm Valves

Pressure gauges ☐

Main drain/test ☐

Trim piping per manufacturer’s instructions ☐

Isolation valve ☐

Backflow Prevention

Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer ☐

Reduced pressure Detectors Assembly ☐

Double Check Valve Assembly ☐

Double Check Detector Assembly ☐

Fire Department Connection

Brass Finish ☐

Brass caps and chains ☐

Check valve ☐

Waterflow alarms

Tied into fire alarm control panel ☐

Provided at alarm valve riser ☐

Valves, Piping

Isolation valves installed per drawings ☐

Pipe fittings complete and pipes properly supported ☐

Pipes properly labeled ☐

Piping system properly flushed ☐

No leaking apparent around fittings ☐

Valves properly labeled ☐

Risers clamps ☐

Test connections




210800 - 5


Check

Instrumentation installed according to specification

(pressure gages, test valves, etc.) ☐

Clean up of equipment completed per contract doc-

uments ☐

Inspectors test connections provided at all zones with

equivalent sprinkler orifice size ☐

Maintenance access acceptable for components ☐

The checklist items all successfully completed for given trade ☐YES ☐NO

4. Operational Checks


Check Equip Tag Test Results

Functional Y/N

Inspectors test valve opened flowing equivalent of one

sprinkler, activation of flow switch and automatic activa-

tion of alarm at fire alarm control panel at Zone # 1










Activation of tamper switch and automatic activation of

alarm at fire alarm control panel at all valve locations



FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING


211100 - 1

SECTION 211100 - FACILITY FIRE-SUPPRESSION WATER-SERVICE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Install underground service-entrance piping according to NFPA 13 with restrained

joints. Encase piping in corrosion-protective encasement.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire-suppression water-service piping and related components outside the

building and service entrance piping through floor into the building and service entrance piping

through wall into the building and the following:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-suppression specialty valves.

3. Concrete vaults.

4. Protective enclosures.

5. Alarm devices.

B. Utility-furnished products include water meters that are furnished to the site, ready for

installation.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail precast concrete vault assemblies and indicate dimensions, method of field

assembly, and components.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. LEED Submittals (if applicable)

1. Credit MR2.1 & MR2.2: Construction Waste Management: See Section “017419 –

Construction Waste Management” for construction waste management submittal

materials.

2. Credit IEQ4.1: Low-Emitting Materials: For interior field applied adhesives, sealants and

sealant primers, submit Manufacturers’ product data (MSDS Sheet) including printed

statement of VOC content.

3. Credit IEQ4.2: For interior field applied paints and coatings, submit Manufacturers’

product data (MSDS Sheet) including printed statement of VOC content.




211100 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: For piping and specialties including relation to other services in same

area, drawn to scale. Show piping and specialty sizes and valves, meter and specialty locations,

and elevations.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying the water. Include tapping of

water mains and backflow prevention.

2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-

service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with FM Global's "Approval Guide" or UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" for

fire-service-main products. FM Global listing required for FM insured projects

E. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and valve

and hydrant supervision for fire-suppression water-service piping.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces.

3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew

point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when

outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or lift.

Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or

rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and

handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.




211100 - 3

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural

capacity of floor when storing inside.

F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping: Do not interrupt service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, Owner, Owner’s Insurance Carrier and Local

AHJ no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Grooved-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with cut, rounded-grooved ends.

B. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot

end.

C. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end.

D. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe Appurtenances:


following:

a. Anvil International.

b. Corcoran Piping System Co.

c. Shurjoint Piping Products.

d. Tyco Fire Products LP.

e. Victaulic Company.

f. Viking Corporation.

2. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching pipe.

3. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile-iron-pipe

dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and

nuts.

E. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or

AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets,

and steel bolts.











211100 - 4

F. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

1. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

G. Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125, cast iron.

H. Utilize Polyethylene Encasement.

2.2 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, Fire-Service Pipe: FM Global approved, with minimum thickness equivalent to Class 150

and Class 200.

B. Molded PE Fittings: FM Global approved; PE butt-fusion type, made to match PE pipe

dimensions and class.

2.3 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Romac Industries, Inc.

b. Star Pipe Products.

c. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical-

joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-

joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset

and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and

steel bolts.

3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.

B. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings:


following:

a. EBAA Iron, Inc.

2. Description: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and one or two flexing

sections for up to 15-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with

AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.


2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Material: high-density, cross-laminated PE film of 0.004-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.










211100 - 5

D. Color: Black or natural.


A. Gaskets for Ferrous Piping and Copper-Alloy Tubing: ASME B16.21, asbestos free.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series.

C. Bonding Adhesive for Fiberglass Piping: As recommended by fiberglass piping manufacturer.

2.6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least

equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

B. Tubular-Sleeve Pipe Couplings:


following:

a. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

b. Romac Industries, Inc.

c. Viking Johnson.

2. Description: Metal, bolted, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, with center

sleeve, gaskets, end rings, and bolt fasteners, and with ends of same sizes as piping to be

joined.

3. Standard: AWWA C219.

4. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard Stainless steel Ductile iron.

5. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.


7. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

2.7 CURB VALVES


following:

1. Jones, James Company.

2. Master Meter, Inc.

3. Mueller Co.

B. Curb Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure, service-line valves. Valve has

bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, wide tee head, and inlet and outlet matching service

piping material.












211100 - 6

C. Service Boxes for Curb Valves: Similar to AWWA M44 requirements for cast-iron valve boxes.

Include cast-iron telescoping top section of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug

with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over curb valve and with a

barrel approximately 3 inches in diameter.

1. Shutoff Rods: Steel; with tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate

deepest buried valve, and slotted end matching curb valve.

D. Meter Valves: Comply with AWWA C800 for high-pressure, service-line valves. Include angle-

or straight-through-pattern bronze body, ground-key plug or ball, and wide tee head, with inlet

and outlet matching service piping material.

E. Coordinate with Local water Authority requirements.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Refer to Specification Section 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with excavating, trenching, and backfilling requirements in Section 312000 "Earth

Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with water utility company for tap of size and in location

indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company

and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60.

2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve.

3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with stem

pointing up and with valve box.

D. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and

arrangement required by utility company's standards.

2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for

corporation valves.




211100 - 7

3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves.

Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies.

5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main.

6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

1. Install encasement for piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

G. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.

H. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 60 inches, with top at least 12 inches below

level of maximum frost penetration, and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches of cover over top.

2. Under Railroad Tracks: With at least 48 inches of cover over top.

3. In Loose Gravelly Soil and Rock: With at least 12 inches of additional cover.

4. Coordinate with local Water Authority Requirements.

I. Install piping by tunneling or jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other

obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

J. Extend fire-suppression water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building

fire-suppression water-service piping systems at locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate fire-suppression water-service piping within the building at the floor slab /

wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs,

or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building's fire-

suppression water-service piping systems when those systems are installed.

K. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction.

Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

L. Comply with requirements in Section 211200 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes," Section 211313

"Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems," and Section 211316 "Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for fire-

suppression-water piping inside the building.

M. Comply with requirements in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water

piping inside the building.

N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-

Suppression Piping."




211100 - 8

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings

that have finish and pressure rating same as or higher than systems pressure rating for

aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in tubing NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adaptors, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and

equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside and inside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194.

G. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with grooved-end,

ductile-iron-piping couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with bolts according to ASME B31.9.

I. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with

OD, and with system working pressure.

J. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

3.4 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and

restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks.

2. Locking mechanical joints.

3. Set-screw mechanical retainer glands.

4. Bolted flanged joints.

5. Heat-fused joints.

6. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches in fire-

suppression water-service piping according to NFPA 24 and the following:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600.

2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.

3. Bonded-Joint Fiberglass, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M45.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed

ferrous anchorage devices.




211100 - 9

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground

valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. AWWA Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44.

C. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each

underground valve and valves in vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron

indicator post.

D. UL-Listed or FM Global-Approved Valves Other Than Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24.

E. MSS Valves: Install as component of connected piping system.

F. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head pointed up

and with service box.

G. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. Install full-

size valved bypass.

H. Support valves and piping, not direct buried, on concrete piers. Comply with requirements for

concrete piers in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033053 "Miscellaneous

Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks.

Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Do not install backflow preventers that have relief drain in vault or in other spaces subject to

flooding.

C. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

3.7 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire-department connection to mains.

B. Install protective pipe bollards around each freestanding fire-department connection. Pipe

bollards are specified in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications."

3.8 ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with NFPA 24 for devices and methods of valve supervision. Underground

valves with valve box do not require supervision.




211100 - 10

B. Supervisory Switches: Supervise valves in open position.

1. Valves: Grind away portion of exposed valve stem. Bolt switch, with plunger in stem

depression, to OS&Y gate-valve yoke.

2. Indicator Posts: Drill and thread hole in upper-barrel section at target plate. Install switch,

with toggle against target plate, on barrel of indicator post.

C. Locking and Sealing: Secure unsupervised valves as follows:

1. Valves: Install chain and padlock on open OS&Y gate valve.

2. Post Indicators: Install padlock on wrench on indicator post.

D. Pressure Switches: Drill and thread hole in exposed barrel of fire hydrant. Install switch.

E. Water-Flow Indicators: Install in water-service piping in vault. Select indicator with saddle and

vane matching pipe size. Drill hole in pipe, insert vane, and bolt saddle to pipe.

F. Connect alarm devices to building's fire-alarm system. Wiring and fire-alarm devices are

specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System." Section 283112 "Zoned

(DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to utility water main. Use tapping sleeve and

tapping valve service clamp and corporation valve. Coordinate with local water authority

requirements.

B. Connect fire-suppression water-service piping to interior fire-suppression piping.


A. Use test procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed

by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described below.

B. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks

have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to

stabilize system. Use only potable water.

C. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times the working pressure for two

hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold

at test pressure for one hour; decrease to zero psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure

and hold for one more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100

joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within

allowed limits.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.




211100 - 11

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground fire-

suppression water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping.

Underground warning tapes are specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic fire-suppression water-

service piping or fire-suppression water-service piping with electrically insulated fittings, on

main electrical meter panel. Comply with requirements for identifying devices in

Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect fire-suppression water-service piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended,

or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in

NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty

water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Flush in accordance with NFPA and Owner’s insurance carrier’s requirements.

4. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in

AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow it to stand for

three hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine

remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings.

3.14 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings.



FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS


211119 - 1

SECTION 211119 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flush-type fire-department connections.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLUSH-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION 2 ½”x 2 ½” TYPE


1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

4. Potter Roemer LLC.

5. Kochek

B. Standard: UL 405.

C. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.

F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes

and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices

or clappers.

G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.









211119 - 2

H. Escutcheon Plate: Rectangular, brass, wall type.

I. Outlet: With pipe threads.

J. Body Style: Horizontal.

K. Number of Inlets: Two.

L. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to “AUTO SPK”.

M. Finish: Coordinate with Architect

N. Exact type, size and location to be coordinated with local AHJ (Fire Marshal).

2.2 FLUSH-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION, STORZ TYPE


1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.

3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

4. Potter Roemer LLC.

5. Kochek


C. Type: Flush, for wall mounting.

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.

F. Wall-Type, Fire Department Connection: UL listed forged Storz head with stainless steel locks,

with cap and chain.

G. Size: 4” or 5” Storz, type with 30 degree fixed elbow. Exact type, size and location to be

coordinated with local AHJ (Fire Marshal).

H. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR"

I. Provide 3” lettering, on a sign with contrasting colors 10-12’ above the FDC. Coordinate with

local AHJ.

J. Finish: to be determined by Architect

K. UL listed. Exact type, size and location to be coordinated with local AHJ (Fire Marshal).

1. Similar to KOCHEK No. SFDCEB541









211119 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-department connection installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install yard-type fire-department connections in concrete slab support. Comply with

requirements for concrete in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Install protective pipe bollards around each fire-department connection. Coordinate with

Architect and AHJ. Comply with requirements for bollards in Section 055000 "Metal

Fabrications."

D. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.

Route galvanized drain piping to exterior and/or approved drain location.



WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS


211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Cover system for sprinkler piping.

3. Specialty valves.

4. Sprinklers.

5. Alarm devices.

6. Manual control stations.

7. Control panels.

8. Pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than 300 psig.

B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175-psig maximum.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, including

printed statement of VOC content and chemical components.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. HYDRAULIC SUMMARY DATA SHALL BE INCLUDED ON SHOP DRAWINGS.

2. Calculations shall include a 10 psi "Cushion" between required flow/pressure and

available flow/pressure.




211313 - 2

3. Hydraulic reference points shall be clearly indicated on drawings. Do not use "pipe

numbers", provide consecutively numbered reference points at all areas indicated on

hydraulic calculations including at connection to street main.

4. Hydraulic calculations shall include a minimum of 1500 sq.ft. for all remote areas. Grid

calculations shall include "Peaking" process (per NFPA requirements) to ensure

calculation of most remote area.

5. For areas having unsprinklered combustible concealed spaces (as described in NFPA 13,

) the minimum area of sprinkler protection shall be 3,000 sq.ft.

6. Increase hydraulic remote area for all dry systems.

7. Increase hydraulic remote area by 30% for sprinklers used on sloped ceilings with a pitch

exceeding one in six (16.7%).

8. Use of: line spacing off wall in excess of 7’-6”, remote area reductions, etc. (as noted in

NFPA 13) are not permitted.

9. Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations for all sprinkler and standpipe systems,

including all hazard areas; (i.e. wet, dry, light, ordinary, extra, etc.) to engineer, architect

and Fire Marshal.

10. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


12. Provide dimensional installation piping layout/s coordinated with all trades. Include all

sprinkler piping, drains, pipe sizes, hanger styles and locations, valves, alarm equipment,

and all other items for a complete shop drawing. Submittal shop drawings shall be clear

and legible. All sprinkler information must standout on the shop drawings (ie: bold

piping, etc. or lighter background). Reverse reading drawings are not acceptable.

13. Include a complete riser diagram indicating new and existing fire protection equipment,

hydraulic reference points and elevations at each floor.

14. Provide a full height building cross section noting elevations, types of construction, and

locations of ceilings, walls/partitions, and piping.

15. Include a site plan indicating flow test location, north arrow, underground supply piping,

building location and adjacent streets.

16. Determine deviations from specifications and drawings and indicate on shop drawings.

17. Provide definition/description of sprinkler identification for all sprinklers.

18. Submit all fire protection drawings and calculations to the local AHJ - "Authority having

jurisdiction" (ie: Fire Marshal), owners insurance company, architect and engineer.

Secure approval prior to installation.

19. Shop drawings and hydraulic calculations shall be submitted to architect and engineer.

Submitted drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer licensed

in the State of Connecticut. Secure approval prior to installation.

1.6 CRITERIA

A. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 psi, including losses through

water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

C. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, local AHJ

and owner’s insurance company requirements.

D. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be in accordance with NFPA

13, local AHJ and owner’s insurance company requirements.

1. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area plus 100 gpm outside hose.




211313 - 3

2. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area plus 250 gpm

outside hose.


outside hose.

4. Extra-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.30 gpm over 2500-sq. ft. area plus 500 gpm

outside hose.


outside hose.

6. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.

2. Compressed air piping.

3. HVAC hydronic piping.

4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that

have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if

applicable.

D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Contractor responsible

to document and submit "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping"

and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

E. Samples

1. Submit samples on the following items:

2. Sprinkler heads, escutcheons, head guards, valve tags and pipe markers.

F. Operating instructions and parts lists.

1. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish five (5) printed and bound sets.

2. Equipment and systems: Brief description of equipment and systems and basic operating

features. Manufacturer's name, (include address and telephone number) model number,

service manual, spare parts lists, wiring diagrams and descriptive literature for all

components.

3. Maintenance instructions.

4. Instructions for starting and operation.

5. Detailed and simplified type, one line color coded flow and wiring diagrams.

6. Witnessed CONTRACTOR'S MATERIAL AND TEST CERTIFICATE FOR ABOVE

GROUND and UNDERGROUND PIPING (FIELD TEST REPORTS). Provide on

owner’s insurance carrier forms as required.

G. Welding certificates.




211313 - 4

H. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

1. Provide less than (1) year old 3-way water flow data including:

a. Date and Time of test, including water company

b. Static & residual pressures

c. GPM

d. Size of water main

2. Fire Protection section of specifications shall include hydrant "three point" flow test data.

Ref. also to "Fire Protection and Water Supply" Section 2.4.7 of the Consultant’s

Procedure Manual.

3. The water test shall conform to the procedures described in the National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) Standard 291, "Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants",

(specific edition currently enforced by codes); or the procedures described in the NFPA

Handbook "Testing of Water Supplies". The results of the water flow test shall be plotted

in the form of a three-point curve to ensure accuracy of the test results. The water flow

test report is to be included in the "Sprinkler" section of the specifications.

I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and

Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

J. Field quality-control reports.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.9 AS-BUILT / RECORD DRAWINGS







drawings. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (Auto-cad or Revit

version as required by the owner) version. Number of copies of each as requested by the owner.


revisions of the original design of the work.

C. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (Revit version as required by the

Owner). Number of copies of each as requested by the Owner, minimum of four copies

1. Indicate the following installed conditions:

a. Include all changes and an accurate record, on reproductions of the contract

drawings or appropriate shop drawings, of all deviations, between the work shown

and work installed.

b. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, and with items requiring maintenance located. Valve location

diagrams, complete with valve tag chart.




211313 - 5

c. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

building lines.

d. Approved substitutions, contract modifications, and actual equipment and

materials installed.

e. Contract modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

f. Submit for review bound sets of the required drawings, manuals and operating

instructions.

g. Submit a complete maintenance manual of all equipment installed under this

contract.

1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Furnish manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists and sources of supply

for replacements in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Provide the following:

1. Information shall include: drawings, hydraulic calculations, above and below ground

pipe testing, waterflow test, equipment “cut” sheets along with a copy of NFPA 25,

Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection

Systems (adopted edition State recognizes) bound in a folder.

C. Master Operating Manual (submit in quadruplicate)

1. Complete sets of final and correct shop drawings, maintenance and replacement parts

manuals, and operating instructions, for equipment supplied.

2. Bind each set within a common binder. Index and organize with a table of contents, to

permit quick and convenient reference.

3. Three days of instruction in operation and maintenance of equipment to Owner's

maintenance force. Design a 2-week period, convenient to Owner, during which

qualified personnel, including manufacturers' technicians and engineers will be available

for Owner's instruction.

4. Manufacturer's mechanical and electrical equipment parts lists of all components of the

systems listed on the equipment schedules, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of

controllers.

a. List shall give system number, unit number, manufacturer's model number, and

manufacturer's drawing numbers.

5. Step by step operating instructions for each system including preparation for starting,

shutdown and draining.

6. Maintenance instructions for each type of equipment.

7. List of nearest local suppliers for all equipment.




211313 - 6

8. Manufacturer's literature describing each piece of equipment listed on the equipment

schedules, control diagrams and wiring diagrams as applicable.

9. Description of sequence operation by the control manufacturer, as applicable.

10. Recommended trouble shooting procedures in the event of foreseeable mechanical

system failure.

11. List of various sprinkler and/or standpipe zones including graphic diagram.

12. Chart of the tag numbers, location and function of each valve.

13. Copies of the following test reports:

a. Aboveground and underground piping.

b. Current, less than 1 year old water flow test.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering

responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field

test reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and


C. Quality of Materials.

1. All equipment and materials shall be UL listed and Factory Mutual approved.

2. New, best of their respective kinds and free of defects.

3. Electrical equipment: Listed by Underwriters Laboratories or bearing their label. Secure

approval from Architect, Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction for materials,

equipment and installation prior to installation. All fire protection Work shall be free

from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date of final

acceptance shall meet all local and state codes. All defects, which develop or are

discovered within this period, shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the

Owner and at no additional cost.

1.13 WORKMANSHIP

A. Perform all work in a practical, neat and workmanlike manner with mechanics skilled in work,

and using the best practices of the trade involved.

B. No work shall be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Architect.

C. Workmanship or materials not meeting with requirements of the specifications and drawings

and satisfaction of the Architect shall be rejected and immediately replaced in an acceptable

manner, without additional cost to the Owner.

1.14 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and

indicate general arrangements of piping, sprinkler heads, etc.. Any work or materials in




211313 - 7

addition to or different from these Contract Documents as required to provide a complete

system shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost. During the bid period the

Contractor shall examine the site and construction documents of the proposed work to

determine the existing conditions that may affect their work. The contractor shall identify and

submit any problematic conditions in writing to the Architect prior to submitting the bid.

B. Sprinkler Permits and Water Service

1. Arrange with local authorities for all permits and approvals, provide all necessary

documentation.

2. Pay required charges.

3. Coordinate any fire protection shut-downs with the building Owner and the building's

Insurance company. Minimize the fire protection "down time" and place the system back

into service at the end of each working day. Coordinate any situation which may require

over-night fire watch with the construction manager and building owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with

the following:

1. NFPA 13.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

C. High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 300-psig working pressure.

D. All components must be UL and/or FM approved. FM approval is mandatory for projects

insured by FM Global and/or local AHJ

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard-Weight: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field

formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 10, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M,

Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10,

plain end.

C. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,

seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded.

E. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.




211313 - 8

H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or EPDM

rubber gasket.

a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.

b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type

gaskets.

2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials

appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

J. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:



b. Smith-Cooper International.

c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

d. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 300-psig minimum.

3. Galvanized Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron

casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Victaulic Firelock installation-ready fittings for 1 1/4”-2 ½” piping.

K. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints or building expansion

joints. Flexible connection shall be similar to Metraflex Metrafire Loop and coordinated with

requirements of NFPA 13, 9.3.2.3 regardless of building’s seismic zone.

2.3 PIPE PAINTING

A. Paint all exposed interior piping with two coats of enamel epoxy type paint. Prep, clean and

prime pipe surfaces, in accordance with paint manufacturers specifications / recommendations

prior to installation and final color application.

B. Contractor shall ensure paint and primer are compatible with one another and material being

painted.

C. Paint color shall match existing wall color, coordinate with the Owner’s requirements prior to

installation.

D. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film

has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or


F. Piping and fittings exposed to corrosive and/or high humidity areas; exterior, attics, basements

(i.e. greater than 50% rh) shall be galvanized schedule 40 steel (nitrogen systems shall be

schedule 40 steel) with epoxy coating similar to Ameron. Sprinkler heads within these areas

shall also be corrosive / moisture resistant (i.e. Teflon coated). Pipe hangers and components

within these areas shall be hot dipped galvanized steel with epoxy coating similar to Ameron.









211313 - 9

2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.

2. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 300-psig.

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Alarm Valves:


a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

c. Victaulic Company; FireLock® Alarm Check Valve Series 751.

d. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 193.

3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.

4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure

gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

6. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application

7. Provide listed relief valve (not less than ½”) to operate at 175 psi or 10 psi in excess of

the maximum system pressure, whichever is greater. Relief valve shall be routed to

main drain

G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:






4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.

6. End Connections: Threaded.

H. Air Venting Valves:

1. shall be located near a high point in the system to allow air to be removed from that

portion of the system. Provide one air vent for each sprinkler control assembly.


a. Potter

3. UL / FM Approved

4. Furnish and install a ball valve prior to the “Y” type strainer to isolate the automatic air

release valve and strainer from the system for replacement of the automatic air vent or

WAGS or strainer maintenance.

5. Ball valve shall be supervised.













211313 - 10

6. Output 1/2'” NPT

7. Provide strainer connected to air vent

8. Mount in a vertical, accessible location with 8” of clearance above the sprinkler main.

9. The output of the air vent valve shall be piped to a secondary automatic shut off valve,

(WAGS). All components shall be brass.

10. The WAGS shall be factory installed in a water retention pan. In the event the primary

automatic air vent fails to close and water begins to discharge, the water will flow

through the WAGS and into the water retention pan. When the water level in the

retention pan reaches a pre-determined level, a water soluble element in the WAGS shall

dissolve and release a powerful spring loaded piston to provide a positive water shutoff.

Operation of the WAGS shall activate a switch capable of being monitored by a fire

alarm panel or remote indicator.

11. Similar to Potter Automatic air release PAAR-B

2.5 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Branch Outlet Fittings:



b. Shurjoint Piping Products.





4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

9. Utilize solid back type mechanical fittings.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).



2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded or grooved.

C. Branch Line Testers:


a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.


c. Potter Roemer LLC.



















211313 - 11

3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.


c. Victaulic Company; TestMaster™ II Alarm Test Module Style 720.




4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.


6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

E. Drain termination:

1. All drain piping and fittings shall be galvanized.

2. Provide necessary piping as required to route to the exterior of building

3. Drains shall not cause damage to landscaping, the building and/or discharge onto

sidewalks.

4. Provide splash blocks

5. Utilize JOSAM Series 25010-Q100 Downspout cover or FROET Chameleon downspout

nozzle, custom color. Architect to determine

F. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:


a. Fivalco Inc.

b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

c. Gateway Tubing, Inc.

d. Victaulic Company; VicFlex™ Braided Sprinkler Fitting Assembly.

2. Standard: UL 1474. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for

connection to ceiling grid.


4. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.6 SPRINKLERS




3. Victaulic Company; Victaulic Sprinkler Heads.


B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175-psig maximum.



















211313 - 12

D. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.

E. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 300 psig.

F. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for

"Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by

application.

G. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Nominal Orifice: 1/2 inch, with discharge coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.

2. Nominal Orifice: 17/32 inch with discharge coefficient K between 7.4 and 8.2.

H. Sprinkler Finishes: Refer to schedule on drawings.

I. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting

applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with

sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

J. Sprinkler Guards:




c. Victaulic Company.



3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.7 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:


a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.

b. Notifier.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.


3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.

4. Size: 6-inch minimum- diameter.

5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.















211313 - 13

C. Water-Flow Indicators:


a. ADT Security Services, Inc.

b. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

c. System Sensor.


e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and

auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-

adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal

if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.


7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Pressure Switches:


a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

b. System Sensor.




3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell International company.

b. Kennedy Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

d. System Sensor.Standard: UL 346.

2. Type: Electrically supervised.


4. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.



2.8 PRESSURE GAGES


1. AGF Manufacturing Inc.

2. AMETEK, Inc.

3. Ashcroft Inc.

4. Brecco Corporation.

5. WIKA Instrument Corporation.


























211313 - 14


C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 300 psig.

E. Label: Include "WATER" label on dial face.

2.9 PRE-ENGINEERED KITCHEN HOOD FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

A. Shall be provided and installed for the kitchen exhaust hood(s) (total of nine), and plenum(s),

ductwork and cooking appliances requiring protection by the local and state codes, local fire

marshal or owner’s insurance company.

B. The system shall be in accordance with NFPA 17A, 70, 72 & 96 and UL.

C. The system shall be a pre-engineered, wet chemical, fixed nozzle agent distribution network. It

shall include: automatic detection and actuation and remote manual actuation as well as

automatic gas / electrical shut-off.

D. Similar to ANSUL Model R-102 Restaurant Fire Suppression System.

E. System shall include training of facility personnel by manufacturers representative.

F. All system components shall be coordinated with the local Fire Marshal.

2.10 WATER STORAGE TANK & ACCESSORIES Fiberglass type

A. Water storage tanks

1. Provide and install (1) 25,0000 gallon (active water supply), fire protection underground

water storage tank including: 24” manway, 36“ manway extension, 6” flanged discharge,

6” vent assembly, 4” locking refill with cover, domestic fill piping fittings, traffic slab,

etc.

2. Water storage tanks shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's

specifications including: type and depth of bedding & backfill material, bury depths,

separation from one another, etc.

a. Tanks shall be secured with anti-floatation anchors. Including: deadman anchors,

tie down irons, hold down straps, bedding material, etc.

3. All ground penetrations shall be coordinated and approved by architect prior to

installation, including: manhole's, valve curb boxes, etc.

4. Traffic Loading: When installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions, the vessel

shall meet HS-20 vehicle axle load carrying requirements.

5. Tanks shall be similar to Darco model 10’ diameter, (25,000 gallons) or Hyland. Tank

shall be coordinated with available grade, required depth of bury and pipe routing to wet

well.

a. Other manufacturers must meet specifications requirements but may include:

Granby, etc.

B. Water storage tank accessories

1. Fire storage tank modulating float valve: the modulating float valve shall modulate to

maintain a constant liquid level in the fire storage tank by compensating for variation in




211313 - 15

supply and/or demand. The valve shall be capable of controlling the flow into the tank in

direct relation to the flow that is being withdrawn from the tank. The valve shall close on

a rising liquid level in the fire suction tank. The valve shall be the no. 428xhi modulating

float control valve as manufactured by Cla-Val company and as distributed by harper

international, Inc., Greenwich, CT. (800) 551-2733. Valve model no.: 1.5" no. 428g-

01XHI, 300S, BS, CFM-9 w/ 4' SS rod & SS float

2. Tank level sensors and alarms - provide a complete system of sensors/electrodes, control

panel, electrode fitting, remote alarm device, and interface with fire pump controller for

low water level. Controls and shall be complete with one common ground electrode, one

high level alarm electrode (do not annunciate high level at fire pump control panel), one

low level electrode set 12” at below full tank level, one low water electrode set at 6” from

tank bottom (annunciated at the fire pump control panel), electrode holders, NEMA 1

panel, complete with, alarm lights, audible alarm with silencing button, 120v/24v

transformer and relays. Provide (1) set of dry contact for remote annunciation of low

water alarm to the fire pump controller. Provide and install stilling well in accordance

with manufacturers recommendations. Level control and alarm wiring shall be provided

and installed by this section. Warrick Controls, Inc, Or B/W Controls.

2.11 UNDERGROUND FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC WET WELL

A. Quality Assurance

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Containment Solutions, Xerxes Corporation, etc.

2. Governing Standards, as applicable:

a. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:

1) ASTM D883: Standard Terminology Related to Plastics

2) ASTM D3753: Standard Specifications for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced

Polyester Manholes and Wet Wells

3) ANSI / AWWA D120-09: AWWA Standard for Thermosetting Fiberglass-

Reinforced Plastic Tanks

3. Scope of Work

a. The product listed under this section shall include all labor, materials and

equipment necessary to furnish a FRP wet well. Unless otherwise indicated the

terminology used in this specification shall be in accordance with the definitions in

the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) designation D883 –

Standard Terminology Related to Plastics. Wet wells shall be on piece units

manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable specifications of ASTM D3753.

b. Wet well shall be coordinated with fire pump size, hydraulic calculations, NFPA

22, 20, etc.

4. Submittals

a. Shop Drawings

1) The manufacturer shall supply to engineer, contractor, and/or owner, a

complete set of scale drawings detailing dimensions of heights, diameter,

elevations to invert, pipe sizes and any other necessary details.

b. Calculations

1) The manufacturer shall supply the engineer, contractor, and/or owner

buoyancy calculations assuming a flooded condition at finish grade for an

empty wet well.

2) Structural design and analysis submittals will include analysis showing a

minimum safety factor of 3:1 for longitudinal / axial buckling of the wet

well side wall.




211313 - 16

B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Wet Well

1. Loading Conditions

a. The wet well shall be designed and constructed to withstand or exceed wall

collapse and bucking with a 3:1 safety factor, based on the field geotechnical

report of the site specific soil conditions. If those site specific conditions are not

available at time of design, loading conditions listed below shall be assumed:

1) Unit weight of water is 62.4 lbs. per cubic foot.

2) Saturated soil unit weight of 120 lbs. per cubic foot.

3) Modulus of soil reaction of 700 lbs. per square foot.

b. Wet well bottom shall not have more than 1/8 inches of center deflection with

vessel empty and water table located estimated equal to finish grade.

c. Wet well, when installed according to wet well manufacturers current Wet Well

Installation Instructions and Operating Guidelines, shall support accessory

equipment – such as submersible pumps, rails, valves, and ladders as shown on

drawings.

2. Product Storage

a. Wet well shall be vented to atmospheric pressure.

b. Wet well shall be capable of storing products identified in the manufacturer’s

limited warranty for underground wet wells in effect at the time of purchase.

3. Materials

a. Wet well shall be manufactured with 100% premium resin (highly cross-linked

isophthalic polyester or terephthalic polyester resins only), and chopped glass. No

fillers or extenders will be used.

b. The resin shall be suitable for continuous immersion in sewage in the pH range of

3 to 11 and concentrations of H2S found in municipal sewer systems. Resins shall

be suitable for sulfuric acid concentrations to 20% of solution in waste stream.

c. Wet well shall be tested by the manufacturer to a Barcol Hardness of at least 80%

of the resin manufacturer’s specific hardness for fully cured resin.

d. The following pertinent average material properties shall be used in analysis for

fiberglass composite in the wet well.

1) Tensile Modulus 900,000 psi

2) Flexural Modulus 900,000 psi

3) Tensile Strength 10,000 psi

4) Compressive Strength 20,000 psi

5) Poisson’s Ratio 0.33

4. Wet Well Dimensions (Refer to Containment solutions Wet Well Data Sheet, 48”

diameter, +/- 19’, coordinate with fire pump size, depth of water storage tank, etc. tanks,

etc.)

a. Other manufacturers must meet specifications requirements but may include:

Granby, etc.

b. Wet well shall have nominal capacity of: Coordinate with NFPA 20 and fire pump

size.

c. Wet well shall have nominal diameter of: Coordinate with NFPA 20 and fire pump

size.

d. Wet well shall have height of: Coordinate with NFPA 20 and fire pump size, fire

tank storage and coverage requirements.




211313 - 17

C. Accessories and Features

1. Wet Well Top Flange

a. The wet well top flange shall be designed and built to support a 300 lb. vertical

foot traffic load. Flange dimensions shall be a minimum of 3.0 inches wide or

greater.

2. Anti-Floatation Flange

a. The wet well anti-floatation flange (for flat bottom wet wells) shall have an outside

diameter of at least 4.0 inches greater than the wall diameter of the wet well.

b. The wet well anti-floatation flange for truncated bottom wet wells shall be a

minimum of 6 inches greater than the diameter of the truncated base.

3. Piping Stub – Outs and Connections

a. Piping stub-outs will be installed by the manufacturer. Installation of FRP pipe will

be performed using FRP hand lay up procedures. All resin and fiberglass shall be

the same type and grade as used in the manufacturer of the basin.

b. The location of field stub-outs is subject to the manufacturer’s approval.

4. Wet Well Wall Reinforcement Rib

a. All 6’ diameter and larger wet wells shall be constructed using integral constructed

trapezoidal ribs.

5. Optional Ladders

a. Ladders shall be the standard ladder as supplied by wet well manufacturer and/or

material specified by the owner.

6. Pump Mounting Base and Studs

a. The pump base mounting studs shall be 300 series stainless steel threaded studs.

b. The pump mounting base detail shall be provided by the owner.

D. Testing & Installation

1. Wet Well shall be installed and tested according to the Xerxes Wet Well Installation

Instructions and Operating Guidelines.

E. Certification and Design

1. The manufacturer shall verify that the wet well has been sampled, tested and inspected in

accordance with this specification and meets all requirements.

2. The manufacturer can provide, if requested, anti-floatation calculations for the designed

wet well based on specific site parameters.

3. Marking and Identification

a. The wet well shall be marked on the inside and outside with the following

information:

1) Manufacturer’s trade name or trademark

2) Manufacturer’s location

3) Total height and diameter of wet well

4) Date of manufacture

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Where conflicts occur between drawings and specifications, or within either document, the

Contractor shall ask for and obtain a written clarification from the Engineer prior to submitting




211313 - 18

his bid. Otherwise, the items or arrangements of superior quality, greater quantity or higher cost

shall prevail and be included in the contract price.

B. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system

design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

C. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with

requirements for exterior piping in Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service

Piping" for exterior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated

at connection to water-service piping. Comply with requirements for backflow preventers in

Section 211100 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."


A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from

approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates

ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint

device materials and installation.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and


G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,

and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when

sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.




211313 - 19

J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to

drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and

spill over floor drain or to outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. In seismic-rated areas, refer to Section 210548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal

seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit

removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements


P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with



Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression

Piping."



that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for


B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and


D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut



1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.




211313 - 20


damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes

and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for

galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and

grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,

and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water



C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of


D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.

2. Install alarm valves with bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line

connection.

3. Install deluge valves in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply

to deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip

valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Sprinkler head finishes shall be coordinated and approved by Architect prior to installation

B. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

C. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or

sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

D. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling

grid.

E. All piping and sprinklers shall be of the concealed type in areas where ceilings exist. Exposed

piping and sprinklers shall be installed in areas without ceilings. All fire protection work shall




211313 - 21

be coordinated with other trades including the buildings architectural features (lights, diffusers,

etc.).

F. Do not run exposed piping in front of windows and skylights. Keep all piping as high as

possible. Coordinate all piping with other trades. Concealed piping should be elevated +/- 6"

above the ceiling. Coordinate all piping with lights and diffusers. The ceiling construction

consists of a rated assembly and therefore all sprinkler piping shall meet the requirements of

NFPA, to ensure continuous rating

G. Clearance from electrical equipment

1. Piping (except for piping directly supplying sprinklers for such rooms):

a. Prohibited, except as noted, in:

1) Electric Rooms and Closets.

2) Telephone Equipment Rooms and Closets.

3) Elevator Machine Rooms.

b. Prohibited, except as noted, over or within 5 feet of:

1) Transformers.

2) Substations.

3) Switchboards.

4) Motor control centers.

5) Standby power plant.

6) Bus ducts.

c. When over or within 5 feet unavoidable, provide custom painted drip pans under

piping over electrical equipment.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13 and as specified in Section 210553.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




211313 - 22

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any

sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-maintenance pumps.


A. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with grooved ends, grooved-end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved

joints.

B. Refer to schedule on drawings.

3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Refer to schedule on drawings



DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS


211316 - 1

SECTION 211316 - DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings.

4. Sprinklers.

5. Alarm devices.

6. Control panels.

7. Pressure gages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at

working pressure of 175-psig maximum.

B. Authority Having Jurisdiction: Fire Marshal / Building Official





B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems.



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. The Shop Drawing process will include a walk-thru with the Government to verify the

location of everything shown on Shop Drawings and that there is no conflict with

anything existing or any other issues. Shop drawings will not be approved and

Contractor cannot start installation until this has been done.




211316 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are





4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:



B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. HYDRAULIC SUMMARY DATA SHALL BE INCLUDED ON SHOP DRAWINGS.

1. Calculations shall include a 10 psi "Cushion" between required flow/pressure and

available flow/pressure.

2. Hydraulic reference points shall be clearly indicated on drawings. Do not use "pipe

numbers", provide consecutively numbered reference points at all areas indicated on

hydraulic calculations including at connection to street main.

3. Hydraulic calculations shall include a minimum of 1500 sq.ft. for all remote areas. Grid

calculations shall include "Peaking" process (per NFPA requirements) to ensure

calculation of most remote area.

4. For areas having unsprinklered combustible concealed spaces (as described in NFPA 13,

2013) the minimum area of sprinkler protection shall be 3,000 sq.ft.

5. Increase hydraulic remote area for all dry systems.

6. Increase hydraulic remote area by 30% for sprinklers used on sloped ceilings with a pitch

exceeding one in six (16.7%).

7. Use of: line spacing off wall in excess of 7’-6”, remote area reductions, etc. (as noted in

NFPA 13) are not permitted.

8. Contractor shall submit hydraulic calculations for all sprinkler and standpipe systems,

including all hazard areas; (i.e. wet, dry, light, ordinary, extra, etc.) to Architect,

Engineer, AHJ.



11. Provide dimensional installation piping layout/s coordinated with all trades. Include all

sprinkler piping, drains, pipe sizes, hanger styles and locations, valves, alarm equipment,

and all other items for a complete shop drawing. Submittal shop drawings shall be clear

and legible. All sprinkler information must standout on the shop drawings (ie: bold

piping, etc. or lighter background). Reverse reading drawings are not acceptable.

12. Include a complete riser diagram indicating new and existing fire protection equipment,

hydraulic reference points and elevations at each floor.

13. Provide a full height building cross section noting elevations, types of construction, and

locations of ceilings, walls/partitions, and piping.

14. Include a site plan indicating flow test location, north arrow, underground supply piping,

building location and adjacent streets.

15. Determine deviations from specifications and drawings and indicate on shop drawings.

16. Provide definition/description of sprinkler identification for all sprinklers.

17. Submit all fire protection drawings and calculations to the Architect, Engineer, AHJ.

Secure approval prior to installation.




211316 - 3

18. The Shop Drawing process will include a walk-thru with the Architect / Engineer to

verify the location of everything shown on Shop Drawings and that there is no conflict

with anything existing or any other issues. Shop drawings will not be approved and

Contractor cannot start installation until this has been done.

19. Submitted drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer licensed

in the State of Connecticut.

D. Design Criteria

1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses

through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

3. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications shall be in accordance with NFPA 13,

requirements.

4. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping shall be in accordance with NFPA 13,

and the Government’s requirements.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: According to UL listing.

6. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler shall be in accordance with NFPA 13, and the

Government’s requirements including;

a. Residential Areas: 400 sq. ft.

b. Office Spaces: 196 sq. ft.

c. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.

d. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.

e. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.

f. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design shall be in accordance with NFPA

13, Government’s requirements including:

1. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area plus 100 gpm outside hose.


outside hose.


outside hose.


outside hose.


outside hose.

F. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are





4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:



G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.




211316 - 4

H. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that


applicable.

I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Contractor responsible

to document and submit "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping"

and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

J. Samples

1. Submit samples on the following items:

2. Sprinkler heads, escutcheons, head guards, valve tags and pipe markers.

K. Operating instructions and parts lists.

1. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish five (5) printed and bound sets.

2. Equipment and systems: Brief description of equipment and systems and basic operating

features. Manufacturer's name, (include address and telephone number) model number,

service manual, spare parts lists, wiring diagrams and descriptive literature for all

components.

3. Maintenance instructions.

4. Instructions for starting and operation.

5. Detailed and simplified type, one line color coded flow and wiring diagrams.

6. Witnessed CONTRACTOR'S MATERIAL AND TEST CERTIFICATE FOR ABOVE

GROUND and UNDERGROUND PIPING (FIELD TEST REPORTS).

L. Welding certificates.

M. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

1. Provide less than (1) year old 3-way water flow data including:

a. Date and Time of test, including water company

b. Static & residual pressures

c. GPM

d. Size of water main

2. Fire Protection section of specifications shall include hydrant "three point" flow test data.

Ref. also to "Fire Protection and Water Supply" Section 2.4.7 of the Consultant’s

Procedure Manual.

3. The water test shall conform to the procedures described in the National Fire Protection

Association (NFPA) Standard 291, "Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants",

(specific edition currently enforced by codes); or the procedures described in the NFPA

Handbook "Testing of Water Supplies". The results of the water flow test shall be plotted

in the form of a three-point curve to ensure accuracy of the test results. The water flow

test report is to be included in the "Sprinkler" section of the specifications.

N. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with



O. Field quality-control reports.

P. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction.




211316 - 5

Q. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that


applicable.

R. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

S. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with



T. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in





1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with

space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of

sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with

sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.








1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed

air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe

valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from opened sprinklers.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in





211316 - 6

B. Furnish manufacturers operating and maintenance instructions, parts lists and sources of supply


C. Provide the following:

1. Information shall include: drawings, hydraulic calculations, above and below ground

pipe testing, waterflow test, equipment “cut” sheets along with a copy of NFPA 25,

Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection

Systems (adopted edition State recognizes) bound in a folder.

2. Master Operating Manual (submit in quadruplicate)





5. Three days of instruction in operation and maintenance of equipment to facilities

personnel. Design a 2-week period, convenient to facilities personnel during which


for facilities personnel instruction.



controllers.




shutdown and draining.




schedules, control diagrams and wiring diagrams as applicable.

11. Description of sequence operation by the control manufacturer, as applicable.


system failure.

13. List of various sprinkler and/or standpipe zones including graphic diagram.



a. Aboveground and underground piping.

b. Current, less than 1 year old water flow test.

1.11 AS-BUILT / RECORD DRAWINGS





sketches and loose paperwork will not be acceptable and will be returned for revision.

Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic version. Number of copies of

each as requested by the owner.






211316 - 7

C. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic version as required by the

Owner). Number of copies of each as requested by the Owner, minimum of three copies




and work installed.


numbered, and with items requiring maintenance located. Valve location



building lines.





instructions.


contract.








B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and


C. Quality of Materials.

1. All equipment and materials shall be UL listed and Factory Mutual approved.

2. New, best of their respective kinds and free of defects.

3. Electrical equipment: Listed by Underwriters Laboratories or bearing their label. Secure

approval from Owner, Architect and Engineer and all authorities having jurisdiction for

materials, equipment and installation prior to installation. All fire protection Work shall

be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from date

of final acceptance shall meet all local and state codes. All defects, which develop or are

discovered within this period, shall be repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the

Owner at no additional cost.

1.13 WORKMANSHIP



B. No work shall be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Architect, Owner

and AHJ.




211316 - 8


and satisfaction of the Owner, Engineer and AHJ shall be rejected and immediately replaced in

an acceptable manner, without additional cost to the Owner.

1.14 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents are diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work and

indicate general arrangements of piping, sprinkler heads, etc. Any work or materials in addition

to or different from these Contract Documents as required to provide a complete system shall be

furnished and installed at no additional cost. During the bid period the Contractor shall examine

the site and construction documents of the proposed work to determine the existing conditions

that may affect their work. The contractor shall identify and submit any problematic conditions

in writing to the Owner prior to submitting the bid

B. Sprinkler Permits and Water Service

1. Arrange with local authorities for all permits and approvals, provide all necessary

documentation.

2. Pay required charges.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Refer to Specification section 211313 “Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems” for additional associated

equipment


A. Refer to drawing pipe schedules

B. For piping 2” and smaller: Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E,

Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. For piping 2-1/2” and larger: Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E,

Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

D. All drain piping and fittings shall be galvanized.

E. Grooved-Joint, fittings shall be utilized for piing 2” and larger. Piping 1 ½” and smaller shall

utilize screwed fittings

1. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

F. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,

seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

G. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

H. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.




211316 - 9

I. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

J. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

K. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

L. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

M. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.





3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching

steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,

unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,

EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts. Allowed for sizes 2-1/2" and larger.

5. Plain end fittings and bushings are not permitted.

6. Grooved fittings and couplings including gaskets used on dry pipe and pre-action systems

shall be listed for dry pipe service.

N. Pipe Painting:

1. All interior exposed piping shall be custom color painted.

2. Paint all exterior dry piping with two coats of enamel epoxy type paint. Prep, clean and

prime pipe surfaces, in accordance with paint manufacturers specifications /

recommendations prior to installation and final color application.

3. Contractor shall ensure paint and primer are compatible with one another and material

being painted.

4. Paint color shall match existing wall color, coordinate with the Architect requirements

prior to installation.

5. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured

film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

6. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or


7. Pipe hangers and components within exterior areas shall be hot dipped galvanized steel

with epoxy coating similar to Ameron.


A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

B. Pressure Rating:

1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1431&mf=04&src=wd








211316 - 10

C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

D. Size: Same as connected piping.

E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

F. Refer to Specification Section 210523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED

FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

2.4 DRY-PIPE VALVES


following:

1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.




B. Standard: UL 260

C. Design: Differential-pressure type.

D. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm

connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line

attachment.

1. Air Compressor:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Gast Manufacturing Inc.

2) General Air Products, Inc,

3) Viking Corporation.

b. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval

Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

c. Motor Horsepower: shall be coordinated with system size and manufacturer and

available electrical supply

d. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase. Shall be coordinated with system size,

manufacturer and available electrical supply

2. Dry Accelerator


of the following:

1) Victaulic

2) Tyco

3) Reliable

4) Compatible with dry pipe valve assembly.

b. Accelerator speeds the operation of the sprinkler’s control valves by sensing the

rapid decay of system pressure and exhausting air. It attaches to the air supply’s

trim at the inlet of the dry actuator.

c. UL/FM listed











211316 - 11

2.5 DRY-PIPE VALVES WITH NITROGEN GENERATION


following:

1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.




B. Standard: UL 260

C. Design: Differential-pressure type.

D. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm


attachment.

1. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:


of the following:

1) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

2) Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

3) Victaulic Company.


b. Standard: UL 260.

c. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.

d. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping,

bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure,

strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 175-psig outlet

pressure.

2. Air Compressor:


of the following:

1) Gast Manufacturing Inc.

2) General Air Products, Inc,


b. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval

Guide," published by FM Global, listing.

c. Motor Horsepower: shall be coordinated with system size and manufacturer and

available electrical supply

d. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase. Shall be coordinated with system size,

manufacturer and available electrical supply

E. Nitrogen generation

1. Nitrogen generation manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

a. ECS Protector Series PGEN-5

2. A self-contained skid mounted unit that includes the following components:

3. 3/4 hp air compressor and nitrogen generator cabinet power supply (120v/1 phase/60Hz)

4. Single point nitrogen/air discharge – ½” FNPT

5. Oil less air compressor with after cooler
















211316 - 12

6. 20 gallon horizontal air receiver tank with automatic condensate blow down – ½” MNPT

7. Cabinet enclosed membrane type nitrogen generator (no nitrogen gas storage) with

manual bypass

8. Air maintenance device with on board adjustable regulator (recommend Victaulic Series

757, Tyco Model AMD– 1 and Reliable Model A-2)

9. Riser-mounted ECS Protector SMART Vent (PSV-D)

10. ECS Protector SMART Gas Analyzer (SGA-1)

11. ECS In-Line Corrosion Detector (ILD-X) – monitoring multiple zones

12. Generator shall be capable of supplying multiple dry pipe valve assemblies

13. Provide additional spare set of all filters for Nitrogen Generator and Oxygen removal

vent.

F. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. AFAC Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.





5. Size: NPS 3/4.


G. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


following:


b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.




5. Size: NPS 3/4.


2.6 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

B. Branch Outlet Fittings:


following:


b. Apollo-Shurjoint Piping Products USA Inc.

c. Tyco Fire Products LP.


















211316 - 13

4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to

match connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The).

c. Tyco Fire Products LP.




4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test

valve.



D. Branch Line Testers:


following:

a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc.


c. Potter Roemer LLC.



4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:


following:

a. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Tyco Fire Products LP.





4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.




















211316 - 14

F. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:


following:

a. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

b. Victaulic Company.


3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to

ceiling grid.


5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.7 SPRINKLERS


following:

1. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.


3. Tyco Fire Products LP.



B. Refer to sprinkler head schedule on drawings.

C. Sprinkler Guards:


following:


b. Tyco Fire Products LP.




3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Refer to Specification section 211313 “Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems”

B. Pressure Switches:


following:

a. Potter Electric Signal Company, LLC.

b. System Sensor.

c. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.


5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.






















211316 - 15

2.9 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. AGF Manufacturing, Inc.

2. AMETEK, Inc.

3. Ashcroft Inc.

4. Brecco Corporation.

5. WIKA Instrument Corporation.


C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 300 psig.

E. Label: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system

design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.


A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general

location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from

authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from

approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates

ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.










211316 - 16

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint

device materials and installation.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in

pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and


G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve,

and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when

sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire department connections

and check valves. Drain to floor drain or to outside building.

K. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.

3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.

L. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

M. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements in NFPA 13. In seismic-rated areas, refer to Section 210548 "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

N. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal

seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit

removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

O. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

P. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air compressors.

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements


R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with



S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.




211316 - 17



that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for


B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and


D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water

service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut





damaged.

H. Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer

lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and

grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both

piping systems.

3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls,

and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water



C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of





211316 - 18

D. Specialty Valves:

1. Install valves in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system.

2. Install dry-pipe valves with trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm


attachment.

a. Install air compressor and compressed-air-supply piping.

b. Install air-pressure maintenance device with shutoff valves to permit servicing

without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling;

pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings

with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range; and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.

c. Install compressed-air-supply piping from building's compressed-air piping

system.

3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or

sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling

grid.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in

NFPA 13.


identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest



equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"

Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Start and run air compressors.

6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.




211316 - 19

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any

sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train facilities personnel to adjust, operate,

and maintain specialty valves.


A. Refer to schedule on drawings.

B. Piping between Fire Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight

steel pipe with threaded ends, cast-iron threaded fittings, and threaded grooved ends, grooved-

end fittings, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and grooved joints.

3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE


END OF SECTION


DIESEL-DRIVE, VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS


213216 - 1

SECTION 213216 - DIESEL-DRIVE, VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vertical-turbine fire pumps.

2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.

3. Flowmeter systems.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined


1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event."

B. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher

pressure rating is indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, right-angle gear drives, engine drivers, and fire-pump

accessories and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




213216 - 2


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each fire pump, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for location and application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire

Protection."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested fire pump, right-angle gear drive, and driver.

B. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire pump, right-angle gear drive, and driver with

reinforcement to resist movement of pump, gear drive, and driver during seismic events when

base is anchored to building substrate.

C. Finish: Red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.




213216 - 3

2.2 VERTICAL-TURBINE FIRE PUMPS


following:

1. A-C Fire Pump; a Xylem brand.

2. Aurora Pump; Pentair Ltd.

3. Patterson Pump Company; a Gorman-Rupp company.

4. Peerless Pump Company.

B. Pump Head: Cast iron, for surface discharge.

1. Discharge Outlet: With flange according to ASME B16.1 except connections may be

threaded according to ASME B1.20.1, in sizes where flanges are not available.

2. Pump Head Seal: Stuffing box and packing. Packing drain shall be piped to wet well

3. Base: Cast iron or steel with hole for electrical cable.

C. Pump:

1. Standard: UL 448, for vertical-turbine pumps for fire service.

2. Line Shaft: Stainless steel or steel, with corrosion-resistant shaft sleeves.

3. Line Shaft Bearings: Rubber sleeve, water lubricated.

4. Line Shaft: Steel.

5. Line Shaft Bearings: Corrosion resistant, oil lubricated.

6. Impeller Shaft: Monel metal or stainless steel.

7. Bowl Section: Multiple cast-iron bowls with closed-type bronze or stainless-steel

impellers.

8. Column Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded

ends and cast-iron or steel fittings, in sections 10 feet or less.

9. Suction Strainer: Cast or fabricated, bronze or stainless steel, and sized to restrict passage

of 0.5-inch spheres.

D. Right-Angle Gear Drive:



the following:

a. Amarillo Gear Co.

b. De'Ran Gear, Inc.

c. Johnson Gear Co. LLC.

2. Description: FM-Approved, speed-reduction gear drive for pump speed control. Provide

ratio for outlet speed of approximately 1760 rpm.

E. Engine-to-Gear Drive Shaft: FM-Approved, telescoping, steel drive shaft with universal joint

and grease fitting at each end. Include metal shaft guard.

F. Driver:


2. Type: Diesel engine.

3. Emergency Manual Operator: Factory wired for starting and operating standby engine in

case of malfunction in main controller or wiring.

4. Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed radiator.

a. Coolant: Type recommended by driver manufacturer.













213216 - 4

5. Engine Cooling System: Factory-installed water piping, valves, strainer, pressure

regulator, heat exchanger, coolant pump, bypass piping, and fittings.

a. Piping: ASTM B 88, Type L, copper water tube; ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,

solder-joint pressure fittings; AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series brazing filler metal;

and brazed joints.

6. Engine-Jacket Water Heater: Factory-installed electric elements.

7. Dual Batteries: Lead-acid-storage type with 100 percent standby reserve capacity.

8. Fuel System:

a. Provide fuel piping, filters, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer,

NFPA 20, etc.

b. Fuel Storage Tank: Size indicated but not less than required by NFPA 20. Include

floor legs, direct-reading level gage, and secondary containment tank with capacity

at least equal to fuel storage tank.

c. Double wall, fuel Storage Tank: Size indicated but not less than required by

NFPA 20. Include floor legs, direct-reading level gage, and secondary containment

with capacity at least equal to fuel storage tank.

d. Contractor shall fill tank with diesel fuel (in accordance with manufacturers

recommendations) prior to and after testing.

e. Interstitial tank monitoring.

f. Installed in the interstitial area between two tank walls, to detect both oil and water

leaks. For use with TG-EL-D3 or TG-EL-D5 Tank Gauge and Leak Detection

Systems.

g. Provide and install leak detectors in the annular space within the double wall tank.

The leak detectors shall be solid state and discriminate between oil and water,

display the leak with (2) LEDs on its indicating transmitter, and send an

appropriate alarm signal to the tank gauge. All leak detectors shall be intrinsically

safe, have continuous electronic checking, fail safe to an alarm condition, and have

indicating transmitters with a magnetic test mechanism at grade level to exercise

the sensors and check the tank gauge response. Test systems that bypass the

sensors or rely only on electronic simulation are unacceptable. The leak detectors

shall be Preferred Utilities Manufacturing Corporation, Danbury CT, Model HD-

A1.

h. Storage tank fill lines shall terminate at the building wall in a Model 2 Horizontal

Spill Container fill box per NFPA 31 Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning

Equipment. The fill box shall have a total of 5 U.S. gallon holding capacity,

NEMA 4 rated construction with a neoprene gasket door seal, three point latch

locking handle, (1.5", 2" or 3") oil fill connection dry disconnect and dust cover

(shipped loose). The cabinet shall be 304 stainless steel (or carbon steel), 12 gauge

construction, and be equipped with ½" NPT drain connection. The enclosure shall

be equipped with “stitch” weld 2" x 2" x ¼" angle steel flanges for flush mounting,

with 2 pre-drilled holes per side. The entire interior shall be prime coated and

painted with white enamel. (If the In-wall spill container is carbon steel material

the exterior to be primed and painted with compatible enamel paint.).

i. Provide an overfill Alarm Station integral to the Model 2 Horizontal Spill

Container. The station shall consist of an explosion proof “Overfill Alarm”

light(s), alarm horn and “Alarm Silence” pushbutton. (Provide a separate explosion

proof digital tank content display.) The light and bell shall be automatically

silenced in 90 seconds or instantly silenced when the operator selects the “Alarm

Silence” button. Explosion proof components are required to prevent the ignition

of the fuel oil vapors generated from the sun heating the spill container. The




213216 - 5

Horizontal Spill Container shall be a Preferred Utilities Mfg Corp., Danbury CT,

Model 2-4, Flush Mounted with (1.5", 2" or 3") fill connection size and a (stainless

steel or carbon steel) enclosure.

9. Exhaust System: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Schedule 40, black steel pipe;

ASME B16.9, weld-type pipe fittings; ASME B16.5, steel flanges; and ASME B16.21,

nonmetallic gaskets. Fabricate double-wall, ventilated thimble from steel pipe.

a. Exhaust Connector: Flexible type.

b. Exhaust Silencer: Residential type.

G. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Coordinate with NFPA 13 hydraulic requirements as well as NFPA 20.

2. Refer to Drawing fire pump schedule

3. Pump shall be similar to ITT/A-C Fire Model FP11CLC UL/FM Vertical Turbine Diesel

Fire Pump

2.3 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump discharge

piping.

B. Relief Valves:


following:

a. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.

b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.


2. Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-

suppression water-supply piping.

C. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump-head discharge outlet.

D. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.

E. Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:

1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.

2. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends threaded

according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.

4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.

5. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers

instead of inlets.

b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by

NFPA 20.

c. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with ends

threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to

NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.

e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular.








213216 - 6

f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads.

g. Exposed Parts Finish: Polished brass.

h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

6. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers

instead of inlets.

b. Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.

c. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; round.

d. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains.

e. Exposed Parts Finish: Polished brass.

f. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

2.4 FLOWMETER SYSTEMS


following:

1. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division.

2. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump Company.


B. Description: UL-listed or FM-Approved, fire-pump flowmeter system with capability to

indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity.

C. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

D. Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi unless otherwise indicated. Sensor size shall

match pipe, tubing, flowmeter, and fittings.

E. Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2

inches in diameter. Include bracket or device for wall mounting.

1. Tubing Package: NPS 1/8 or NPS 1/4 soft copper or plastic tubing with copper or brass

fittings and valves.

F. Portable Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches in

diameter and with two 12-foot-long hoses in carrying case.

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.










213216 - 7

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test"

and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."

1. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.

B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-pump installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief

valves, and related components.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install fire pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete." Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 210548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and

Equipment."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 210548.13

"Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

C. Install fire-pump discharge piping equal to or larger than size required by NFPA 20.

D. Support piping and pumps separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.

E. Install valves that are same size as connecting piping. Comply with requirements for fire-

protection valves specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."

F. Install pressure gage on pump head discharge flange pressure-gage tapping. Comply with

requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems."




213216 - 8

G. Install piping hangers and supports, anchors, valves, gages, and equipment supports according

to NFPA 20.

H. Install fuel system according to NFPA 20.

I. Install water supply and drain piping for diesel-engine heat exchangers. Extend drain piping

from heat exchangers to point of disposal.

J. Install exhaust system piping for diesel engines. Extend to point of termination outside

structure. Install pipe and fittings with welded joints; install components having flanged

connections with gasketed joints.

K. Install condensate drain piping for diesel-engine exhaust system. Extend drain piping from low

points of exhaust system to condensate traps and to point of disposal.

L. Install flowmeters and sensors. Install flowmeter-system components and make connections

according to NFPA 20 and manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not

factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical

Installer.

N. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where

possible.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align fire-pump-driver, right-angle gear-drive, and fire-pump shafts after complete unit has

been leveled on concrete base, grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.

B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with grout,

with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has hardened.

Check alignment and make required corrections.

C. Align piping connections.

D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 2.4 and to

tolerances specified by manufacturer.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping and valves specified in Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe

Sprinkler Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.

D. Connect flowmeter-system meters, sensors, and valves to tubing.




213216 - 9

E. Connect fire pumps to their controllers.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to

NFPA 20.


A. Test each fire pump with its right-angle gear drive and controller as a unit. Comply with

requirements for electric-motor-driver fire-pump controllers specified in Section 213900

"Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing components, assemblies, and equipment including controller, test for

compliance with requirements.

2. Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.

3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest


4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.


equipment.

E. Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable

location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to

Owner.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.




213216 - 10

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps, right-angle gear drives, and fire-pump controllers.



PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS


213400 - 1

SECTION 213400 - PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 213900 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers" for pressure-maintenance-pump

controllers.


A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher





accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For pumps, accessories, and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.



connection.



A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




213400 - 2




1.8 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL-TURBINE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, vertical, multistage, open-line-shaft turbine pump

as defined in HI 2.1-2.2 and HI 2.3; with pump motor mounted above pump head.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Pump Head: Cast iron, for surface discharge, with flange except connections may be

threaded in sizes in which flanges are not available.

2. Pump Head Seal: Stuffing box and stuffing.







impellers.


ends and cast-iron or steel fittings, in sections 10 feet or less, with strainer of cast or

fabricated bronze or stainless steel at bottom.

C. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in

Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller.

D. Base: Cast iron or steel with hole for electrical cable.

E. Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics.

F. Capacities and Characteristics shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, coordinated with fire

pump assembly and available electrical supply. Pump shall be similar to Grundfos Model

10S07-12, 10 GPM @ 90 PSI Submersible Jockey Pump .75 HP, 3500 RPM, 208/1/60, Full

Load Current: 7.6 Amps at 208 volts. Provide Jockey pump controller with digital display,

fuse disconnect switch, min. run timer, pilot lights.




213400 - 3

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements

for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.

B. Base-Mounted Pump Mounting: Install pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for

concrete bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033053

"Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."


install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


5. Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts.

C. Install vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 2.4.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,










equipment.

D. Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.




213400 - 4


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.





213400 - 1

SECTION 213400 - PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 213900 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers" for pressure-maintenance-pump

controllers.


A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher





accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For pumps, accessories, and specialties. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.



connection.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




213400 - 2




1.8 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VERTICAL-TURBINE, PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, vertical, multistage, open-line-shaft turbine pump

as defined in HI 2.1-2.2 and HI 2.3; with pump motor mounted above pump head.

B. Pump Construction:

1. Pump Head: Cast iron, for surface discharge, with flange except connections may be

threaded in sizes in which flanges are not available.

2. Pump Head Seal: Stuffing box and stuffing.







impellers.


ends and cast-iron or steel fittings, in sections 10 feet or less, with strainer of cast or

fabricated bronze or stainless steel at bottom.

C. Motor: Single speed with permanently lubricated ball bearings. Comply with requirements in

Section 210513 "Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Power Cord: Factory-connected to motor for field connection to controller.

D. Base: Cast iron or steel with hole for electrical cable.

E. Nameplate: Permanently attached to pump and indicating capacity and characteristics.

F. Capacities and Characteristics shall be in accordance with NFPA 20, coordinated with fire

pump assembly and available electrical supply. Pump shall be similar to Grundfos Model

10S07-12, 10 GPM @ 90 PSI Submersible Jockey Pump .75 HP, 3500 RPM, 208/1/60, Full

Load Current: 7.6 Amps at 208 volts. Provide Jockey pump controller with digital display,

fuse disconnect switch, min. run timer, pilot lights.




213400 - 3

2.2 MOTORS



for Fire Suppression Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven load


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. NFPA Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of pressure-maintenance pumps.

B. Base-Mounted Pump Mounting: Install pumps on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for

concrete bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033053

"Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."








5. Attach pumps to equipment base using anchor bolts.

C. Install vertical-turbine, pressure-maintenance pumps according to HI 2.4.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,










equipment.

D. Pressure-maintenance pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.




213400 - 4


3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Lubricate pumps as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure-switch ranges as indicated.



CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS


213900 - 1

SECTION 213900 - CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE-PUMP DRIVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Controllers for diesel-drive fire pumps.

2. Controllers for pressure-maintenance pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Automatic transfer switch(es).

B. ECM: Electronic control module.

C. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

D. N.O.: Normally open.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-pump controllers and alarm panels shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."



characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work, including required clearances and service

spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 2.

c. Factory-installed devices.




213900 - 2

d. Nameplate legends.

e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of integrated unit.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices.

g. Specified modifications.

2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, method of field

assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Schematic and Connection Diagrams: For power, signal, alarm, and control wiring and

for pressure-sensing tubing.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.







C. Product Certificates: For each type of product indicated, from manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer's factory test reports of fully assembled and tested equipment.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product indicated to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor-based logic controls.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-pump controllers and all associated equipment from single

source or producer.




213900 - 3



D. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction pertaining to materials and installation.

E. Comply with NFPA 20 and NFPA 70.

F. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand

seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.

Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and

physical damage.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 40 deg F and not exceeding 122 deg F unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 6600 feet unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of

proposed interruption of electric service, and comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of controllers with other construction including conduit,

piping, fire-pump equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for

workspace and equipment access doors and panels. Ensure that controllers are within sight of

fire-pump drivers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROLLERS FOR DIESEL-DRIVE FIRE PUMPS


1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a business of Emerson Network Power.

2. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.

3. Hubbell Incorporated.

4. Joslyn Clark Corporation.

5. Master Control Systems, Inc.

6. Metron Control Products div. Hubbell Industrial Controls.











213900 - 4

B. General Requirements for Controllers:

1. Comply with NFPA 20 and UL 218.

2. Listed by an NRTL for diesel-engine driver for fire-pump service.

3. Combined automatic and nonautomatic operation.

4. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.

C. Method of Starting:

1. Pressure-switch actuated.

a. Water-pressure-actuated switch and pressure transducer with independent high-

and low-calibrated adjustments responsive to water pressure in fire-suppression

piping.

b. System pressure recorder, electric ac driven, with spring backup.

c. Programmable minimum-run-time relay to prevent short cycling.

d. Programmable timer for weekly tests.

2. Dual, redundant dc-voltage battery units, with automatic changeover.

3. Emergency Control: Bypasses all automatic control circuits during manual starting and

running.

4. Automatic engine start on loss of ac power to the controller.

D. Method of Stopping: Automatic and nonautomatic shutdown after automatic starting.

E. Door-Mounted Operator Interface and Controls:

1. Monitor, display, and control devices, alarms, functions, and operations listed in

NFPA 20 as required for drivers and controller types used.

2. Method of Control and Indication:

a. Microprocessor-based logic controller, with multiline readout.

b. Membrane keypad.

c. LED alarm and status indicating lights.

3. Local and Remote Alarm and Status Indications:

a. Controller power on.

b. Engine-lubrication-system critically low oil pressure.

c. Engine-jacket coolant high temperature.

d. Engine fail-to-start.

e. Engine overspeed shutdown.

f. Low fuel level.

g. Missing or failed battery.

h. Battery charger failure.

i. System overpressure.

j. ECM selector switch in alternate ECM position.

k. Fuel injector malfunction.

l. All status indications shall be coordinated to report to main building’s fire alarm

panel. Provide all necessary wiring, modules, etc. as required.

4. Audible alarm.

5. Nonautomatic START and STOP push buttons or switches.

F. Optional Features:

1. Extra Output Contacts:

a. One Form C contacts for low pump-room temperature.

b. One each, Form C contacts for high and low fuel levels.

c. One each, Form C contacts for high and low reservoir levels.




213900 - 5

2. Door-mounted thermal or impact printer for alarm and status logs.

3. Operator Interface Communications Ports: USB, Ethernet, and RS485.

4. Powered louver contacts.

5. Powered engine-oil heater contacts.

G. Battery Charger System:

1. Built-in, independent, dual battery chargers with automatic changeover; 12-V dc for

nickel-cadmium batteries.


2.2 CONTROLLERS FOR PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS


1. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a business of Emerson Network Power.

2. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation.

3. Hubbell Incorporated.

4. Joslyn Clark Corporation.

5. Master Control Systems, Inc.

6. Metron Control Products div. Hubbell Industrial Controls.

B. General Requirements for Pressure-Maintenance-Pump Controllers:

1. Type: UL 508 factory assembled, -wired, and tested, across-the-line; for combined

automatic and manual operation.

2. Enclosure: UL 508 and NEMA 250, Type 2 for wall-mounting.

3. Factory assembled, wired, and tested.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint.

C. Rate controller for scheduled horsepower and include the following:

1. Fusible disconnect switch.

2. Pressure switch.

3. Hand-off-auto selector switch.

4. Pilot light.

5. Running period timer.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Fire-Pump Controllers, ATS, Remote Alarm Panels, and Low-Suction-Shutdown Panels:

NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed locations and NFPA 20.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: Type 1 (IEC IP10).

2. Indoor Locations Subject to Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 2 (IEC IP11).

3. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: Type 4 (IEC IP56).

4. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12 (IEC IP12).

B. Enclosure Color: Manufacturer's standard "fire-pump-controller red".

C. Nameplates: Comply with NFPA 20; complete with capacity, characteristics, approvals, listings,

and other pertinent data.











213900 - 6

D. Optional Features:

1. Floor stands, 12 inches high, for floor-mounted controllers.


A. Testing: Test and inspect fire-pump controllers according to requirements in NFPA 20 and

UL 218.

1. Verification of Performance: Rate controllers according to operation of functions and

features specified.

B. Fire-pump controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive equipment, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is wet or damaged by moisture or

mold.


3.2 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION

A. Install controllers within sight of their respective drivers.

B. Connect controllers to their dedicated pressure-sensing lines.

C. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on walls with disconnect operating handles not

higher than 79 inches above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight

structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not on walls, provide freestanding racks

complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

D. Floor-Mounting Controllers: Install controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete bases,

using floor stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12 inches

above finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete." Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."








213900 - 7




E. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls

for Electrical Systems."

F. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

G. Comply with NEMA ICS 15.

3.3 STANDALONE ATS INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounting ATS: Install ATS on walls with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79

inches above finished floor, and bottom of enclosure not less than 12 inches above finished

floor unless otherwise indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel

channels bolted to wall. For ATS not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting ATS: Install ATS on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete bases, using floor

stands high enough so that the bottom of enclosure cabinet is not less than 12 inches above

finished floor. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-

in-Place Concrete." Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."








C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls


D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.4 REMOTE ALARM PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Install panels on walls with tops not higher than 72 inches above finished floor unless otherwise

indicated. Bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For

ATS not on walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 260529 "Hangers and

Supports for Electrical Systems."




213900 - 8

3.5 POWER WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install power wiring between controllers and their services or sources, and between controllers

and their drivers. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 260519 "Low-

Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.6 CONTROL AND ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between controllers and remote devices and facility's central monitoring system.

Comply with requirements in NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 260523 "Control-Voltage

Electrical Power Cables."

B. Install wiring between remote alarm panels and controllers. Comply with requirements in

NFPA 20, NFPA 70, and Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

C. Install wiring between controllers and the building's fire-alarm system. Comply with

requirements specified in Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System."

D. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

E. Connect remote manual and automatic activation devices where applicable.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in NFPA 20 for marking fire-pump controllers.


identification in NFPA 20 and as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,


C. Perform tests and inspections.




D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Inspect and Test Each Component:

a. Inspect wiring, components, connections, and equipment installations. Test and

adjust components and equipment.




213900 - 9

b. Test insulation resistance for each element, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuits.

c. Test continuity of each circuit.

2. Verify and Test Each Electric-Driver Controller:

a. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus 10 or minus 1 percent of

motor nameplate rated voltages, with motors off. If outside this range for any

motor, notify Architect Construction Manager Owner before starting the motor(s).

b. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.


proper unit operation.


equipment.

E. Field Acceptance Tests:

1. Do not begin field acceptance testing until suction piping has been flushed and

hydrostatically tested and the certificate for flushing and testing has been submitted to

Architect Construction Manager Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Prior to starting, notify authorities having jurisdiction of the time and place of the

acceptance testing.

3. Engage manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative to be present during the

testing.

4. Perform field acceptance tests as outlined in NFPA 20.

F. Controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 STARTUP SERVICE



3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust controllers and battery charger systems to function smoothly and as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, and timers.

C. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event

recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to

Substantial Completion.

D. Set field-adjustable pressure switches.




213900 - 10

3.11 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to

Substantial Completion.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain controllers, remote alarm panels, and to use and reprogram

microprocessor-based controls within this equipment.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING


220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Work of this section shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor,

equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Section as


B. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate a general arrangement of work. General design

concepts indicated must be followed or bettered. The bid shall include offsets, additional

piping, valves and plumbing equipment and components as required to meet construction

conditions for proper operation. Do not scale drawings. Consult Architectural and Structural

drawings for space conditions and additional fixtures. Develop and submit coordination

drawings as outlined in Division 22 sections.

C. The work under this Section shall include all incidentals, labor, material, equipment, appliances,

services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, consumable items, fees, licenses, and

administrative tasks required to complete and make operable the plumbing work as intended.

D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment as necessary to provide a complete

installation including coordination, system check out and start up on each item and system.

E. This Contractor shall inform himself from the general construction specifications and plans, of

the exact dimension of finished work and of the height of finished ceilings in all rooms where

equipment or pipes are to be placed and arrange his work in accordance with the schedule of

interior finishes, as indicated on the architectural drawings.

F. Manufacturer's qualifications: firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of fixtures,

appliances, pipes and pipe fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in

satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

G. Material qualifications: shall conform to all local, state, and national/federal codes and

regulations which may apply and nothing in these specifications shall be interpreted as an

infringement of such codes or regulations.

H. Welding: qualify welding procedures, welders, and operators in accordance with ASME B31.1,

or ASME B31.9, as applicable. Certify welding of piping work using Standard Procedure

Specifications by, and welders tested under supervision of, National Certified Pipe Welding

Bureau (NCPWB).

I. Brazing: certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work.




220500 - 2

1.2 LEAD-FREE STATEMENT

A. Several plumbing fixtures described in this section fall under jurisdiction of the Federal

Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act (42 USC 300G) which mandates that effective

January 4, 2014 the wetted surfaces of any valve, fitting or fixture that comes in contact with

potable water must have a weighted-average lead content of no more than 0.25 percent. The

contractor shall be responsible for providing products that are Lead-Free products and meet the

requirements of Safe Drinking Water Act Section 1417 (e) (Section 9 of NSF/ANSI Standard

61) and authorities having jurisdiction.




1.4 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Transition fittings.

3. Dielectric fittings.

4. Mechanical sleeve seals.

5. Sleeves.

6. Escutcheons.

7. Grout.

8. Plumbing demolition.



11. Concrete bases.


1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated

spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied


C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient


D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.




220500 - 3

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions



F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:











C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and

connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If

minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with

requirements.

1.7 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the specifications and drawings to provide for finished work, tested and

ready for operation.

B. Items and services not shown on drawings, but mentioned in specifications, or vice versa, or

items and services necessary to render the work complete and ready for operation, even if not

specified, shall be provided without additional cost.

C. Where conflicts occur between drawings and specifications, or within either document, the

Contractor shall ask for and obtain a written clarification from the Architect prior to submitting






220500 - 4

1.8 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this Division shall include all labor, material, equipment plant, services and

administrative tasks required to complete and make operable the plumbing work shown on the

Drawings, required for proper operation and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the

following:

1. Preparation and submission of shop drawings, diagrams and illustrations.

2. Procuring all necessary permits and approvals, and paying all required fees and charges

in connection with the work of this Division.

3. Protection, testing, cleaning, adjustment and guarantee of the work of this Division to

safely, properly and continuously operate.

4. As-built drawings, operating and maintenance instructions and manuals.

5. Identification labels, tags, charts and diagrams.

6. Maintain existing services to plumbing, etc. (temporary services during construction).

7. Excavation and backfill.

8. Coordination.

9. Project record documents.

10. Operation and Maintenance Data.

11. Cutting and patching.

12. Cooperation with and full participation in the commissioning process.

1.9 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Finish patching of all construction cut under this Division.

B. Waterproofing of roof penetrations for the work of this Division.

C. Concrete and masonry work except as specified.

D. Painting, except as noted.

1.10 GENERAL CONFORMANCE

A. Obtain all general conformances in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Submit to the Architect for review a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work.



C. Where any specific materials, process or method of construction, or manufactured article is





D. Equipment of one type, shall be products of one manufacturer.




220500 - 5

1.11 PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES

A. Prior to proceeding with any installation, prepare and submit to the proper authorities, for their

review, all required working drawings. Provide all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay

all local, state and federal taxes, fees and other costs in connection with the work.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for performing all controlled inspections required by

applicable Administrative building Code.

1.12 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work required.

Do not scale the Drawings. Consult the architectural drawings and details, and the drawings of

other trades, for exact location of equipment.

B. Drawings shall be used in layout of work. Check reference drawings to verify spaces in which

the work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where

headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, Architect shall be notified before proceeding

with installation.

C. If directed by the Architect, make minor modifications in the layout as needed to prevent

conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.

D. The drawings are schematic and diagrammatic.

1. Symbols and diagrams are used to indicate the various items of work and the complete

systems, but not necessarily have dimensional significance, neither do they necessarily

delineate all related and subsidiary parts and equipment.

2. The work shall be installed complete and ready for operation in conformity with the

intent expressed on the drawings and in the specifications.

3. Coordinate the work with the requirements of the architectural and structural drawings

for dimensions, locations and clearances.

4. Locations of items exposed to view shall be taken from the architectural drawings or

located as directed.

1.13 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product or a catalog

number is specified, and terms "or equal" or "or approved equal" are used, the substituted item

must conform in all essential respects to the specified item including operating efficiency, noise

generated, and method of operation. Consideration will not be given claims that the substituted

item meets performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in

schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

B. When such approved deviation requires a different quantity and or arrangement of equipment

from that specified or indicated on the drawings, provide required equipment, wiring, piping,

connections, valves, and structural supports, and any other additional equipment required by the

deviation, at no additional cost to the Owner.




220500 - 6

C. When an item of equipment is proposed, other than that detailed or specified on the drawings,

which requires any additional equipment or redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations,

piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing or architectural design,

such costs shall be incurred by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

D. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting

electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at no cost to

the Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply

with requirements.

1.14 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS CRITERIA

A. The criteria of design and performance to produce the required operation is based on equipment

shown or scheduled.

1. The equipment must conform to the structural design provisions for loads applied to the

structure, to the dimensions established by drawings for mechanical spaces and other

clearances, and for inlet and outlet locations and proper relationship to associated

equipment, piping and ducts.

B. The descriptions cover basic equipment and operation but not all the details of design and

construction.

1. The use of singular in descriptions does not limit the quantities of items to be furnished to

provide the operation specified. Furnish all equipment required to produce specified

performance under installed conditions.

2. Factory wiring, interconnections, piping and connections shall conform to these

specifications for the field work.

3. Provide all trim, enclosures and accessories required to make a complete installation.

1.15 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedure: Prepare and make the submissions listed below and in Division 1.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under

this Division.

C. Manufacturer's Drawings.


and finishes.

D. Installation Drawings.

1. Coordinated scale drawings of equipment including interconnecting piping and

equipment.







220500 - 7

E. Wiring and Control Diagrams.



installed.

F. Provide composite shop drawings showing work of all related construction, when required to


G. Provide drawings showing dimensions and locations of concrete work required.

H. Samples.


I. Reports:



3. Field pipe testing reports and certificates of approval.



6. Performance report on balancing of systems.



J. If submissions of catalog cuts of standard manufactured items show different types, options,

finishes, performance requirements, or variations, those features proposed shall be clearly

identified.




and erection dimensions, kinds and quality of materials and their finishes, and















standard shop practices or reasons, such variations shall be clearly identified on the

drawings in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper








220500 - 8









K. Shop Drawing Schedule


proposed shop drawing submissions.

2. The schedule shall include the following information.






time.





submittals.

L. Submittals will be reviewed for conformance with the contract drawings and specifications. The


taken:

1. Reviewed:






compliance.
















220500 - 9

4. Rejected



without delay.

M. A submittal review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and









1.16 COORDINATION


construction, to allow for plumbing installations.


concrete and structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that

are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08

Section "Access Doors and Frames."

1.17 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Closely schedule the work so that work will be installed at the proper time without delaying the

completion of the entire project.

B. Where the work will be installed in close proximity to the work of other trades, or where there

is evidence that the work will interfere with the work of other trades, arrange space conditions

to make a satisfactory adjustment. If work is installed before coordinating with other trades,

make necessary changes to the work to correct the condition without additional cost to the

owner.

C. Prepare complete set of drawings showing all necessary slab openings and structural supports

that require structural framing. Drawings shall clearly indicate sizes and location relative to

established column lines. Drawings shall be completed in sufficient time to allow for structural

steel fabrication so as not to delay project schedule.

D. Shop drawing submissions shall demonstrate a knowledge of the work of other trades, and shall

show the locations of the work of other trades which affects the work of this contract.




220500 - 10


A. Develop and submit coordination drawings as outlined.

B. Sheet metal, plumbing and fire protection shop drawings that have been coordinated with

architectural and structural drawings shall be submitted to engineer for review. Drawings must

be returned from engineer either "reviewed" or "furnish as corrected" prior to being used as

basis for coordination drawings.

C. After sheet metal and piping drawings have been revised per engineers’ comments, reproducible


work:

1. Mechanical sheet metal


3. Electrical work


5. Sprinkler piping

D. After all trades have included their work on the coordination drawing and noted conflicts, all




E. The architect and engineer are not part of the coordination drawing process. The engineer will

provide assistance for noted conflicts only. Coordination drawings are not to be considered

piping or duct shop drawings. The contractor is required to submit individual piping and

ductwork shop drawings for review by the engineer. Piping and ductwork shop drawings shall

follow the design intent of the contract documents.

F. Submit final signed coordination drawing to engineer for review. Engineer will review

coordination drawings for general arrangement and for noted conflicts only. Specific

installation requirements will be reviewed only in individual trade shop drawings.

G. Any work fabricated or installed prior to sign off by all trades which is deemed to be in conflict

with coordination drawings shall be removed and re-installed in conformance with coordination

drawings.

H. Each contractor (mentioned above) is responsible for the coordination of his sub-contractors.

I. The overall coordination of the coordination process is the responsibility of the contractor. The

engineer is not responsible for the coordination process. The engineer will respond to questions

that arise from the coordination process. Drawings submitted will be reviewed for clearly

identified conflicts only. Solutions to conflicts will not bear additional cost.

J. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD or Revit version as

required by the Owner) version or AutoCAD Version 2010 if not specified. Number of copies

of each as requested by the Owner.

K. Electronic drawing files shall be generated by the Contractor. If requested, electronic files of the

mechanical floor plans, sections and elevations only will be made available. Electronic files will




220500 - 11

be released only upon receipt of the signed Agreement for Transfer of Electronic File Data,

Agreement for Transfer of Building Information Model and all fees indicated therein.

1.19 AS-BUILT/RECORD DRAWINGS







drawings.



C. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD and Revit version as


of each as requested by the Owner. PDF’s inserted into an AutoCad file are not acceptable.




and work installed.


numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located

(i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location



building lines.





instructions.


contract.

1.20 GUARANTEES AND SERVICES

A. All workmanship, installation materials and equipment shall be maintained and serviced for the

guarantee period at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Leave entire system installed under this Contract in perfect working order, and, without

additional charge, replace any work or material which develops defects within the guarantee

period, including all other work damaged as a result of such defects.




220500 - 12

C. Manufacturers' Warranties

1. The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment which he has furnished is free from

defects in material and workmanship. Obligations under this warranty shall be as

follows:

a. The equipment manufacturer or supplier shall provide and pay for all labor, parts,

accessories, materials, freight and other services to repair or replace any equipment

or part thereof which, in the course of installation, start-up and testing is found to

be defective.

b. For a period of eighteen months from the date of acceptance by the Owner, the

manufacturer shall replace any defective equipment or part thereof; freight costs

for return of defective parts, labor for parts replacement, and replacement of lost

refrigerant, are the responsibility of the installing contractor.

c. The manufacturer shall provide an additional warranty on all equipment as

indicated in their respective specification section.

d. Performance - where equipment is specified by size, guarantee that it will have the

capacity specified in the system in which it is installed.

2. The final acceptance of the equipment will be made after the manufacturer has adjusted

his equipment, balanced the various systems, demonstrated that it fulfills the

requirements of the drawings and specifications, and has furnished all the required

certificates of inspection and acceptance.

1.21 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall provide routine and preventive maintenance during the warranty period.

B. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a comprehensive plan covering items to be

maintained and service to be performed. Plan shall include checklist for use by maintenance

personnel.

C. Owner's representative(s) shall accompany contractors' maintenance personnel, and receive

instructions on proper maintenance of equipment.

D. Maintenance performed shall include a complete check out of each piece of equipment at least

twice during warranty period. The first shall occur approximately half way through the

warranty period (change of season) and the second at the conclusion of the warranty period and

prior to commencement of the owner's maintenance. Each system and/or piece of equipment

shall be inspected, operated through its complete range of operation, and adjusted as required.

This inspection shall be the same as performed at the initial start-up of the item or system. In

addition, there shall be monthly maintenance inspections of each piece of equipment.

E. During the monthly inspections, equipment shall be checked for items such as dirty filters, belt

wear, lubrication, unusual sounds or unusual operating conditions. Monthly inspections shall

also include recording of system operating temperatures and pressures.

F. Contractor shall include all labor and material to perform the maintenance, including

replaceable items such as filters and belts.

G. Maintenance on the following items shall be included:

1. Pumps




220500 - 13

2. Water Heaters

3. Thermostatic Mixing valves

4. Backflow preventers

5. Trap Primers

6. Heat Exchangers (converters)

7. Heat Tracing

8. Valves

9. Grease Interceptors

10. Electronic Flush Valves

11. Electronic Faucets


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and

moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.23 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Excavation under the lump sum bid shall mean and intend the removal of all materials of every

nature and description which are encountered in obtaining the lines and grades indicated or

required for the work and which, in the opinion of the Commissioner, can be loosened and

removed by hand, by means of hand tools or by means of power shovels. The Contractor shall

assume that all excavations to the lines and grades required can be executed by the

aforementioned means.

B. Protection - Provide all necessary and required sheet piling, bracing and shoring to maintain the

work safe to life, limb and property and all decking, guard rails and planking for the safety of

pedestrians and vehicular traffic and all other precautionary measures as directed.

C. Trimming - The bottom of all excavations shall be trimmed to the lines and grades required for

the work.

D. Surface and Subsurface Water - Provide and operate necessary equipment for pumping surface

and subsurface water to keep excavations and foundations for the work under this contract dry

at all times. The water shall be disposed of into sewers or other carry-off agencies in a manner

approved by the Commissioner.

E. Surface and Subsurface Utilities

1. Active Services - When encountered in the work and where indicated on the drawings, all

existing active sewer, gas, water, electric and other utility services and structures shall be

protected at all times and where required for the proper execution of the work shall be

relocated as directed by the Architect. If existing active services are not indicated but are

encountered and require protection or relocation the Contractor shall request the

Architect in writing for determination and decision in the matter and the work shall not

proceed until written directions as to procedure are obtained.




220500 - 14

2. Inactive Services - When encountered in the work, whether or not indicated on the

drawings, all existing inactive sewer, water, gas, electric and other utility services and

structures which interfere with the execution of the work shall be removed, capped,

plugged or otherwise discontinued.

3. The cost of all work connected with protecting and maintaining all utilities shall be borne

by the Contractor. The cost of relocating all utilities not indicated to be relocated, but

required to be so that new utilities can be installed, shall be borne by the Owner.

F. Blasting - Where blasting is required it shall be done by persons skilled in such work. All blasts

shall be properly covered and every precaution shall be taken to ensure the safety of person and

property. Blasting powder, caps and other explosives shall be stored in accordance with

regulations of agencies or bureaus having jurisdiction thereof.

G. Restoration

1. Backfilling - After inspection and review of the work, all sheeting and shoring shall be

removed and the excavations shall be refilled with clean earth, thoroughly tamped.

Excess material shall be removed as directed. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal

layers not exceeding 12" in depth.

2. Surface Restoration - Surface of sidewalks, pavements, sodding, shrubs, etc., shall be

restored to their original condition except as otherwise specified.

3. Removal of Temporary Work - Temporary decking, guard rails, planking and other

protective work shall be removed when, in the opinion of the Commissioner, the need for

same ceases to exist.

4. Repairs - All work removed or damaged through the installation or removal of the

temporary protective work or through improper protection shall be replaced at no

additional expense to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In PART 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply for product selection:


manufacturers specified.












220500 - 15





C. Master Operating Manual (submit in quadruplicate)





controllers.




summer operation, winter operation, shutdown and draining.




schedules, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers and a copy of the air

balance report.

7. As-installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer.

8. Description of sequence operation by the control manufacturer.


system failure.



a. Water Balance.

b. System Performance.

c. Required Pressure Tests.

d. Water Flow Tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying

piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. All underground piping shall be laid on a 6” sand bed and backfilled with clean fine earth

compacted to 12” above pipe. Complete backfill with available earth free of large boulders and

sharp rocks. Tamp backfill in 6” elevations and overfill to allow for settlement.




220500 - 16

D. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install piping at indicated slopes.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

M. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07

Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in

requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION





assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.




220500 - 17

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service


3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping

materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections

"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."






220500 - 18

C. Thoroughly clean all surfaces, requiring prime painting, of rust, loose scale, oil and grease.

1. Dry surfaces before painting.

2. Do not paint controls, nameplates, or labels.

D. Paint all equipment not painted at the factory with one prime coat.

E. Provide field painting as follows:

1. All exposed iron work, including uninsulated ferrous piping and conduit system

components, hangers, supports, equipment bases, and apparatus; prime coat, red oxide

primer.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES











embedded.








to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.


3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and equipment base

plates, and anchors.






220500 - 19






3.9 COORDINATION AND LAYOUT

A. Study Drawings and Specifications to ensure completeness of work required.

1. Include supplementary items normal to manufacturers' requirements or standard accepted

trade practices as necessary to complete work, though not specifically indicated or

specified.

B. Verify measurements and conditions in field before starting work.

C. Examine materials to which work is to be applied and notify the Architect, in writing, of any

conditions existing, which are detrimental to proper and expeditious installation of work.

1. Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of conditions.

D. Confer with other trades, install work to avoid interference with other trades, and possible

necessary adjustments to conform to structural conditions and work of other trades.

E. Coordinate and set inserts and locate openings in floors and walls in new construction.

1. Locate pipes to avoid interference with other work shown on the drawings and as directed

by the Architect.

2. Keep all concealed pipes within the enclosing construction provided.

3. Arrange exposed work neatly in parallel runs and parallel with walls or structure, with

uniformly spaced hangers and supports, and within the spaces assigned for each kind of

work.

F. Make coordinated layouts showing concrete work required for housekeeping pads, equipment

bases and inertia masses, which are cast in place, including the location of anchors and dowels.

1. Coordinate the scheduling and placing of the concrete to suit the mechanical work

schedules.

2. Concrete housekeeping pads are to cover the full area of each piece of equipment.

3. Concrete bases are to be of dimension and heights to suit the equipment.

4. The forming and placing of concrete will be provided under this specification section.




220500 - 20

3.10 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Maintain all equipment and systems installed until final acceptance by the Architect and the

Owner, and take such measures as necessary to ensure adequate protection of all equipment and

materials during delivery, storage, installation and shut-down conditions.

1. This responsibility shall include all provisions required to meet the conditions incidental

to the delays pending final test of systems and equipment.

B. After installation of systems has been completed, operate the system to determine the capability

of the equipment and controls to conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications

prior to performance testing.


A. Locate and set equipment anchor bolts, dowels and aligning devices for all equipment requiring

them. Refer to concrete work coordination.

1. Level the equipment and grout solid between the equipment and the surface below. Grout

to be premixed Embeco or Five Star Grout mixed in accordance with manufacturer's

specifications.

B. The field assembly, installation and alignment of equipment is to be done under field

supervision provided by the manufacturer or with inspections, adjustments and reviewed by the

manufacturer.

C. Equipment startup.

1. Each manufacturer of equipment shall provide qualified personnel to inspect, review and

to supervise the operating tests of the equipment.

D. Equipment and system test operation.

1. Notify the Architect in advance of beginning the equipment and system test operation.

2. Each piece of equipment shall be operated in its system as long as required to provide

proper functioning.

3. Perform an operating test of each complete system for twenty-four hours continuous

operation as a minimum, or as long as required to provide coordination and proper

functioning of all related systems and controls.

4. The operating criteria for each test shall be determined in advance with the Architect's

acceptance whenever seasonal conditions will not produce a full design load on any

equipment or system.

5. Certify to the Owner that all equipment is functioning properly.

6. Should the apparatus fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace all

defective or inoperative parts and again conduct the complete performance tests.

3.12 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Blow out, clean and flush each system of piping, and equipment as required to thoroughly clean

the systems.

1. Clean all materials and equipment and leave in condition ready to operate and receive

succeeding finishes where required.




220500 - 21

2. Adjust and align all equipment interconnected with couplings or belts.

3. Adjust valves of all types and operating equipment of all types to provide proper

operation.

4. Clean all strainers.

B. Lubricate equipment as recommended by the manufacturer, during temporary construction use,

and provide complete lubrication just prior to acceptance.

C. Permanent equipment operated during construction shall not be abused or be used in service

different from its design application.

D. Equipment furnished with factory finishes shall be retouched and repainted as required to

present a new appearance.

E. Provide and maintain protection for all of the work whether completed or in progress.

1. Provide coverings and enclosures as required.

F. New and existing operating equipment and systems shall be clean and dust free inside and out.

1. Concealed and unoccupied areas such as plenums, pipe and duct spaces and Equipment

Rooms shall be free of rubbish and swept clean at time of acceptance.

3.13 TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Tests shall be performed in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, and the

following.

B. Provide the services of an independent water balancing and testing firm which specializes in

balancing and testing of plumbing systems, and which is acceptable to the Owner.

1. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working

order. If requested, the balancing shall be conducted in the presence of the

Architect/Owner.

C. Balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order.

1. After completion of the balancing and testing submit copies of the results to the

Architect.

D. Perform tests and make necessary adjustments to obtain the flow and distribution of water

required to produce the operating criteria called for by the contract documents, in accordance

with the latest standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau and the Associated

Air Balance Council.

1. Mark final position of balancing valves.

E. Upon completion of the installation, test and balance all equipment and systems under field

operating conditions to demonstrate its compliance with specification requirements.

1. Submit three copies of the test report to the Architect. Refer to specification sections for

details of report requirements.

F. Should any part of the system fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace all

defective or inoperative parts again conduct the complete performance tests.




220500 - 22

G. The Architect and Owner shall be notified, in writing, at least 48 hours prior to scheduled test

dates.

3.14 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Provide mechanical connections to equipment and fixtures requiring such connections which

are supplied by Owner or under other divisions.

B. Provide unions, nipples, adapters, valves, flexible connections, and other trim required for final

connections for each such fixture or item of equipment, as required for complete and perfect

operation.

3.15 WORKMANSHIP







3.16 LUBRICATION

A. All equipment furnished, installed or connected under this division, shall be inspected for

proper lubrication when connected and before operation of the equipment is begun.

B. The Contractor for the work of this division will be held responsible for any damage to

equipment that is operated without having been properly lubricated.

3.17 USE OF PREMISES AND CLEANING

A. Remove and dispose of all waste materials and rubbish due to all construction operations under

the contract, except as otherwise noted, and keep the building free from rubbish and dirt caused

by his and/or his subcontractors' employees.

1. During the entire progress of the work, rubbish removal shall be made frequently so as to

prevent any potential safety or health hazard.

B. Upon completion of the work, remove all protection, paint, putty, and other stains from all

fixtures and glass and leave the premises thoroughly broom cleaned.




220500 - 23

3.18 CUTTING, ALTERING AND PATCHING

A. Provide all cutting, chasing, drilling, altering and rough patching required for the work of this

division.

1. Including the restoring of existing work cut for or damaged by installation of new work,

and where present work is removed.

2. All materials and workmanship required in connection with cutting, altering and rough

patching shall match the existing work in every respect.

B. Do all shoring, bracing, cutting, patching, piecing out, filling in, repairing and refinishing of all

present work as made necessary by the alteration and the installation of new work.

C. All holes and openings occurring in the existing floors after equipment, partitions, floors, steel

work, conduits and pipes are removed or installed shall be closed up with materials similar to

the adjacent work.

D. The size and location of items requiring an opening, chase or other provisions to receive it shall

be given by the trade requiring same in ample time to avoid undue cutting of any new work to

be installed. These provisions shall not relieve the Contractor from keeping informed as to the

required opening, chases, etc., nor from responsibility for the correctness thereof, nor for cutting

and repairing after the new work is in place.

E. Include all cutting, repairing and patching in connection with the work that may be required to

make the several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by the work of

other trades, as shown on the drawings and/or specified, or reasonably implied by the drawings

and specifications.

F. All repairing, patching, piecing-out, filling-in, restoring and refinishing shall be neatly done by

mechanics skilled in their trade to leave same in condition satisfactory to the Owner.

G. Materials and their methods of application for patching shall comply with applicable

requirements of the specifications.

1. Materials and workmanship not covered by the specifications and items of work exposed

to view adjoining existing work to remain shall conform to similar materials and

workmanship existing in or adjacent to the spaces to be altered.

H. Cutting, repairing and patching shall include all items shown on the drawings, specified in the

specifications or required by the installation of new work or the removal of existing work.

I. All holes in masonry floors and walls are to be core drilled.

J. Disturbed concrete and /or cement floor areas shall be patched with approved type latex mortar.

1. When cement mortar is used for patching, the surfaces shall be depressed a minimum

depth of 1".

K. Reinstall all weather protection work in waterproof manner.




220500 - 24

L. Openings in roofs.

1. Openings in roofs shall be kept properly plugged and caulked at all times, except when

being worked on, to preclude the possibility of flooding due to storms or other causes.

After completion of work, openings shall be permanently sealed.

M. Temporary openings.

1. All temporary openings cut in walls, floors or ceilings for pipe or ductwork shall be

closed off with transite or an equally non-combustible material except when mechanics

are actually working at the particular opening.

3.19 SPECIAL WORKSMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS FOR ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED

SYSTEMS

A. General: In addition to basic project workmanship requirements specified above, a higher

degree of care in systems layout and routing shall be exerted in selected areas, as follows:

1. Architectural Exposures: Note that this project includes locations where systems will be

partially or fully exposed to view in finished architectural spaces due either to the

intentional omission of ceilings, and/or to the intentional holding back of ceiling edges

from walls, for architectural effects. These areas shall receive extra effort and care above

and beyond basic project workmanship principles.

B. Special Workmanship Requirements: In these special areas, comply with the following

requirements:

1. Run systems tight to overhead structure whenever possible.

2. In spaces with gaps between ceiling edges and walls, do not run systems down near

ceilings. Locate them as high above as feasible.

3. Do not cross under framing members within view of such gaps. Seek alternative routes

around or through obstacles.

4. Fasten systems sufficiently often to prevent their visually sagging or drooping between

support points.

5. Route systems parallel to walls, framing members, and other elements defining spatial

geometries.

6. Change directions orthogonally.

7. Do not run diagonally when traversing horizontal or vertical surfaces.

C. Rejection of Work: Workmanship and/or materials not complying with the above additional

requirements in these special areas to the satisfaction of the Architect shall be rejected and shall

be immediately replaced in an acceptable manner without additional cost.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT


220513 - 1

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY





1.3 COORDINATION


following:

1. Motor controllers.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.



A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea

level.







220513 - 2


A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.



E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:



K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame

sizes smaller than 324T.










2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.


motors.





220513 - 3


A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements

of specific motor application:


2. Split phase.



B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when

winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.

Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal

range.




EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220516 - 1

SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Several plumbing fixtures described in this section fall under jurisdiction of the Federal Reduction

of Lead in Drinking Water Act (42 USC 300G) which mandates that effective January 4, 2014

the wetted surfaces of any valve, fitting or fixture that comes in contact with potable water must

have a weighted-average lead content of no more than 0.25 percent. The contractor shall be

responsible for providing products that are Lead-Free products and meet the requirements of Safe

Drinking Water Act Section 1417 (e) (Section 9 of NSF/ANSI Standard 61) and authorities having

jurisdiction.




1.3 SUMMARY


1. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints.

2. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.

3. Rubber packless expansion joints.

4. Grooved-joint expansion joints.

5. Pipe loops and swing connections.

6. Alignment guides and anchors.


A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,

and temperatures.

B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.






220516 - 2

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with



1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and

for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and

methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Flex Pression Ltd.

b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

c. Flexicraft Industries.


e. Metraflex Company (The).

f. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexible-

metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible

hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456890295&mf=&src=wd









220516 - 3

4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solder-

joint end connections.

a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig

at 450 deg F ratings.

5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with

threaded end connections.

a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70

deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

B. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.

b. American BOA, Inc.

c. Badger Industries, Inc.

d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.

e. Flex Pression Ltd.

f. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

g. Flex-Weld, Inc.

h. Flexicraft Industries.

i. Flo Fab inc.

j. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

k. Mason Industries, Inc.

l. Metraflex Company (The).

m. Proco Products, Inc.

n. Senior Flexonics Pathway.

o. Tozen Corporation.

p. U.S. Bellows, Inc.

q. Unaflex.

r. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

s. Universal Metal Hose.

t. WahlcoMetroflex.

2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers

Association, Inc."

3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.

4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated.

5. Configuration: Single joint with base and double joint with base class(es) unless otherwise

indicated.

6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single- or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows,

copper pipe ends, and brass shrouds.

a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint.

b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: threaded.

c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.

C. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.


c. Flex-Weld, Inc.



























220516 - 4

d. Flexicraft Industries.

e. Garlock Sealing Technologies.

f. General Rubber Corporation.

g. Mason Industries, Inc.

h. Metraflex Company (The).

i. Proco Products, Inc.

j. Red Valve Company, Inc.

k. Tozen Corporation.

l. Unaflex.

m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion

Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703.

4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods.

5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods.

6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.

7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F.

8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F.

9. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalies, or Chemicals: CSM.

10. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: Buna-N.

11. Material for Water: EPDM.

12. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

2.2 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS


following:

1. Anvil International, Inc.

2. Shurjoint Piping Products.


B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples,

couplings, and grooved joints.

C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.

D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved

ends.

E. Couplings: flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM

gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:


following:



















220516 - 5

b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

d. Flex-Weld, Inc.

e. Flexicraft Industries.

f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

g. Mason Industries, Inc.

h. Metraflex Company (The).

i. Senior Flexonics Pathway.

j. U.S. Bellows, Inc.

k. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer

cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to

pipe.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: Hot Dipped Galvanized.

2. Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel hex head.

3. Washers: stainless steel, plain, flat washers.

4. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials where used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.

B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint

Manufacturers Association, Inc."

C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.

D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or

compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in

main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including

tee in riser.














220516 - 6

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including

tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to

expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9

and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9

and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,

Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.

3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,

Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener

manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220517 - 1

SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.




5. Grout.

6. Silicone sealants.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES


following:


2. CALPICO, Inc.

3. GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop collar.

C. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, with plain

ends and integral welded waterstop collar.








220517 - 2

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with


E. PVC Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

G. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.



products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

2. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Description: Manufactured, galvanized cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange for use in

waterproof floors and roofs. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.




following:


2. CALPICO, Inc.




B. Description:

1. Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space

between piping and sleeve.

2. Designed to form a hydrostatic seal of 20 psig minimum.



4. Pressure Plates: Composite plastic.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel, Type 316 of length required to secure

pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.4 FIRESTOP PENETRATORS

A. Use Proset “Firestop Penetrators”, U.L. or Warnock Hersey classified and listed in the building

materials directory. Tested in accordance with the ASTM E-814, U.L. 1479 and CSA/ULC

CAN S-115 Test standard. Use for all applicable pipe penetrations and plumbing fixture floor













220517 - 3

openings through fire rated floors, walls, walls or floor/ceiling assemblies in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Use system “A” penetrators for water lines, heating and cooling lines, fire standpipe and

sprinkler lines. Temperature control, acid waste glass or durion pipe and electric and

communication conduit penetrating floors or walls.

2. Use system “B” penetrators for cast iron or copper DWV pipes for stacks and drains

penetrating floors or walls.

3. Use system “C” penetrators for plastic DWV pipes for stacks and drains penetrating

floors or walls.

4. Use system “CA” penetrators for polypropylene acid waste pipe penetrating floors or

walls

5. Use cast-in-coupling penetrators for poured in place concrete on steel or wood forms in

floors or walls.

6. Use C.H. PVC or metal coupling penetrators for cored holes through precast or existing

concrete in floors or walls.

7. Use P-90 wall sleeve penetrators for pipes passing through gypsum walls or floor/ceiling

assemblies.

8. Use CM metal or PVC slip flange CM couplings for poured in place concrete on

corrugated metal deck.



following:


2. CALPICO, Inc.





concrete slab or wall.

C. Plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink, for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or

floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,













220517 - 4

2.7 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation.

b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.

c. Polymeric Systems, Inc.

d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company.

e. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.



the following:

a. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.



the following:

a. Smooth-On.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP

sleeves.




3. Using grout or silicone sealant, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls

without sleeve-seal system.














220517 - 5






appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

E. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at

pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with

requirements for firestopping and fill materials specified in Section 078413 "Penetration

Firestopping."



1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between






level.


ring is specified.

5. Use silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Penetrations, Horizontal Assembly Penetrations, and Smoke Barrier

Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire or smoke rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe

penetrations with fire- and smoke-stop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping

specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."








watertight seal.






220517 - 6




D. Use grout or silicone sealant to seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.



1. Leak Test: After allowing for a full cure, test sleeves and sleeve seals for leaks. Repair

leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

B. Sleeves and sleeve seals will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.





a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves.


a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.




a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Steel pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Steel pipe sleeves.


a. Piping Smaller Than: Steel pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS




C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and

setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed hinge, and spring-clip

fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220518 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping

and with OD that completely covers opening.



b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-




f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with


g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,


h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.




1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.





METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Filled-system thermometers.

3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

4. Thermowells.

5. Dial-type pressure gages.

6. Gage attachments.

7. Test plugs.

8. Test-plug kits.




A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.




220519 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS


following:

1. Ashcroft Inc.

2. Marsh Bellofram.

3. Miljoco Corporation.

4. Noshok.

5. Trerice, H. O. Co.

6. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

7. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle and rigid, bottom, with unified-inch screw

threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:


following:

a. Ashcroft Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Trerice, H. O. Co.

d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.















220519 - 3

4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F.

7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

8. Window: Glass.

9. Ring: Stainless steel.

10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in

horizontal plane, with locking device and rigid, bottom; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and

of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:



the following:

a. Trerice, H. O. Co.


3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size.

4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass or plastic.

8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.





220519 - 4

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


following:

a. Ashcroft Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Noshok.

d. Trerice, H. O. Co.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.


3. Case: Liquid-filled Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Glass.

10. Ring: Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.7 TEST PLUGS


following:

1. Flow Design, Inc.


3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.



















220519 - 5


B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include

extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS


following:





5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.




B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and

carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and

tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial and

tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F.

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and probe.

Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping

tees.













220519 - 6

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.

3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.

2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be one of the

following:



C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be one of the

following:





220519 - 7


D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller shall be one of the

following:



E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 150 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 200 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 200 psi.



PROTECTIVE COVER SYSTEM FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220520 - 1

SECTION 220520 - PROTECTIVE COVER SYSTEM FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Soffit/pipe enclosures.


A. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and product data.

1.4 DESCRIPTION

A. The soffit/cover system shall incorporate a concealed snap-lock connection, which, once

assembled, renders the cover essentially irremovable with the use of ordinary tools.

B. Coordinate installation soffit/cover system with all other trades.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. 10-Year Limited Warranty

1. Products shall be free of material and workmanship defects for a period of ten (10) years

from the delivery date of the products and that any defective products will be replaced

without charge provided the manufacturer and/or their authorized agent is given the prior

opportunity to inspect any alleged defect and to examine the installation and use thereof.

The warranty set forth does not apply to and under no circumstances will the manufacturer

be liable for any incidental, indirect, special or consequential damage, loss, penalty or

expense of any kind, including, but not limited to, any expense incurred for product

removal or re-installation. The manufacturer will not be liable for any damage to or defect

in any of the manufacturer’s product which has been subject to misuse, neglect or accident

or which has been stored, used or installed in violation of recommended installation or

maintenance procedures.




220520 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 A factory-fabricated steel cover support system with concealed surface-mounted attachment

clamps, in dimensions as shown on the drawings for concealment of piping, conduit, wiring, cable

or fire sprinkler piping.


following:

1. Grice Engineering, Inc.

2. In-Ex Systems, Inc.

B. Support/Attachment Devices

1. Spring steel shield clips of the size recommended by manufacturer, for securement of the

cover. Clips shall be produced from 21 gauge minimum zinc-plated spring steel and shall

have a reverse curvature design such that the clips soundly secure the soffit from easy

removal. Each clip must be demonstrated as being able to resist a force of 100 lbs. uplift at

the free end. Test results shall be available upon request.

C. Soffit/Cover

1. The soffit/cover shall be smooth in appearance and shall be made of 20 Gauge G90

galvanized steel, with a paintgrip finish, or in accordance with the material specifications

as shown below. The cover shall have a snap-lock interfacing with the clips such that once

assembled, it is rendered virtually irremovable with the use of ordinary tools.

2. The soffit and related fittings shall be factory painted with Sherwin Williams epoxy

polyester hybrid powder coating of a color to be specified by the owner’s representative.

Matching touch-up paint shall be supplied to the owner by the manufacturer.

3. Cover manufacturer shall be staffed with a licensed engineer having a minimum of five

years experience with such systems.

4. The cover shall be sized in accordance with requirements to accommodate the specific

application size as specified by the project documents, specifications and blue prints,

provided to the cover manufacturer prior to bid date.

5. L-Design shield cover for sidewall installations and U-Design shield cover for side-wall

and pendant installations respectively.

6. Cover joints shall be butt-joined with interlocking internal splice couplings and/or with

male/female interlocking joints. External couplings will not be allowed.

D. Cover design shall include a rollformed “groove” at the interfacing of the cover and the adjacent

construction surface to facilitate the application of sealant/adhesive compounds and enhance the

security of such compounds from dislodging.

E. Accessories

1. The system shall include tamper-resistant end caps, prefabricated corners, wall flanges,

couplings, and other items which may be necessary to complete the system, and shall be

installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Spare parts - The installing contractor shall supply the owner with quantities of spare parts

equal to a minimum of five percent (5%) of the total quantities of each soffit part utilized

in this installation.




220520 - 3

2.2 FINISH OPTIONS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel: 18 Gauge.

1. Finishes available with cold-rolled steel:

a. Zinc-galvanized Paint grip (treated to accept painting but not painted) of ASTM-

A527. Coating Class G90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of system shall be in strict accordance with approved shop drawings and

manufacturer’s printed instructions.

B. If used to conceal fire sprinkler systems, the sprinkler contractor/engineer must determine the

piping and sprinkler layout, including sprinkler head locations and pipe support locations (based

on pipe manufacturer’s specifications). Indicate areas on drawings where cover system is to be

used.

C. Select appropriate fasteners for the substrate encountered to adequately secure the pipe and cover

system.

D. To ensure that the cover is linear and snug-fitting when installed, it is imperative that its support

devices are anchored squarely and firmly against the structural surface in a straight line.

E. All penetrations to the soffit/cover must be field cut to prevent misalignment with intended

protrusion. The exceptions to this are that access doors will be factory furnished and installed and

perforations, if required, for ventilation purposes will be factory perforated.

F. Guidelines for installation of modular soffit/cover system shall be supplied by the manufacturer

of said system and the installing contractor shall adhere to the manufacturer’s guidelines.

G. All field cut ends and scratches shall be “touched up” (spray or brush) with a matching paint.

H. Manufacturer shall supply on-site installation instruction, upon installer’s request, by a qualified

installation instructor for a minimum of one day for the project start-up (1,500 lineal feet

minimum.)

I. The completed installation shall be visibly searched for voids between the interfacing of the cover

and construction surface. Voids shall be sealed with a color matching urethane caulk.

3.2 PIPE ENCLOSURE SCHEDULE

A. Trap Primer piping.

1. Pipe enclosure shall extend from bottom of trap primer panel to top of finish floor. Pipe

enclosure shall be same width as installed trap primer panel. Contractor shall be

responsible for coordination of pipe enclosure size.




220520 - 4

B. Piping exposed in Janitors closet.

1. Pipe enclosure shall extend finish floor to a minimum height of 6’-0” above the finish floor.

Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of pipe enclosure size.

C. Piping installed in areas subject to mechanical damage.

END OF SECTION


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING


220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Several plumbing fixtures described in this section fall under jurisdiction of the Federal Reduction

of Lead in Drinking Water Act (42 USC 300G) which mandates that effective January 4, 2014

the wetted surfaces of any valve, fitting or fixture that comes in contact with potable water must

have a weighted-average lead content of no more than 0.25 percent. The contractor shall be

responsible for providing products that are Lead-Free products and meet the requirements of Safe

Drinking Water Act Section 1417 (e) (Section 9 of NSF/ANSI Standard 61) and authorities having

jurisdiction.




1.3 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Brass, grooved-end butterfly valves

4. Bronze swing check valves.

5. Bronze gate valves.

6. Bronze globe valves.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. RS: Rising stem.

F. SWP: Steam working pressure.




220523 - 2


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


C. NSF Compliance:

1. NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

2. NSF 372 “Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content”.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooved ends and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.


handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.




220523 - 3

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.

4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation. Milwaukee Insulator/MS Handle (TIH) or approved equal.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according (or similar) to AWWA C606.

3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company

c. Kitz Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.


g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo 77CLF-100 Series or 77CLF-200 Series, solder

end, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.












220523 - 4

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Bronze.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

B. Type Zero Lead Bronze Ball Valve with Stainless Steel Trim and Mechanical Press Ends:



following:

a. Viega ProPress

b. Apollo

c. Milwaukee

2. Description:

a. Body: Two Piece Zero Lead Bronze Body

b. Ball: Full Port 316 Stainless Steel

c. Stem: Blowout – Proof 316 Stainless Steel

d. Sealing Element: EPDM

e. Smart Connect (SC) – Leak detection feature on un-pressed valves.

f. 600 WOG

g. Listings: UP Code NSF 61 Annex G CSA on ½” - 1”

h. Metal Handle

i. Conforms to MSS SP-110

j. Parameters: 200 PSI Maximum Working Pressure / 0° - 250° F Operating

Temperature.

2.4 BRASS, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 300 CWP, Brass, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:



following]:

a. Victaulic

b. Engineer Approved Equal

2. Description:

a. Standard: Similar to MSS SP-67, Type I.

b. CWP Rating: 300psig.

c. Body Material: Cast brass to UNS C87850.

d. Stem: Stainless steel, offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree

circumferential seating.

e. Disc: Aluminum-bronze; offset

f. Seal: Pressure responsive Grade CHP Flouroelastomer rated for Potable Water -20F

to 180F.




220523 - 5

g. Victaulic Series 608N

2.5 BRONZE LEAD FREE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. 300 WOG, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


following:

a. Apollo Valve

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: Lead Free, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.6 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. 300 WOG, NRS Bronze Lead Free Gate Valves:


following:

a. Apollo Valve


c. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:



c. Body Material: Lead Free, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. 300 WOG, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:


following:

a. Milwaukee Valve Company.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
















220523 - 6

2. Description:



c. Body Material: Lead Free, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.


g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.







E. Examine gasket seating surfaces on valve ends of grooved valves for conditions that might cause

leakage. Gasket seating area shall be free from projections or indentations.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for gate, globe and plug valves NPS 4 and larger and more than

96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.




220523 - 7

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Globe or angle or ball valves.

3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 and larger: Grooved ends

3. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE




HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY





4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.


6. Pipe-positioning systems.





installation details and include calculations for the following:



3. Pipe stands.





A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.




220529 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated











2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or electro-galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.


A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from

structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.





the following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business.

b. Flex-Strut Inc.







220529 - 3

c. G-Strut.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

e. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

f. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels,


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


8. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90 or Electroplated zinc.



following:




d. MIRO Industries, Inc.

e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel channels,


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Select for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot

and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


8. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90

2.1 INSULATED PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS

A. Thermal hanger shields shall be used on all horizontal insulated pipe systems at each point of

support. Manufactured units shall comply with MSS SP-58 standards and be tested per MSS

SP-89 guidelines. Each assembly shall closely fit the various pipe diameters and match the

outside diameter of the adjoining pipe insulation.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Buckaroos, Inc.;

CoolDry™ Insulated Saddles, Heavy Duty CoolDry™ Insulated Saddles, and CoolDry™

Insulated Sliding Saddles, or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Buckaroos, Inc.

2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

3. Clement Support Services.

C. Insulation Material for Cold or Hot Piping, from Minus 40 to Plus 275 Deg F: Naturally

hydrophobic rigid phenolic foam. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III.

1. Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less as tested by

ASTM E 84.














220529 - 4

2. Thermal Properties, NPS 10 and Smaller: 3.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, and thermal

conductivity (k-value) not to exceed 0.17 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F

according to ASTM C 518.

3. Thermal Properties, NPS 12 to NPS 30: 5.0-lb/cu. ft. nominal density, and thermal

conductivity (k-value) not to exceed 0.2 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F according

to ASTM C 518.

D. Vapor Barrier: ASTM C 1136, Type IX, three-ply composite membrane consisting of a 0.5-mil

white polyester film, 1.0-milaluminum foil, and one 0.5-milclear polyester film.

1. Flame-sp read index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 50 or less as tested by

ASTM E 84.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, zero-permeance abuse-

resistant vapor barrier jacket with 1-1/2-inch-wide longitudinal pressure-sensitive acrylic

tape closure system.

E. Insulation Protection Shields: Galvanized metal, G90 coating designation, complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, 180-degree saddle, centered and adhered to bottom a minimum of 1-1/2

inches for jacketed insulation extending from each side to allow for proper circumferential

closure at butt joints with 3-inch-wide zero-permeance tape.

F. Heavy Duty Insulation Protection Shields: Galvanized metal, 12-gage, G90 (Z275) coating

designation, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, 180-degree saddle, centered and adhered

to bottom a minimum of 1-1/2 inches jacketed insulation extending from each side to allow for

proper circumferential closure at butt joints with 3-inch-wide zero-permeance tape. Structural

steel plate welded to bottom of galvanized shield for sizes NPS 6 and larger.

G. Sliding Protection Shield: Galvanized metal, G90 coating designation, complying with

ASTM A 653/A 653M, ribbed, with PTFE layer on top. Ribbed shield is 4 inchesshorter and

centered below primary protection shield. Allows for 2 inches of lateral movement to account

for linear expansion or contraction.

H. Saddle Label: Manufacturer's saddle label with logo sticker to be visible for verification of

proper installation.

I. Thermal hanger shields shall be used on all horizontal insulated pipe systems at each point of

support. Manufactured units shall comply with MSS SP-58 standards and be tested per MSS

SP-89 guidelines. Each assembly shall closely fit the various pipe diameters and match the

outside diameter of the adjoining pipe insulation.


A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.


following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business.

b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.









220529 - 5

e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Indoor Applications: stainless steel.

3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.3 PIPE-POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system composed of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-carbon-

steel shapes.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping

materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.





220529 - 6


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps,

and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or

install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support

together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,


H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping



J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional



inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses


M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed


N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Use thermal hanger-shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.




220529 - 7

b. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-






d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length

at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation.




B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.




supports.





following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so





220529 - 8

3.5 ADJUSTING




3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply



B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



equipment.




not have field-applied finishes.



E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and

tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in




2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.




220529 - 9


pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of


7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,


8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.






support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.



occurs.


longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small

horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and vertical adjustment

is unnecessary.


NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to expansion and

contraction, is required.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.






220529 - 10

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.


construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.




5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.


flange edge.







structural steel.










M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system




2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.




220529 - 11

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping



2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.



5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability


6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit


base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress







O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


Q. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete

construction.

R. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.



HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING – GREASE WASTE


220534 - 1

SECTION 220534 - HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING - GREASE WASTE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a UL Listed, CSA Certified and FM Approved heat tracing system for

flow maintenance of greasy waste disposal lines consisting of self-regulating heating cable,

connection kits and electronic controller.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. System for flow maintenance of buried greasy waste disposal lines with line sensing control,

monitoring, integrated ground-fault circuit protection and Building Management System (BMS)

communication capabilities.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. IEEE 515.1-2012: Standard for testing, design, installation and maintenance of electrical

resistance trace heating for commercial applications.

B. CSA C22.2 NO. 130-03-2008 Requirements for Electrical Resistance Heating Cables and

Heating Device Sets.

C. National Electric Code (NEC): NFPA70


A. Product Data: For UL/ULC Listed Heat Tracing Systems for Plumbing Piping including the

following:

1. Manufacturer’s Data Sheets for Heat Cable, Components, Controller & Installation

Accessories.

2. Installation Instructions for Heat Tracing Systems for Plumbing Piping

3. Electrical Wiring Diagram for Controller, Sensors & Interface to BMS


A. Operation & Maintenance Manuals for Heat Tracing Systems for Plumbing Piping




220534 - 2


A. Manufacturers Qualifications

1. Minimum of 10 years of experience in design, engineering, manufacturer and support of

Heat Tracing Systems.

2. Manufacturer shall be ISO-9001:2008 Registered

B. Installer Qualifications

1. System installer shall have a complete understanding of product from manufacturer prior

to installation of Heat Tracing Systems for Plumbing Piping System.

2. Electrical Connections shall be performed by a licensed electrician.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging and dry location with a temperature range

of 0°F (-18°C) to 100°F (38°C) until ready for installation.

B. Protect Heating Cable from exposure to moisture, water & mechanical damage until ready for

installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty form which manufacturer warrants against defect in

material and workmanship under normal use and regular service and maintenance for a period

of one year from the date of shipment of the products by Chromalox:

1. Heating Cable & Components: One Year

2. Controls & Sensors: One Year

B. Provide manufacturer’s extended warranty of ten (10) years from the date of installation on

heating cable and components by completing warranty registration card within the timeline

indicated on the extended warranty.

1. Install heating cable system per manufacturer’s instructions on their Installation &

Operation Manual

2. Maintain & complete the installation & maintenance log.

3. Submit complete testing log data to owner

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a Heat

Tracing Systems for Plumbing Piping by Chromalox, Pittsburgh, PA, 800-443-2640,

www.chromalox.com.

1. Submit comparable products of one of the following for approval by Engineer:

a. Delta-Therm Corporation.

b. nVent (RAYCHEM).

c. Watts Radiant; A WATTS Brand.

http://www.chromalox.com/







220534 - 3

d. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Instructions to Bidders and

Division 01 General Requirements.

B. MATERIALS

1. Heating Cables

a. Basis of design shall be Chromalox CPR Self-Regulating, Heating Cable

specifically designed for the intended application, tested and approved to CSA

22.2 No 130-03 and IEEE 515.1 requirements.

b. The self-regulating, heating cable shall consist of two (2) 16 AWG nickel-copper

bus wires embedded in a radiation cross-linked, continuous, self-regulating

polymer core.

c. The self-regulating, heating cable shall have a fluoropolymer, dielectric jacket

cover.

d. The self-regulating, heating cable shall have a tinned-copper ground braid.

e. The heating cable shall be UL, FM or CSA Listed.

f. The manufacturer shall provide design heat loss information on all piping and

select a self-regulating, heating cable from the table below to prevent freezing of

the pipe:

Heater Output @ 50°F Voltage Maximum Exposure Temperature

3 Watts / Lineal Ft 120 & 208-277 185°F

5 Watts / Lineal Ft 120 & 208-277 185°F

8 Watts / Lineal Ft 120 & 208-277 185°F

10 Watts / Lineal Ft 120 & 208-277 185°F

2. Connection Kits

a. Heating Cable Connection Kits shall be Chromalox DL Series or similar for

exposed piping and not require installing contractor to cut into heating cable core

and expose the bus wires.

b. Chromalox DL Series connection kits shall be NEMA 4X rated to prevent water

ingress and corrosion.

c. Chromalox DL Series connection kits shall be UV stabilized for installation

outdoors.

d. Heating Cable Connection Kits shall be Chromalox DL Kits for buried piping and

compatible with standard electrical mechanical tubing and junction boxes. All J-

box connections with heating cable shall be sealed with fire stopping material to

prevent over heating of the connection inside of the junction box.

e. Manufacturer to provide connection kits for power, splice, tee and end seal.

f. All Splices, Tees & End Seals shall be installed above the insulation per NEC.

g. All Connections kits shall be UL, CSA or FM Listed.

3. Heating Cable Accessories

a. Heating cable shall be attached to plumbing piping with Chromalox FT-66 glass

fiber, glass tape. Use of metal zip ties is prohibited for the attachment of the

heating cable to the plumbing piping.

b. Contractor shall provide Chromalox WL-05 Heating Tracing Labels every 10’,

opposite sides of pipe to identify plumbing piping with heat tracing cable installed

on it.

c. All PVC Sanitary Piping shall have a 2” W aluminum tape, Chromalox AT-18,

placed over the heating cable along its entire length to facilitate heating of the

plastic pipe.




220534 - 4

4. Controller

a. Basis of design is Chromalox IntelliTrace CTC controller for two (2) circuits.

b. Unit shall operate at 100-277 VAC and rated @ 40A per circuit

c. Unit shall include a 10" High Resolution TFT Display with ability to show set

point temperature, line temperature and current draw of each circuit

simultaneously.

d. Unit shall include ON/OFF, PID or Manual SSR power control with a selectable

Soft Start capability. Electro-mechanical relays shall not be permitted.

e. Unit shall include two temperature sensors inputs per circuit.

f. Unit shall include 2 x common alarm outputs (1 x AC, 1 x DC), Alarms for

Low/High Temperature & Current, GFEP (Ground Fault Equipment Protection) &

Sensor Failure.

g. ModBus RTU/RS485 Communications capability.

h. Unit shall include multiple levels of password security.

i. Unit shall be supplied with a FRP, NEMA 4X Enclosure with wall mounting

bracket.

j. Unit shall include BACnet protocol converter for connecting all IntelliTrace CTC

controllers to BACnet network. Protocol Converter shall be Chromalox model

MBC contained in a NEMA4 Enclosure with separate power supply.

5. Temperature Sensors – One (1) required

a. Provide one Chromalox LN-50 100-ohm, three wire, ambient sensing, temperature

sensor with copper sheathed probe with vented guard. Unit shall include ½” NPT

fitting for mounting into conduit fitting by others.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLERS

A. Acceptable Installers

1. Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, installer shall be

familiar with installing heat-trace cable and equipment.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Installer to field verify all plumbing piping sizes & lengths as shown on drawings.

B. Installer to verify that power is available, in proper location and ready for use.

C. Installer to verify that all plumbing piping has been properly prepared for heating cable

installation. Notify General Contractor or Construction Manager of unsatisfactory conditions

exist prior to Flow Maintenance System.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. The Flow Maintenance installation shall conform to all local building codes including but

limited to NFPA70, IEEE 515.1 Commercial Heat Tracing Applications.




220534 - 5

B. The installer shall comply with the Chromalox’s installation, operation & maintenance

instructions.

C. The installer shall layout heating cable per approved shop drawings.

D. Grounding of the Flow Maintenance shall be in accordance with section 260526 “Grounding &

Bonding for Electrical Systems”

E. Connections of all electrical wiring shall be in accordance with section 260519 “Low-Voltage

Electrical Systems”


A. Start-Up and testing of the Flow Maintenance shall be performed by factory technician or

factory representative per the owner’s requirements.

B. Field Testing & Inspections

1. The system shall be commissioned in accordance to the Chromalox Installation,

Operation & Maintenance Manual.

2. The heating cable circuit integrity shall be tested using a 2500 Vdc megohmmeter at the

following intervals below. Minimum acceptable insulation resistance shall be 1000

megohms or greater.

a. Before installing the heating cable

b. After heating cable has been installed onto the roof or gutter

c. After installing connection kits

d. Prior to initial start-up (commissioning)

e. As part of the regular system maintenance

3. The technician shall verify that the IntelliTrace CTC Controller parameters are set

properly for the Flow Maintenance requirements.

4. The technician shall verify that the temperature sensors are correctly connected to the

controller.

5. The installer shall submit test results to owner after commissioning.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Keep ambient temperature sensors clean of dirt and debris

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Comply with Manufacturers recommendations IOM Manual Flow Maintenance.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage during construction.




220534 - 6

B. Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial electric heat

tracing.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


220548 - 1

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Isolation mounts.


4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.

5. Housed spring mounts.


7. Spring hangers.

8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.

9. Pipe riser resilient supports.


1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Seismic Design Category (SDC) as Defined in the IBC: B.

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.

B. Seismic Restraint Loading is not required for Building in Category B



EQUIPMENT


220548 - 2

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation details indicated to comply with




operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for

designing vibration isolation bases.



deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been

examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and

rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,

and cantilever loads.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and

equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and

seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.


D. Field quality-control test reports.



conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.



EQUIPMENT


220548 - 3

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

3. California Dynamics Corporation.

4. Isolation Technology, Inc.

5. Kinetics Noise Control.

6. Mason Industries.

7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

8. Vibration Isolation.

9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

C. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad

area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that

match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

D. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate

for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise

identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element

and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

E. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.






F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger

rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.












EQUIPMENT


220548 - 4

H. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert

in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.







6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

I. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.










6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.


spring coil.

J. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch-thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit

stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load

on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch-thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a

factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and

contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection

of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.



EQUIPMENT


220548 - 5

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance.




3.2 APPLICATIONS



B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings



components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide


B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide


C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at




EQUIPMENT


220548 - 6

D. Drilled-in Anchors:


anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or

drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are









5. Install stainless steel anchors.








restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least

seven days' advance notice.




Architect.





9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.





C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed


D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the

following:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc.

b. Craftmark Pipe Markers.

c. Marking Services, Inc.








220553 - 2

d. Seton Identification Products.

e. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical

engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.



a. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

b. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less

than 5 by 3 inch.

c. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger

lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to

three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were screws

or rivets would void warranty of equipment.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing

numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification

Section number and title where equipment is specified.

1. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers

where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section

number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in

operation and maintenance data.



following:





B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch

thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

C. Letter Color: White.

D. Background Color: Red.

E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 5 by 3

inch.

G. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 2 inch












220553 - 3

H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were screws or


I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

K. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


following:





B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Machine printed, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, pipe size, and showing flow direction. Marker/hand written labels are

not acceptable.

C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe

and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both

directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

E. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

F. Pipe-Label Colors:

1. In accordance with ANSI A13.1 and local fire code requirements

2.4 VALVE TAGS


following:


2. Carlton Industries, LP.

3. Champion America.


5. LEM Products Inc.

















220553 - 4


a. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

b. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or

stamped holes for attachment hardware.


B. Valve Tag Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, valve number and service.

1. Example: HW

Isolation

001

2. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve

(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations

for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.


4. Valve-tag schedule shall be framed behind glass and located in each mechanical room

2.5 WARNING TAGS


following:





B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock

with matte finish suitable for writing.



3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."


C. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.










220553 - 5



surfaces where devices are to be applied.




A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.


A. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in

finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:


2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

3. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

4. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

5. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.


7. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in areas

of congested piping and equipment.

8. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.


10. And at all locations required to conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007

B. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including

pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Coordinate with facility standards. If no facility standards exist or are

not desired, conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007.


A. Install tags on all valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose

connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves

in a valve schedule.




220553 - 6

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with

captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. All services: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:


3. Letter Color:



A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.





PLUMBING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING


220800 - 1

SECTION 22 08 00 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Division 22 – Plumbing



1.3 REQUIRMENTS

A. The Commissioning process requires the participation of Division 22, Plumbing, to ensure that

all systems fulfill the functional and pre-functional requirements set forth in these construction

documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Section

019113. Division 22, Plumbing, shall fulfill commissioning responsibilities assigned to division

22 in accordance with Section 019113.


PART 3 - EXECUTION



installed properly.



with 019113.





operation.




220800 - 2

B. The contractor will be provided with functional performance test procedures to perform while CA

witnesses. The contractor shall perform functional tests in accordance with 019113.









1. Domestic Hot Water Heater and Recirculation System

a) Provide documentation for factory authorized start-up on water heaters.

b) Provide sign off and/or documentation of mixing valve setup and recirculation

system balancing as per the requirements of the contract documents and or

manufacturer’s instructions.

c) Provide sign off and/or documentation of system flushing as per the requirements of

the contract documents.

2. Well Water System

3. Sump Pumps

4. Sinks and Lavatories

5. Water Closets


A. See Attached.

End of Section




220800 - 3

Sample Only – Actual Functional Test Sheets shall be developed from final contract docu-

ments


DOMESTIC WATER HEATER AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM

1. Participants


CxA

Mechanical

Controls

TAB

Plumbing

Electrical



Check Description

☐ The above equipment and systems integral to them are complete and ready for functional test-

ing.

☐ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable

per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and

sensor calibrations completed.

☐ Test and balance completed and approved for the hydronic systems and terminal units connected

☐ All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected.

☐ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed.

☐ Schedules and reviewed

This checklist does not take the place of the manufacturer’s recommended checkout

and startup procedures.

Items that do not apply shall be noted with the reasons on this form (N/A = not ap-

plicable, BO = by others).

Contractor’s assigned responsibility for sections of the checklist shall be responsible

to see that checklist items by their subcontractors are completed and checked off.




220800 - 4

3. Installation Checks


Domestic HW Sys-

tem

General Installation

Permanent labels affixed ☐

Casing condition good: no dents ☐

Maintenance access acceptable for unit and components valve has been installed

where it can be easily, cleaned, adjusted, etc. ☐

Concrete pad provided ☐

Instrumentation installed according to specification (thermometers, pressure

gages, flow meters, etc.) ☐

Clean up of equipment completed per contract documents ☐

Main gas, pilot gas pressure regulators, and high and low pressure switches are

vented to the outdoors ☐

Water heater is ASME rated ☐

Piping arrangement installed per the contract documents ☐

Installation of combustion air fan and associated motorized damper ☐

Flue pipe installed as per the contract documents ☐

Well Water System and Potable Water Storage Tanks and Booster Pumps

8000 gallon single wall underground tank installed ☐

Level sensor ☐

2 float switches ☐

Pump control panel to be mounted in mechanical room 039 ☐

Pumps ☐

Fill tube with locking fill cap. ☐

Relocated existing well tanks and pressure switch from existing pump house in-

side existing school. ☐

Well Pressure Bladder Tanks (2) ☐

Solenoid valve in place tied to domestic water storage tank and level control ☐

Solenoid valve tied to fire pump tank level control ☐

Water Heaters, Recirc Pumps and TMVs

WH-1 and 2 stacked vertically on rack provided with heaters by mfg. ☐

WH-1 and 2 pumps installed (Provided with unit) ☐

WH-1 and 2 drain valve in place ☐

Purge valve in place ☐

WH-3 and 4 installed properly ☐




220800 - 5


Domestic HW Sys-

tem

WH-3 and 4 drain valves ☐

WH-3 and 4 T&P relief valve in place. ☐

RP-1/TMV-1 installed properly for 120°F Loop ☐

RP-2/TMV-2 installed properly for 140°F Lop ☐

Valves and Piping ☐

Pipe fittings complete and pipes properly supported ☐

Pipes properly labeled ☐

Pipes properly insulated ☐

Valves properly labeled ☐

Valves installed in proper direction ☐

Meters in place as per drawings ☐

Piping system properly flushed ☐

No leaking apparent around fittings ☐

Isolation valves installed per drawings ☐

Electrical and Controls

Power disconnects in place and labeled ☐

All electric connections tight ☐

Safeties in place and operable ☐





220800 - 6

4. Functional Testing Record

Test

#

Mode ID

Test Procedure

(including special condi-

tions) Expected Response

Pass

Y/N

Not

e

1 Well Pumps

and Tank

High Level BAS monitors status, Alarm is gen-

erated at BAS

Low Level BAS monitors status, Alarm is gen-

erated at BAS

Pump Failure BAS monitors status, Alarm is gen-

erated at BAS

General Alarm BAS monitors status, Alarm is gen-

erated at BAS

2 Recirc Pumps Simulate a call for the do-

mestic water heater

The recirc pumps operate as needed

under control of a strap on aquastat.

BAS acts as permissive to only al-

low pump operation during 1 hour

before occupancy to reestablish sys-

tem temp and off at time set by

building facilities to allow for

maintenance.

Service/Disconnect switch turns

pumps off

Confirm pump failures report to

BMS and alarm

3

Setting/bal-

ancing the

Mixing Valve

Set/balanced per contract

documenters and per manu-

facturers recommendations

Reports shall be attached.

4

Domestic Wa-

ter Heating

System

Review setpoints and sys-

tem operation.

Water to water heat pumps operate

as lead/lag and are sequenced to

maintain domestic stored water tem-

perature of 140°F

Heat pump supply temp is set for

150°F

5

Lead/Lag

Control Pa-

rameters

Confirm lead/lag configu-

ration

Lead water to water heat pump is

energized on a lead/standby se-

quence

Selectable lead lag configuration in

place on BMS –

Weekly/monthly/run hours/manual

Status is confirmed on lag pump

prior to lead pump being disabled.




220800 - 7

The functional tests have all passed for given trade ☐YES ☐NO

☐ Balancing Procedures have been followed as per manufacturer recommendations per specific

manufacturer.

Test

#

Mode ID

Test Procedure

(including special con-

ditions) Expected Response

Pass

Y/N

Not

e

6

Lag Operation

and Back up

Heating Ele-

ments

Simulate a low temp

condition by increasing

the setpoint

If after 30 minutes (adj.) the domestic

water storage tank is not at setpoint, the

lag heat pump energizes on.

BMS locks out the back up electric heat-

ing elements in storage tanks when heat

pumps are operating.

If after 30 minutes (adj.) domestic water

tank temp is not to temp with two heat

pumps operating, the back-up elements

may be enabled to operate.

7 Electric Heat-

ing Elements

Confirm manual toggle

locks electric elements

out via BMS.

Manual toggle at BAS provided to lock

out electric elements.

Switch toggle to out of

service

“Out of service” toggle provided for

heat pump when out of service to allow

the electric backup to energize on with

only one pump in operation.

8 Domestic Wa-

ter Metering Confirm metering

BMS is monitoring flow meters pro-

vided under the plumbing scope of

work.




220800 - 8




220800 - 9




220800 - 10


WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS State Project No. 078-0068N, Phase 2 of 3

221000 - 1

SECTION 221000 – WATER SYSTEM COMPONENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all plant, materials, supplies, power, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, overhead, profit, insurance, bonds, permits, shop drawings, design services (where required), and other services and accessories required to furnish and install the work of this Section, complete and in place.

B. The work of this Section includes:

1. Selective clearing and thinning of trees, brush, shrubbery, etc. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 9.52.01.

2. Construction staking of all water system components and appurtenances in this Section. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 9.80.01.

3. Trench excavation and backfill, excluding rock-in-trench excavation, but including removal and disposal of existing miscellaneous pipes and other obstructions, existing pavement, curbs, and walks, etc. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 2.05.01.

4. Design, installation, maintenance, operation, and protection of all pumping, bailing, draining, sheeting, shoring, and cofferdams necessary to successfully construct the work.

5. The removal, handling, protection, and resetting of hedges, small trees, shrubbery, signs, posts, guide rails, mail boxes, and the like.

6. The bracing of utility poles in close proximity to the excavation. 7. Furnish and install water main pipe bedding. 8. At Wells A and B, furnish and install new Well Pumps, Well Discharge Piping, Pitless

Adapter, Power Cables, Well Cap and Associated Materials and Installation,9. Between Wells A and B and the Well Service Room, furnish and install Underground

Water Piping, Pump Electrical Conduit and Conductors, Magnetic Indicating Tape and Associated Materials and Installation,

10. At the Well Service Room, furnish and install PVC Pipe Sleeves at the foundation wall, Interior Water Piping and Appurtenances, Flow Meters, Sample Taps, a Well Pump Control Panel, Backflow Preventer, Solenoid Valves, and Associated Materials and Installation.

11. Flush and disinfect new water lines and appurtenances.12. Provide combined pressure and leakage tests on the new water lines and appurtenances.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. These publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. ANSI/AWWA Standards, latest edition, including all revisions and addenda2. ConnDOT Form 818, State of Connecticut Department of Transportation Standard

Specifications for Roads, Bridges, and Incidental Construction, Form 818 – 2020; including all latest revisions and addenda.



221000 - 2

3. NSF-61, National Sanitary Foundation – Standard 61

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Well Pumps –Well pumps in each well shall be the following:

1. In Well A – Provide and install a 4” submersible pump rated for 9 gpm @ 130’ TDH, install at a depth of 350 feet in the well. Design based on 1 HP Goulds model 7GS10, other acceptable manufactures include or Webtrol and Myers.

2. In Well B – Provide and install a 4” submersible pump rated for 7 gpm @ 125’ TDH, install at a depth of 350 feet in the well. Design based on ¾ HP Goulds model 5GS07, other acceptable manufactures include or Webtrol and Myers.

a. Note: The available site power is 120/208/3 ph.

B. Well Piping and Installation

1. At existing Wells A and B - Provide stainless steel safety rope, 1 ¼” pitless adaptor, 1¼” PE drop tubing rated for 200 PSI, install check valves every 100’, torque arrestor, and a separate non-connected 1 ¼” PE tubing from the top of the well to 10 feet above the well pump depth, for future water level measurements.

C. Underground Water Piping

1. Underground water piping between the wells and the well service room should be polyethylene tubing, conforming to AWWA C-901, 200 psi pressure rated. Provide full coils wherever possible, to minimize joints. Provide 1 ¼” tubing for all wells. Provide brass inserts and double pipe clamps at all joints. Install underground water piping in sand bedding, with minimum 6” sand above and below all water piping. Install at minimum 4 ½ foot depth. Install magnetic indicating tape above water main, at depth 12” below grade.

D. Pump Electrical Conduit

1. Install Schedule 40 PVC conduit between well and applicable pump station of school buildings, for pump conductors as shown on the Drawings. Install in 12” sand bedding. Install at minimum 2 foot depth. Provide magnetic indicating tape above underground conduits, approximately 12” below grade.

E. PVC Pipe Sleeves

1. Install new raw-water PE piping from wells within 4” rigid PVC conduits, below or through foundation walls, and below concrete floors, to a point 6” above finished floor.



221000 - 3

F. Interior Water Piping and Appurtenances – Shall be the following:

1. Copper Water Piping – Where shown on the drawings and/or referred to in the contract documents, copper water piping shall be Type L copper tubing with “Press –fit” connections.

2. All water piping and appurtenances shall be waterworks grade, with full port openings, rated for a working pressure of 150 psi. Upon completion of installation, all piping shall be flushed to waste, to clear any debris from the piping. Upon completion of flushing, pressure test in accordance with AWWA C600. Disinfect in accordance with AWWA C651.

G. Flow Meters1. Provide 1” Sensus direct read flow meters or equivalent, on each well raw water piping.

Meters to read in gallons, and must meet most recent AWWA standards. Provide transmitter to generate a flow signal (4-20 ma) from each wells, for potential future use by the Owner

2. Provide 2” Siemens Mag5100 flow meter or equivalent with 150# RF flanges, hard rubber liner, and hastelloy-C electrode grounding rings where shown. Meters to read in gallons, and must meet most recent AWWA standards. Provide transmitter to generate a flow signal (4-20 ma) from each tank supply line, for potential future use of the Owner.

H. Backflow Preventers1. Provide Watts Series 007 or equivalent double check valve assembly, with cast copper

silicon alloy body, and top mounted ball valve test cocks.

I. Solenoid1. Provide Asco series 210 or equivalent solenoid valves, 2 way, and brass body.

J. Water System Control Panel- Provide, install, troubleshoot and make fully operational to the owner’s satisfaction a single Well Pump control panel in the Well Service room. The panel shall control the operation of Well A and B submersible pumps, be connected to a water level transducer installed in the 8,000 gallon atmospheric storage tank, have an operator friendly touch screen, and alarm points. The panel shall have at a minimum the following features:

1. Provide a gasketed steel NEMA 4 panel enclosure.2. Panel to utilize 120 volt/single phase/ 60 Hz power supply.3. Provide individual hand-off-automatic (HOA) switches for all well pumps, 4. Provide hour-meters for all well pumps,5. Provide Green run light, amber off lights for each well pump. 6. Provide red alarm lights on the panel face, for tank high level and tank low level alarm

points.7. Provide a digital touch screen panels and readouts for the following items:

a. Water level in atmospheric water storage tank, to the nearest 0.01 feet.b. Well pump on and off elevations in the water tank, c. Alarm conditions for high and low water levels in the atmospheric tank,

8. Provide a dry contact for a signal from the solenoid valve on the fire tank fill piping. When the fire tank fill piping calls for water, this solenoid shall be energized, and shall close the dry contact within the pump control panels, causing both Well 1 and Well 2 pumps to operate.



221000 - 4

When the fire tank is full, and the solenoid is de-energized, the dry contact in the pump control panel shall be de-energized, and the well pump panel will return to normal operation.

K. Well Pump Operation- The wells shall operate based upon a drop in water level in the specific atmospheric tank at each school. Install a water level pressure transducer inside the atmospheric tank, which will send a 4-20 ma signal back to the control panel, to indicate water level in the tank. The system shall be pre-set for the following levels:

1. High Alarm (7’ 9” from bottom of tank)2. Well Pumps Off (7’ 6” from bottom of tank)3. Well Pumps On (6’6” from bottom of tank)4. Low Alarm (4’ 0” from bottom of tank)5. Transfer Pumps Off (2’ 0” from bottom of tank)6. Transfer Pumps Re-Start (3’0” from bottom of tank(

Notes: 1. Tank is 8’-0” in diameter. These levels shall be easily adjustable by the Operator,

through a simple touch pad display. 2. Refer to Section J – Water System Control Panel, Item 8, for fire storage tank fill

protocol.

L. Pressure Transducer shall have a 0-10 psi range, be able to send a 4-20 ma signal back to the control panel, and measure water level in the tank to the nearest 0.01 feet. Include a continuous 250’ (field verify prior to ordering) cable back to the water system control panel inside a PVC conduit. Include a 1 ½” perforated stilling tube inside the tank for the transducer. Design based on a Dwyer series SBLT2 Mercoid Submersible Level Transmitter, or approved equal.

M. Battery Back-up- Provide a battery back up inside the well pump control panel to operate the panel for up to 12 hours without primary power.

N. Alarm Auto-dialer- Provide and install an autodialer adjacent to the Well Pump Control Panel. Auto-dialer to contact pre-programmed phone numbers during a high storage tank or low storage tank alarm condition.

Alarm Dialer design based on Raco Guard-It, or approved equal by the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. This item does not include rock-in-trench excavation.

B. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 2.05.03.

C. Clear and thin trees, brush, and shrubbery, as necessary to construct the work. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 9.52.03.



221000 - 5

D. Stake out all construction items. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 9.80.03.

E. Remove and dispose of existing water mains and valves, miscellaneous pipes, other obstructions, and existing pavement, curbs, and walks, as necessary, to construct the work.

F. Design, install, maintain, operate and protect all pumping, bailing, draining, sheeting, shoring, and cofferdam facilities necessary to construct the work.

G. Remove, handle, protect, and reset hedges, small trees, shrubbery, signs, posts, guide rails, mail boxes, and other site improvements, as necessary to construct the work.

H. Brace utility poles in close proximity to the excavation, as necessary, to construct the work.

3.2 UNDERGROUND WATER PIPING

A. Comply with AWWA C-901, 200 psi pressure rated.

3.3 WATER MAIN BEDDING

B. Comply with ConnDOT Form 816, Article 6.51.03. Use Type II installation procedures.

1. Delete the dimensions referred to in Article 6.51.03 and replace with the dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings.

2. Delete references to “culverts’ and replace with references to “water main pipe”.

3.4 DISINFECTION AND FLUSHING

A. Disinfect all new Interior Water Piping and Appurtenances completed under this Contract. Comply with AWWA Standard C600 and C651.

B. Disinfect all new well pumps installations completed under this Contract. Comply with AWWA C654.

C. Thoroughly flush all pipelines prior to the disinfection process.

D. Install a double check-valve between the test-water source and the new water distribution system. Provide other safety measures as may be required.

E. Following the disinfection process, thoroughly flush all pipelines before sampling for tests.

F. Following the flushing process, retrieve and convey test samples to a certified water testing laboratory. Water samples shall be analyzed for coliform bacteria, physical parameters, and VOC's. To pass, test results must reveal total coliform (TC) = 0 and heterotrophic plate count (HPC) less than 100 colonies per ml.

G. If, the Owner and/or Engineer determine that the disinfection process failed, repeat the entire disinfection process to the satisfaction of the Owner, at no cost to the Owner, and without extension of time for completion of the work.



221000 - 6

H. Dispose of all chlorinated test water in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations (which may require de-chlorination). Obtain all required discharge permits prior to start of the disinfection process.

3.5 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

A. Conduct pressure and leakage testing on all new water lines completed under this contract. Comply with AWWA Standard C600.

B. Interior Water Piping and Appurtenances - Pressure test in accordance with AWWA C600. Disinfect in accordance with AWWA C651.

C. If the section shall fail to pass the pressure and leakage test, locate, uncover, retest and repair or replace the defective pipe, fitting or joint, all at no cost to the Owner and without extension of time for completion of the work. Make additional tests and repairs until the section passes the specified tests.

D. The Owner will provide at no charge to the Contractor, the necessary water for this initial pressure and leakage tests. If this initial test fails, the Owner will charge the Contractor for all subsequent required water.

3.6 WATER QUALITY TESTING

A. Wells and well discharge piping- Upon completion of disinfection, flush wells and piping to waste, providing for dechlorination prior to discharge. Upon field measurements of zero free chlorine residual, the Contractor shall retain the services of a State certified water quality laboratory and have samples collected from each well for coliform bacteria, heterotrophic plate count, color, odor, turbidity, pH, and lab chlorine residual.

B. Interior Well Service Room Piping- Upon completion of disinfection, flush the piping to waste, providing for dechlorination prior to discharge. Upon field measurements of zero free chlorine residual, the Contractor shall retain the services of a State certified water quality laboratory, and have samples collected from well service room sample taps, as well as from the point-of-entry sample tap located each tank as well as three representative locations in the pumping station, for coliform bacteria, heterotrophic plate count, color, odor, turbidity, pH, and lab chlorine residual. For the tank samples, also collect samples for volatile organic compounds, as listed in the Public Health Code.

C. Dechlorination Plan- The Contractor shall submit a written plan to the Engineer for approval, on how the Contractor plans to dechlorinate and dispose of the water on the site. The Contractor shall revise this plan as required by the Engineer for approval, prior to beginning the disinfection process.

D. Resampling- If any of the water quality samples do not meet the state standards, the Contractor shall repeat the disinfection, dechlorination, and sampling procedure, as many times as necessary at no additional cost to the Owner, until acceptable water quality is obtained, meeting the State drinking water standards.



221000 - 7

E. Startup and Testing- Contractor to provide factory authorized representatives for well pump system controls for up to two-4 hour periods for start-up, testing and training and up to one-8 hr period within two months after initial training.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING


221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside

buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting

materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.




221116 - 2

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping

components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." All products shall meet the low-lead

requirements of NSF-372.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. Cerroflow

2. Elkhart Products Corporation.

3. Howell Metal

4. Mueller Copper Tube

5. NIBCO Inc

6. Precision Tube

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Viega ProPress Fittings or equivalent: Bronze or copper shall conform to the material

requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22, and the performance requirements of

IAPMO PS117, and ICC LC1002. ProPress fittings ½-inch thru 2-inch for use with

ASTM B88 copper tube type K, L, or M and ½-inch up to include 1-1/4-inch annealed

copper tube. ProPress fittings shall have an EPDM sealing element and Smart Connect

(SC), leak detention feature for un-pressed fittings. ProPress fittings with EPDM sealing

element shall conform to NSF 61-G when installed in a potable water system.

Installation shall conform to manufacturer’s instructions and specifications.


following:

a. Viega.

b. Elkhart Products Corporation.

c. NIBCO Inc

H. Grooved-Joint Copper-Tube Appurtenances:



the following:

a. Victaulic









221116 - 3

b. Engineer Approved Equal

2. Copper Grooved-End Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast bronze or ASME B16.22 wrought

copper and ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 152 wrought copper fittings with copper

tubing sized grooved ends designed to accept Victaulic couplings (flaring of tube and

fitting ends to IPS dimensions is not permitted). Basis of Design: Victaulic Copper-

Connection.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt

pads to provide system rigidity upon visual metal-to-metal bolt pad contact with no

torque requirement, coated with copper-colored enamel, Grade EHP EPDM-synthetic

rubber gasket UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF61 for hot (180F) and cold

(86F) water, center-leg gasket with pipe stop to ensure proper groove engagement,

alignment, and pipe insertion depth, and ASTM A449 compliant and bolts and nuts.

Designs that permit spaces or gaps at bolt pads or require a torque per written

manufacturer’s installation instructions not permitted. Installation-Ready, for direct stab

installation without field disassembly. Victaulic Style 607.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or

flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber


B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.



C. Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron.



2.4 PEX TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. PEX Tubing shall be copper tube size dimension (CTS), SDR-9 wall thickness and meets the

respective requirements of ASTM F876 and F877.Materials Chlorine resistance rating NSF-pw

(CL5), design pressure and temperature ratings, relevant ASTM standards, manufacturing date

and production code, as well as the NSF-pw stamps indicating third-party certification by NSF

International for meeting and exceeding performance and toxicological standards, as well as

achieving the highest chlorine resistance rating in the PEX industry


following:

a. Viega

b. Vanguard

c. Heatlink




221116 - 4

2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.

b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.

c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

d. JCM Industries.

e. Romac Industries, Inc.

f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.

g. Viking Johnson.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.














221116 - 5

d. Jomar International.

e. Matco-Norca.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.


c. Matco-Norca.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.


3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


following:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.


2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.


4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


following:

a. Elster Perfection Corporation.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.

c. Matco-Norca.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.


2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.























221116 - 6

F. Dielectric Waterway: Fittings shall be a copper-silicon casting conforming to UNS C87850, and

UL classified in accordance with ANSI / NSF-61 for potable water service. Fittings shall have

threaded ends, grooved ends, or a combination. Victaulic Style 647.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Cap all pipe and equipment outlets during construction and keep lines and inside of equipment

free of foreign materials.

C. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

D. Cap all pipe and equipment outlets during construction and keep lines and inside of equipment


E. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600

and AWWA M41.

F. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to

ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

G. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for

drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

H. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

I. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

J. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's

requirements.

K. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in

Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."




221116 - 7

L. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

M. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

N. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, grooved joint couplings and valves with pressure ratings

the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless


Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.

R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

S. Install unions or grooved joint couplings in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of

equipment, machine, and specialty. In grooved installations the coupling shall act as the union.

T. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged

booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and

Gages for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

V. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with

requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain ends of cooper tube.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.




221116 - 8

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut





damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Copper and copper alloy press connections:

1. Shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Contractor shall be trained on the use and installation of the system by manufacturer’s

representative.

3. Fitting shall be visually examined to ensure that sealing element is not damaged and it is

properly seated into the fitting. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting.

4. The tubing shall be marked with a felt tip pen at the face of the fitting.

5. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing

is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting.

6. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) recommended by the manufacturer.

G. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints:

1. Roll groove end of tube.

2. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts.

3. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for roll-grooved

joints. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations.

4. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the

intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be developed and supplied by the system

manufacturer.

5. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the

area from pipe end to groove.

6. A factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training to contractor's field

personnel in the installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative

shall periodically review the product installation.

7. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products

H. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.




221116 - 9

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: 32 inches with 3/8-inch rod.




221116 - 10

H. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.

2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use

flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Cap all pipe and equipment outlets during construction and keep lines and inside of equipment


B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.




221116 - 11

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Pressure test to identify un-pressed connections:

a. After press-connect fittings have been installed a “step test” shall follow.

b. Utilizing air or water, the system shall be pressurized to 45 psi.

c. If there is a significant drop in pressure, the system shall be walked to check for

un-pressed fittings.

d. Should an un-pressed fitting be located, the pressure should be released from the

system and the un-pressed fitting shall be pressed.

e. If no un-pressed fitting is identified the system shall be pressurized to test

pressures required by code, not to exceed 600 psi.

3. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

C. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.




221116 - 12

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least

200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges, grooved joints and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Refer to schedule on drawings.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate

valves with flanged ends or grooved for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or

ball valves with flanged or grooved ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.




221116 - 13

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.

4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES


221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

5. Strainers.

6. Outlet boxes.

7. Hose stations.

8. Hose bibbs.

9. Wall hydrants.

10. Drain valves.

11. Water-hammer arresters.

12. Air vents.


14. Flexible connectors.

15. Water meters.






221119 - 2

B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14.

B. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.

C. All piping specialties which come into contact with potable water shall meet the requirements of

Safe Water Drinking Act (SWDA).


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

6. Finish: Rough bronze or Chrome plated.










221119 - 3

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


following:


b. Legend Valve.

c. MIFAB, Inc.


e. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.


3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated.

C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers:


following:







3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Size: Pipe size connected. Refer to drawings.

6. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:










4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Size: Refer to drawings.

6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; steel with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged or grooved for NPS 2-1/2

and larger.

8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.





















221119 - 4

9. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged

ends on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers:


following:


b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.



4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.

5. Body: Stainless steel.


C. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:


following:


b. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.



4. Size: equal to pipe size served.

5. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

D. Carbonated-Beverage-Dispenser, Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:


following:

a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

b. Lancer Corporation.




4. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8.



E. Hose-Connection Backflow Preventers:


following:


b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

c. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.


3. Operation: Up to 10-foot head of water back pressure.

















221119 - 5

4. Inlet Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

5. Outlet Size: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

6. Capacity: At least 3-gpm flow.

F. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:


following:


b. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-

procedure instructions.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Lead Free Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:


a. Bell and Gossett; insert product designation.

b. Cimberio

c. Danfoss; insert product designation.

d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Type: Ball or Y-pattern globe valve with two readout ports and memory-setting

indicator.

3. Body: Brass or bronze.

4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2.

5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. The Thermostatic Zone Valve shall have a solid brass body with corrosion-resistant internal

components. It shall include an integral check valve and strainer to prevent backflow and filter

debris from entering the valve. Zone temperature adjustment shall be from 100°F to 160°F

(38°C to 71°C) and is made using an Allen wrench and a locknut on the bonnet prevents

unauthorized or accidental temperature adjustment. Valve shall proportionally modulate to

maintain zone temperatures based on heat loss and shall stabilize pump demand to prevent

cycling. The TZV modulates its Cv from a maximum of 0.7 to a minimum of 0.05 with a 10°F

(5.6°C) change in zone temperature. The valve shall not have positive shut-off thereby

preventing pump dead-heading and/or subsequent overheating.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Acorn model TZV.

b. JRGutherm

c. Viega

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices:


following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.











221119 - 6


c. Leonard Valve Company.

d. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.



4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-

control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Digital Mixing Valve

1. Lead free digital water temperature control and monitoring system shall feature full-color

touchscreen interface which is configurable on location and does not require factory pre-

programming. System shall control water temperature to +/- 2°F in accordance with

ASSE 1017 and during periods of low/zero demand and feature a user-programmable

high temperature alarm. Unit shall feature Feed Forward or Predictive Control which

anticipates changes in system demand and adjusts valve pre-emptively to maintain mixed

set point. Controller shall be password protected and feature a user-adjustable outlet

temperature range of 80 - 180°F and an approach temperature of 2°F. System shall

digitally monitor inlet pressure and temperature, mixed outlet temperature, mixed outlet

set point, pressure and flow/BTUs (optional), as well as return temperature without the

use of an external module. System shall control an engineer specified recirculation pump

based on user-set return temperature limits. Controller shall integrate with building

automation systems through Bacnet and Modbus protocols and feature local and remote

temperature alarms. System will also feature a user-set and controlled, high-temperature

sanitization mode for use as part of user’s safe and properly designed thermal bacteria

eradication protocol. In the event of a power failure or loss of cold water, system will

close the hot water supply. System shall be listed/approved to ASSE 1017, cUPC, NSF,

CSA 24/UL873 and BTL (Bacnet Testing Laboratories) and should be mounted on a

heavy-duty welded strut with corrosion resistance coating and factory tested as a

complete unit. System shall be a Powers LFIS series as indicated on the drawings or

engineer approved equal.

C. Lead free, Lavatory, Tempering Valve:



a. Acorn Controls

b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Leonard Valve Company.

d. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Symmons Industries, Inc.

f. PPP Inc.

2. Description: IAPMO lab certified per ASSE 1070 at 0.25 gpm (1.0 lpm) and CSA

standards and shall have a solid brass body with corrosion resistant internal components.

It shall include integral checks with screens to prevent backflow and to filter debris from

entering the valve.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig maximum unless otherwise indicated.













221119 - 7

4. Flow: Valve shall provide 4.0 gpm with 3/8” compression connection and 4.5 gpm

capacity with the 1/2” NPT connection at 45 psi differential.

5. Tempered-Water Setting: 85-115° F

6. Thermostatic Mixing Valve and Water Regulator Finish: Rough bronze.

D. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


following:


b. Honeywell International Inc.

c. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

d. Leonard Valve Company.

e. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.

7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: per manufacturers recommendation.

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: per manufacturers recommendation.

c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: per manufacturers recommendation.

6. Drain: Pipe plug or Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.8 OUTLET BOXES

A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes:


following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc.

c. IPS Corporation.

d. LSP Products Group, Inc.

e. Oatey.

f. Plastic Oddities.

g. Symmons Industries, Inc.

h. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.


















221119 - 8

i. Whitehall Manufacturing; a div. of Acorn Engineering Company.

j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

2. Mounting: Recessed.

3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.

4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.

6. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping.

7. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch-long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female,

garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers.

8. Drain Hose: One 48-inch-long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked

end.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes:




b. IPS Corporation.

c. LSP Products Group, Inc.

d. Oatey.

2. Mounting: Recessed.

3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel or epoxy-painted-steel box and faceplate.

4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller

copper tube outlet.

5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.

2.9 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.


7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral or field-installation, nonremovable, drainable, hose-

connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011.

8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

9. Finish for Service Areas: Chrome or nickel plated.

10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.

13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Operating key.

14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.











221119 - 9

2.10 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:


following:

a. Josam Company.

b. MIFAB, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Watts Drainage Products.

e. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.


4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

10. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

11. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

12. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

B. Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:



a. Arrowhead Brass Products.

b. Mansfield Plumbing Products LLC.

c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

d. Prier Products, Inc.

e. Smith, Jay. R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

g. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc.

2. Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.

3. Type: Freeze-resistant, automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.

4. Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed or Type B, for

automatic draining with hose removed or with hose attached and nozzle closed.


6. Operation: Loose key.

7. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

8. Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.

9. Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

















221119 - 10

2.11 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

B. Gate-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 threaded or solder joint.

6. Outlet: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

C. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for ball valves or MSS SP-80 for gate valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 200-psig minimum CWP or Class 125.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy or ASTM B 62 bronze.

5. Drain: NPS 1/8 side outlet with cap.

2.12 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.


e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

g. Watts Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.











221119 - 11

2.13 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 1/2 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

B. Welded-Construction Automatic Air Vents:


2. Pressure Rating: 150-psig minimum pressure rating.

3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal.

4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel.

5. Size: NPS 3/8 minimum inlet.

6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.


A. Comply with requirements for general-duty metal valves in Section 220523 "General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2.15 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Flexicraft Industries.

3. Flex Pression, Ltd.

4. Flex-Weld Incorporated.

5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

6. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc.

7. Metraflex, Inc.


9. TOZEN Corporation.

10. Unaflex.Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company.

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering

and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel

wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.















221119 - 12

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

2.16 WATER METERS

A. This contractor shall be responsible for providing and install water meters and remote register

assembly as required by utility company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with


1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets

and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

D. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve and

pump.

E. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-

retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements

for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

F. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

G. Install air vents at high points of water piping.

H. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of

1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding





221119 - 13

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical

Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers.

2. Intermediate atmospheric-vent backflow preventers.

3. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.

4. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers.

5. Calibrated balancing valves.

6. Digital Mixing valves.

7. Primary water tempering valves.

8. Outlet boxes.

9. Trap-seal primer systems.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker and reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer

according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.



DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS


221123 - 1

SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.

2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

3. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated

capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and





221123 - 2


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of domestic-water pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. One Year.

1.10 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grundfos Pumps

Corp. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.

3. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless,

overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.










221123 - 3

C. Pump Construction:

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor

and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft

horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Plastic.

4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Refer to schedule on drawings.

2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


following:

1. Alyan Pump Co.



4. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, U.S.A.


B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-

impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted

horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with

NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe

connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.

3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket.

5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to

pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:










221123 - 4

2.3 VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Grundfos Pumps

Corp. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Alyan Pump Co.



4. Peerless Pump, Inc.


B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-

impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted

vertical.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with wear rings and threaded companion-flange

connections for pumps with NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps

with NPS 2-1/2 pipe connections. Include pump manufacturer's base attachment for

mounting pump on concrete base.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.

3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible or rigid type if pump is provided with coupling.

D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and rigidly mounted to pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:


2.4 MOTORS



for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load


2.5 CONTROLS

A. Pressure Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of water-supply pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion pressure sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Enclosure:

a. Indoor (dry): NEMA 1

b. Indoor (wet): NEMA 4

c. Indoor (corrosive): NEMA 4X (Stainless Steel)

d. Outdoor: NEMA 3R (gasketed)












221123 - 5

e. Indoor/Outdoor (explosion proof): NEMA 7.

3. Operation of Pump: On or off.

4. Transformer: Provide if required.

5. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

B. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

3. Enclosure:

a. Indoor (dry): NEMA 1

b. Indoor (wet): NEMA 4

c. Indoor (corrosive): NEMA 4X (Stainless Steel)

d. Outdoor: NEMA 3R (gasketed)

e. Indoor/Outdoor (explosion proof): NEMA 7.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Transformer: Provide if required.

6. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

7. Settings: Start pump at 115 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections

before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.

D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical.

E. Pump Mounting: Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with cast-

iron base mounted on concrete base using elastomeric mounts. Comply with requirements for

concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch.











221123 - 6

F. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to support pump

weight.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 220548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate

brackets or supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 220529

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

G. Install pressure switches in water supply piping.

H. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

I. Install timers.

J. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

b. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

c. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 221116

"Domestic Water Piping."

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected

piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty

Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in

Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

3. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and snubber

at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or

install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply

with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in Section 220519 "Meters

and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

D. Connect pressure switches, thermostats, time-delay relays, and timers to pumps that they

control.

E. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and

time-delay relay.




221123 - 7

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set pressure switches, thermostats, timers, and time-delay relays for automatic starting

and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

10. Adjust timer settings.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial domestic-

water pumps.



FACILITY GROUND-MOUNTED, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS


221218 - 1

SECTION 221218 - UNDERGROUND, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Single-Wall Underground Protected Steel Tanks for Domestic Water.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide protected steel, atmospheric, domestic water storage conforming to specifications and

engineers drawing.

B. All required labor, materials and equipment shall be included

C. The tank installation as shown on the plans and specified herein, is based on the equipment

furnished by one manufacturer. A proposed tank of differing materials will need prior approval

of the engineer.


A. Governing Standards, as applicable:

1. Tank manufacturer shall be in the business of manufacturing tanks to Underwriters

Laboratories (UL) Standard 58, 142, 1746.

2. Tank manufacturer shall be in the business of manufacturing tanks with materials

conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 22, Standards for Water Tanks for Private

Fire Protection

4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall comply with the requirements of Special Provisions and General Provisions

as well as Section 220500.

B. Shop Drawings shall include Plan and Section views of the tank and associated features. The

section view shall clearly identify elevations/clearances of all equipment, including all critical

dimensions and show locations of all fittings and accessories including man ways, vents, tank

overflow lines, suction connection and piping, tank fill lines, test header refill lines, heaters,

supervisory switches, float valves and access man way.




221218 - 2

C. The tank manufacturer's and installing contractor's standard published warranty shall be

included with the submittal information.

D. A complete submittal package for the proposed design shall be supplied to the Professional

prior to ordering. The package shall be complete and shall provide all information necessary to

substantiate conformance with these plans and specifications in all details. Any and all

deviations or exceptions shall be listed separately along with rational for acceptance of same.

E. Construction shall be governed by the drawings and specifications showing general dimensions

and construction details. Any deviations from the plans or specifications shall be clearly

indicated in the submittal package for approval by the Professional.

F. When approved, the approval by the Professional of the tank supplier's drawings shall be an

approval relating only to their general conformity with the bidding drawings and specifications

and shall not guarantee detail dimensions and quantities, which remains the Contractor's

responsibility.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Bacteriological test results.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period:

1. The manufacturer shall:

a. Warrant its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a

period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. The warranty shall be limited to

repair or replacement of the defective part(s).

b. Supply a ten (10) year limited warranty against external corrosion.




221218 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of design is Highland Tank & Mfg. Co., Inc.

One Highland Road

Stoystown, PA 15563

Phone 814-893-5701

Fax 814-893-6126

E-mail: [email protected]

Website: www.highlandtank.com

B. Acceptable alternative manufacturers:

1. PS International, Incorporated

2. Mass Tank

2.2 HIGHDRO® FACILITY UNDERGROUND SINGLE-WALL STEEL POTABLE WATER

STORAGE TANK(S)

A. HighDRO® Cylindrical, Underground single-wall steel tank(s) for the storage of potable water

near atmospheric pressure. The potable water storage tank:

1. Must be fabricated with a liner certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61: Drinking Water

System Components - Health Effects.

2. Shall be installed underground with top access near or above grade level.

B. Quantity: One (1)

C. Nominal Water Storage Tank Capacity: 8,000-gallons, as indicated on the drawings.

D. Nominal Dimensions:

1. Nominal Diameter: 8-feet, 0-inches, as indicated on the drawings.

2. Nominal Length: 21-feet, 4-inches, as indicated on the drawings.

E. Conformance:

1. The water storage tank shall be designed and fabricated in accordance with UL-58

Standard for Steel Underground Tanks, Single-Wall construction.

2. Pressure testing of new tank. The potable water tank, welds, seams and connecting

fittings must be factory-tested for tightness using standard engineering practices. Tank

must be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be tight.

3. Storage tank shall be coated for potable water service in accordance with AWWA D102.

4. Storage tank liner shall be certified to NSF/ANSI Standard 61: Drinking Water System

Components - Health Effects.

5. Potable water storage tank Corrosion Control System shall be in strict accordance with

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Subject UL-1746 Standard for External Corrosion

Protection Systems for Steel Underground Storage Tanks and HighGuard External

Corrosion Protection Specifications.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.highlandtank.com/




221218 - 4

6. The potable water storage tank shall have the structural strength to withstand static and

dynamic hydraulic loading while empty and during operating conditions

a. The potable water storage tank’s dimensions and thickness shall be in strict

compliance with Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain as presented in UL 58.

b. Calculations, signed and stamped by a Registered Professional Engineer shall be

submitted to document structural strength under specified overbearing or external

pressure.

F. Construction:

1. The potable water storage tank shall be cylindrical, horizontal, atmospheric-type steel

tank intended for storage of potable water.

a. Water storage tank shall be of single-wall construction.

b. Water storage tank shall be fabricated of 5/16” mild carbon steel with shell seams

of continuous lap weld construction.

c. The water storage tank shall be fabricated, inspected and pressure tested for

leakage before shipment from the factory by manufacturer as a completely

assembled, single vessel ready for installation. The water storage tank shall be a

pre-packaged, pre-engineered, ready to install unit. Sectionalized, bolted steel

storage tanks are not permissible.

2. Loading Conditions - Water storage tank shall meet the following design criteria:

a. Internal Load – Water storage tank shall withstand a 5-psig air test (3-psig for

>12’) with a 5:1 safety factor.

b. Vacuum Test - To verify structural integrity, water storage tank shall be designed

to withstand a vacuum test to 11.5” of mercury.

c. Surface Loads – Water storage tank to withstand surface H-20 axle loads when

installed per manufacturer’s installation instruction and PEI/RP100.

d. External Hydrostatic Pressure – Water storage tank shall be capable of being

buried in ground with five feet of overburden over the top of the tank, the hole

fully flooded and a safety factor of 5:1 against general buckling.

e. Ancillary Equipment – Water storage tank shall be capable of supporting internal

pump platforms, drop/fill/suction tubes, submersible pump(s) and ladders when

installed according to storage tank manufacturer’s current installation instructions.

3. Product Storage:

a. Storage tank shall be capable of storing water products with a specific gravity up

to 1.1

4. Threaded NPT Fittings: Stainless Steel (to prevent corrosion in threaded area).

5. Threaded fittings with thread protectors shall be supplied as follows:

a. 4-inch diameter, intended for vent usage, located as indicated on the drawings

b. 2-inch diameter, intended for manway vent usage, located as indicated on the

drawings

c. 2-inch diameter, intended for wiring conduit usage, located as indicated on the

drawings

6. Flanged Fittings: Flanged fittings with flange protectors shall be supplied as follows:

a. 4-inch diameter, Class: 150#, Type: RF (RF – Raised Face, FF – Flat Face /SO –

Slip On, WN –Weld Neck) Flange intended for filling riser pipe usage, located as

indicated on the drawings.

b. 2-inch diameter, Class: 150#, Type: RF (RF – Raised Face, FF – Flat Face /SO –

Slip On, WN –Weld Neck) Flange intended for discharge manifold usage, located

as indicated on the drawings.




221218 - 5

7. Manways and Extensions:

a. Manway and extension, circular, minimum 24” in diameter. Manway to be located

as indicated on the drawings. Extensions to terminate below grade at a distance

determined by the type of frame and cover at grade. Storage tank manways are not

meant for any type of traffic loading.

b. Manway and extension, rectangular, minimum 36”x36” in dimension. Manway to

be located as indicated on the drawings. Extensions to terminate below grade at a

distance determined by the type of frame and cover at grade. Storage tank

manways are not meant for any type of traffic loading.

c. Manway covers shall have surface handles.

8. Vent:

a. A vent assembly of 16 square inches open area in accordance with AWWA D100

shall be furnished and installed above the maximum water level of sufficient

capacity so that as maximum design rate of water fill or withdrawal, the resulting

interior design pressure / vacuum will not exceed = 2.0 / -0.5 ounces per square

inch.

b. The vent shall be so designed in construction as to prevent the entrance of birds

and/or animals by including a 4 mesh (1/4” opening size) galvanized screen. If

required by the contract drawings, a 16 mesh (1/16” opening size) galvanized

screen will be installed to prevent the entrance of insects. However, if the storage

tank is located in an area where heavy frost is common during the winter months

an additional pressure / vacuum relief must also be provided.

9. Corrosion Protection System:

a. Exterior Protective Coating:

1) Surface Preparation: Steel Grit blast - SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3 Commercial

Blast Cleaning.

2) Finish: External surfaces coated with 75 mils DFT HighGuard Self-

Reinforcing Polyurethane.

a) Polyurethane coating shall have a high cross-link density, which is, in

essence, self-reinforcing or self-fibrating. Artificial fillers or

reinforcement (chopped fiberglass or FRP roving) shall not be

permitted.

b) Coating shall be subjected to a 15,000-volt spark test after application

to ensure coating integrity and effective corrosion protection.

b. Interior Protective Coating:

1) Surface Preparation: Steel Grit blast - SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, Near-

White Blast Cleaning.

2) Finish: Internal surfaces coated with 15 mils DFT HighDRO®-Liner Plus

Polyurethane Lining

a) The lining must comply with NSF/ANSI 61 - Approved for potable

water.

b) The liner shall be applied on all internal surfaces in accordance with

AWWA D102, ICS #4.

10. Lifting lugs shall be provided at balancing points to facilitate water storage tank handling

and installation.

11. Identification plates: Plates to be affixed in prominent location and be durable and

legible throughout equipment life.




221218 - 6

G. HighDRO® Potable Water Storage Tank(s) Options/Accessories:

1. UL listed Liquid Level Sensors and Controls:

a. Water storage tank(s) shall be supplied with a control panel system that provides

operation and status of the tank and pumps.

b. Level sensor to be a tank-suspended pressure transducer.

1) Refer to Section 221000

c. Critical low floats for cistern pump dry run protection.

1) Refer to Section 221000

2) Model # ENM-10

d. The control panel shall be NEMA Type 1 steel enclosure.

1) Quantity: 1

2) Manufacturer: Highland Tank

3) Model # HT-RWHS-CP

4) Voltage: 3/60/208

5) Logic: PLC

2. Cistern Pumps:

a. Pump Type – Submersible

1) Quantity – 2

2) Manufacturer: Grundfos

3) Model # 45S50-9

4) Voltage: 3/60/208

5) HP: 5HP

6) Discharge: 2”

7) Duty Point: 40GPM @ 90PSI

8) Housing: Stainless Steel Can Assembly for horizontal placement.

9) Suction: Integrated strainer on S.S. Housing.

b. Pump Operation – VFD

1) Quantity: 2

2) Manufacturer: Grundfos

3) Model # CUE 3x200-240V

4) Voltage: 3/60/208

c. Pressure Transducer

1) Quantity: 2

2) Manufacturer: Danfoss

3) Model # MBS 3000

4) Voltage: 24VDC

d. Expansion Tank

1) Quantity: 1

2) Manufacturer: Elbi

3) Model # WTL-500

3. Polyester Hold-down straps:

a. When water storage tank(s) anchoring is required, manufacturer provided

corrosion resistant polyester hold-down straps with turnbuckles and a cable

restraint system will be provided.

b. Steel hold-down straps with neoprene liners shall be provided where polyester

straps are not applicable.




221218 - 7

4. Prefabricated Concrete Deadman Anchors:

a. Pre-engineered and pre-fabricated concrete deadman anchors may be an acceptable

means of anchoring the water storage tank(s) provided buoyancy calculations are

submitted and signed by an engineer of the tank manufacturer.

b. The concrete deadmen must be supplied by the tank manufacturer and have been a

standard product for at least five years.

c. All pre-fabricated concrete deadmen shall be sized and installed in accordance

with the tank manufacturer’s guidelines.

5. Cylindrical and/or rectangular steel Grade Level Manways designed to AASHTO H20

requirements:

a. Grade Access Manways will consist of:

1) Structural steel frames with integral concrete anchors and 12” deep steel

concrete retention skirts. Manway access covers shall be flush style, skid

free composite construction with recessed picking handles for easy removal.

All manways will be H-20 truckload rated. Manways shall be furnished by

tank manufacturer.

2) Level sensor riser pipes shall be recessed below one single grade access

manway or multiple manways as shown on contract drawings.

3) All grade access manways for a complete storage tank installation shall be

supplied by the manufacturer for single source supply.

6. Fill Tube:

a. Provide Fill tube per drawings.

b. Pipe shall be stainless steel and terminate per drawing.

7. Internal Ladder:

a. Ladder shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with OSHA 1910.27 of [

carbon steel, coated per AWWA D102 ICS #4 utilizing 15 mils DFT HighDRO®-

Liner Plus Polyurethane lining; NSF/ANSI 61 approved for potable water.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installation and testing shall be in strict accordance with the Highland Tank’s HighDRO®

Potable Water Storage Tank’s Installation Instructions available at www.highlandtank.com.

B. No modifications shall be made to the water storage tank(s) without the prior written approval

of the manufacturer and the Engineer. This includes any welding on tank shell, adding

penetrations, modifying the tank structure, or repairing damage that might affect the integrity of

the water storage tank(s).

C. Contractor shall install water storage tank(s), piping, and equipment (valves, sensors, pumps,

vents, gauges, etc.) in accordance with the manufacturers' installation instructions, industry

standard recommended practices and federal, state and local regulations.

D. Water storage tank(s) shall be handled, lifted, stored, and secured in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

http://www.highlandtank.com/




221218 - 8

E. Securely store the tank at the job site. The location should be selected to minimize tank

relocations as work progresses.

F. The hazards associated with the cleaning, entry, inspection, testing, maintenance or other

aspects of storage tank(s) are significant. Safety considerations and controls should be

established prior to undertaking physical activities associated with storage tank(s).

G. Never enter a storage tank or enclosed space, under any condition, without proper training and

OSHA approved equipment. (Consult OSHA guidelines 29 CPR, Part 1910 “Permit Required

Confined Spaces.”)

H. Entry and cleaning of water storage tank(s) must be per federal (OSHA), state, and local

regulations as well as company requirements.

I. Familiarity with the Site.

1. Contractor shall familiarize self with the location of all public utility facilities and

structures that may be found in the vicinity of the construction.

2. The Contractor shall conduct his operation to avoid damage to the utilities or structures.

3. The Contractor is responsible for meeting all the requirements established by the agencies

for utility work, as well as work affecting utilities and other government agencies.

4. Regional and local building codes authorities shall be consulted for local requirements.

5. Notify the Engineer of any local requirements not incorporated in the system as designed.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine excavation to receive underground potable water storage tank(s).

B. Notify site supervisor or engineer of conditions that would adversely affect installation.

C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. The site shall be prepared to ensure adequate support for the water storage tank and drainage of

surface water.

B. Water storage tanks located in areas subject to flooding must be protected against flotation.

C. Maintain legal separation distances from property lines, buildings, public ways, and other

storage tanks. Caution: Distance requirements vary significantly between jurisdictions.

D. Air Test (if required):

1. Perform air test of water storage tank(s) above ground before installation in accordance

with manufacturer’s instructions in Highland Tank Installation Instructions or with

PEI/RP100.

2. Test Pressure: 5 psi maximum.

3. Bubble solution applied to welded seams.




221218 - 9

E. Before Placing Water Storage Tank(s) in Excavation:

1. Remove dirt clods and similar foreign matter from storage tank(s).

2. Visually inspect storage tank(s) for damage.

3. Notify site supervisor of damage to storage tank(s).

4. Repair or spark test damaged areas of storage tank coating in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions in Highland Tank Installation Instructions.

a. Spark Testing: Set holiday detector at a minimum of 10,000 volts.

b. Coat holidays, damaged storage tank(s) coating, and exposed steel surfaces in

accordance with manufacturer’s instructions with compatible coating furnished by

tank manufacturer.

c. Retest holidays at 10,000 volts.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install underground HighDRO® Potable Water Storage Tank(s) in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions in Highland Tank Installation Instructions and PEI/RP100.

B. Install water storage tank(s) at locations and to elevations indicated on the Drawings.

C. Ensure water storage tank(s) excavation is free from materials that may cause damage to storage

tank(s) or tank’s coating.

D. Do not allow foreign matter to be introduced into excavation or backfill during water storage

tank(s) installation.

E. Bottom of Excavation: Cover with clean sand or gravel to depth indicated on the Drawings,

suitably graded and leveled.

F. HighDRO® Potable Water Storage Tank(s) Placed on Concrete Pad for Anchoring Purposes.

1. Concrete for Pad: Specified in Section 03 30 00.

2. Do not place water storage tank(s) directly on concrete pad.

3. Spread layer of fine gravel, pea gravel, clean sand, or ASTM D 448 #8 coarse aggregate a

minimum of 6 inches deep, evenly spread over dimensions of concrete pad to separate

water storage tank(s) from pad.

4. Water Storage Tank(s) Bedding Material for Installation in Tidal Area: Fine gravel or

pea gravel.

G. HighDRO® Potable Water Storage Tank(s) Handling:

1. Ensure equipment to handle water storage tank(s) is of adequate size to lift and lower

storage tank(s) without dragging, dropping, or damaging storage tank or tank’s coating.

2. Carefully lift and lower water storage tank(s) with cables or chains of adequate length

attached to lifting lugs provided.

3. Use spreader bar where necessary.

4. Do not use chains or slings around water storage tank’s shell.

5. Maneuver storage tanks with guidelines attached to each end of the tank.

H. Hold-Down Straps:

1. Install polyester hold-down in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions in Highland

Tank Installation Instructions.




221218 - 10

2. If steel hold-down straps are used, ensure hold-down straps are separated from water

storage tank by separating pads made of inert, insulation dielectric material.

3. Separating Pads:

a. Minimum 2 inches wider than width of hold-down straps.

b. Place separating pads at locations on water storage tank where hold-down straps

could come into direct contact with storage tank shell.

I. Backfill:

1. Backfill Material: Clean sand, ASTM D 448 #8 crushed aggregate or fine gravel.

2. Place backfill material along bottom side of water storage tank(s) by shoveling and

tamping to ensure storage tank(s) are fully and evenly supported around bottom quadrant.

3. Deposit backfill material carefully around and over water storage tank(s) to avoid damage

to storage tank(s) and tank coating.

4. Deposit backfill material to depth over water storage tank(s) as indicated on the

Drawings.

J. Plugs:

1. Remove plugs at unused water storage tank(s) openings, add pipe compound, and

reinstall plugs in unused openings.

2. Do not cross-thread or damage storage tank(s) fittings when replacing plugs or installing

tank’s piping.

K. Before Placing Backfill Over Potable Water Storage Tank(s):

1. Final Inspection: Visually inspect water storage tank(s), tank coating, and pipe

connections.

3.5 ELECTRICAL

A. Installation of all electrical components including (Electric level sensors, alarm/control panels,

electronic valves, pumps, etc.):

1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers' installation instructions and shall

conform to state and local electrical codes with special attention to compliance with

requirements for work in classified areas.

2. Provide proper electrical junction boxes, conduit and seal offs as specified in Article 500

514 of the National Electrical Code.

3. Contractor shall provide wiring and seal-offs for all conduits.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed underground steel potable water storage tank(s) from damage during

construction.

3.7 START-UP, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

A. HighDRO® Potable Water Storage Tank(s) shall be started, operated and maintained according

to the Highland Tank Installation Instructions in effect at time of installation.




221218 - 11

B. Calibration and start-up of ancillary equipment shall be performed by factory-trained and

qualified personnel

3.8 TESTING

A. Tank shall be tested according to the Highland Tank Installation Manual and Operating

Guidelines in effect at time of installation.



FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS


221223 - 1

SECTION 221223 - FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel, precharged, potable-water storage tanks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

B. LDPE: Low-density polyethylene plastic.


A. Seismic Performance: Steel water tanks shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."




and profiles, and finishes for water storage tanks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For steel water storage tanks, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.








221223 - 2



B. Product Certificates: For each type of potable-water storage tank, from manufacturer.


D. Purging and disinfecting reports.


A. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label steel, ASME-code, potable-water

storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure

Vessels," Division 1.

B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for potable-

water storage tanks. Include appropriate NSF marking.

1.8 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL, PRECHARGED, POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

A. Steel, Precharged, Bladder, Water Storage Tanks:



a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Flo Fab inc.

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Wessels Company.

e. Wood, John Co.

2. Description: Steel, vertical, pressured-rated tank with cylindrical sidewalls and with air-

charging valve and air precharge.

3. Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist

tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building

structure.

4. Operation: Factory-installed, butyl-rubber bladder.

B. Construction: ASME code, steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, for 125-psig

working pressure.

C. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: ASME B1.20.1, with female thread.










221223 - 3

2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: ASME B16.5, flanged.

D. Specialties and Accessories: Include tappings in tank and the following:

1. Pressure gage.

E. Vertical Tank Supports: Factory-fabricated steel legs or steel skirt, welded to tank before

testing and labeling.

F. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for

potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

1. Lining Material: Antimicrobial Liner Neutralizes Bacteria on Contact.

G. Exterior Coating: Red Oxide Primer.


A. Test and inspect potable-water storage tanks according to the following tests and inspections

and prepare test reports:

1. Pressure Testing for ASME-Code, Potable-Water Storage Tanks: Hydrostatically test to

ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks. Fill tanks with water, vent air,

pressurize to 1-1/2 times tank pressure rating, disconnect test equipment, hold pressure

for 30 minutes with no drop in pressure, and check for leaks.

B. Repair or replace tanks that fail test with new tanks, and repeat until test is satisfactory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install water storage tanks on concrete bases, level and plumb, firmly anchored. Arrange so

devices needing servicing are accessible.

1. Install horizontal tanks on fabricated steel supports and saddles.

B. Install tank seismic restraints.

C. Install thermometers and pressure gages on water storage tanks and piping if indicated.

Thermometers and pressure gages are specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for

Plumbing Piping."

D. Install the following devices on tanks where indicated:

1. Pressure relief valves.

2. Temperature and pressure relief valves.

3. Vacuum relief valves.

4. Tank vents on nonpressure tanks.

5. Connections to accessories.

E. After installing tanks with factory finish, inspect finishes and repair damages to finishes.




221223 - 4

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to potable-water storage tanks to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect water piping to water storage tanks with unions or flanges and with shutoff valves.

Connect tank drains with shutoff valves and discharge over closest floor drains.

1. General-duty valves are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing

Piping."

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Gate or ball.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Gate or butterfly.

c. Drain Valves: NPS 3/4 gate or ball valve. Include outlet with, or nipple in outlet

with, ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH thread for garden-hose service, threaded cap,

and chain.

2. Water Piping Connections: Make connections to dissimilar metals with dielectric

fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in



A. Perform the following final checks before filling:

1. Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct.

2. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.

3. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.

a. Manually operate pressure relief valves.

b. Adjust pressure settings.

4. Verify that vacuum relief valves are correct size.

a. Manually operate vacuum relief valves.

b. Adjust vacuum settings.

B. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to

operating level.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable-water storage tanks.

B. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if

method is not prescribed, use procedure described in AWWA C652 or as described below:

1. Purge water storage tanks with potable water.




221223 - 5

2. Disinfect tanks by one of the following methods:

a. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine.

Isolate tanks and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Fill tanks with water-chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine.

Isolate tanks and allow to stand for three hours.

3. Flush tanks, after required standing time, with clean, potable water until chlorine is not

present in water coming from tank.

4. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat

procedure if biological examination made by authorities having jurisdiction shows

evidence of contamination.

C. Prepare written reports for purging and disinfecting activities.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING


221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

3. Copper tube and fittings.

4. PVC pipe and fittings.

5. Specialty pipe fittings.



B. Shop Drawings: For hubless, single-stack drainage system. Include plans, elevations, sections,

and details.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.



2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and

their installation requirements.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.




221316 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working

pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2. Waste, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand

the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting


2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. AB & I Foundry; a part of the McWane family of companies.

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Tyler Pipe; a part of McWane family of companies.

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

D. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.


following:




C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


following:

a. ANACO-Husky – Model HD 2000














221316 - 3

b. Ideal Triton – Model “HD”

c. MiFAB – Model “MI-XHub”

d. Mission Rubber Company – Model “Heavy Weight”

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: no hub fittings with

stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564,

rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. Sizes 1-1/2”-4” shall have minimum of (4)

sealing bands, Sizes 5”-10” piping shall have minimum of (6) sealing bands.

D. No-hub Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fitting Restraints:

1. Description: CISPI Designation 301-12 large diameter no-hub cast iron fittings, over 4

inch (102 mm) in size, with supplemental support to minimize the risk of joints

separation under high thrust conditions. Auxiliary restraint products used shall be

manufactured assemblies with thrust pressure rating adequate for the specific installation.

Field devised methods and materials are not permitted.

a. HOLDRITE 117 Series No Hub Fitting Restraints.


A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,

solder-joint fittings.

C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and Type M, water tube, drawn temper.

D. Copper Pressure Fittings:

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper,

solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket,

metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic

piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping

and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.





221316 - 4

2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.

2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:

1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

3) Fernco Proflex

4) Anaco Husky 4300 series

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

3. Pressure Transition Couplings:


of the following:

1) Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.


3) Dresser, Inc.

4) EBAA Iron, Inc.

5) Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

6) Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

7) JCM Industries, Inc.

8) Romac Industries, Inc.

9) Viking Johnson.

b. Standard: AWWA C219.

c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to,

and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.

e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric Unions:


of the following:

1) A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

2) Capitol Manufacturing Company.

3) Central Plastics Company.

4) HART Industrial Unions, LLC.

5) Jomar Valve.

6) Matco-Norca.

7) WATTS.

8) Wilkins.

9) Zurn Industries, LLC.



























221316 - 5

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.

2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2. Dielectric Flanges:


of the following:



3) Matco-Norca.

4) WATTS.

5) Wilkins.


b. Description:


2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.


4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


of the following:

1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2) Calpico, Inc.


4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

4. Dielectric Nipples:


of the following:

1) Elster Perfection Corporation.

2) Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company.

3) Josam Company.

4) Matco-Norca.

5) Precision Plumbing Products.


b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

2) Electroplated steel nipple.

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.























221316 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. All underground piping shall be laid on a 6” sand bed and backfilled with clean fine earth



C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.



otherwise.







K. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices

specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

L. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.




221316 - 7

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to

back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

M. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place

hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

N. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

O. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

P. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

R. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage

force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste

Piping Specialties."

S. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve

Seals for Plumbing Piping."




221316 - 8

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813,

water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install

gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with

keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION


1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

4. In Underground Force Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.


1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220523.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping,"

Section 220523.13 "Butterfly Valves for Plumbing Piping," Section 220523.14 "Check Valves




221316 - 9

for Plumbing Piping," and Section 220523.15 "Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-

duty valve installation requirements.

B. Shutoff Valves:

1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge.

C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage

pump discharge.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:







C. Install hangers for cast-iron steel and copper soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities

having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

E. Support vertical runs of cast iron steel and copper soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally

enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Support of piping and equipment by means of engineered products designed for each

application. Comply with manufacturer's design load capacities. Makeshift, field-devised

methods such as use of scrap materials, plumber's tape, tie wires and similar methods are not

permitted.

G. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,


structure.


washers, and other accessories with the use of manufactured products, designed for each

specific application. Makeshift, field-devised, methods shall not be employed.




221316 - 10





K. Install Cast Iron pipe in compliance with all U S soil pipe and fitting manufacturers' installation

instructions and per CISPI Designation 310-11, CISPI Designation 301-09 and the CISPI Cast

Iron Soil Pipe Handbook, regarding auxiliary support for ho-hub cast iron pipe and fitting joints

over 4 inches (102 mm) in size and for joints subjected to excessive thrust forces, use

manufactured assemblies with appropriate thrust pressure ratings, rather than field assembled

miscellaneous materials.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required

by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:








221316 - 11

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for



A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

3.10 TESTING

A. Required tests. The permit holder shall make the applicable tests prescribed in Sections B

through G below to determine compliance with the provisions of this code. The permit holder

shall give reasonable advance notice to the code official when the plumbing work is ready for

tests. The equipment, material, power and labor necessary for the inspection and test shall be

furnished by the permit holder and he or she shall be responsible for determining that the work

will withstand the test pressure prescribed in the following tests. All plumbing system piping

shall be tested with either water or, for piping systems other than plastic, by air. After the

plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage system

shall be submitted to final tests. The code official shall require the removal of any cleanouts if

necessary to ascertain whether the pressure has reached all parts of the system.

B. Test gauges. Gauges used for testing shall be as follows:

1. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall utilize a testing gauge having increments

of 0.10 psi or less.

2. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than or equal to 100 psi shall

utilize a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less.

3. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall utilize a testing gauge having

increments of 2 psi or less.

C. Drainage and vent water test. A water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its

entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly

closed, except the highest opening, and the system shall be filled with water to the point of

overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the

highest openings of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no

section shall be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at




221316 - 12

least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested so that no joint or pipe in the

building, except the uppermost 10 feet of the system, shall have been submitted to a test of less

than a 10 foot head of water. This pressure shall be held for at least 15 minutes. The system

shall then be tight at all points.

D. Drainage and vent air test. An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until there is

a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi). This pressure shall be held for a test

period of at least 15 minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of changes

in ambient temperature or the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of the test

period.

E. Drainage and vent final test. The final test of the completed drainage and vent system shall be

visual and in sufficient detail to determine compliance with the provisions of this code except

that the plumbing shall be subjected to a smoke test where required by the local code official.

Where the smoke test is utilized, it shall be made by filling all traps with water and then

introducing into the entire system a pungent, thick smoke produced by one or more smoke

machines. When the smoke appears at stack openings on the roof, the stack openings shall be

closed and a pressure equivalent to a 1–inch water column shall be held for a test period of not

less than 15 minutes.

F. Gravity sewer test. Gravity sewer tests shall consist of plugging the end of the building sewer at

the point of connection with the public sewer, filling the building sewer with water, testing with

not less than a 10-foot head of water and maintaining such pressure for 15 minutes.

G. Forced sewer test. Forced sewer tests shall consist of plugging the end of the building sewer at

the point of connection with the public sewer and applying a pressure of 5 psi greater than the

shut off pump rating, and maintaining such pressure for 15 minutes.

H. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

I. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.




221316 - 13


A. Refer to Schedule on drawings.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES


221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Roof flashing assemblies.

3. Through-penetration firestop assemblies.

4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.


A. Shop Drawings:

1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For FOG disposal systems, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.









A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.




221319 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components.


a qualified testing, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:



a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

e. WATTS.

f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.

c. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

d. WATTS.

e. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Type: Adjustable housing.

5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

6. Outlet Connection: Inside calk or Spigot.

7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

















221319 - 3

12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.


e. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test

tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure Plug:

a. Brass or Cast iron.

b. Countersunk head.

c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw.

d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:



the following:


b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.


2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch-thick, lead

flashing collar and skirt extending at least 10 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot

reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2.4 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies:



the following:

a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve-and-stack fitting with firestopping plug.

3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack.

4. Sleeve: Molded-PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

















221319 - 4

5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap

for plug.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,

cast-iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where

required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564 rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.

B. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping

and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

D. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

of fitting that will extend 2 inches above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe

extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

E. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating

roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

F. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include

vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Expansion Joints:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4.

2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland.

3. End Connections: Matching connected piping.




221319 - 5

4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping.

2.6 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Section 220513 "Common Motor

Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, motor shall be large enough, so

driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

E. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor

penetrations.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

F. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.




221319 - 6

J. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

L. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

M. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy

access and maintenance.

N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required.

C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.




221319 - 7


A. Tests and Inspections:




equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



SANITARY DRAINS


221319.13 - 1

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:




b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.


e. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.


4. Trap Pattern: deep seal P-trap.









SANITARY DRAINS


221319.13 - 2

5. All floor drains throughout building shall be provided with a barrier trap seal device to

minimize trap evaporation. Device shall comply with the performance requirements of

ASSE 1072 standard.

a. JR Smith Quad Close 2692

b. Zurn Z1072

c. Rectorseal Sure Seal

d. Or engineer approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for backwater

valves, air admittance devices and miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for



SANITARY DRAINS


221319.13 - 3

3.4 PROTECTION




END OF SECTION 221319.13


FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING


221413 - 1

SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

3. Specialty pipe and fittings.

4. Encasement for underground metal piping.




A. Coordination Drawings: Detail storm drainage piping. Show support locations, type of support,

weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Structural members to which drainage piping will be attached or suspended from.




1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of storm drainage service.




221413 - 2

2. Do not proceed with interruption of storm drainage service without Construction

Manager's and Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water.



B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting


2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON STORM PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:




B. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Marked with CISPI collective trademark and NSF certification mark.

2. Class: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

D. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON STORM PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings:

1. Marked with CISPI collective trademark and NSF certification mark.

2. Standard: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.


following:















221413 - 3

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


following:

a. ANACO-Husky – Model HD 2000

b. Ideal Triton – Model “HD”

c. MiFAB – Model “MI-XHub”

d. Mission Rubber Company – Model “Heavy Weight”

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: no hub fittings with

stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564,

rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. Sizes 1-1/2”-4” shall have minimum of (4)

sealing bands, Sizes 5”-10” piping shall have minimum of (6) sealing bands.

D. No-hub Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fitting Restraints:

1. Description: CISPI Designation 301-12 large diameter no-hub cast iron fittings, over 4

inch (102 mm) in size, with supplemental support to minimize the risk of joints

separation under high thrust conditions. Auxiliary restraint products used shall be

manufactured assemblies with thrust pressure rating adequate for the specific installation.

Field devised methods and materials are not permitted.

a. HOLDRITE 117 Series No Hub Fitting Restraints.

2.5 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS


1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in ODs

or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes

to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-

system fitting.

3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to the following:


2) Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

3) Fernco Proflex

4) Anaco Husky 4200

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

d. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

4. Pressure Transition Couplings:


of the following:


2) EBAA Iron, Inc.

3) Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).

4) JCM Industries, Inc.















221413 - 4

b. Standard: AWWA C219.

c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type couplings same size as pipes to be joined, and with

pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with pipes to be joined.

d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.

e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.

f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.


1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:


of the following:

1) A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.



4) HART Industrial Unions, LLC.

5) Jomar Valve.

6) Matco-Norca.

7) WATTS.


b. Description:



3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:


of the following:


2) Matco-Norca.

3) WATTS.


b. Description:


2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.


4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


of the following:

1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2) Calpico, Inc.


4) GPT; an EnPro Industries company.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.























221413 - 5

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel-backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:


of the following:

1) Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company.

2) Matco-Norca.

3) Precision Plumbing Products.


b. Description: Electroplated steel nipple.

c. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

d. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

e. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

f. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in

Section 312000 "Earth Moving."



systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. All underground piping shall be laid on a 6” sand bed and backfilled with clean fine earth




and service areas.



otherwise.












221413 - 6




K. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices

specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."

L. Make changes in direction for piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

2. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

M. Lay buried building piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place

hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

N. Install piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

O. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

P. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building

storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage

force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221423 "Storm

Drainage Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221423 "Storm Drainage

Piping Specialties."

Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve

Seals for Plumbing Piping."




221413 - 7

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."


A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron

Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Caulked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum caulked joints.

C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints:

1. Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for

hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Joint Restraints and Sway Bracing:

1. Provide joint restraints and sway bracing for storm drainage piping joints to comply with

the following conditions:

a. Provide axial restraint for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction, branches, and changes in diameter greater

than two pipe sizes.

b. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 4 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction 45 degrees and greater.

c. Provide rigid sway bracing for pipe and fittings 5 inches and larger, upstream and

downstream of all changes in direction and branch openings.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION


1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

3. In Aboveground Force-Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings.

4. In Underground Force-Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings.

b. NPS 2 and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.


1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.

4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.




221413 - 8

3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices specified in

Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:







C. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

E. Support vertical cast-iron piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent, but as a minimum at

base and at each floor.

F. Support of piping and equipment by means of engineered products designed for each

application. Comply with manufacturer's design load capacities. Makeshift, field-devised

methods such as use of scrap materials, plumber's tape, tie wires and similar methods are not

permitted.

G. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,


structure.


washers, and other accessories with the use of manufactured products, designed for each

specific application. Makeshift, field-devised, methods shall not be employed.





K. Install Cast Iron pipe in compliance with all U S soil pipe and fitting manufacturers' installation

instructions and per CISPI Designation 310-11, CISPI Designation 301-09 and the CISPI Cast

Iron Soil Pipe Handbook, regarding auxiliary support for ho-hub cast iron pipe and fitting joints




221413 - 9

over 4 inches (102 mm) in size and for joints subjected to excessive thrust forces, use

manufactured assemblies with appropriate thrust pressure ratings, rather than field assembled

miscellaneous materials.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:





3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for



A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3.9 TESTING

A. Required tests. The permit holder shall make the applicable tests prescribed in Sections B

through G below to determine compliance with the provisions of this code. The permit holder

shall give reasonable advance notice to the code official when the plumbing work is ready for

tests. The equipment, material, power and labor necessary for the inspection and test shall be

furnished by the permit holder and he or she shall be responsible for determining that the work




221413 - 10

will withstand the test pressure prescribed in the following tests. All plumbing system piping

shall be tested with either water or, for piping systems other than plastic, by air. After the

plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, the entire drainage system

shall be submitted to final tests. The code official shall require the removal of any cleanouts if

necessary to ascertain whether the pressure has reached all parts of the system.

B. Test gauges. Gauges used for testing shall be as follows:

1. Tests requiring a pressure of 10 psi or less shall utilize a testing gauge having increments

of 0.10 psi or less.

2. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 10 psi but less than or equal to 100 psi shall

utilize a testing gauge having increments of 1 psi or less.

3. Tests requiring a pressure of greater than 100 psi shall utilize a testing gauge having

increments of 2 psi or less.

C. Storm Drainage system test. A water test shall be applied to the drainage system either in its

entirety or in sections. If applied to the entire system, all openings in the piping shall be tightly

closed, except the highest opening, and the system shall be filled with water to the point of

overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged except the

highest openings of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no

section shall be tested with less than a 10 foot head of water. In testing successive sections, at

least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested so that no joint or pipe in the

building, except the uppermost 10 feet of the system, shall have been submitted to a test of less

than a 10 foot head of water. This pressure shall be held for at least 15 minutes. The system

shall then be tight at all points.

D. Storm Drainage system air test. An air test shall be made by forcing air into the system until

there is a uniform gauge pressure of 5 pounds per square inch (psi). This pressure shall be held

for a test period of at least 15 minutes. Any adjustments to the test pressure required because of

changes in ambient temperature or the seating of gaskets shall be made prior to the beginning of

the test period.

E. Storm Drainage system final test. The final test of the completed drainage and vent system shall

be visual and in sufficient detail to determine compliance with the provisions of this code

except that the plumbing shall be subjected to a smoke test where required by the local code

official. Where the smoke test is utilized, it shall be made by filling all traps with water and then

introducing into the entire system a pungent, thick smoke produced by one or more smoke

machines. When the smoke appears at stack openings on the roof, the stack openings shall be

closed and a pressure equivalent to a 1–inch water column shall be held for a test period of not

less than 15 minutes.

F. Gravity Storm sewer test. Gravity storm sewer tests shall consist of plugging the end of the

building storm sewer at the point of connection with the public storm sewer, filling the building

storm sewer with water, testing with not less than a 10-foot head of water and maintaining such

pressure for 15 minutes.

G. Forced storm sewer test. Forced storm sewer tests shall consist of plugging the end of the

building storm sewer at the point of connection with the public storm sewer and applying a

pressure of 5 psi greater than the shut off pump rating, and maintaining such pressure for 15

minutes.




221413 - 11

H. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until


I. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

J. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete

with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure:

a. Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in.

b. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not

less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until


5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

K. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

L. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.


A. Refer to schedule on drawings



STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES


221423 - 1

SECTION 221423 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal roof drains.

2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.

3. Cleanouts.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of Design - Froet Industries, LLC, PO Box 787, 1741 Industrial Drive, Sterling, Illinois

61081. Phone 815-626-7922. Fax 815-626-0702. Website www.froetindustries.com. E-mail

[email protected].

B. Alternate drain manufactures subject to approval by engineer and compliance with requirements

below.

1. Josam Company.


3. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

4. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

http://www.froetindustries.com/





221423 - 2

2.2 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof Drains: “Froet Drain” bi-functional roof drains.

1. Dual Outlets: 100C(2,3,4,5,6,8)

a. Primary Drain Outlet: Attached to storm sewer.

b. Overflow Drain Outlet: Attached to relieve area outside of building, separate from

primary drain system. Indicated on the Drawings.

2. Compliance:

a. ANSI/ASME A112.6.4.

b. IAPMO IGC 187.

c. ICC-ES LC 1021.

3. Body:

a. Bi-functional.

b. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 25.

c. One piece casting including both outlets free of internal bosses

d. Anchor flange.

e. Powder coated.

f. Overflow riser pipe must be removable

4. Dome Strainer:

a. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 25.

b. Minimum Free Area by drain size: [2”-30 in2] [3’-62 in2] [4”-62 in2] [5”-95 in2]

[6’-95 in2] [8”-163 in2]

5. Waterproofing Membrane Clamp Ring:

a. Width: 2.375 inches (61 mm).

b. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 25.

c. Integral Gravel Stop: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) height minimum.

d. Anchorage: Four 1.5” bolts pre-applied with anti-seize

e. Free area height above roof: 1/4-inch

6. Pipe Size: Indicated on the Drawings.

7. Low-Profile Bi-functional Roof Drains:

a. Primary Strainer: 3 inches (76 mm) high.

b. Overflow Inlet: 4 inches (102 mm) high.

8. Finishing Ring: Recessed ring to allow drain body to be installed in flush configuration,

either directly to roof deck or into drain pan.

9. Overflow Strainer:

a. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 25.

b. Minimum free area by drain size; (2-73 in2), (3-105 in2), (4-105 in2), (5-146 in2),

(6-146 in2), (8-200 in2)

c. Type: Standard.

d. Debris strainer for overflow pipe.

e. Vandal resistant.

B. Alternate drainage systems:

1. Alternate overflow roof drains must be installed so as not to allow the overflow drain to

flow prematurely nor allow excessive loading of overflow water. This installation shall

conform to all governing local and state codes.

2. Alternate roof drain manufacture shall provide documentation certifying the proper

location and placement of the primary and overflow drains to assure proper operation of

drainage system.




221423 - 3

3. Installation of two-drain system shall be warranted by the installing contractor in regards

to the correct lateral and vertical placement of the overflow drain.

C. Bi-functional Drains

1. Casted Drain Bodies: Drain Bodies (sump) shall be one complete unit and shall also

include the outlet connections within the casting and must comply with LC 1021 in

regards to sump free area.

2. Bi-Functional drains must have removable overflow pipe riser or provide access to

primary system to facilitate full pipe rodding of primary system from roof.

3. Separate strainers must be provided for the primary and overflow systems. Drains using

one strainer for both systems are not allowed.

D. Standard Primary Drains

1. Roof Drains: 200C (3, 4, 5, 6,) Standard primary roof drain single outlet

2. Compliance:

a. ANSI/ASME A112.6.4-2003,

3. Body:

a. Cast Iron, ASTM A 48, Class 25

b. Body with anchor flange and fully cast sump which includes the outlet within the

casting.

c. Smooth sump walls for maximum flow ability no boss obstructions.

d. Bolts holes drilled and tapped to1.5” depth Powder coated

4. Dome Strainer:

a. Cast Iron, ASTM A 48, Class 25

5. Waterproofing Membrane Clamp Ring:

a. 2.375-inch (61-mm) wide,

b. ASTM A 48, Class 25 cast iron,

c. Integral gravel stop: 1 ¼”-inch (32mm) height minimum

d. Anchorage: 4 bolt

e. Free area height above roof: 1/4-inch

6. Pipe Size: 3 inches (76 mm), 4 inches (100 mm), 5inches (127 mm) and 6 inches (152

mm)

7. Drain bolts

a. 1.5” long threaded length with anti-seize pre-applied to threads

8. Deck Clamp: L-shaped clamp to hold drain body in place.

9. Sump Pan: 14-guage galvanized steel.

10. Finishing Ring: Recessed ring to allow drain body to be installed in flush configuration,

either directly to roof deck or into drain pan.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Conductor Nozzles:



the following:

a. Froet LPS (2,3,4,6,8,10) Downspout nozzle.

2. Description: The spout is a high corrosion resistant aluminum alloy. The flapper will be

Aluminum and will be powder coated in the matching spout color. The flapper will be an

option and will need to added to the spout if needed.





221423 - 4

3. The spout comes with two different thickness of gaskets in all sizes but 6” which there

are 3. The thickest gasket is for service weight cast iron. The middle thickness or thinnest

if only two is for Heavy Weight cast iron or PVC. The third size or thinnest when there

are three sizes with 6” only will be for the PVC pipe.

4. The pipe will need to be stubbed out or cut off at 3/4” the wall surface. The 3/4” will

allow for gasket squish on the back of the spout.

5. Size: Same as connected conductor.

6. Color: Standard color to be selected by Architect.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.


d. Wade; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

e. WATTS.




4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or No-hub, cast-iron soil


5. Closure: Countersunk, brass plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.



e. WATTS.




4. Type: Adjustable housing.

5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

6. Outlet Connection: No hub, Hub with inside caulk or Hub with gasket.

7. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

8. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

9. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

10. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

12. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.


















221423 - 5

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.



e. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.


4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or No-hub, cast-iron soil pipe test tee

as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure Plug:

a. Brass.

b. Countersunk head.

c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw.

d. Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

D. Test Tees:




b. Josam Company.


d. WATTS.

e. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301.


4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or no-hub, cast-iron soil-


5. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head, brass.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as, or not more than, one size smaller than cleanout size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's

written installation instructions.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.

3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

















221423 - 6

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following

instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger

drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.

4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical storm piping conductor.

5. All horizontal drains shall be provided with cleanouts located not more than 100 feet

apart.

6. Building storm sewers shall be provided with cleanouts located not more than 100 feet

apart measured from the upstream entrance of the cleanout. For building storm sewers 8

inches and larger, manholes shall be provided and located not more than 200 feet from

the junction of the building storm drain and building storm sewer, at each change in

direction and at intervals of not more than 400 feet apart. Manholes and manhole covers

shall be of an approved type.

7. Cleanouts shall be installed at each change of direction of the building drain or horizontal

storm lines greater than 45 degrees. Where more than one change of direction occurs in a

run of piping, only one cleanout shall be required for each 40 feet of developed length of

the drainage piping.

8. There shall be a cleanout near the junction of the building drain and the building storm

sewer. The cleanout shall be either inside or outside the building wall and shall be

brought up to the finished ground level or to the basement floor level. An approved two-

way cleanout is allowed to be used at this location to serve as a required cleanout for both

the building drain and building storm sewer. The cleanout at the junction of the building

drain and building storm sewer shall not be required if the cleanout on a 3-inch or larger

diameter storm stack is located within a developed length of 10 feet of the building drain

and building sewer connection.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

G. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies for penetrations of fire- and smoke-rated

assemblies.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221413 "Facility Storm Drainage

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.




221423 - 7

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes

are required.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

3.4 PROTECTION






ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS


223300 - 1

SECTION 223300 - ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Electric water heaters for potable water.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. UL 1453 “Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters”

B. ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel code, Section IV, Part HLW

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1-2010

D. NFPA 70- National Electric Code

E. NSF/ANSI Standard 61- Drinking Water System Components

F. NSF/ANSI Standard 372 - Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content

G. ASTM G123 - 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion Cracking of

Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium Chloride Solution.”




223300 - 2


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated

capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Product Certificates: For each type of electric, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.

B. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to




E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency,


1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with applicable code for internal wiring of factory wired equipment

B. Units: ETL, UL or CSA Listed as a Complete Electric Water Heater Assembly.

C. Comply with ASME Section IV. Part HLW Requirements for Potable Water Heaters.




B. Listing: The water heater will be listed ETL listed to UL 1453 “Electric Booster and

Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters”

C. ASME Compliance: Water heater shall bear the ASME HLW stamp and be National Board

listed ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.




223300 - 3

D. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label

commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

E. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.10 COORDINATION


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Storage Tank: 25-year coverage for manufacturing or material defects, leaks, production of

rusty water and/or chloride stress corrosion cracking. Tank warranty does not require inspection

and maintenance of anode rods.

B. The heater warranty shall cover the 1st year and all subsequent years of the warranty. No

additional optional long-term warranty is to be specified to meet 25-year warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section. The water heaters shall be manufactured by a company that

has held an ASME code stamp for 50 years or more.

B. The water heaters shall be ETL listed as a complete unit. The heater shall satisfy current Federal

Energy Policy Act standards for both thermal efficiency and stand-by heat losses.

C. Manufacturers: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Niles Steel Tank Company Model JEV300X45ABDLor a comparable product by one of the

following:

1. PVI

2. Hubbell Heaters

D. Acceptable manufacturers shall be subject to compliance with the requirements.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. The storage section of the water heater shall be ASME HLW stamped and National Board

Registered for a maximum allowable working pressure of 150 psi and pressure tested at 1-1/2

times working pressure.





223300 - 4

B. All tank connections/ fittings shall be welded to the tank and made of stainless steel. Tank shall

be equipped with a ball-type drain valve. Tank design will not include a manway.

C. The storage tank shall be an unlined pressure vessel constructed from phase-balanced austenitic

and ferritic duplex steel with a chemical structure containing a minimum of 21% chromium to

prevent corrosion and mill certified per ASTM A 923Methods A to ensure that the product is

free of detrimental chemical precipitation that affects corrosion resistance. The material selected

shall be tested and certified to pass stress chloride cracking test protocols as defined in ISO

3651-2and ASTM G123 - 00(2005) “Standard Test Method for Evaluating Stress-Corrosion

Cracking of Stainless Alloys with Different Nickel Content in Boiling Acidified Sodium

Chloride Solution.”

D. Waterside surfaces shall be welded internally utilizing joint designs to minimize volume of

weld deposit and heat input. All heat affected zones (HAZ) shall be processed after welding to

ensure the HAZ corrosion resistance is consistent with the mill condition base metal chemical

composition. Weld procedures (amperage, volts, welding speed, filler metals and shielding

gases) utilized shall result in a narrow range of austenite-ferrite microstructure content

consistent with phase balanced objectives for welds, HAZ and the base metal.

E. All internal and external tank surfaces shall undergo complete pickling and passivation to

ASTM 967.

F. Materials shall meet ASME Section II material requirements and be accepted by NSF 61 for

municipal potable water systems. Storage tank shall be CSA certified to NSF 372 lead free.

G. Water contacting tank surfaces will be non-porous and exhibit 0% water absorption.

H. Lined or plated storage tanks will not be acceptable.

I. Water heaters that require anodes will not be acceptable.

J. Heating elements will be rated at a minimum of 12 kW and a maximum of 18 kW. Each heating

element shall be threaded construction not bolted.

K. Heating elements will be sheathed in Incoloy. Each element will individually mount to the tank

by means of a threaded stainless-steel fitting. A magnetic contactor will be supplied for each

power circuit. Maximum current per circuit will be 50 amps on three-phase units.

2.3 PERFORMANCE

A. Water heater will meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1– 2010.

2.4 WATER HEATER TRIM

A. As a minimum, the heater will be equipped with the following:

1. Manual reset high limit

2. An immersion operating thermostat

3. External temperature limiting device




223300 - 5

4. An ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valves

5. Options as selected on Niles option page.

6. Access to lifting lugs

7. Hinged Door with keypad lock

8. Channel iron skid base

9. Magnetic contactors

B. Operating and safety controls shall meet the requirements of UL

C. The water heater shall employ an electronic operating control with digital temperature readout.

Operator shall be capable of connecting to a building automation system through BMS

connection.

2.5 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Furnish and install as shown on plans, pre-charged hydropneumatic steel expansion tank.

The tank construction shall be in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, with all welds conforming to ASME Section IX. The

tank must be stamped with a maximum working pressure of 150 psi and a maximum

working temperature as listed by manufacturer. All internal wetted parts must comply

with FDA regulations and approvals. An internal butyl/EPDM diaphragm or butyl

bladder will be used to isolate air charge from water.


following:

a. AMTROL Inc.

b. Honeywell International Inc.

c. Pentair Pump Group (The); Myers.

d. Taco, Inc.

B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 or ASHRAE 90.2.

C. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include

relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-

water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends

into storage tank.

E. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domestic-

water heater working-pressure rating.

F. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

G. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.




223300 - 6


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code

construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for

retesting and reinspection requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements

for correcting the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers’ written instructions and

referenced. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters on concrete base.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.








7. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original

design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange

units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on

domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified

in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater

relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward

pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

D. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end

drain valves specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."




223300 - 7

E. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

G. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

H. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water

Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION


Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform tests and inspections.







proper operation.


equipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for

retesting and reinspection requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements

for correcting the Work.





223300 - 8

3.5 FINISHING

A. The heater will be completely packaged, requiring only hookup for electrical and plumbing. The

heater will be insulated with high performance foam insulation jacketed with powder-coated

steel panels and mounted on heavy-duty channel skids. The heater will fit properly in the space

provided and installation will conform to all local, state, and national codes.

3.6 START-UP

A. Start up on the unit will be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of

the startup report will be provided to the owner.



DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS


223600 - 1

SECTION 223600 - DOMESTIC HEAT PUMP WATER HEATER

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY

A. This section includes water source heat pump water heaters for potable water.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASME Boiler and Pressure vessel code

B. ISO 9001 Quality Management System

C. NFPA 70- National Electric Code

D. NSF/ANSI Standard 61- Drinking Water System Components

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished

specialties and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,

components, and size of each field connection

C. Wiring Diagrams: Detail for wiring power signal, differentiate between manufacture- installed

and field-installed wiring




223600 - 2

D. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include

maintenance guide and wiring diagrams

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




B. Water heater shall have UL-1995 certification for the entire unit.

1.7 COORDINATION


1.8 WARRANTY

A. Equipment shall include parts warranty for 12 months from startup or 18 months from

shipment.

B. Compressors shall include 5-year parts warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Nyle is the basis of design. Acceptable manufacturers shall be subject to

compliance with the requirements.

B. Refer to drawing schedule for model number and characteristics

2.2 HEAT PUMP UNIT

A. Heat pump water heater shall be packaged water source equipment, factory assembled, charged,

and tested. The heat pump shall be suitable for heating potable water and have the capability of

producing no less than 160°F potable water, with published heating capacity and C.O.P. based

on project specifications.

B. Heat Pump unit shall consist of compressor, condenser, evaporator, hot water circulating pump,

piping, and controls, factory assembled, charged, and tested.

C. All components, including assemblies, sub-assemblies and the materials that go into

constructing the heat pump water heater’s potable water system must be certified for coming in

direct contact with potable water, including but not limited to: piping, brazing, soldering or




223600 - 3

welding materials, circulator pump, flow sensor, temperature sensors, thread sealant, flow

control valves and flat plate heat exchanger.

D. Entire heat pump shall be UL1995

E. Electrical: Unit control panel shall be UL1995.

2.3 CABINET

A. Shall be either corrosion resistant epoxy coated 12-gauge aluminum, 304L stainless steel or

316L stainless steel. Supports, channels and beams shall also be constructed of the like.

Compartments shall have large access doors for servicing. Cabinet shall be designed for outdoor

operation. Cabinet shall be insulated to prevent condensation from forming on exterior surfaces.

2.4 COMPRESSOR

A. Compressor: Hermetic scroll type by Copeland Corp., or reciprocating piston type by Carlyle

Compressor suitable for high temperature operation with R-134a refrigerant. Compressor shall

be furnished with service ports for suction and discharge connections.

B. Compressor Controls: Compressor controls/accessories must include the following:

1. High Pressure Safety monitoring

2. Low Pressure Safety monitoring

3. Multi-function Phase Failure Relay (Copeland Scroll)

4. Active compressor mounted protection with advanced algorithms, fault history, and LED

indicators. (Copeland Scroll)

2.5 CONDENSER

A. 316L Stainless steel copper brazed plate vented double wall type, standard on all units. Single

wall condenser construction shall not be allowed. UL Listed, NSF 61 OR 372 compliant, and

suitable for up to 450°F (232°C) high temperature operation with potable water. Unit shall be

operational pressure rated to no less than 435 PSI (30 Bar), with built in temperature ports for

performance monitoring. Refrigerant: Refrigerant shall be R-134a.

B. Refrigerant Accessories:

1. Filter-Drier: Sweat connection type.

2. Site Glass: Moisture indicating type.

3. Liquid Line Service Valves: Bronze quarter turn type.

4. Discharge Check Valve: Copper magnetic in-line type.

5. Liquid Line Solenoid Valve: Electrically actuated.

6. Compressor Crankcase Heater: Belly band type for scroll compressors

7. Suction accumulator

8. Liquid receiver




223600 - 4

2.6 EVAPORATOR

A. 316L Stainless steel copper brazed plate single wall type, standard on all units. Unit shall be

operational pressure rated to no less than 435 PSI (30 Bar), with built in temperature ports for

performance monitoring. Refrigerant: Refrigerant shall be R-134a.

2.7 EXPANSION VALVE

A. Thermal expansion valve shall be specifically designed for heat pump use with field adjustable

superheat feature.

2.8 ANTI-SHORT CYCLE CONTROL

A. Anti-Short Cycle Control: Units shall be factory wired to allow a maximum of twelve

compressor starts per hour to prevent compressor short cycling and allow time for suction and

discharge pressures to equalize permitting the compressor to start in an unloaded condition.

2.9 WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS

A. Shall be in-line stainless steel body NSF-61 Certified, centrifugal type able to deliver rated flow

against the external head shown on the drawings.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Controls:

1. The Heat Pump Unit Shall offer an optional PLC Controls

2. Timed Short Cycle Control

3. Panel Mount Control Touch Screen

4. Access Level Control

5. Internal Or External Aquastat Controls

6. Resettable Compressor Run Times

7. Low Temperature Freeze/Flow Monitoring

8. Flow Rate Meter for Potable Water

9. Phase Failure Monitoring (scroll type compressors)

10. 100 Fault Memory

11. Systems Performance Monitoring

12. BMS Compatibility With Varied Protocol Options

13. Bacnet MSTP

14. Bacnet Ethernet

15. Modbus Mstp Built In

B. Slave units must be in a master or slave identifiable configuration, capable of being arranged in

arrays. Communications between units shall be inherent ethernet. Units shall have built in lead

lag compatibility. PLC shall monitor and control automated active and passive defrost, and

wetted component freeze protection.




223600 - 5

2.11 CONSTANT LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL (SINGLE-PASS ONLY)

A. Constant Leaving Water Temperature Control (Single-Pass only): Heat pump shall be factory

equipped with electronic temperature control valve which automatically maintains constant

leaving water temperature regardless of entering water temperature. Leaving water temperature

is set by the heat pump operator/user via the field adjustable touch screen interface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER, HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION

A. Install water heaters level and plumb in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and

referenced standards.

B. Domestic-Water, Heat-Exchanger Mounting: Install domestic-water heat exchangers on

concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Section 033000 "Cast-

in-Place Concrete."


install dowel rods on 18-inchcenters around the full perimeter of concrete base.






5. Anchor heat exchangers to substrate.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to Water-Source Heat Pump, allow space for service and

maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heat

exchangers.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION











223600 - 6




proper operation.


equipment.

B. Domestic-water heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting

and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting

the Work.


3.5 START-UP

A. Start up on the unit will be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of

the startup report will be provided to the owner and factory.



COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS


224213.13 - 1

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Toilet seats.




and profiles, and finishes for water closets.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than six of each type.




224213.13 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets: Wall mounted, rear spud.



a. Kohler Co.

b. Sloan Valve Company.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Standard and child height.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

3. Support:

a. Standard: ASME A112.6.1M.

b. Description: Waste-fitting assembly as required to match drainage piping material

and arrangement with faceplates, couplings gaskets, and feet; bolts and hardware

matching fixture. Include additional extension coupling, faceplate, and feet for

installation in wide pipe space.

c. Water-Closet Mounting Height: Standard, Child and Handicapped/elderly

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Piston Flushometer Valves:



a. AMTC

b. Kohler Co.

c. Sloan Valve Company.

d. TOTO USA, INC.



4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Style: Exposed.

8. Consumption: 1.28 gal. per flush.












224213.13 - 3

2.3 TOILET SEATS


following:

1. Bemis Manufacturing Company.

2. Centoco Manufacturing Corporation.

3. Church Seats.

4. Kohler Co.

5. Olsonite Seat Co.

6. TOTO USA, INC.

a. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

b. Material: Plastic.

c. Type: Commercial (Standard).

d. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

e. Hinge: Check.

f. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

g. Seat Cover: Not required.

h. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to

piping or building substrate.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water

closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto

waste-fitting seals; and attach to support.

4. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.










224213.13 - 4

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet.

4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.




224213.13 - 5

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL URINALS


224213.16 - 1

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.




and profiles, and finishes for urinals.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified

with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed,

but no fewer than one of each type.


COMMERCIAL URINALS


224213.16 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals: Wall hung, back outlet, washout, accessible.



a. Kohler Co.

b. Sloan Valve Company.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Fixture:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Washout with extended shields.

d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.

e. Water Consumption: 0.125 GPF.

f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4, top.

g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2, back.

h. Color: White.

3. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.

b. Size: NPS 2.

4. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support plates and

coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular,

steel uprights.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Battery-Powered, Solenoid-Actuator, Piston Flushometer Valves:



a. AMTC

b. Kohler Co.


d. TOTO USA, INC.



4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device.

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951; listed and

labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended

location and application.

11. Consumption: 0.125 gal. per flush.










COMMERCIAL URINALS


224213.16 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.

3. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

4. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.

4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


COMMERCIAL URINALS


224213.16 - 4

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required

to match urinals.



and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.



A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES


224216.13 - 1

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories.

2. Faucets.




and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.




224216.13 - 2


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.




1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LAVATORIES



a. American Standard America.

b. Kohler Co.

c. Sloan

d. TOTO USA, INC.

2.2 FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets:



a. American Standard America.

b. Kohler Co.


d. TOTO

2.3 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS


Effects," for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.












224216.13 - 3

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. AM Conservation Group, Inc.

2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

3. NEOPERL, Inc.

C. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar

stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to

faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.

2.4 SUPPLY FITTINGS


Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2.

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper-pipe and brass straight or offset tailpieces riser.

2.5 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.







224216.13 - 4

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant

requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.



A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.




224216.13 - 5

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



COMMERCIAL SINKS


224216.16 - 1

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY


1. Classroom sinks

2. Service basins.

3. Utility sinks.

4. Sink faucets.

5. Laminar-flow, faucet-spout outlets.

6. Supply fittings.

7. Waste fittings.




and profiles, and finishes for sinks.




A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


COMMERCIAL SINKS


224216.16 - 2


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLASSROOM SINKS

A. Elkay Lustertone Classic Stainless Steel 37-1/4" x 17" x 4", Double Bowl Drop-in Classroom

ADA Sink Kit. Sink is manufactured from 18 gauge 304 Stainless Steel with a Lustrous Satin

finish, Center drain placement, and Bottom only pads.

1. Included with Product: One LKD2439C faucet, one LK1141A bubbler, one LK35

strainer, one LK8 drain fitting

2.2 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins: Terrazzo, floor mounted.




b. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C.

c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

d. Stern-Williams Co., Inc.

2.3 UTILITY SINKS

A. Utility Sinks: Stainless steel, counter mounted.



a. Advance Tabco.

b. Eagle Group; Foodservice Equipment Division.

c. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

d. Just Manufacturing.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3750&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd











COMMERCIAL SINKS


224216.16 - 3

2.4 SINK FAUCETS


Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets:

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets.

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Chicago Faucets.

2) Kohler Co.

3) Moen Incorporated.

4) Speakman Company.

5) T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

6) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2.5 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS


Effects," for faucet-spout-outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. AM Conservation Group, Inc.

2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.

3. NEOPERL, Inc.

C. Description: Chrome-plated brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar

stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to

faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.

2.6 SUPPLY FITTINGS


Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Loose key.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2













COMMERCIAL SINKS


224216.16 - 4

2. Chrome-plated, rigid-copper pipe.

2.7 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

2.8 GROUT






PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to

ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.


COMMERCIAL SINKS


224216.16 - 5

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with


G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant

requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



PRESSURE WATER COOLERS


224716 - 1

SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL












1.3 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.


and profiles, and finishes.





A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 2 of each.




224716 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A. Pressure Water Coolers:



a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Filtrine

c. Murdock

2. Standards:

a. Comply with NSF 61.

b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane) refrigerant


3. Refer to drawings for Capacities and Characteristics:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Set freestanding pressure water coolers on floor.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure water

coolers to mounting frames.

E. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations

where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 220523

"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."






224716 - 3

F. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.

G. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with


H. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Install ball, gate, or globe shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Install valve upstream

from filter for water cooler. Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523

"General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 1

SECTION 230000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Work of this Division shall be governed by the Contract Documents. Provide materials, labor,

equipment, and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install all work of this Division as


B. Requirements given herein may be affected by other related requirements of the project

specification. Correlation of the contract requirements is the responsibility of the contractor.

C. Perform the work in accordance with the above requirements and the provisions of all

applicable codes and laws.

D. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to achieve sustainable

design, measured and documented according to the CT High Performance Building Standard

(CTHPB) Mandatory Requirements and minimum required sustainable strategies, as indicated

on the Sustainable Matrix.

E. Standard Specifications and Abbreviations

1. The following abbreviations used in the Specifications refer to organizations publishing

specifications and standards. These shall be construed to mean the latest standard adopted

and published at the date of advertisement for bids and such specifications are made part

of the Contract Documents to the same extent as if written out in full.

ADC-Air Diffusion Council

AHDGA-American Hot Dip Galvanizing Association

AISC-American Institute of Steel Construction

AMCA-Air Moving and Conditioning Association

ANSI-American National Standards Institute

ARI-American Refrigeration Institute

ASHRAE-American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers

ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineers

ASTM -American Society for Testing Materials

AWS-American Welding Society

AWWA-American Water Works Association

FIA-Factory Insurance Association

FM-Factory Mutual

FS-Federal Specifications

MCAA-Mechanical Contractors Association of America


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 2

MSS-Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry

NBFU-National Board of Fire Underwriters

NBS-National Bureau of Standards

NEC-National Electrical Code

NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA-National Fire Protection Association

NSF-National Sanitation Foundation

OSHA-Occupational Safety Health Act

PDI-Plumbing and Drainage Institute

PPI-Plastics Pipe Institute

SMACNA-Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association,

Inc.

SSPC-Steel Structures Painting Council

STI-Steel Tank Institute

UL-Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

USDC-United States Department of Commerce

USPHS-United States Public Health Service

2. Conform to ANSI - 31.1.0 and addenda for basic materials and methods of installation for

closed piping systems with pressures in excess of 30 PSI, and for pipe welding regardless

of system pressures.

3. Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII and FM requirements

for construction of unfired pressure vessels.

F. Where the word "provided" is used in this document, it shall be understood to mean, "provided

and installed."

G. Comply with general requirements and procedures for compliance with CT High Performance

Buildings (CTHPB) prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain certification.

1. Other CTHPB prerequisites and credits needed to obtain CTHPB certification depend on

material selections and may not be specifically identified as CTHPB requirements.

Compliance with requirements needed to obtain CTHPB prerequisites and credits may be

used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.

2. Additional CTHPB prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated CTHPB

certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of Project that are not part of

the Work of the Contract.

3. Provide all CTHPB prerequisite and credit requirements needed to obtain the indicated

CTHPB certification.

4. Obtain a copy of the CTHPB Project checklist.

5. Refer to other Division CTHPB Sections for additional requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grout.

2. HVAC demolition.



5. Concrete bases.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 3


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CTHPB: Connecticut High performance Buildings.

B. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a

10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo,

cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.

C. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as

manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is

extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight)

shall contribute to the regional value.

D. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500

miles from Project site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the

building product that is installed at Project site.

E. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials made

from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles from

Project site.

F. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,

unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

G. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied


H. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient


I. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

J. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions



K. Where the word “provided” is used in this document, it shall be understood to mean “provided

and installed.”

L. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:




GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 4









1.5 INTENT

A. It is the intention of the specifications and drawings to provide for finished work, tested and

ready for operation.

B. Items and services not shown on drawings, but mentioned in specifications, or vice versa, or

items and services necessary to render the work complete and ready for operation, even if not

specified, shall be provided without additional cost.

C. Where conflicts occur between drawings and specifications, or within either document, the

Contractor shall ask for and obtain a written clarification from the Architect prior to submitting



1.6 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work under this Division shall include all labor, material, equipment plant, services and

administrative tasks required to complete and make operable the mechanical work shown on the

Drawings, required for proper operation and/or specified herein, including but not limited to, the

following:

1. Preparation and submission of shop drawings, diagrams and illustrations.

2. Procuring all necessary permits and approvals, and paying all required fees and charges

in connection with the work of this Division.

3. Protection, testing, cleaning, adjustment and guarantee of the work of this Division to

safely, properly and continuously operate.

4. As-built drawings, operating and maintenance instructions and manuals.

5. Identification labels, tags, charts and diagrams.

6. Excavation and backfill.

7. Coordination.

8. Project record documents.

9. Operation and Maintenance Data.

10. Cutting and patching.

11. Cooperation with and full participation in the commissioning process.

12. Trend logging and associated reports required to satisfy CTHPB Measurement &

verification credit


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 5

1.7 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Finish patching of all construction cut under this Division.

B. Waterproofing of roof penetrations for the work of this Division.

C. Concrete and masonry work except as specified.

D. Painting, except as noted.

E. Removal, patching, or otherwise handling of hazardous materials.

1.8 SITE INVESTIGATION

A. Examine the drawings and specifications of all trades, and the site, and from these

investigations be responsible for the nature and location of work, general and local conditions,

particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials,

availability of labor, water, electric power, roads, etc.

1.9 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work required.

Do not scale the Drawings. Consult the architectural drawings and details, and the drawings of

other trades, for exact location of equipment.

B. Drawings shall be used in layout of work. Check reference drawings to verify spaces in which

the work will be installed. Maintain maximum headroom and space conditions. Where

headroom or space conditions appear inadequate, Architect shall be notified before proceeding

with installation.

C. If directed by the Architect, make minor modifications in the layout as needed to prevent

conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.

D. The drawings are schematic and diagrammatic.

1. Symbols and diagrams are used to indicate the various items of work and the complete

systems, but not necessarily have dimensional significance, neither do they necessarily

delineate all related and subsidiary parts and equipment.

2. The work shall be installed complete and ready for operation in conformity with the

intent expressed on the drawings and in the specifications.

3. Coordinate the work with the requirements of the architectural and structural drawings

for dimensions, locations and clearances.

4. Locations of items exposed to view shall be taken from the architectural drawings or

located as directed.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 6

1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. Closely schedule the work so that work will be installed at the proper time without delaying the

completion of the entire project.

B. Where the work will be installed in close proximity to the work of other trades, or where there

is evidence that the work will interfere with the work of other trades, arrange space conditions

to make a satisfactory adjustment. If work is installed before coordinating with other trades,

make necessary changes to the work to correct the condition without additional cost to the

owner.

C. Prepare complete set of drawings showing all necessary slab openings and structural supports

that require structural framing. Drawings shall clearly indicate sizes and location relative to

established column lines. Drawings shall be completed in sufficient time to allow for structural

steel fabrication so as not to delay project schedule.

D. Shop drawing submissions shall demonstrate a knowledge of the work of other trades, and shall

show the locations of the work of other trades which affects the work of this contract.

1.11 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product or a catalog

number is specified, and terms "or equal" or "or approved equal" are used, the substituted item

must conform in all essential respects to the specified item including operating efficiency, noise

generated, and method of operation. Consideration will not be given claims that the substituted

item meets performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in

schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

B. When such approved deviation requires a different quantity and or arrangement of equipment

from that specified or indicated on the drawings, provide required equipment, wiring, piping,

connections, valves, and structural supports, and any other additional equipment required by the

deviation, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. When an item of equipment is proposed, other than that detailed or specified on the drawings,

which requires any additional equipment or redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations,

piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing or architectural design,

such costs shall be incurred by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.

D. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics

may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting

electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified at no cost to

the Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply

with requirements.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 7

1.12 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS CRITERIA

A. The criteria of design and performance to produce the required operation is based on equipment

shown or scheduled.

1. The equipment must conform to the structural design provisions for loads applied to the

structure, to the dimensions established by drawings for mechanical spaces and other

clearances, and for inlet and outlet locations and proper relationship to associated

equipment, piping and ducts.

B. The descriptions cover basic equipment and operation but not all the details of design and

construction.

1. The use of singular in descriptions does not limit the quantities of items to be furnished to

provide the operation specified. Furnish all equipment required to produce specified

performance under installed conditions.

2. Factory wiring, interconnections, piping and connections shall conform to these

specifications for the field work.

3. Provide all trim, enclosures and accessories required to make a complete installation.

C. Acoustical performance of equipment and systems.

1. Noise levels from operation of motor driven equipment, whether air-borne or

structure-borne, and noise levels created by or within air-handling equipment and air

distribution and control media shall not exceed sound pressure levels determined by the

noise criterion curves in the ASHRAE Guide as follows:

Location Noise Criterion

Offices NC 35

Corridors NC 40

Toilets NC 40

Classrooms NC 30

Gym NC 35

2. Testing for conformance to the above requirements will be provided by an acoustical

consultant retained by the Owner.

a. Octave band sound pressure levels will be obtained for ambient room conditions

with equipment not operating and also with the installed equipment operating per

plans and specifications.

b. For testing purposes, sound pressure levels will be measured 3'-0" above the floor.

1.13 GENERAL CONFORMANCE

A. Obtain all general conformances in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements.

B. Submit to the Architect for review a list of manufacturers of equipment proposed for the work.



C. Where any specific materials, process or method of construction, or manufactured article is




GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 8



D. Equipment of one type, shall be products of one manufacturer.

1.14 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Drawings.


and finishes.

B. Installation Drawings.

1. Coordinated scale drawings of equipment including interconnecting piping and ductwork.




C. Wiring and Control Diagrams.



installed.

D. Provide composite shop drawings showing work of all related construction, when required to


E. Provide drawings showing dimensions and locations of concrete work required for the

mechanical work.

F. Samples.


G. Reports:



3. Field pipe testing reports and certificates of approval.



6. Performance report on the balancing of air and water systems.



H. If submissions of catalog cuts of standard manufactured items show different types, options,

finishes, performance requirements, or other variations, those features proposed shall be clearly

identified.




and erection dimensions, kinds and quality of materials and their finishes, and other


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 9















standard shop practices or other reasons, such variations shall be clearly identified

on the drawings in order that, if acceptable, suitable action may be taken for proper













I. Shop Drawing Schedule


proposed shop drawing submissions. The schedule shall include the following

information.






time.





submittals.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 10

J. Submittals will be reviewed for conformance with the contract drawings and specifications. The


taken:

1. Reviewed:






compliance.













4. Rejected



without delay.

K. A submittal review is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and









L. Submit CTHPB submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1.15 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Categories below are taken from CTHPB rating systems and the standards referenced by them;

if clarification is required, see those documents or the reference guides.

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.

2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.

3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.

4. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.

5. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 11

6. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.

7. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.

8. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.

9. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.

10. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine

covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight

polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250

g/L.

11. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.

12. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.

13. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.

14. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.

15. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.

16. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.

B. For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that

comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D and the following chemical restrictions:

C. Categories below are taken from CTHPB rating systems and the standards referenced by them;

if clarification is required, see those documents or the reference guides.

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L.

3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250

g/L.

4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.

5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.

7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.

8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.

9. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.

10. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.

11. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.

12. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein.

a. Acrylonitrile.

b. Antimony.

c. Benzene.

d. Butyl benzyl phthalate.

e. Cadmium.

f. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

g. Di-n-butyl phthalate.

h. Di-n-octyl phthalate.

i. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.

j. Diethyl phthalate.

k. Dimethyl phthalate.

l. Ethylbenzene.

m. Formaldehyde.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 12

n. Hexavalent chromium.

o. Isophorone.

p. Lead.

q. Mercury.

r. Methyl ethyl ketone.

s. Methyl isobutyl ketone.

t. Methylene chloride.

u. Naphthalene.

v. Toluene (methylbenzene).

w. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.

x. Vinyl chloride.

1.16 GUARANTEES AND SERVICES

A. All workmanship, installation materials and equipment shall be maintained and serviced for the

guarantee period at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Leave entire system installed under this Contract in perfect working order, and, without

additional charge, replace any work or material which develops defects within the guarantee

period, including all other work damaged as a result of such defects.

C. Non-durable, expendable items such as air filter media are not subject to replacement after the

date of acceptance.

D. The guarantee period shall be extended as follows:

1. For heating systems, one year plus the time necessary to include one continuous heating

season from November 1st to April 1st.

2. For air-conditioning systems, one year plus the time necessary to include one continuous

cooling season from May 1st to October 1st.

E. Manufacturers' Warranties

1. The manufacturer shall warrant that the equipment which he has furnished is free from

defects in material and workmanship. Obligations under this warranty shall be as

follows:

a. The equipment manufacturer or supplier shall provide and pay for all labor, parts,

accessories, materials, freight and other services to repair or replace any equipment

or part thereof which, in the course of installation, start-up and testing is found to

be defective.

b. For a period of eighteen months from the date of acceptance by the Owner, the

manufacturer shall replace any defective equipment or part thereof; freight costs

for return of defective parts, labor for parts replacement, and replacement of lost

refrigerant, are the responsibility of the installing contractor.

c. The manufacturer shall provide an additional warranty on all equipment as

indicated in their respective specification section.

d. Performance - where equipment is specified by size, guarantee that it will have the

capacity specified in the system in which it is installed.

2. The final acceptance of the equipment will be made after the manufacturer has adjusted

his equipment, balanced the various systems, demonstrated that it fulfills the


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 13

requirements of the drawings and specifications, and has furnished all the required

certificates of inspection and acceptance.

1.17 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall provide routine and preventive maintenance during the warranty period.

B. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review a comprehensive plan covering items to be

maintained and service to be performed. Plan shall include checklist for use by maintenance

personnel.

C. Owner's representative(s) shall accompany contractors' maintenance personnel, and receive

instructions on proper maintenance of equipment.

D. Maintenance performed shall include a complete check out of each piece of equipment at least

twice during warranty period. The first shall occur approximately half way through the

warranty period (change of season) and the second at the conclusion of the warranty period and

prior to commencement of the owner's maintenance. Each system and/or piece of equipment

shall be inspected, operated through its complete range of operation, and adjusted as required.

This inspection shall be the same as performed at the initial start-up of the item or system. In

addition, there shall be monthly maintenance inspections of each piece of equipment.

E. During the monthly inspections, equipment shall be checked for items such as dirty filters, belt

wear, lubrication, unusual sounds or unusual operating conditions. Monthly inspections shall

also include recording of system operating temperatures and pressures.

F. Contractor shall include all labor and material to perform the maintenance, including

replaceable items such as filters and belts.

G. Maintenance on the following items shall be included:

1. Pumps

2. Fans

3. Air handling units (DOAS)

4. Filters

5. Temperature controls

6. Water Treatment

7. Unit and Cabinet Heaters

8. Water to Air Heat pumps

9. Water to water Heat pumps

10. UV Lamps

11. Bi Polar

12. Valves

13. Actuators

14. VRF Units


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 14

1.18 PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES

A. Prior to proceeding with any installation, prepare and submit to the proper authorities, for their

review, all required working drawings. Provide all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay

all local, state and federal taxes, fees and other costs in connection with the work.

B. The contractor shall be responsible for performing all controlled inspections required by

applicable Administrative building Code.

1.19 COORDINATION


construction, to allow for HVAC installations.


concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are

concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section

"Access Doors and Frames."

1.20 It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product or a catalog

number is specified, and terms “or equal” or “or approved equal” are used, the substituted item

must conform in all essential respects to the specified item including operating efficiency, noise,

physical size, capacity, quality, and material.


A. Sheet metal and plumbing shop drawings that have been coordinated with architectural and

structural drawings shall be submitted to Engineer for review. Drawings must be returned from

Engineer either "Reviewed" or "Furnish as corrected" prior to being used as basis for

coordination drawings. Refer to Section 233113 for sheet metal shop drawing and 232113 for

piping shop-drawing requirements.

B. The contractor shall submit for review sheet metal shop standards. Any sheet metal shop

drawings submitted prior to the submission of the shop standards shall be returned "not

reviewed".

C. After sheet metal and piping drawings have been revised per Engineers comments, reproducible


work:


2. Electrical work


4. Sprinkler piping

5. Life support subcontractor


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 15

D. Prior to inclusion of sprinkler piping and equipment, contractor shall have submitted sprinkler

plans and calculations to engineer for review and to Rating Bureau for review.

E. After all trades have included their work on the coordination drawing and noted conflicts, all




F. The Architect and Engineer are not part of the coordination drawing process. The Engineer will

provide assistance relative to acceptability of installations.

G. Submit final signed coordination drawing to engineer for review. Engineer will review for

acceptability of installations.

H. Any work fabricated or installed prior to sign off by all trades shall be removed and re-installed

in conformance with coordination drawings.

I. Each contractor (mentioned above) is responsible for the coordination of his sub-contractors.

J. The overall coordination of the coordination process is the responsibility of the general

contractor and/or construction manager.

K. The overall coordination of the coordination process is the responsibility of the general

contractor and/or construction manager. The Engineer is not responsible for the coordination

process. The Engineer will respond to questions that arise from the coordination process.

Drawings submitted will be reviewed for clearly identified conflicts only. Solutions to conflicts

will not bear additional cost.

L. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD or Revit version as


of each as requested by the Owner.

M. Electronic drawing files shall be generated by the Contractor.

1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS/RECORD DRAWINGS







drawings.

B. Provide "As-Built Drawings" indicating in a neat and accurate manner a complete record of all


1. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD and Revit

version as required by the Owner) version or AutoCAD Version 2018 if not specified.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 16

Number of copies of each as requested by the Owner. PDFs inserted into an AutoCad

file are not acceptable.


a. All changes and an accurate record from the contract drawings or appropriate shop

drawings, of all deviations, between the work shown and work installed.

b. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location; locations of dampers and other

control devices; filters, boxes, coils and terminal units requiring periodic

maintenance or repair.

c. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located

(i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location


d. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

building lines.

e. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and


f. Contract modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

g. Submit for review bound sets of the required drawings, manuals and operating

instructions.

3. Electronic drawing files shall be generated by the Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS













C. Master Operating Manual (submit in quadruplicate and as digital PDF document)



a. Directory Manual – A TOC for all volumes in the Systems Manual shall be

provided. Each heading should include a brief description of contents of each

section to help when searching the PDF document.

b. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR)

c. Basis of Design (BOD)

d. Construction Record Documents


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 17

e. System and equipment operating data / Maintenance Procedures – O&M materials

as submitted and approved. This should not be limited to MEP O&M’s, but should

include all applicable O&M materials through the specified divisions.

f. Final ATC as-built documents

g. Warranty Manual – A separate manual inclusive of all project warranties Warranty

start dates shall be clearly presented and conform with project requirements

Warranty claims procedures shall be clearly presented.

1) Manual shall be compiled in electronic format, shall be unprotected, and

shall be searchable. The documents within this manual shall be easy to

navigate provided with table of contents, filed individually tabbed &

bookmarked.



controllers.




summer operation, winter operation, shutdown and draining.




schedules, control diagrams and wiring diagrams of controllers and a copy of the air

balance report.

7. As-installed control diagrams by the control manufacturer.

8. Description of sequence operation by the control manufacturer.


system failure.



a. Air Balance.

b. Water Balance.

c. System Performance.

d. Required Pressure Tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Selective Demolition" for general

demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be

removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 18

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork

material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment

operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,

remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and

quality.

3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Sections

"Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."



C. Inside of all ductwork where visible through registers and grilles: one coat of flat black paint.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 19

3.4 CONCRETE BASES











embedded.








to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.


3.6 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment

base plates, and anchors.









GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 20

3.7 COORDINATION AND LAYOUT

A. Study Drawings and Specifications to ensure completeness of work required.

1. Include supplementary items normal to manufacturers' requirements or standard accepted

trade practices as necessary to complete work, though not specifically indicated or

specified.

B. Verify measurements and conditions in field before starting work.

C. Examine materials to which work is to be applied and notify the Architect, in writing, of any

conditions existing, which are detrimental to proper and expeditious installation of work.

1. Starting of work shall be construed as acceptance of conditions.

D. Confer with other trades, install work to avoid interference with other trades, and possible

necessary adjustments to conform to structural conditions and work of other trades.

E. Coordinate and set inserts and locate openings in floors and walls in new construction.

1. Locate pipes and ducts to avoid interference with other work shown on the drawings and

as directed by the Architect.

2. Keep all concealed pipes and ducts within the enclosing construction provided.

3. Arrange exposed work neatly in parallel runs and parallel with walls or structure, with

uniformly spaced hangers and supports, and within the spaces assigned for each kind of

work.

F. Make coordinated layouts showing concrete work required for housekeeping pads, equipment

bases and inertia masses, which are cast in place, including the location of anchors and dowels.

1. Coordinate the scheduling and placing of the concrete to suit the mechanical work

schedules.

2. Concrete housekeeping pads are to cover the full area of each piece of equipment.

3. Concrete bases are to be of dimension and heights to suit the equipment.

4. The forming and placing of concrete will be provided under this specification section.

3.8 MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PRIOR TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Maintain all equipment and systems installed until final acceptance by the Architect and the

Owner, and take such measures as necessary to ensure adequate protection of all equipment and

materials during delivery, storage, installation and shut-down conditions.

1. This responsibility shall include all provisions required to meet the conditions incidental

to the delays pending final test of systems and equipment.

B. After installation of systems has been completed, operate the system to determine the capability

of the equipment and controls to conform to the requirements of the drawings and specifications

prior to performance testing.

C. Once final acceptance is established and the warranty period begins, contractor shall begin the

maintenance of equipment and system during the warranty period.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 21


A. Locate and set equipment anchor bolts, dowels and aligning devices for all equipment requiring

them. Refer to concrete work coordination.

1. Level the equipment and grout solid between the equipment and the surface below. Grout

to be premixed Embeco or Five Star Grout mixed in accordance with manufacturer's

specifications.

B. The field assembly, installation and alignment of equipment is to be done under field

supervision provided by the manufacturer or with inspections, adjustments and reviewed by the

manufacturer.

C. Equipment startup.

1. Each manufacturer of equipment shall provide qualified personnel to inspect, review and

to supervise the operating tests of the equipment.

D. Equipment and system test operation.

1. Notify the Architect in advance of beginning the equipment and system test operation.

2. Each piece of equipment shall be operated in its system as long as required to provide

proper functioning.

3. Perform an operating test of each complete system for twenty-four hours continuous

operation as a minimum, or as long as required to provide coordination and proper

functioning of all related systems and controls.

4. The operating criteria for each test shall be determined in advance with the Architect's

acceptance whenever seasonal conditions will not produce a full design load on any

equipment or system.

5. Certify to the Owner that all equipment is functioning properly.

6. Should the apparatus fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace all

defective or inoperative parts and again conduct the complete performance tests.

3.10 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Blow out, clean and flush each system of piping, and equipment as required to thoroughly clean

the systems.

1. Clean all materials and equipment, and leave in condition ready to operate and receive

succeeding finishes where required.

2. Adjust and align all equipment interconnected with couplings or belts.

a. Adjust valves of all types and operating equipment of all types to provide proper

operation.

b. Clean all strainers.

B. Lubricate equipment as recommended by the manufacturer, during temporary construction use,

and provide complete lubrication just prior to acceptance.

C. Permanent equipment operated during construction shall not be abused or be used in service

different from its design application.

1. Temporary disposable filters shall be used during temporary operation.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 22

2. All expendable media, including belts used for temporary operation and similar

expendable materials shall be replaced just prior to acceptance.

3. Packing boxes of equipment operated during construction must be replaced just prior to

system acceptance, using materials and methods specified by the supplying manufacturer.

D. Equipment furnished with factory finishes shall be retouched and repainted as required to

present a new appearance.

E. Provide and maintain protection for all of the work whether completed or in progress.

1. Provide coverings and enclosures as required.

F. New and existing operating equipment and systems shall be clean and dust free inside and out.

1. Concealed and unoccupied areas such as plenums, pipe and duct spaces and Equipment

Rooms shall be free of rubbish and swept clean at time of acceptance.

3.11 TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Tests shall be performed in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, and the

following.

B. Provide the services of an independent air and water balancing and testing firm which

specializes in balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, and

which is acceptable to the Owner.

1. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working

order. If requested, the balancing shall be conducted in the presence of the

Architect/Owner.

C. Balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order.

1. After completion of the balancing and testing submit copies of the results to the

Architect.

D. Perform tests and make necessary adjustments to obtain the flow and distribution of air and

water required to produce the operating criteria called for by the contract documents, in

accordance with the latest standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau and the

Associated Air Balance Council.

1. Occupied spaces shall be draft free upon completion.

2. Provide any necessary baffles at registers and diffusers.

3. Maintain the specified acoustical performance of the systems.

4. Mark final position of dampers and balancing valves.

E. Upon completion of the installation, test and balance all equipment and systems under field

operating conditions to demonstrate its compliance with specification requirements.

1. Submit three copies of the test report to the Architect. Refer to specification sections for

details of report requirements.

F. Should any part of the system fail to meet the contract requirements, adjust, repair or replace all

defective or inoperative parts again conduct the complete performance tests.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 23

G. The Architect and Owner shall be notified, in writing, at least 48 hours prior to scheduled test

dates.

3.12 PAINTING

A. Thoroughly clean all surfaces, requiring prime painting, of rust, loose scale, oil and grease.

1. Dry surfaces before painting.

2. Do not paint controls, nameplates, or labels.

B. Paint all equipment not painted at the factory with one prime coat.

C. Provide field painting as follows:

1. All exposed iron work, including uninsulated ferrous piping and conduit system

components, hangers, supports, equipment bases, and apparatus; prime coat, red oxide

primer.

2. Un-insulated ductwork and casing exposed to view and exposed galvanized surfaces of

conduit and piping and of equipment prime painted at the shop as indicated on the

drawings to be painted Prime coat, zinc chromate for galvanized surfaces.

3. Inside of all ductwork/plenums where visible through registers and grilles: One coat of

flat black paint specifically designed for metal surfaces. Paint shall be low VOC.

4. Inside of all outdoor air intake plenums where visible through louvers: One coat of flat

black paint specifically designed for exterior metal surface. Paint shall be low VOC.

3.13 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT

A. Provide mechanical connections to equipment and fixtures requiring such connections which

are supplied by Owner or under other divisions.

B. Provide unions, nipples, adapters, valves, flexible connections, and other trim required for final

connections for each such fixture or item of equipment, as required for complete and perfect

operation.

3.14 WORKMANSHIP








GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 24

3.15 LUBRICATION

A. All equipment furnished, installed or connected under this division, shall be inspected for

proper lubrication when connected and before operation of the equipment is begun.

B. The Contractor for the work of this division will be held responsible for any damage to

equipment that is operated without having been properly lubricated.

3.16 REMOVALS AND RELOCATIONS

A. All components of abandoned systems and abandoned portions of systems shall be removed,

and, unless specifically noted to be relocated and reused, become the Owner's property.

Contractor shall dispose of removed materials as directed by the Owner.

B. Where portions of systems noted for removal remain in use, permanently seal the point of

disconnection so as not to interfere with the system operation.

C. Where interferences between the existing system components and new work require relocation

of the existing components to clear that interference, they may be reused, except where

specifically noted to the contrary, providing that their condition is noted by the Owner's

representative and they are approved by him as equivalent to new.

D. Where existing system components are required to be replaced, all new components shall be

provided.

E. System components include all accessories, cables, controls, conduits, hangers, bases and

supports and outlets.

F. The work specified under this contract specifically excludes the removal or patching of

"hazardous materials." This includes but is not limited to asbestos, PCBs or any other material

having been designated by the Environmental Protection Agency as a hazardous material. If

this contractor finds anything, which is suspected of being a hazardous material, it should be

immediately brought to the Owner's attention.

3.17 USE OF PREMISES AND CLEANING

A. Remove and dispose of all waste materials and rubbish due to all construction operations under

the contract, except as otherwise noted, and keep the building free from rubbish and dirt caused

by his and/or his subcontractors' employees.

1. During the entire progress of the work, rubbish removal shall be made frequently so as to

prevent any potential safety or health hazard.

B. Upon completion of the work, remove all protection, paint, putty, and other stains from all

fixtures and glass and leave the premises thoroughly broom cleaned.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 25

3.18 CUTTING, ALTERING AND PATCHING

A. Provide all cutting, chasing, drilling, altering and rough patching required for the work of this

division.

1. Including the restoring of existing work cut for or damaged by installation of new work,

and where present work is removed.

2. All materials and workmanship required in connection with cutting, altering and rough

patching shall match the existing work in every respect.

B. Do all shoring, bracing, cutting, patching, piecing out, filling in, repairing and refinishing of all

present work as made necessary by the alteration and the installation of new work.

C. The size and location of items requiring an opening, chase or other provisions to receive it shall

be given by the trade requiring same in ample time to avoid undue cutting of any new work to

be installed. These provisions shall not relieve the Contractor from keeping informed as to the

required opening, chases, etc., nor from responsibility for the correctness thereof, nor for cutting

and repairing after the new work is in place.

D. Include all cutting, repairing and patching in connection with the work that may be required to

make the several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by the work of

other trades, as shown on the drawings and/or specified, or reasonably implied by the drawings

and specifications.

E. All repairing, patching, piecing-out, filling-in, restoring and refinishing shall be neatly done by

mechanics skilled in their trade to leave same in condition satisfactory to the Owner.

F. Materials and their methods of application for patching shall comply with applicable

requirements of the specifications.

1. Materials and workmanship not covered by the specifications and items of work exposed

to view adjoining existing work to remain shall conform to similar materials and

workmanship existing in or adjacent to the spaces to be altered.

G. Cutting, repairing and patching shall include all items shown on the drawings, specified in the

specifications or required by the installation of new work or the removal of existing work.

H. All holes in masonry floors and walls are to be core drilled.

I. Disturbed concrete and /or cement floor areas shall be patched with approved type latex mortar.

1. When cement mortar is used for patching, the surfaces shall be depressed a minimum

depth of 1".

J. Reinstall all weather protection work in waterproof manner.

K. Openings in roofs.

1. Openings in roofs shall be kept properly plugged and caulked at all times, except when

being worked on, to preclude the possibility of flooding due to storms or other causes.

After completion of work, openings shall be permanently sealed.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 26

L. Temporary openings.

1. All temporary openings cut in walls, floors or ceilings for pipe or ductwork shall be

closed off with transite or an equally non-combustible material except when mechanics

are actually working at the particular opening.

3.19 TEMPORARY HEAT

A. Refer to section 015000 “Temporary Facilities and Controls” for requirements.

B. In addition to requirements of section 01500 the contractor in using the permanent heating

system for temporary heating agrees to the following:

1. After the Architect and the Owner approve and accept the project heating system, or

portion thereof, for temporary heating purposes, the heating system shall be turned over

to the contractor. When the contractor has no further need for temporary heat, the

heating system shall be returned to the Owner.

2. The contractor shall assume the cost of other operating supplies used for temporary

heating and the costs involved in the operation and maintenance of the temporary wiring

and electricity. If the adaptation of the temporary heating system to the contractor's

temporary heating needs makes necessary the installation of temporary control valves,

gauges, or piping, or the installation of temporary protection, units, filtration, the

contractor shall bear the costs of such adaptations.

3. That portion of the project's heating system and other related mechanical equipment

termed the temporary heating system shall be limited to equipment and the necessary

piping, traps, valves, strainers, controls, pumps, starters, wiring and all other apparatus

and equipment necessary to cause the temporary heating system to function correctly.

4. Prior to use the heating systems shall be protected to a minimum of level as defined under

SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G,

"Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." using “Advance Level” protection

requirements.

5. In addition, filters shall be replaced as necessary throughout the temp heating, New filters

shall be installed after temp heating no longer needed and system turned over to owner.

6. All return or exhaust inlets shall be protected and covered with a minimum of MERV 10

filtration.

C. Base building systems are not dehumidifiers. Contractor shall provide for dehumidification

control in the project as described in 015000.

D. If systems are to be used for temporary cooling, not dehumidification, all requirements of

temporary heating apply.

E. Refer to Construction Indoor Air Quality Management below for additional requirements.

3.20 PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE SEPARATIONS AND NON-RATED ASSEMBLIES

A. Pack annular space between duct (insulation), sleeve and pipe (insulation) and / or conduit in

fire rated and non-rated construction with fire retardant putty, sealant and / or caulk. Material


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 27

shall be non-asbestos based and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for fire

rating required.

B. Penetrations of multiple items and penetrations with annular space greater than 1/2" shall be

provided with a backing material in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as part of a

UL listed assembly.

C. Fire retardant sealer and system shall meet ASTM E-84, ASTM E-814, and UL-1479.

D. All fire stopping shall be provided by one (1) manufacturer. Refer to Division 07 and

architectural drawings for all requirements.

E. MANUFACTURER MODEL

Dow Corning Firestop 2001

Nelson CLK,FSP

Standard Oil

Fyre Putty 3MCP-25

3.21 REFRIGERANT REMOVAL

A. CT HPS 16a-38k-3(k) Prerequisite: Chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants shall not be

utilized for energy systems in new construction.

3.22 CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT

A. CT HPS Strategy 16a-38k-3(e) 1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling and ventilation systems during

construction period, pre-purchase extended warranty to coincide with duration of HVAC

use during construction. Filters shall be a minimum of MERV 10 or greater and shall be

changed on a regular basis as needed.

2. VRF system shall not be utilized as temporary heating or air conditioning during

construction unless temporary filtration media can be used that is a minimum of MERV 7

and shall be changed on a regular basis as needed.

3. All filter media shall be replaced with permanent filter media prior to building

occupancy.

4. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." using

“Advance Level” protection requirements.

3.23 ENERGY PERFORMANCE - MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. CT HPS Strategy 16a-38k-6(a)11: Develop a measurement and verification plan for energy

usage, to cover a period at least 1 year after occupancy. Refer to section 230993 for additional

requirements.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 28

3.24 INDOOR ENVIRONMENT

A. CT HPS Strategy 16a-38k-6(b)1: Install permanent indoor air monitoring systems to provide

performance feedback on ventilation systems. Such monitoring systems, at minimum, shall

include devices to measure temperature, relative humidity, carbon dioxide, and dew point.

Carbon dioxide measurement sensors shall measure both interior and exterior levels of CO2.

B. CT HPS Strategy 16a-38k-6(b)6: Using conditions for thermal comfort described in the current

version of the ASHRAE Standard 55, allow for individual thermal comfort control for 50% or

more of the building occupants.

3.25 SPECIAL WORKSMANSHIP REQUIREMENTS FOR ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED

SYSTEMS

A. General: In addition to basic project workmanship requirements specified above, a higher

degree of care in systems layout and routing shall be exerted in selected areas, as follows:

1. Architectural Exposures: Note that this project includes locations where systems will be

partially or fully exposed to view in finished architectural spaces due either to the

intentional omission of ceilings, and/or to the intentional holding back of ceiling edges

from walls, for architectural effects. These areas shall receive extra effort and care above

and beyond basic project workmanship principles.

B. Special Workmanship Requirements: In these special areas, comply with the following

requirements:

1. Run systems tight to overhead structure whenever possible.

2. In spaces with gaps between ceiling edges and walls, do not run systems down near

ceilings. Locate them as high above as feasible.

3. Do not cross under framing members within view of such gaps. Seek alternative routes

around or through obstacles.

4. Fasten systems sufficiently often to prevent their visually sagging or drooping between

support points.

5. Route systems parallel to walls, framing members, and other elements defining spatial

geometries.

6. Change directions orthogonally.

7. Do not run diagonally when traversing horizontal or vertical surfaces.

C. Rejection of Work: Workmanship and/or materials not complying with the above additional

requirements in these special areas to the satisfaction of the Architect shall be rejected and shall

be immediately replaced in an acceptable manner without additional cost.

3.26 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING


adjust, operate, and maintain water-source heat pumps. Refer to Division 1 Section

"Demonstration and Training.”


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 29

B. The contractor and subcontractors shall be responsible for coordinating, scheduling and

completing operations and maintenance training for the Owners designated personnel on all

systems and equipment.

C. All training materials (agenda, hand-outs, etc.) shall be submitted to the Owner for review and

approval at least two weeks in advance of scheduled training.

D. Equipment training shall be provided by a factory authorized technical representatives,

experienced in training, operation and maintenance procedures for installed systems,

subsystems and equipment.

E. All qualifications and certifications of the individual performing the training shall be submitted

to the Owner for review and approval at least two weeks in advance of scheduled training.

F. Each Subcontractor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the Owner for

review and approval at least two weeks in advance of scheduled training. The plan will include

field orientation during installation, classroom instruction and field training after the completion

of installation.

G. For all major systems and equipment, the automated temperature controls subcontractor shall

provide a short discussion of the control of the equipment during the mechanical or electrical

training conducted by others in addition to formal automated temperature controls training on

work station operation, graphics, etc.

H. Provisions shall be included to provide formal classroom training to representatives of the

Owner’s personnel for select systems and equipment above and beyond typical preventative

maintenance training (e.g. manufacturer provided training school, etc.). Coordinate

requirements with the owner.

I. Provisions shall be included to provide professional videotaping of classroom training. For

systems not being commissioned, the CM will carry the responsibility of hiring the Cx

Videographer. The duration and intensity of the videotaping is to be specified at the discretion

of the Owner.

J. Training Requirements Outline:

1. General familiarization and operating procedures for each of the building’s system

installations.

2. Routine maintenance procedures for equipment.

3. Specific operating and maintenance procedures for:

a. Mechanical systems

b. Electrical systems

c. Plumbing systems

d. Fire protection systems

e. Temperature control system

f. Envelope systems

4. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the

following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.


GENERAL PROVISIONS


230000 - 30

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

e. Repair instructions.

5. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials

and related services.

6. Quantity of training: The maintenance personnel shall be trained on the various building

systems in sessions of not less than 40 hours of training time. The training shall be of a

sufficient extent to allow the trained staff, to train their peers and to demonstrate the

training sessions were effective.

7. Video Documentation: The contractor(s) shall provide for the services of a qualified

videographer to digitally record the training sessions.



HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING


230130.51 - 1

SECTION 230130.51 - HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system

components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ASCS: Air systems cleaning specialist.

B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.


A. Qualification Data: For an ASCS.

B. Strategies and procedures plan.

C. Cleanliness verification report.


A. ASCS Qualifications: A certified member of NADCA.

1. Certification: Employ an ASCS certified by NADCA

2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified as an ASCS by NADCA.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for fibrous-glass ducts.

C. Cleaning Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to HVAC air-distribution system cleaning

including, but not limited to, review of the cleaning strategies and procedures plan.




230130.51 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system components to

determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for performance of the Work.

B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR 2006.

C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a minimum,


1. Supervisor contact information.

2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.

3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.

4. Required support from other trades.

5. Equipment and material storage requirements.

6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.

B. Use the new service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the HVAC

system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.

C. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC

Systems" Section.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Comply with NADCA ACR 2006.

B. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.

C. Systems and Components to Be Cleaned:

1. Air devices for supply and return air.

2. Air-terminal units.

3. Ductwork:

a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes, to the air-handling unit.

b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.

c. Exhaust-air ducts.




230130.51 - 3

4. Air-Handling Units:

a. Interior surfaces of the unit casing.

b. Coil surfaces compartment.

c. Condensate drain pans.

d. Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.

5. Filters and filter housings.

D. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC

system during the cleaning process.

E. Particulate Collection:

1. For particulate collection equipment, include adequate filtration to contain debris

removed. Locate equipment downwind and away from all air intakes and other points of

entry into the building.

2. HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for particles sized 0.3

micrometer or larger shall be used where the particulate collection equipment is

exhausting inside the building,

F. Control odors and mist vapors during the cleaning and restoration process.

G. Mark the position of manual volume dampers and air-directional mechanical devices inside the

system prior to cleaning. Restore them to their marked position on completion of cleaning.

H. System components shall be cleaned so that all HVAC system components are visibly clean.

On completion, all components must be returned to those settings recorded just prior to cleaning

operations.

I. Clean all air-distribution devices, registers, grilles, and diffusers.

J. Clean visible surface contamination deposits according to NADCA ACR 2006 and the

following:

1. Clean air-handling units, airstream surfaces, components, condensate collectors, and

drains.

2. Ensure that a suitable operative drainage system is in place prior to beginning wash-down

procedures.

3. Clean evaporator coils, reheat coils, and other airstream components.

K. Duct Systems:

1. Create service openings in the HVAC system as necessary to accommodate cleaning.

2. Mechanically clean duct systems specified to remove all visible contaminants so that the

systems are capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see

NADCA ACR 2006).

L. Debris removed from the HVAC system shall be disposed of according to applicable Federal,

state, and local requirements.

M. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Source-Removal Cleaning Methods: The HVAC system shall be cleaned using source-

removal mechanical cleaning methods designed to extract contaminants from within the

HVAC system and to safely remove these contaminants from the facility. No cleaning




230130.51 - 4

method, or combination of methods, shall be used that could potentially damage

components of the HVAC system or negatively alter the integrity of the system.

a. Use continuously operating vacuum-collection devices to keep each section being

cleaned under negative pressure.

b. Cleaning methods that require mechanical agitation devices to dislodge debris that

is adhered to interior surfaces of HVAC system components shall be equipped to

safely remove these devices. Cleaning methods shall not damage the integrity of

HVAC system components or damage porous surface materials such as duct and

plenum liners.

2. Cleaning Mineral-Fiber Insulation Components:

a. Fibrous-glass thermal or acoustical insulation elements present in equipment or

ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned with HEPA vacuuming equipment while the

HVAC system is under constant negative pressure and shall not be permitted to get

wet according to NADCA ACR 2006.

b. Cleaning methods used shall not cause damage to fibrous-glass components and

will render the system capable of passing the HVAC System Cleanliness Tests (see

NADCA ACR 2006).

c. Fibrous materials that become wet shall be discarded and replaced.

N. Coil Cleaning:

1. Measure static-pressure differential across each coil.

2. See NADCA ACR 2006, "Coil Surface Cleaning" Section. Type 1, or Type 1 and

Type 2, cleaning methods shall be used to render the coil visibly clean and capable of

passing Coil Cleaning Verification (see applicable NADCA ACR 2006).

3. Coil drain pans shall be subject to NADCA ACR 2006, "Non-Porous Surfaces Cleaning

Verification." Ensure that condensate drain pans are operational.

4. Electric-resistance coils shall be de-energized, locked out, and tagged before cleaning.

5. Cleaning methods shall not cause any appreciable damage to, cause displacement of,

inhibit heat transfer, or cause erosion of the coil surface or fins, and shall comply with

coil manufacturer's written recommendations when available.

6. Rinse thoroughly with clean water to remove any latent residues.

O. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings:

1. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings if active fungal growth is reasonably suspected

or where unacceptable levels of fungal contamination have been verified. Apply

antimicrobial agents and coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations

and EPA registration listing after the removal of surface deposits and debris.

2. When used, antimicrobial treatments and coatings shall be applied after the system is

rendered clean.

3. Apply antimicrobial agents and coatings directly onto surfaces of interior ductwork.

4. Sanitizing agent products shall be registered by the EPA as specifically intended for use

in HVAC systems and ductwork.

3.4 CLEANLINESS VERIFICATION

A. Verify cleanliness according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Verification of HVAC System

Cleanliness" Section.




230130.51 - 5

B. Verify HVAC system cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before applying any treatment

or introducing any treatment-related substance to the HVAC system, including biocidal agents

and coatings.

C. Perform visual inspection for cleanliness. If no contaminants are evident through visual

inspection, the HVAC system shall be considered clean. If visible contaminants are evident

through visual inspection, those portions of the system where contaminants are visible shall be

re-cleaned and subjected to re-inspection for cleanliness.

D. Additional Verification:

1. Perform surface comparison testing or NADCA vacuum test.

2. Conduct NADCA vacuum gravimetric test analysis for nonporous surfaces.

E. Verification of Coil Cleaning:

1. Measure static-pressure differential across each coil.

2. Coil will be considered clean if the coil is free of foreign matter and chemical residue,

based on a thorough visual inspection.

F. Prepare a written cleanliness verification report. At a minimum, include the following:

1. Written documentation of the success of the cleaning.

2. Site inspection reports, initialed by supervisor, including notation on areas of inspection,

as verified through visual inspection.

3. Surface comparison test results if required.

4. Gravimetric analysis (nonporous surfaces only).

5. System areas found to be damaged.

G. Photographic Documentation: Provide photographic documentation within final cleanliness

verification report.

3.5 RESTORATION

A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components

according to NADCA ACR 2006, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.

B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in Project closeout report.

C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing. Comply with

requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

D. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."

E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.

F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have

removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.



COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT


230513 - 1

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Section 232913 – Variable Frequency Motor Controllers and Enclosed Controllers

1.2 SUMMARY





1.3 COORDINATION


following:

1. Motor controllers, variable frequency drives and motor starters.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Motors shall premium efficiency complying with NEMA MG 1.


C. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

D. Motors to be operated with a variable frequency drive (VFD, VSD) shall be furnished with a

bearing protection ring/shaft grounding ring similar to Aegis.




230513 - 2


A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.





A. Description: NEMA MG 1 Design B or NEMA MG-1 medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


D. Multispeed Motors:



E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

1. Bearing shall have a minimum rated fatigue life of L-10 of 150,000 hours for direct

coupled application and a minimum of 50,000 hours for belted applications.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:



J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.








230513 - 3






2. Premium Efficient Inverter Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.


motors.



A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:


2. Split phase.



5. Electronically commutated (ECM) with integral speed control

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type or ECM type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.




EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING


230516 - 1

SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flexible, ball-joint, packed expansion joints.

2. Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints.

3. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints and loops.

4. Rubber packless expansion joints.

5. Pipe loops and swing connections.

6. Alignment guides and anchors.



and temperatures.




B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with


qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Engineer seal shall be valid in

the jurisdiction of the project.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems

and for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.

2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and

methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.

3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.

4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end

connections, and location for each expansion joint.




230516 - 2



B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.


A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.



1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



and temperatures.


2.2 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Flexible, Ball-Joint, Packed Expansion Joints:



the following:

a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

2. Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials"; and

ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-

containing parts and bolting.

3. Material: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing.

4. Design: For 360-degree rotation and angular deflection.

5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 400 deg F

6. Angular Deflection for NPS 6 and Smaller: 30 degree minimum.

7. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.

8. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or Welded.






230516 - 3

2.3 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:


following:


b. Flexicraft Industries.

c. Flex Pression Ltd.

d. Flex-Weld, Inc.

e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

f. Metraflex, Inc.

g. Senior Flexonics Pathway.

h. Unaflex.

i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig unless otherwise indicated.

3. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper pipe

ends.

a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded.

b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded.

4. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe end

connections; and carbon-steel shroud.

a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.

b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or Weld.

B. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.


c. Flex Pression Ltd.

d. Metraflex, Inc.

e. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.

2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two

flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section

of flexible hose.

3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.

4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with

solder-joint or threaded end connections.

a. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500

psig at 450 deg F ratings.

5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with

threaded end connections.

a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70


6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded

end connections.




















230516 - 4

7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged

or weld end connections.


deg F (1900 kPa at 21 deg C) and 200 psig at 600 deg F (1380 kPa at 315 deg C)

ratings.

C. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:


following:

a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.


c. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.

d. Metraflex, Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion

Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-PSJ-703.

4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods as required by the

application.

5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods as required by the

application.

6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.

7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F.

8. Material for Fluids Containing Acids, Alkalies, or Chemicals: EPDM.

9. Material for Fluids Containing Gas, Hydrocarbons, or Oil: Buna-N.

10. Material for Water: EPDM.

11. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS

A. Alignment Guides:


following:

a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.


c. Flexicraft Industries.

d. Flex-Weld, Inc.

e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

f. Metraflex, Inc.

g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.

2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer

cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to

pipe.

3. Shell must be sized to accommodate insulation.

B. Anchor Materials:

1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.

3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.















230516 - 5

4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for

application.

a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.

b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.

c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened

portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component

epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is

to be installed.

b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud


c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXPANSION AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed at all

expansion and seismic joints. Refer to the architectural and structural drawings for locations of

all joints.

B. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.

3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or

compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in

main.

C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including

tee in riser.

D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including

tee in main.

3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Install two guides on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to

expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.




230516 - 6

C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.

D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9

and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

E. Anchor Attachments:

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications."

2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,

Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.

F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with

ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.

2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow

fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.



SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING


230517 - 1

SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.




5. Grout.

6. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-

resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without

penetrating items.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded

steel collar; zinc coated.

C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc

coated, with plain ends.

D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with





230517 - 2

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.



following:


2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping

ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.




following:


2. CALPICO, Inc.


4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular

space between piping and sleeve.



2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.




1. Presealed Systems.


concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match

piping OD.

2.5 GROUT














230517 - 3




2.6 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant, ASTM C920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, use NT.

B. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;

ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT. Grade P Pourable (self-leveling)

formulation is for opening in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

C. Silicone Foam: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and

cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION







are constructed.




2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal

system.



2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inchular clear space between sleeve

and pipe or pipe insulation.


appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."




230517 - 4

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."



1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inchannular clear space between






level.


ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal

pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified

in Division 07 "Penetration Firestopping."








watertight seal.






D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




230517 - 5




a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Sleeve-seal fittings.

b. Piping NPS 6and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between piping and


b. Piping NPS 6and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.





1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inchannular clear space between piping and


b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system.



4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:


b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.



b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING


230518 - 1

SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS




2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-Brass Type with polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew

fastener.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING


230518 - 2

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.



b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-




f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with


g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,









METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING


230519 - 1

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermometers.

2. Gauges.

3. Test plugs.


1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers, gauges indicating manufacturer's number, scale

range, and location for each.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer, gauge signed by product manufacturer.

1.5 WARRANTY


replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: minimum 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.




230519 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS


following:

1. Trerice, H. O. Co. BX9-GLW

2. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group 3AA-ES

3. Weiss Instruments, Inc. A9VU

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Cast aluminum; minimum 9-inch nominal size.

D. Case Form: Adjustable angle; 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane,

with locking device.

E. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and organic liquid/spirit.

F. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched or baked scale markings

graduated in deg F.

G. Window: Glass.

H. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

I. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

J. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

K. Connector: Swivel union joint, 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5

percent of scale range.

M. Provide weather tight/proof (NEMA 4X) case for all exterior applications.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Manufacturers: Same as manufacturer of thermometer being used.

B. Description: Pressure-tight, threaded-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting

and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer.


2. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Brass.

3. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Stainless Steel.

4. Type: Tapered shank.

5. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

6. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.







230519 - 3

7. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

8. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

2.3 PRESSURE GAUGES


following:

1. Trerice, H. O. Co. 700SS-SGW, 700LFSS-SGW

2. Wika 232.53, 233.53

3. Weiss NF402, LF442

B. Direct-and Remote Mounting, Dry and Liquid Filled, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-

dial type complying with ASME B40.100.

1. Case: Dry and liquid filled, stainless steel, 4 inch diameter.

2. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type or back-outlet.

4. Movement: Stainless steel mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to

pointer.

5. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with scale markings graduated in psi.

6. Pointer: Metal, micrometer adjustable pointer.

7. Window: Safety Glass.

8. Ring: Stainless Steel.

9. Accuracy: Grade 1A, plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.

11. Provide weather tight/proof (NEMA 4X) case for all exterior applications.

12. Provide surface mount style case with back flange, lower connection, 316 stainless steel

capillary tubing, and assembly for remote mounted gauges.

2.4 GAUGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Match attachment size below with pressure-gauge-connection size.

1. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads

and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated

piping.

2. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of steel pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

3. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe

threads. Provide valve extensions to allow handle function to not interfere with the full

insulation thickness.

2.5 TEST PLUGS


following:


2. MG Piping Products Co.






230519 - 4

5. Sisco Manufacturing Co.


7. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and

threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.

2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.

E. Test Kit: Furnish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gauge and adaptor, one

thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gauge, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing

elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

1. Pressure Gauge: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- diameter dial and

probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig.

2. High-Range Thermometer: Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- diameter

dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F.

3. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A. Install thermometers where indicated on the plans and specifications.

B. Install liquid-in-glass thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat exchanger.

3. Supply air, outside-air, return-air, and mixed-air ducts.

4. Two inlets and two outlets of each water to water heat pump.

5. Inlet and outlet of each water to air heat pump.

6. Inlet and outlet of each buffer tank.

7. Discharge of each pump.

8. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled condensing unit.

9. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled refrigeration condensing unit.

10. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled VRF condensing unit.

C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers:

1. Dual Temperature Heating and Cooling Water and heating coil: 0 to 200 deg F, with 2-

degree scale divisions.

2. Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

3. Geothermal (Glycol) Condenser Water: 0 to 200 deg F, with 2-degree scale divisions.




230519 - 5

3.2 PRESSURE GAUGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install pressure gauges where indicated on the plans and specifications.

B. Install liquid filled-type pressure gauges at the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve

2. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3. Two inlets and two outlets of each water to water heat pump.

4. Inlet and outlet of each water to air heat pump.

5. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled condensing unit.

6. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled refrigeration condensing unit.

7. Inlet and outlet of each water cooled VRF condensing unit.

C. Install dry-type pressure gauges at the following locations:

1. Across tube bundles.

2. Across water coils per details.

D. Provide the following pressure ranges for pressure gauges:

1. Scale: Two times operating pressure.

3.3 INSTALLATIONS

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping

tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at the

most readable position.

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gauges on panel.

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gauge for fluids.

K. Provide valve extensions to allow handle function to not interfere with the full insulation

thickness.

L. Install test plugs in piping tees.




230519 - 6

M. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements

and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

O. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

P. All meters and gauges shall be installed according to manufacturer’s requirements.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

for meters, gauges, machines, and equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.



GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING


230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Iron single flange butterfly valves

3. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves.

4. High-performance butterfly valves.

5. Bronze swing check valves.

6. Iron swing check valves.

7. Iron swing check valves with closure control.

8. Iron, grooved-end swing-check valves.

9. Iron, center-guided check valves.

10. Bronze globe valves.

11. Iron globe valves.

12. Lubricated plug valves.

13. Eccentric plug valves.

14. Chainwheels.


1. Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.




230523 - 2


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.





2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.


handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

1.7 WARRANTY



1. Warranty Period: minimum five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.




230523 - 3

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: all high performance valves (ball and butterfly) 2 1/2” and larger.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4and smaller except plug valves.

3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation. Refer to Specification 230700.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:


following:

a. Hammond Valve.


c. NIBCO INC.


e. Apollo, Conbraco Industries

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Soldered or Threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

g. Stem: Stainless steel.

h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

i. Port: Full.




230523 - 4

2.3 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:


following:

a. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.


c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.4 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:


following:

a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.


c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.


2. Description:



c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.

d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.

e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron.

f. Seal: EPDM.

2.5 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Class 150, Butterfly Valves:


following:

a. Zwick Armaturen GMBH.

b. Adams.

c. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International.

d. Jamesbury

e. Milwaukee Valve Company
















230523 - 5

2. Description:


b. CWP Rating: 285 psig at 500 deg F.

c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: Carbon steel.

e. Seat: Double Offset. Reinforced PTFE. MTFE or Xtreme.

f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane.

g. Disc: Carbon steel.

h. Service: Bidirectional.

2.6 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. All check valves shall be low pressure type.

B. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.


c. NIBCO INC.

d. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.7 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:


following:


b. Hammond Valve.


d. NIBCO INC.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:


b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.










230523 - 6

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:


following:


b. Hammond Valve.


d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:




d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

i. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.

2.9 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES

A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves:


following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.


c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.


2. Description:

a. CWP Rating: 300 psig.

b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

c. Seal: EPDM.

d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.

2.10 IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES

A. All check valves shall be low pressure type.

B. Class 150, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


following:

a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation.

b. Crispin Valve.















230523 - 7

c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:




d. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Style: Compact wafer.

f. Seat: Bronze.

C. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat:


following:

a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation.

b. Crispin Valve.

c. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

2. Description:




d. Body Material: ASTM A 395/A 395M or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Style: Globe, spring loaded.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Seat: Bronze.

2.11 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


following:


b. Hammond Valve.


d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.


h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.




230523 - 8

2.12 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:


following:


b. Hammond Valve.


d. NIBCO INC.


2. Description:


b. CWP Rating: 250 psig and 400 degrees.

c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.13 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:


following:

a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Company.

c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 250 psig and 400 degrees.

c. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-

sealing system.

d. Pattern: Venturi.

e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

B. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:


following:

a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc.

b. Milliken Valve Company.

c. R & M Energy Systems, a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.



d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, Grade 40 cast iron with

lubrication-sealing system.

e. Pattern: Venturi.

f. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.




230523 - 9

2.14 CHAINWHEELS


following:

1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.

2. Roto Hammer Industries.

3. Trumbull Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.

2. Attachment: For connection to ball, butterfly and plug valve stems.

3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile Iron, of type and size required for valve.

4. Chain: galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

5. Safety Cable: provide a secondary safety restraint system, a stainless steel safety cable kit

for each chain wheel. Attach steel cable to a nearby pipe or other secure object to provide

additional protection.

C. Provide one chain storage bucket per chain wheel.

1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. model Chain Away

2. Roto Hammer Industries model Chucket

3. Trumbull Industries. Model Chain-Up

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



handling.







E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.




230523 - 10

B. Provide and install access doors in ceilings and walls where valves are located behind

inaccessible ceilings and walls. Indicate all access doors on shop drawings, coordinate locations

with architect.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install chain wheels on operators for ball, butterfly, globe, and plug valves > 83 inches above

floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between

flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly valves

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Lug type.

3. Throttling Service: Globe, ball or butterfly valves.

4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. Valves installed in wet/damp or exterior locations shall be suitable for the environment. Valve

bodies, handles, flanges, wheels shall be factory epoxy coated by the manufacturer. Bolts,

washers, and nuts used for flange connections shall be stainless steel.

C. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

D. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. Dual temperature and geothermal (glycol) condenser water:

a. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends or soldered ends with

union.

b. For Steel Piping: Flanged ends.

c. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.




230523 - 11

3.5 DUAL TEMPERATURE WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless steel trim.

2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

3. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. High Performance Butterfly Ball Valves: Class 150; Lug type, or 175 CWP, Iron,

Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats, or 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End

Swing Check Valves.

3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.

4. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 150, compact-wafer, metal seat.

5. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 250.

3.6 GEOTHERMAL (GLYCOL) CONDENSER WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless steel trim.

2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

3. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. High Performance Butterfly Ball Valves: Class 150; Lug type, or 175 CWP, Iron,

Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats, or 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End

Swing Check Valves

3. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.

4. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves: Class 150, compact-wafer, metal seat.

5. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 250.



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY





4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.


6. Pipe stands.


8. Plastic Pipe Supports.


1. Section 232113 “Hydronic Piping”

2. Section 230516 "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping" for pipe guides and

anchors.

3. Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for

vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.






230529 - 2








installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for

components:



3. Pipe stands.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance



1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, metal pipe hanger and support

systems shall be one of the following or engineer-approved equal.

1. Anvil International

2. ERICO, Inc.

3. PHD

4. Hubbard Enterprises




230529 - 3




2. Metallic Coatings:

a. Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Hot dipped galvanized.

b. General Service: Electrogalvanized.

3. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

4. MSS SP-58 Continuous-thread hanger rod, nuts, and washers:

a. Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Carbon-Steel Hot dipped galvanized.

b. General Service: Carbon-Steel Electrogalvanized.


A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes.

B. Metallic Coatings:

1. Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Hot dipped galvanized.

2. General Service: Electrogalvanized.

C. MSS SP-58 Continuous-thread hanger rod, nuts, washers, and U-bolts:

1. Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Carbon-Steel Hot dipped galvanized.

2. General Service: Carbon-Steel Electrogalvanized.




following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.




6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of:

a. Hostile/Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Carbon-Steel.

b. General Service: Carbon-Steel.











230529 - 4




8. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and less than or equal to 12 ft above finished

floor; shall be provided with plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall

be same throughout the project.



following:

a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc.



d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

g. PHS Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,


3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.




6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of:

a. Corrosive/Moist/Exterior environments: Carbon-Steel.

b. General Service: Carbon-Steel.




8. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and less than or equal to 12 ft above finished

floor; shall be provided with plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall

be same throughout the project.

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Rigid Insulation Blocks: High density, rigid fiberglass material intended for use as thermal

insulation.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


following:

a. Hamfab – H Block

2. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less, and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as

tested by ASTM E 84.

3. Factory-Applied Jacket: ASJ-SSL. Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.

4. Service temperatures: -120° F. to +1000° F.

5. Density: 18 lb. cu./ft.

6. Moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume, 96 hrs. at 120° F/ 96% RH

7. Corrosion: Does not cause or accelerate corrosion












230529 - 5

8. Safety: Non-combustible

9. Shrinkage: None

10. Dimensionally stable

11. Alkalinity: Ph9

12. Thermal Conductivity: K = .30 (stable, non-deteriorating)

13. Compressive strength: nominal 5% deflection at 30PSI, nominal 10% deflection at 80PSI

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts



following:

a. Buckaroos, Inc.

2. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with

100-psi (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

3. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-

psi (688-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.


A. Mechanical-Wedge Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners. Model Power-Stud

b. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries Model AWA

c. Hilti, Inc. Model KB

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. Model Trubolt

e. MKT Fastening, LLC. Model Sup-R-Stud

B. Mechanical Anchor: Steel threaded fastening system for suspending threaded rod vertically

overhead; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and


1. Manufacturers:

a. Powers Fasteners. Model Vertigo; Wood Vertical Hanger and Wood Side

b. Hanger

c. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries Model ARS, ARSW

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Model RWV, RWH






230529 - 6

2.7 PIPE STANDS

A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped

cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

b. MIRO Industries.

c. Portable Pipe Hangers.

C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof

installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:


b. MIRO Industries.


D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for


2. Base: Plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

5. Manufacturers:


b. MIRO Industries.


E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for


2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

6. Manufacturers:


b. MIRO Industries.


F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-

steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof

curb.




230529 - 7


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.




2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars




C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.



2.10 PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORTS


following:

1. Armacell Insuguard with InsuCover

2. Eaton B-Line Snap ‘N Shield.

B. UL classified for USA.

C. UV Resistant.

D. ASTM E84 certified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,


structure.




230529 - 8

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated

trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being


C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and less than or equal to 12ft above finished floor;

shall be provided with plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall be same

throughout the project.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in all pipe hangers and shields for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Powder-actuated fasteners are not acceptable.

2. When possible, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

3. Install mechanical-wedge type anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Pin/nail anchors, spikes, expansion shields, expansion anchors, dropin anchors, wedge

bolts, self tapping screw anchors, and friction clamps are not acceptable.

G. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.



I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping



K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional



inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses





230529 - 9

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed


O. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by

ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles. Fill interior voids with insulation that

matches adjoining insulation.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Thermal-hanger shield inserts shall be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate

for pipe NPS 4and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.





5. Insert Material: Length at a minimum of 2” longer; in each direction; than protective

shield length.

P. All pipe hangers shall be sized to accommodate the pipe, pipe insulation thickness and

protective shields and saddles. Insulation shall be continuous through all hangers and

penetrations.

1. Insulation may not be continuous through the hanger when riser clamps and pipe clamps

are utilized for vertical support. Insulation shall be continuous around the pipe clamp and

continue 3” on the method of support; threaded rod, pipe stand.

2. Insulation shall be continuous through the hanger when pipe clamps are utilized for

horizontal suspension. Full circumference protective shield shall be utilized.




B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.




supports.






230529 - 10



following:





4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so


3.4 ADJUSTING




C. Provide plastic caps on the ends of all threaded rod exposed and less than or equal to 12ft above

finished floor. Color shall be same throughout the project.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply



B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

Section 099123 "Interior Painting" and Section 099600 "High Performance Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



equipment.




not have field-applied finish.






230529 - 11

E. Use carbon-steel electrogalvanized pipe hangers and supports, electrogalvanized metal trapeze

pipe hangers and electrogalvanized metal framing systems and attachments for general service

applications.

F. Use carbon-steel hot dipped galvanized pipe hangers and supports, hot dipped galvanized metal

trapeze pipe hangers and hot dipped galvanized metal framing systems and attachments for

corrosive/moist/exterior service applications.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in




2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes

NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.


pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated

and insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

5. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For floor mounting of

insulated, stationary pipes below 100°F NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.






support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 30, from

two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.



might occur.


longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical



NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition

to expansion and contraction.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system



NPS 24.






230529 - 12

K. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Wedge type mechanical expansion anchor: For upper attachment to suspend hangers

from concrete.

2. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete.


construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. Retaining strap/clip required.




6. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

7. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Only acceptable for support of pipes

less than or equal to NPS 2. Retaining strap/clip required.


flange edge.







structural steel.










L. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system




2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length indicated in above sections.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

M. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping



2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.






230529 - 13

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability


6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress







N. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not


1. Each pipe shall be provided with a U-bolt to retain the pipe on the hanger.

2. Each insulated pipe shall be provided with a 360 degree insulation shield at each U-bolt.

O. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not


P. Only refrigerant piping utilizing elastomeric pipe insulation may be installed and supported

using plastic pipe supports.

Q. Use mechanical-wedge type anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured

instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

1. Powder-actuated fasteners are not acceptable.

2. When possible, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

3. Install mechanical-wedge type anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.





VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT


230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Isolation mounts.


4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.

5. Housed spring mounts.


7. Spring hangers.

8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.

9. Pipe riser resilient supports.


11. Roof curbs

12. Seismic snubbers.

13. Restraining braces and cables.

14. Steel and inertia, vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Refer to structural drawings for wind speed and seismic design criteria.

B. Importance Factor: 1.0.

C. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 110 mph.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 2

2. Refer to structural drawings for wind speed and seismic design criteria.

3. All outdoor equipment subject to wind loads must have attachment calculations stamped

by a professional engineer registered in the state that the project is located.

D. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Seismic Design Category (SDC): B

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.185 Second):

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.099


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to


b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind

restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment

mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment

mounted outdoors.



deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been

examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and

rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,

and cantilever loads.

a. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and

values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate

association with vibration isolation devices.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 3

b. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint

details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in

other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the

basis for approval (tests or calculations).


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and

equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and

seismic restraints.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.





conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or

preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on

calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing

are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-

restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. registered in

the project state.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. (AB)

2. Kinetics Noise Control. (KNC)

3. Mason Industries. (MI)

4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. (VE)

5. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. (VM&C)

6. Novia, A Division of Carpenter & Patterson (N)

B. Pads, Type NP (Neoprene Pad): Arranged in a single layer of ¾” thick ribbed or waffled

neoprene for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and factory cut to

sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.


Type NP isolators shall be one of the following products:

Type Super W……………….MI

Type NGD.…………………..KNC

Type 400N..………………….VE

Series Maxi-Flex…………….VM&C

Type NPW……………………N

C. Pads, Type DNP (Double Neoprene Pad): Arranged in two layers of ¾” thick ribbed or waffled

neoprene, separated by a galvanized steel, stainless steel or aluminum plate. If the isolator is

outdoors, the plate shall not be made of galvanized steel. These layers shall be permanently

adhered together. The pads shall be sized so that they will be loaded within the manufacturer’s

recommended range.


Type DNP isolators shall be one of the following products:

Type Super W (Multilayers)….MI

Type NGD (Multilayers)……..KNC

Type 400N (Multilayers)…….VE

Series Maxi-Flex…………….VM&C

Type NPW (Multilayers)..…….N

D. Restrained Mounts, Type FNC (Floor Neoprene Constrained): All-directional mountings with

seismic restraint.






Type FNC isolators shall be one of the following products:

Type BR.…………………….MI

Series RSM………………….VM&C

Type RNM..…………………N



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 5

E. Spring Isolators Type FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene): Freestanding, laterally stable, open-

spring isolators.







5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

Type FSN isolators shall be one of the following products with appropriate neoprene pad

(if used) selected from Type NP:

Type SW (Style A)…………..AB

Type SLFH.………………….MI

Type FDS B………………….KNC

Type OST…………………….VE

Series AC…………………….VM&C

Type SM………………………N

F. Restrained Spring Isolators, Type FSNTL (Floor Spring and Neoprene Travel Limited):

Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to

weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, neoprene or

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting

and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having

jurisdiction.







Type FSNTL isolators shall be one of the following products with appropriate neoprene

pad (if used) selected from Type NP or approved equal:

Type CT………………………AB

Type SLR…………………….MI

Type FLS…………………….KNC

Type KW…………………….VE

Series AWR………………….VM&C

Type RSM……………………N

G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down

before contacting a resilient collar.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 6

H. Elastomeric Hangers Type HN (Hanger Neoprene): Single or double-deflection type, fitted

with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded

connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Type HN isolators shall be one of the following products:

Type BRD….…………………AB

Type HD.……………….…….MI

Type RH…….……………….KNC

Type 3C..…………………….VE

Type RHD..………………….VM&C

Type NH………………………N

J. Spring Hangers Type HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene): Combination coil-spring and

elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.










6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.


spring coil.

Type HSN isolators shall be one of the following products:

Type HRSA..………….…..…..AB

Type 30N…………………..….MI

Type SRH………..………..…..KNC

Type SNRC………………..….VE

Type RSH 30A or RSHSC.….VM&C

Type RSH……..………………N

K. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert

hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.










6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 7


spring coil.

L. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch-thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit

stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load

on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

M. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch-thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a

factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and

contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection

of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

2. Kinetics Noise Control.

3. Mason Industries.

4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

5. Novia, A Division of Carpenter & Patterson

B. Inertia Base – Type BIB: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for

placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide

bases or rails.

a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors

in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported

equipment manufacturer.

2.3 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL

A. Resilient penetration sleeve/seals shall be field-fabricated from a pipe or sheet metal section that

is l/2" to 3/4" larger than the penetrating element in all directions around the element, and shall

be used to provide a sleeve through the construction penetrated. The sleeve shall extend 1"

beyond the penetrated construction on each side. The space between the sleeve and the

penetrating element shall be packed with glass fiber or mineral wool to within 1/4" of the ends

of the sleeve. The remaining 1/4" space on each end shall be filled with acoustical sealant to

form an airtight seal. The penetrating element shall be able to pass through the sleeve without



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 8

contacting the sleeve. Alternatively, prefabricated sleeves accomplishing the same result are

acceptable.

Type SWS……………………………………………..…….M.I.

2.4 RESILIENT LATERAL SUPPORTS

A. These units shall either be a standard product of the vibration isolator manufacturer, or be

custom fabricated from standard components. These units shall incorporate neoprene isolation

elements similar to Type FN that are specifically designed to provide resilient lateral bracing of

ducts or pipes.

Resilient lateral supports shall be one of the following products or approved equal:

Type Custom ........................................................................... A.B.

Type ADA .............................................................................. M.I.

Type RGN ........................................................................... K.N.C.

Type VERG or VPL ............................................................... V.E.

Type MDPA .................................................................... V.M.&C.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Refer to specification section 233300 for requirements.

2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS (FPC) PIPE TO PUMP

A. Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and

Kevlar7 tire cord frictioning. Any substitutions must have equal or superior physical and

chemical characteristics. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face rubber flanged

ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2" and larger shall

have two spheres reinforced with a ductile iron external ring between spheres. Flanges shall be

split ductile iron or steel with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" to 24" may be single

sphere. Sizes 6” to 12” may have threaded two piece bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and

cable retention. Connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 170°F with a uniform drop in

allowable pressure to 215 psi at 250°F in sizes through 14". 16" through 24" single sphere

minimum ratings are 180 psi at 170°F and 150 psi at 250°F. Higher rated connectors may be

used to accommodate service conditions. All expansion joints must be factory tested to 150% of

rated pressure for 12 minutes before shipment. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be

a minimum of 3/1. Concentric reducers to the above ratings may be substituted for equal ended

expansion joints.

B. Expansion joints shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints

under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the

manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods.

If control rods are used, they must have 2” thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in

diameter to take the thrust at 1000 psi maximum on the washer area.

Flexible pipe connections shall be one of the following or an approved equal:

SFDEJ or SFU ........................................................................ M.I.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 9

2.7 STAINLESS STEEL FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS (FPC-SS) FOR CONNECTION TO

ALL EQUIPMENT WITH SPRING ISOLATION (AIR HANDLING UNIT COILS, ETC.)

A. Refer to Flexible Pipe Connections (FPC) Pipe To Pump above for pipe to pump connection

requirements.

B. Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3"

(75mm) and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths

shall be as tabulated:

Flanged

3" x 12" 6" x 18" 12" x 24"

4" x 12" 8" x 18"

14" x 30"

5" x 18" 10" x 18"

16" x 32"

Male Nipples

1/2" x 12" 1-1/4" x 12" 2" x 12"

3/4" x 12" 1-1/2"x 12" 2-1/2" x 18"

1" x 12"

At equipment, hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontal

and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible. Flexible pipe connections shall be one

of the following or an approved equal:

Type FFL…………………..…………………………. M.I.

2.8 GROMMETS

A. Grommets shall be made of neoprene or neoprene impregnated duck that is specially formed to

prevent bolts from directly contacting the isolator base plate, and shall be sized so that they will

be loaded within the manufacturer's recommended load range. Grommets shall either be custom

made by combining a neoprene washer and sleeve, or be one of the following products or an

approved equal:

Type Isogrommets ................. MBIS, Inc. (Bedford Heights, OH)

Type WB ...................................... Barry Controls (Brighton, MA)

Type HG ........................ Mason Industries Inc. (Hauppauge, NY)

2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Sealants for acoustical purposes as described in this specification shall be silicone or one of the

resilient, nonhardening sealants indicated below:

Acoustical sealant ............................................................... D.A.P.

BR-96 or AC-20 (AC-20 FTR - Fire Rated) ....................... Pecora

Sonoloc ............................................................................. Sanborn

Acoustical Sealant #834 (Acrylic Latex) ........................... Tremco

Acoustical sealant ............................................................... U.S.G.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 10

2.10 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL MOTION

A. Where pipes cross building expansion or seismic joints and available space will not

accommodate U loops, the use of universal stainless steel expansion vee loops is recommended.

Each joint must be engineered and stamped by the seismic engineer to certify all directional

movement capabilities per structural specifications. PE stamped submittal to include pipe stress

loads, anchor layout, guide layout and factory pressure test certification.

Model Equi-V …………………………………..…….M.I.

Seismic “V” or “U”……………………………………SCP

Seismic SBV or SSV…………………………..………Vibro-Acoustics


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior use.

3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.

4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation devices to indicate capacity range.

2.12 ROOF-CURB - Type RC

A. Prefabricated metal roof curb shall be used at all roof penetrations including but not limited to

HVAC units, duct openings, pipe penetrations, and exhaust fans unless otherwise noted.

B. Prefabricated metal roof curb shall be used at all roof penetrations including but not limited to

HVAC units, duct openings, pipe penetrations, and exhaust fans unless otherwise noted.

A. Description: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, non-isolated curbs that bear directly on the roof

structure and are flashed and waterproofed into the roof's membrane waterproofing system

insulated, air- and watertight curb designed to support equipment and to withstand wind forces.

B. Curb Assembly: Curbs shall be manufactured from minimum 14-gauge Minimum galvanized

sheet metal, reinforced and cross braced as required. All side and end seams between sheets

shall be continuously welded, corner joints to be bolted.

1. Shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick 3 lb. density GREENGUARD rigid fiberglass board

encapsulated top and bottom or shall have provision for up to 2-inches (51-mm) external

insulation.

2. Galvanized steel duct supports shall be provided as required. Supports shall be capable of

supporting the ductwork and equipment with a maximum deflection over the width of the

curb of L/360.

3. Provide 22-gauge minimum galvanized pans for roof top units that require pans under

condensing sections.

4. Curbs shall be fully assembled at the factory and shipped as one piece (size permitting).

5. The curb assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood

nailer around the full perimeter for attaching roof materials.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 11

6. Curb height to be 14” above finished roof or as shown on drawings and shall

accommodate designed deck slope to provide level mounting surface for specified

equipment above.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control

devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance.




3.2 APPLICATIONS



B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings



components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

B. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide


C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide


D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at




EQUIPMENT


230548 - 12

E. Drilled-in Anchors:


anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or

drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are





3. Use wedge type anchors only.


5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. Locations of all vibration isolation devices shall be selected for ease of inspection and

adjustment as well as for proper operation.

2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions.

B. Isolators

1. All vibration isolators shall be aligned squarely above or below mounting points of the

supported equipment.

2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on the sides of the bases which are

parallel to the equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints.

3. Locate isolators to provide stable support for equipment, without excess rocking.

Consideration shall be given to the location of the center of gravity of the system and the

location and spacing of the isolators. If necessary, a base with suitable footprint shall be

provided to maintain stability of supported equipment, whether or not such a base is

specifically called for herein.

4. If a housekeeping pad is provided, the isolators shall bear on the housekeeping pad and

the isolator base plates shall rest entirely on the pad. Anchors shall be located a

minimum of 6” from the edge of the pad.

5. Hanger rods for vibration-isolated support shall be connected to major structural

members, not the floor slab between major structural members. Provide suitable

intermediate support members as necessary.

6. Vibration isolation hanger elements shall be positioned as high as possible in the hanger

rod assembly, but not in contact with the building structure, and so that the hanger

housing may rotate a full 360° about the rod axis without contacting any object.

7. Parallel running pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the

building. Isolator deflections must be the greatest required by the provisions for pipe

isolation for any single pipe on the trapeze. Do not mix isolated and unisolated pipes on

the same trapeze.

8. Pipes, ducts and equipment shall not be supported from other pipes, ducts and equipment.

9. Resiliently isolated pipes, ducts and equipment shall not come in rigid contact with the

building construction or rigidly supported equipment.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 13

10. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Adjust isolators to provide

1/4" clearance between the limit stop brackets and the isolator top plate, and between the

travel limit nuts and travel limit brackets.

11. Adjust all leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so that the isolated equipment is level and

in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.

C. Bases

1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is

suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by the

equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not a base frame is called

for on the schedule. In the case that a base frame is required for the unit because of the

equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for on the

equipment schedule, a base frame recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be

provided at no additional expense.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, there is to be a minimum operating clearance of 1" between

steel rails, steel frame bases or inertia bases and the floor beneath the equipment. The

isolator mounting brackets shall be positioned and the isolators adjusted so that the

required clearance is maintained. The clearance space shall be checked by the Contractor

to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short circuit or restrict the proper

operation of the vibration isolation system.

3. Isolation bases shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Flexible Duct Connections

1. Prior to installation of the flexible connection, sheet metal ducts and plenum openings

shall be squarely aligned with the fan discharge, fan intake, or adjacent duct section, and

the gap between connected parts shall be uniform. Flexible duct connections shall not be

installed until this provision is met. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between

connected sections, and the fabric shall not be stretched taut.

E. Flexible Pipe Connections

1. Install flexible pipe connections in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

2. Where equipment is spring isolated, install flexible pipe connections at all pipe

connections to equipment.

F. Grommets

1. Where grommets are required at hold down bolts of isolators, bolt holes shall be properly

sized to allow for grommets. The hold down bolt assembly shall include washers to

distribute load evenly over the grommets. Bolts and washers shall be galvanized.

G. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals

1. Maintain an airtight seal around the penetrating element and prevent rigid contact

between the penetrating element and the building structure. Fit the sleeve tightly to the

building construction and seal airtight on both sides of the construction penetrated with

acoustical sealant.



EQUIPMENT


230548 - 14

3.5 ROOF EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. Contractor shall coordinate project requirements for roof pitch prior to submitting on curbs.

Curbs shall be manufactured to accommodate architectural roof pitch in lieu of blocking or

additional structural steel. Equipment shall be mechanically fastened to the roof curb. Roof

curbs shall be seismic rated where required by the seismic design category indicated in this

specification section.

3.6 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping and ductwork where they cross seismic joints, where

adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the

connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural

element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with

requirements in this section and in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible

connections.








restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at

least seven days' advance notice.




Architect.





9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.





EQUIPMENT


230548 - 15

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.9 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL SCHEDULE




IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY




3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Valve tags.

6. Air Control Device Identification

7. Warning tags.





C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed


D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION


surfaces where devices are to be applied.






230553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.



4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

5 by 3 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,

2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for

greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size

of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were

screws or rivets would void warranty of equipment.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation tag or unique equipment number,

equipment description, and electrical panel designation serving the equipment. Pump tags shall

also indicate gpm, ft of head, and HP for the pump, as indicated on the balance report submittal.

1. Label Format: EQUIPMENT NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

SERVICE

DATA

ELECTRIC PANEL

2. Examples: CWP-5 AHU-1

CHILLED WATER PUMP VAV AIR HANDLING UNIT

CHILLED BEAMS FIRST FLOOR EAST

210 GPM / 55 FT / 5 HP 15,000 CFM,

EP-7 / CKT 15,16,17 EP-9 / CKT 21,22,23

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number

and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

D. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.


A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.




230553 - 3

C. Background Color: Red.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 5 by 3

inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 2 inch



G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws; adhesive for locations were screws or


H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

I. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Machine printed, color-coded, with

lettering indicating service, pipe size, and showing flow direction. Marker/hand written labels

are not acceptable. Not to be utilized bare pipe with fluid temperatures over 125°F.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: MS-970 Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full

circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners (straps for 6” O.D. of insulation

and larger are acceptable) or adhesive. Self-adhesive, sticker type, or pre-coiled polyester with

self-sealing lap are not acceptable. Pipe labels and pipe labels adhered to a clear pretensioned

sleeve are not acceptable.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Coordinate with facility standards. If no facility standards exist or


D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service, pipe size, and an arrow indicating

flow direction.

1. Lettering Size: Conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007.

E. Pipe labels located within plenums only:

1. MS-900 Self-adhesive, sticker type.

2. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service, pipe size, and an arrow

indicating flow direction.

2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Stencils: Minimum letter height of 2 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 1 inch for

access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors as indicated.




230553 - 4

B. Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations as used on

Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

C. Lettering, background, and arrows color shall meet the facilities standards, if no standard exists,

confirm the following color scheme is acceptable prior to commencement of work:

1. All lettering and arrows: Black

2. Background:

a. Blue: For outside air supply ducts.

b. Yellow: For hot air supply ducts, cold air supply ducts and combined hot/cold air

supply ducts.

c. Green: For exhaust, relief, return, and mixed air ducts.

d. Red: For hazardous material exhaust.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 19 gauge minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped

holes for attachment hardware.


B. Valve Tag Contents: Include identification of piping service using full designations as used on

Drawings symbol and abbreviations lists, equipment served, service, and valve number. Do not

use abbreviations.

1. Label Format: VALVE NUMBER

EQUIPMENT SERVED

SERVICE

DESCRIPTION

2. Example: HWS-001

AHU-1 HEATING COIL

HOT WATER SUPPLY

ISOLATION VALVE

C. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:


a. All services: as required for label information.

2. Valve-Tag Color:


3. Letter Color:


D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.


2. Valve-tag schedule shall be framed behind glass and located in each mechanical room.




230553 - 5

2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identifying Ribbons: Nylon

1. Size: Minimum 1-inch-wide by minimum 12 inches long, free hanging length.

2. Fasteners: Hand tied.

3. Color: Orange or Yellow.

B. Nylon ribbons shall be plenum rated when located in air plenums.

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.



3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER", "CAUTION" or "DO

NOT OPERATE."


B. Plastic labels shall be plenum rated when located in plenums.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.


A. Permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. Where equipment is located within

finished spaces, equipment labels shall not be located on the face of the equipment; where

possible, the label shall be located on the least conspicuous side.

C. All motor driven equipment, HVAC components, and major electrical boxes shall be

individually numbered. (Example: For unit heaters, use UH-1, UH-2, etc., even though both

units are of the same size and type.) All designations shall be unique, integrated with and

distinguished from existing designations.

D. Pump tags (for base mounted pumps) shall be a minimum of 3-inch-high and 18-inch-long with

1-inch-high lettering and fastened to the end face of the isolation base.

E. Air handling unit tags shall have a minimum of 2-inch-high lettering.




230553 - 6

F. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the

equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment,

valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be

clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall

indicate the same number as shown on the Drawings.


A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:


2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units

(less than 2’ in length)

3. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.


6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.

8. Both side of penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.


10. And at all locations required to conform to ASME/ANSI A13.1 - 2007.

B. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Coordinate with facility standards. If no facility standards exist or


C. All self-adhesive/sticker type labels located in plenums shall be secured with additional flow

arrow tape at each end of the label. Flow arrow tape shall be installed a minimum of 1.5 wraps

around the entire circumference of the pipe at each end of the label.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Duct Label: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction.

B. Locate labels/stencils:

1. Near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces.

2. At maximum intervals of 25 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by

removable ceiling system.


4. Both sides of penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.


C. Labeling/stenciling of all exposed ductwork shall be coordinated with the architect and engineer

prior to the commencement.




230553 - 7


A. Install tags on all valves and control devices in piping systems, including check valves, valves

within factory-fabricated equipment units and shutoff valves. List tagged valves in a valve

schedule.

3.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICE IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying ribbons on all control devices in duct systems including but not limited to

manual volume/balance dampers, splitter dampers, cable operated dampers, automatic control

dampers, and barometric dampers when located above accessible and inaccessible ceilings.

B. Ribbon tied on to control device for the purpose of visibly identifying device locations.

C. Attach ribbons at the time each control device is installed.

D. Ribbon shall hang down a minimum of 12” from control device.


A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.





TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC


230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Balancing contractor shall provide all services required to test, adjust and balance:

1. Each piece of equipment and system indicted on the contract documents, drawings and in

the specifications and all air inlets and outlets.

B. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

c. Multizone systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.




230593 - 2

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC NEBB

or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB

or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect, Construction Manager, and Commissioning Authority

(if Commissioning is part of the project) on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan

to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field

supervisor and technicians. Provide 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and

location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide 14 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.




230593 - 3

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated

perforations.

K. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or

mixing fluid flows.




230593 - 4

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for

Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping

Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.




230593 - 5

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.




230593 - 6

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments

to accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate

the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to

adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and

the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns for all the register, grille and diffuser baffles, pattern controllers, and

vanes of adjustable outlets to those indicated on the registers, grilles and diffusers shop

drawing for proper distribution without drafts.

E. TABB Contractor shall allow for one sheave replacement for each belt drive fan.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the

indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point

airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal

units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they

are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.




230593 - 7

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been

adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a

position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.

Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for

the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.

4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to

make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream

from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the

same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave

outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for

constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure

controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is

maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS

A. Set unit at maximum airflow through the cooling coil.

B. Adjust each zone's balancing damper to achieve indicated airflow within the zone.

C. Adjust patterns for all the register, grille and diffuser baffles, pattern controllers, and vanes of

adjustable outlets to those indicated on the registers, grilles and diffusers shop drawing for

proper distribution without drafts.

D. TABB Contractor shall allow for one sheave replacement for each belt drive fan.

3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct

variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.




230593 - 8

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the

general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal

valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement

pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval

from Architect and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic

Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve

until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as

designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open

position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.




230593 - 9

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5

percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated

flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic

systems.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,

serial number, and nameplate data.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.




230593 - 10

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

7. Air pressure drop.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.

2. Airflow.

3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.

4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.

5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.

6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

4. Air pressure drop.

5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.14 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Design value to plus 10

percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Design value to plus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Design value to plus 10 percent.

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Design value to plus 10 percent.

3.15 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and

balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.




230593 - 11

3.16 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water flow rates.




230593 - 12

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit diagram static pressure profile across all components.

a. Schematic diagram of unit and all components.

b. Static pressure upstream and downstream of all components indicated on the

diagram.

c. Include all components, damper, coils, fans, wheels, heat exchangers, sound

attenuators, baffles.

2. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

3. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

4. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total air flow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

j. Return airflow in cfm.

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.




230593 - 13

b. Location.

c. Coil type.

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft..

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

G. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.




230593 - 14

H. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

I. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Utilize the Register, grille, and diffuser layout floor plans submittal, refer to

Specification 233713 Register, Grille, and Diffusers.

c. Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, size, unique number

identifier, and accessories furnished. Unique number identifier shall match the

RGD submittal.

d. Indicate air patterns for all air terminal devices.

e. Apparatus used for test.

f. Area served.

g. Make.

h. Type and model number.

i. Effective area in sq. ft.


a. Air flow rate in cfm.

b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final air flow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

J. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and


1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.




230593 - 15

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

K. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.17 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 20 percent of heat pumps

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request

that a final inspection be made by the Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of the Commissioning Authority.




230593 - 16

3. Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final

report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total

measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a

normal 8-hour business day.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,

proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final

inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.


3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 1

SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Rigid Insulation Blocks.

b. Cellular glass.

c. Flexible elastomeric.

d. Mineral fiber.

2. Fire-rated insulation systems.

3. Insulating cements.

4. Adhesives.

5. Mastics.

6. Lagging adhesives.

7. Sealants.

8. Factory-applied jackets.

9. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.

10. Field-applied cloths.

11. Field-applied jackets.

12. Tapes.

13. Securements.

14. Corner angles.

15. Insulating tee handle/valve stem insulation.

16. Acoustical pipe and duct lagging.


1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and

jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Insulation schedule indicating insulating material and thickness, service, location (interior,

exterior), jacket type, and fastening method.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 2

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Products of one type, shall be by one manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program, manufacturer’s installation training certification or another craft training program

certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-

response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,

by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label

insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with

appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.

C. Store tapes, adhesives, mastics, cements, and insulation materials in ambient conditions in

accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

D. Follow manufacturer’s recommended handling practices.

E. Products shall contain no polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) such as Penta-BDE, Octa-

BDE or Deca-BDE fire retardants; whenever available.

F. Fiber Glass and Mold: Contractor shall take precaution to protect insulation materials from

moisture exposure or physical damage. Any fiber glass insulation that becomes wet or damaged

shall be replaced at no additional cost.

1. HVAC duct work insulation used in the air stream must be discarded if exposed to liquid

water.

G. Insulation shall comply with the International Energy Conservation Code.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity (k value): BTU-in. / (hr ∙ ft² ∙ °F)

B. UL Environment / GREENGUARD provides independent, third-party, Indoor Air Quality

(IAQ) certification of products for emissions of respirable particles and Volatile Organic


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 3

Compounds (VOC’s), including formaldehyde and other specific product-related pollutants.

Certification is based upon criteria used by EPA, OSHA and WHO.

C. IAQ: Indoor Air Quality

D. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency

E. WHO: World Health Organization

F. ASJ+: All Service Jacket composed of aluminum foil reinforced with glass scrim bonded to a

kraft paper interleaving with an outer film layer leaving no paper ex-posed.

G. ASJ: All Service Jacket

H. SSL+: Self-sealing Advanced Closure System

I. SSL: Self-Sealing Lap

J. FSK: Foil-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing

K. PSK: Poly-Scrim-Kraft; jacketing

L. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride

M. FRP: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic

N. ECOSE® Technology: a revolutionary new binder system based on rapidly renewable bio-

based materials rather than petroleum-based chemicals commonly used in other fiber glass

insulation products. ECOSE Technology reduces our binder embodied energy by up to 70% and

does not contain phenol, formaldehyde, acrylics or artificial colors.

O. The UL Environment / GREENGUARD Certification Program (formerly known as

GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certification) gives assurance that products designed for

use in indoor spaces meet strict chemical emissions limits, which contribute to the creation of

healthier interiors. Achieving UL Environment / GREENGUARD Certification gives credence

to manufacturers’ sustainability claims, backing them with empirical scientific data from an

unbiased, third-party organization.

P. UL Environment / GREENGUARD GOLD Certification: (Formerly known as GREENGUARD

CHILDREN & SCHOOLS Certification) offers stricter certification criteria, considers safety

factors to account for sensitive individuals (such as children and the elderly), and ensures that a

product is acceptable for use in environments such as schools and healthcare facilities. It is

referenced by both The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS) and the

Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Building Rating Systems.

Q. UL Environment / GREENGUARD Formaldehyde Free Verification Requirements: for a

product to be verified as formaldehyde free, product samples must have a measured emission

factor of less than or equal to 5 µg/m2 h at 24 elapsed hours or 3 µg/m2 h at 336 elapsed hours.

An emission factor of 5 µg/m2 h, corresponds to a chamber concentration of 2.5 µg/m3 for a

typical building ratio of 0.5 m2/m3.This chamber concentration is comparable to, or below


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 4

typical outdoor air concentrations. This demonstrates that the formaldehyde exposure from

products labeled as formaldehyde free will not contribute to airborne formaldehyde

concentrations at greater levels than those found in the natural outdoor environment.

R. Underwriter’s Laboratories Environment (UL Environment / GREENGUARD): offers

independent green claims validation, product assessment and certification. UL Environment /

GREENGUARD provides third-party credibility for sustainable products.

S. EUCEB: exonerated fiber from a health and safety standpoint by the European Certification

Board process.

T. Recycled content – post-consumer: materials such as bottled glass collected at curbside or other

collection sites after consumer use and used in the manufacturing process to create a new

product rather than being placed in a landfill or incinerated.

U. Recycled content – pre-consumer (aka post-industrial): materials used or created from one

manufacturing process which are collect-ed as scrap and placed back into another

manufacturing process rather than being placed in a landfill or incinerated.

V. Polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) such as Penta-BDE, Oc-ta-BDE or Deca-BDE fire

retardants: have been linked to adverse health effects after exposure in low concentrations.

W. UL Classified: UL has tested and evaluated samples of the product with respect to certain

properties of the product. UL Classifies products to:

1. Applicable UL requirements

2. Standards for safety

3. Standards of other National and International organizations


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct

Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain

clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and

for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 5

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be

applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Rigid Insulation Blocks: High density, rigid fiberglass material intended for use as thermal

insulation.



following:

a. Hamfab – H Block

2. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less, and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or less as

tested by ASTM E 84.

3. Factory-Applied Jacket: ASJ-SSL. Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.

4. Service temperatures: -120° F. to +1000° F.

5. Density: 18 lb. cu./ft.

6. Moisture absorption: 0.2% by volume, 96 hrs. at 120° F/ 96% RH

7. Corrosion: Does not cause or accelerate corrosion

8. Safety: Non-combustible

9. Shrinkage: None

10. Dimensionally stable

11. Alkalinity: Ph9

12. Thermal Conductivity: K = .30 (stable, non-deteriorating)

13. Compressive strength: nominal 5% deflection at 30PSI, nominal 10% deflection at 80PSI



HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 6

G. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid,

hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-

Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas One.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.

3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III.

4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV.

5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1.

6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type II, Class 2.

7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

H. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex or ArmaFlex Ultra.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Sheet and Insul-Tube.

I. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Insulation shall be formaldehyde-free or GREENGUARD Gold Indoor Air Quality Certified

and meet the GREENGUARD Gold standards for low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

emissions. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type I and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied

FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite FSK.

c. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Duct Wrap with ECOSE Technology.

d. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

J. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.


a. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas.

b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations.

c. Knauf Insulation; Elevated Temperature Blanket 1000° F with ECOSE®

Technology.

K. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Insulation shall be formaldehyde-free or GREENGUARD Gold Indoor Air Quality Certified

and meet the GREENGUARD Gold standards for low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

emissions. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications,

provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ for all exposed locations, FSK (attic locations).

Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CertaPro Commercial Board - CB 300.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 7

b. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas - Type 814.

c. Knauf Insulation; Atmosphere Air Duct Board with ECOSE technology-3.0 pcf.

d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 703 Series.

L. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.


a. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas.

b. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations.

c. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW.

d. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt.

e. Knauf Insulation; Elevated Temperature Board 1000° F with ECOSE®

Technology.

M. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: Insulation shall be formaldehyde-free or

GREENGUARD Gold Indoor Air Quality Certified and meet the GREENGUARD Gold

standards for low Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions.


a. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

b. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation with ECOSE® Technology.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

4. Type IV Grade A 1000 Degree Materials: Glass fiber manufactured with a bio based

binder. ASTM C 547, Type IV Grade A. Factory applied ASJ + SSL+ Jacketing.

5. Type IV Grade A 1000 Degree Materials: Glass fiber manufactured with a bio based

binder ASTM C 547, Type IV Grade A. Factory applied Redi-Klad Jacket: Venture Clad

5-ply weather and abuse resistant with self seal lap. Zeo Perm Jacket.

N. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with

ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface

of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of

insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with

self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the

longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.


a. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.

b. Nomaco

O. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Insulation shall be formaldehyde-free or GREENGUARD Gold Indoor Air Quality

Certified and meet the GREENGUARD Gold standards for low Volatile Organic Compound

(VOC) emissions. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with

ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612,

Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 8

deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are

specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.

b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex.

c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation with ECOSE® Technology.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.

2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Fire-Rated Board: Structural-grade, press-molded, xonolite calcium silicate, fireproofing board

suitable for operating temperatures up to 1700 deg F. Comply with ASTM C 656, Type II,

Grade 6. tested and certified to provide a 1 or 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to

authority having jurisdiction.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Johns Manville; Super Firetemp M.

b. Advance Thermal Corp

c. Thermaxx Jackets

B. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is

tested and certified to provide a 1 or 2-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek.

b. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap.

c. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products.

d. Unifrax; Fyre Wrap

2.3 REMOVEABLE THERMAL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Removable thermal blanket insulation attached with straps and double D-rings.



following:

a. Shannon Enterprises Inc. – Insultech Thermal Blanket

b. Thermaxx

2.4 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.



HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 9

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.


a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.

C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C 449/C 449M.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.

b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.

c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.5 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin

adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.

C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.

c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.

D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.

E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.





F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

c. Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.

d. Proto PVC Liquid Adhesive


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 10

2.6 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient

services.





2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film

thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.





2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.


5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Encacel.

b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 60-95/60-96.


2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness.



5. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.





2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 11

2.7 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.





2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-

resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.


4. Color: White.

2.8 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide one of the following:




d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White or gray.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.




3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: Aluminum.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 12

2.9 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ + SSL+: All Service Jacket with Advance Closure System self sealing lap. All

Service Jacket composed of aluminum foil reinforced with glass scrim bonded to a kraft

paper interleaving with an outer film layer leaving no paper exposed; conforming to

ASTM C 1136 Type I,II,III,IV and VII; vapor retarder; with a self-sealing adhesive.

2. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

4. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

5. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

6. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to

ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

7. PSK facing by Knauf Insulation: White polypropylene skrim kraft complying with

ASTM C1136 Type II.

8. For pipe covering, Knauf Insulation Earthwool® Redi-Klad® jacket. 5-ply weather and

abuse resistant with self seal lap, Living Building Challenge-Declare Red List Free. Zero

permeability per ASTM E 96-05; puncture resistance 35.4 kg (189.3 N) per ASTM D

1000; tear strength 4.3 lb(19.4N) per ASTM D 624; thickness 14.5 mils(0.0145”); tensile

strength 68.0 lb./inch width{306 N (31kg)/25mm}, Excellent for Chilled Water

Applications.

9. Fire Retardent: products shall contain no polybrominated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) such as

Penta-BDE, Octa-BDE or Deca-BDE; whenever available.

2.10 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Pipe Insulation: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count

of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch for covering pipe and pipe fittings.


a. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

B. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric for Duct and Equipment Insulation: Approximately 6 oz./sq. yd.

with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. inch for covering equipment.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Chil-Glas No. 5.

C. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe.


a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 13

2.11 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a

minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..


a. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.

2.12 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston.

b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.

c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.

d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

3. Color: Submit color chart for selection by facility. Color of the pvc jacket shall be

different for each system type.

4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,

unions, reducers, end caps, traps, mechanical joints.

5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

6. Fitting and pipe jacket shall be 25/50 flame and smoke spread rated. \

7. Thickness: 20 mil minimum.

D. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. 0.024” thickness.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper.

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 14

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing

membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a

rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white

aluminum-foil facing.


a. Polyguard; Alumaguard 60.

2.13 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.

b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;

complying with ASTM C 1136.



b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.

d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.



b. Compac Corp.; 120.

c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 15

2. Width: 2 inches.





7. Comply with UL 181-A.

D. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Film Thickness: 4 mils.

4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.

5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.


E. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Film Thickness: 6 mils.

4. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils.

5. Elongation at Break: 145 percent.


2.14 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. Childers Products; Bands.

b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for

capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation

indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.

2) GEMCO; CD.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 16

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CH-10.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: ONLY

ACCEPTABLE FOR EQUIPMENT, TANKS AND VESSELS. NOT TO BE USED ON

DUCTWORK. Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding

insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer

is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches

square.

c. Spindle: Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit

depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated

capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without

damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick,

stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to

ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.


following:

a. C & F Wire.

b. Childers Products.

c. PABCO Metals Corporation.

d. RPR Products, Inc.

2.15 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1-1/2 inch by 1-1/2 inch, PVC according to

ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 17

B. Manufacturers:

1. Speed Line Corporation

2. Or approved equal

2.16 INSULATING TEE HANDLE/VALVE STEM INSULATION

A. Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that

allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.


following:

1. Milwaukee Model: Insulator/MS

2. Nibco Model: Nib-Seal insulated handle

3. Apollo Model: Therma Seal

2.17 ACOUSTICAL PIPE AND DUCT LAGGING

A. Acoustical pipe and duct lagging shall be a 2 lb psf vinyl noise barrier with a reinforced foil

facing on one side.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Sound Seal model: B-20 LAG

2. Or approved equal

C. Sound Transmission class: 3

D. Accessories for securely mounting the Acoustical pipe and duct lagging

1. Foil lag tape

2. Stick pins

3. Welding pins

4. Banding

E. Flammability

1. UL 94: Meet VO

2. FMVSS-302: Pass

F. Acoustical Performance:

Sound Transmission Loss: Per ASTM E 90

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 STC

16 22 26 32 35 40 31

G. Samples: Furnish 18” x 21” samples for quality and general panel construction.

H. Submit technical data sheets reflecting construction, material thickness, material weight, and

Acoustical data.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 18

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other

conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a

corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an

epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F.

Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods

for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300

deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating

materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including

fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system

schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 19

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Continuous, unbroken vapor barrier is required on all below ambient service piping, ductwork,

and equipment.

K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, for joints, seams, and penetrations; insulate hangers, supports,

anchors, and other projections with appropriate insulation material finishing it with a vapor-

barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to

maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

6. On any piping that will carry chilled liquid, create a water dam every fourth joint by

sealing the butted ends of the pipe covering with the correct mastic.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal

thickness.

O. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 20

Q. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

R. Install insulating tee handle for all manually operated ball valves.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend exterior jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing to at least 2 inches

below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire

damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper

sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for

firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 21

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated.

For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves

and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation.

Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation

with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,

for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including

contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end

joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and

vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end

joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks

and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation

facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band

material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and

where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing

insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut

with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around

equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two

circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around

outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the

wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along

the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network

for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 22

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks, Vessels, and Pumps: Install

insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.

1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.

2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.

3. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.

4. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

C. Protective boxes on base mounted pumps:

1. Following elastomeric insulation application.

2. Fabricate metal boxes. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in

pump casings (if applicable). Fabricate joints of box sections with outward bolted

flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Joints shall be sealed with

gaskets. Secure the box sections together using quick connect latching mechanism.

(Cam/sash type latches are not acceptable) to facilitate easy removal.

3. Fabricate boxes from stainless steel sheet, at least 0.050 inch thick.

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation of same material and thickness as

used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to

the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and thickness

as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times

the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves,

insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill

joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulation and finish ends with cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than

two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 23

strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the

insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient

services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap

adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or

one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Insulate unions using removable thermal blanket insulation covers specified in the above

sections.

8. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for

above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

9. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

10. Stencil the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size

and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,

and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the

connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing

sealant.

D. Install removable thermal blanket insulation covers at all hot water and steam:

1. automatic control valves >4”

2. unions > 4”

3. butterfly valves

4. PRV stations

3.7 RIGID INSULATION BLOCK INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation at Hangers:

1. Refer to specification section 230529; 2.4 for thermal shield and hanger shield insert

requirements. Inserts and rigid insulation on bottom of piping at all insulation shields

shall be provided.

3.8 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without

deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 24

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of

same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of

cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body.

2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.9 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 25

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.


4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.10 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation

material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.



available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.



available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.



HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 26

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and discharge-

weld insulation pins.


for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 18 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not over compress insulation during installation to less than 75% stated

thickness.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with


facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 6 inch o.c.

Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the

insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.

At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually

mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, stands, legs, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and discharge-weld

insulation pins.


for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 27

3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 12

inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 12 inches o.c. each

way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold

insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with


facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous

unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with

insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure

laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.

Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier

mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. Refer to sections above for vapor

stops.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-

barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped

pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.

Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the

insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section

for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and

inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with

6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of

stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

7. Install PVC corner angles on all edges of insulated ductwork; 6ft and less above finished

floor; within mechanical rooms.

3.11 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with

factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 28

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Circumferential seams shall be a minimum 1 inch overlap, and longitudinal seams shall

be 1.5 to 2 inch overlap. For horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along

top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

2. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the

finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3. PVC pipe end caps shall be provided at al piping ends wherever the pipe insulation

terminates, to seal or conceal edges of the pipe insulation.

4. Cone reducers shall be provided where changes of insulation/pipe sizes occur.

5. On below ambient services, an intermediate vapor retarder compatible with PVC is

required to completely seal the insulation prior to installing the PVC cover. Care should

be taken to ensure that the vapor barrier mastic is applied between the pipe insulation and

the fitting cover, and on fitting cover throat overlap seam. All circumferential and

longitudinal seams of jackets and fitting covers should be sealed with manufacturers

recommended solvent welding adhesive.

6. PVC jacketing colors shall be different for every system. Comply with the Facilities

Standards color scheme; if one is not present, provide the following:

Service (Piping and Equipment) Jacket Color

Dual Temperature Water YELLOW

Geothermal Condenser Water GREEN

Coil Condensate WHITE

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.

E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe

insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end

overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate

overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive

or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around

overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply

adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer

to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge

to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with

an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch-circumference limit

allows for 2-inch-overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 29

jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal

for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and

wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.12 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and

supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.

B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.

C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are

specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.13 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket

Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09

painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of

insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.





1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be

limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-

applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 30

"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion

adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent

of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of

threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,

two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations

of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.15 DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply, return and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply, return and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

4. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

7. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

8. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

9. Flexible duct connectors shall be insulated with blanket type insulation to allow

movement.

10. And all systems/requirements indicated on the drawings schedules.

B. Items Not Insulated: unless otherwise noted.

1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1

2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

4. Vibration-control devices.

5. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.16 PIPING, VALVES, FITTING, EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Refer to schedule on drawings and specification requirements.

3.17 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Refer to schedule on drawings and specification requirements.

B. All exterior ductwork shall be fitted with all-weather tight aluminum jacketing

C. All exterior piping shall be fitted with aluminum jacketing.


HVAC INSULATION


230700 - 31

D. All interior exposed piping shall be fitted with PVC jacketing.



HVAC SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING


230800 - 1

SECTION 23 08 00 - HVAC SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Division 22 – Plumbing



1.3 REQUIRMENTS

A. The Commissioning process requires the participation of Division 23, Mechanical, to ensure that

all systems fulfill the functional and pre-functional requirements set forth in these construction

documents. The general commissioning requirements and coordination are detailed in Section

019113. Division 23, HVAC, shall fulfill commissioning responsibilities assigned to division 23

in accordance with Section 019113.


PART 3 - EXECUTION



installed properly.



with 019113.





operation.

B. The contractor will be provided with functional performance test procedures to perform while

CA witnesses. The contractor shall perform functional tests in accordance with 019113.




230800 - 2









1. Ground Source Heat Pumps

2. Hydronic Pumps

3. Air Terminal Units

4. VFDs

5. HVAC Power Ventilators

6. Electronic Air Cleaners

7. Dedicated Outdoor Air Units

8. Variable Refrigerant Volume HVAC Systems

9. Water to Water Heat Pumps

10. Unit Heaters

11. TAB Review

12. Spot check of testing adjusting and balancing

13. Automatic Temperature Controls and Energy Management System


A. See Attached.

End of Section




230800 - 3

Sample Only – Actual Functional Test Sheets shall be developed from final contract documents


DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM (DOAS-1)

1. Participants


CxA

Mechanical

Controls

TAB

Plumbing

Electrical



Check Description ☐ The above equipment and systems integral to them are complete and ready for functional

testing. ☐ All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and oper-

able per contract documents, including final setpoints and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed.

☐ Test and balance completed and approved for the hydronic systems and terminal units con-nected

☐ All A/E punchlist items for this equipment corrected. ☐ Safeties and operating ranges reviewed. ☐ Schedules and reviewed This checklist does not take the place of the manufacturer’s recommended

checkout and startup procedures. Items that do not apply shall be noted with the reasons on this form (N/A = not

applicable, BO = by others). Contractor’s assigned responsibility for sections of the checklist shall be respon-

sible to see that checklist items by their subcontractors are completed and checked off.




230800 - 4



Check Equip Tag DOAS-1 Comment

Cabinet and General Installation

Permanent labels affixed, including for fans ☐

Casing condition good: no dents, leaks, door gaskets installed ☐

Access doors close tightly - no leaks ☐

Maintenance access acceptable for unit and components ☐

Instrumentation installed according to specification (thermometers, pressure gages, flow meters, etc.)

☐

Clean up of equipment completed per contract documents ☐

Filters installed, clean and tight fitting. Replacement type and effi-ciency permanently affixed to housing--construction filters removed

☐

Fans and Dampers

Supply fan and motor alignment correct ☐

Supply fan belt tension & condition good ☐

Exhaust fan and motor alignment correct ☐

Exhaust fan gravity backdraft damper in good condition ☐

Vibration isolation equipment for fans installed & released from shipping locks

☐

All dampers close tightly ☐

All damper linkages have minimum play ☐

Ducts

Duct joint sealant properly installed ☐

No apparent severe duct restrictions ☐

OSA intakes located away from pollutant sources & exhaust outlets ☐

Coils, Valves and Piping and other components

Dual temp piping installed per contract documents ☐

Piping properly insulated and labeled. ☐

Valves in place and installed in proper direction. ☐

Valve tags in place ☐

All sensors located properly ☐

Heat Wheel in place and in good condition. ☐

Electrical and Controls

Power disconnects in place ☐

All electric connections tight ☐

Safeties in place and operable ☐

Control system interlocks hooked up and functional ☐

Smoke detectors in place ☐

All control devices wiring complete ☐





230800 - 5

4. Operational Checks

Check Equip Tag DOAS-1 Comments

Supply fan rotation correct ☐

Supply fan has no unusual noise or vibration ☐

Exhaust fan rotation correct (if applicable) ☐

Exhaust fan acceptable noise & vibration (if applicable) ☐

Associated VFDs are in place and are operational ☐

All dampers (OSA, RA, EA, etc.) stroke fully without binding and spans calibrated and BAS reading site verified ☐

The HOA switch properly activates and deactivates the unit ☐

No leaks detected in piping or connections ☐

Respective safeties shut unit down as needed. ☐


5. Functional Testing Record

DOAS-1

System Description: The outside air system shall operate under the control of a local, system micro-processor based DDC controller. Controller shall be provided for the OA system with custom points and Sequence programming as follows:

Occupied/Unoccupied Mode Test Result Functional

Y/N

1a An adjustable BMS schedule allows the unit to switch from occupied to unoccu-pied mode.

1b The system is in the occupied mode only for regular school hours only

Communication Loss

Test Result Functional

Y/N

2a If/when communication is lost between the network controller and the outside air system controller, the outside air system is placed into the occupied mode until communication is restored.

2b During this mode, the unit operates based on programming and last setpoints/in-puts

Modes of Operation


Y/N

3a 72°F or greater (adj.) = System in COOLING MODE

3b Between 50°F and 72°F (adj.) = System in ECONOMIZER MODE

3c 50°F or less (adj.) = System in HEATING MODE




230800 - 6

Unoccupied Mode or Freezestat (Low Limit) Mode Test Result Functional

Y/N

4a The supply fan and exhaust fan are off

4b The outside air damper, exhaust air damper and emergency bypass damper are fully closed

4c The face and bypass damper is at full face

4d The bypass water control valve is fully closed

4e The exhaust air water control valve is fully open

Occupied mode


Y/N

5a Water to water heat pump system operation is proven

5b Outside air damper and exhaust air damper are fully open proven by current switch

5c Supply fan/VFD start and operation proven via current switch

5d Emergency bypass damper confirmed fully closed

5e Bypass water control valve confirmed fully closed

5f Exhaust air water control valve confirmed fully open to bypass coil.

5g The system does not start if any one component does not prove operation, in-cluding the water to water heat pump system.

Occupied Mode Face and Bypass Dampers


Y/N

6a

DAT MODE 68°F (adj.) Cooling Varies Economizer 65°F (adj.) Heating

6b Confirm that there is not more than approx.60% airflow necessary across the cooling/heating coil to maintain required DAT

6c Supply fan/VFD start and operation proven via current switch.

Discharge Air Temperature


Y/N

7 If the OAT is between 55°F and 75°F (adj.) the energy recovery wheel modu-lates to maintain DAT without over heating or over cooling (DAT 70°F +/- 5°F). The water to water heat pump system remains off.

Dehumidification Mode (When in Economizer Mode)


Y/N

8a If OA unit is in occupied mode and the OA temp is between 60 and 70°F and the buildings relative air humidity is 60% or greater the wheel modulates.

8b The energy recovery wheel modulates to maintain indoor air relative humidity below +/- 55%. If additional dehumidification is required, WWHP-1 and/or 2 are utilized to provide additional dehumidification.




230800 - 7

Additional Dehumidification Test Result Functional

Y/N

9a Under this mode, the reheat coil maintains DAT of 68°F by modulating the 2-way control valve or varying speed of reheat pump depending on mode of WWHP-1 or 2.

9b Valve modulates with pump off if GS temperature is above 85↑8F

9c If WWHP system is on in cooling mode, utilize the reheat pumps

Supply Fan Control


Y/N

10a The supply fans are controlled by the VFD based on field mounted duct pressure setpoint

10b Fan supply static pressure optimization shall be utilized by polling the associated VAV/CAV Box damper positions and resetting of pressure setpoint as allowed.

10c DDC system determines VAV box with greatest damper open position every 10 minutes.

10d Units supply air static pressure setpoint decreased by 0.1” WG and 1.25”wg. Setpoint is .75”wg when unit is first started.

Exhaust Fan Control


Y/N

11a Exhaust fans are controlled by the VFD based on a field determined supply fan offset

11b Toilet exhaust control – toilet exhaust flow rate is set for 50% higher than code required to allow for reduction in exhaust airflow

Emergency HVAC Kill Switch


Y/N

12 Supply fans, All exhaust fans and all isolation damper switch shall be hardware interlocked. Upon activation of the kill switch, the DOAS system shall enter the unoccupied mode.

Freeze Protection – Low Temperature Conditions


Y/N

13a

The coil is a partial flow coil with face and bypass damper control for freeze pro-tection and dehumidification control. Low temperature cutout is located on the discharge of the coil and activates when the leaving air temperature falls below 35°F.

13b The supply and exhaust fan stop, outside air and exhaust dampers close.

13c Low temperature sensor ERW frost alarm located on the discharge of the energy recovery wheel, when the leaving air temperature falls below 35°F, the wheel slows or stops to prevent fre3ezing of exhaust air stream.

13d When temperature rises to 45°F, the system returns to normal.

13e A manual reset low limit installed downstream of the chilled/hot water coil stops the operation of the system if DAT falls below 35°F




230800 - 8

Smoke Detectors Test Result Functional

Y/N

14a If smoke is detected in the supply, the system shall shut down and an audio/vis-ual alarm shall activate. Upon correction of the problem, the system shall be re-set and return to normal operation.

14b Any activation of the buildings fire alarm system shuts down the OA unit com-pletely.

Building Purge


Y/N

15a The OA unit starts or stops using an optimal start/stop software.

15b Times are calculated based on history for building purge cycle to be completed prior to the OA unit be scheduled on/off.

15c Based on OAT and Purge during warmest ambient temp in the heating mode and coolest ambient temp in the cooling mode.

Purge Mode:

15d All VAVs and CAVs without CO2 sensors are at minimum

15e All zones with differential CO2 levels less than 800 ppm are closed

15f All VAVs with differential CO2 levels less than 700 ppm are 100% open until the level is below 500 ppm.

15g The unit operates to maintain duct static pressure setpoint. The OA unit shall en-ter occupied mode when the building purge is completed.

The functional tests have all passed for given trade ☐YES ☐NO


INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC


230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Building Management System (BMS), utilizing direct digital controls.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section:

1. Control valves.

2. Flow switches and meters.

3. Air flow stations

4. Wells, sockets and other inline hardware for water sensors (temperature, pressure, flow).

B. Work Relating To Controls And Instruments

1. Under Sections 230900 as applicable, provide control wiring for the following:

a. All circuits actuated by a temperature control system component.

b. All circuits which actuate a temperature control component.

c. All control panel wiring to terminal strips and field wiring from terminal strips to

field mounted devices.

d. All wiring from the "AUTO" side of hand-off-auto switches on units being

controlled by Sections 230900.

e. Wiring of electro-mechanical devices required to be located on or in temperature

control panels.

f. Wiring of DDC trunk, communication, and sensor cable wiring.

g. Wiring shall comply with material and workmanship standards of Division 26.

h. Wiring of damper and valve actuators, VAV box actuators, relays, transformers, PE

switches and all other control apparatus. Extend power from circuit at junction

boxes or from beakers in electrical panels. Refer to electrical drawings for junction

box and panel locations.

i. All 120 volt power wiring to vav boxes, unit controllers, damper actuators, line

voltage thermostats, valve actuators, relay’s, etc. not powered by 24 volt power is

work of this division. Wiring shall comply with material and workmanship

standards of Division 26. Obtain 120 volt from local electrical panels or junction

box. Coordinate with Division 26 contractor.

j. Wiring of line voltage fan isolation dampers located within fan curbs regardless of

voltage in order to achieve specified sequence of operations.

k. Smoke detectors installed at transfer ducts to close associated dampers.

l. All control wiring associated with variable refrigerant flow system including but not

limited to BMS interface, sensor wiring, and communication.

C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. None.




230900 - 2

D. Work Required Under Other Divisions Related to This Section:

1. Power wiring to line side of motor starters, disconnects or variable frequency drives.

2. Provision and wiring of smoke detectors and other devices relating to fire alarm system.

3. Campus LAN (Ethernet) connection adjacent to JACE network management controller.

4. Wiring of all devices and circuits carrying voltages greater than 110 volts unless otherwise

noted.

5. Wiring of 115 volt power feeds to all temperature control panels.

6. Power wiring to all motors 110 volt to 480 volt unless otherwise noted.

7. Specific power feeds shown or specified in Div 26 documents.




B. Section 230000 – General provisions: Performance and reference standards for products and

materials required for the Project.

C. Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to

this Section.

D. Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate to this

Section.

E. Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. This project requires the installation of a new Integrated Automation System constructed using a

Niagara Framework with BACnet Field Level Devices. The new IAS shall utilize a single ALER-

ACM controller and Alerton field level controllers as required.

B. The Contractor will be required to perform the following:

1. Furnish, install, configure and commission a new Niagara Framework with BACnet fully

programmable and application specific DDC controllers for the equipment shown

including all components, software and applications required to meet the sequence of

operation and the design/performance intent of the systems.

2. Provide fully programmable field controllers as specified herein and as indicated on the

drawings. Provide I/O and ancillary devices as specified herein, as indicated on the

drawings, and as necessary to perform the sequences of operation.

3. Application Specific or “Configurable” controllers will not be accepted.

4. Provide BACnet BTL AWS (Advanced Work Station) certification for the Control System

Server (CSS). All Network Controllers (NCs) shall be BTL BBC certified.

5. Furnish and install all low voltage step-down transformers with associated low voltage

connections, power supplies and power/communication/input/output cabling necessary for

the control system.

6. Furnish and install conduit, junction boxes, fittings, panels, enclosures, and hardware as

specified in these specifications, on the drawings and as required by Code.




230900 - 3

7. Provide Graphical User Interface Development for all of the devices identified above.

8. It is the contractor’s responsibility to review all of the design documents and specifications

and report any discrepancies to the owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Submit documentation of contractor qualifications, including those indicated in "Quality

Assurance" if requested by the A-E.

D. 4 copies of shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a

complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers' catalog data sheets and

installation instructions. Submit in printed electronic format. Samples of written Controller

Checkout Sheets and Performance Verification Procedures for applications similar in scope shall

be included for approval.

E. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, sequences of

operation, control system bus layout and any other details required to demonstrate that the system

has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control

wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings.

F. Upon completion of the work, provide x complete sets of ' as-built' drawings and other project-

specific documentation in 3-ring hard-backed binders and on Flash media.

G. Any deviations from these specifications or the work indicated on the drawings shall be clearly

identified in the Submittals.


A. The Control System Contractor shall have a full service DDC office within 50 miles of the job

site. This office shall be staffed with sales engineering and support, applications engineers,

software engineers and field technicians. This office shall maintain parts inventory and shall have

all testing and diagnostic equipment necessary to support this work, as well as staff trained in the

use of this equipment. BMS vendors that do not utilize local engineering and sales support

personnel for this project in a branch office within 50 miles of the jobsite shall not be acceptable

under any circumstances.




230900 - 4

B. Single Source Responsibility of Supplier: The Control System Contractor shall be responsible for

the complete installation and proper operation of the control system. The Control System

Contractor shall exclusively be in the regular and customary business of design, installation and

service of computerized building management systems similar in size and complexity to the

system specified. The Control System Contractor shall be the manufacturer of the primary DDC

system components or shall have been the authorized representative for the primary DDC

components manufacturer for at least 5 years.

C. Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be

manufacturer's latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Maintain integrity of shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device through

shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and

materials inside and protected from weather.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to

ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's

responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that

of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures,

air diffusers and structural and architectural features.

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption

of construction progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design is Alerton as provided by Automated Building Systems – Glastonbury – Drew

Appleton (860) 657-9257 or [email protected]. Alerton shall be bid as add alternate #10.

B. Base bid manufactures in addition to Alerton shall be limited to a Niagara Framework with

BACnet Field Level Devices such as:

1. Distech Controls

2. Invensys

3. Honeywell WEBs - Environmental Systems Corporation (ESC)





230900 - 5

2.2 GENERAL

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable,

stand-alone digital controllers, a network area controller, graphics and programming and other

control devices for a complete system as specified herein.

B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data

contained in the overall BMS.

2.3 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE

A. The system provided shall incorporate hardware and software resources sufficient to meet the

functional requirements of these Specifications. The Facility Local Area Network (FAC LAN)

and Device Level Network (DLN) shall be based on industry standard open platforms as specified

herein and utilize commonly available operation, management and application software. All

software packages and databases shall be licensed to the Owner to allow unrestricted maintenance

and operation of the IAS. Contractor shall include all items not specifically itemized in these

Specifications that are necessary to implement, maintain, and operate the system in compliance

with the functional intent of these Specifications.

B. The system architecture shall implement a new building IAS which is based on the Niagara N4

Framework and consists of an Ethernet-based, wide area network (WAN), a single Local Area

Network (LAN) that supports NCs, PCUs, ASCs, Operator Workstations (OWS), Smart Devices

(SD), and Remote Communication Devices (RCDs) as applicable.

C. Facility Local Area Network (FAC LAN): The FAC LAN shall be an Ethernet-based,

10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN connecting Local NCs, IAS Server and OWSs. The FAC LAN serves

as the backbone for the NCs communications path. Contractor shall provide a FAC LAN as a

dedicated LAN for the control system. LAN shall be IEEE 802.3 Ethernet over Fiber or Category

6 cable with switches and routers that support 1000base-T gigabit Ethernet throughput.

D. Device Level Network (DLN): Network used to connect PCUs and ASCs. These shall be Peer to

Peer devices as defined in the BTL standard. Network speed shall be 78K bits per second.

E. ARCnet and/or Token-Ring based FAC LANs and DLNs shall not be acceptable.

F. Remote Data Access: The system shall support the Internet Browser-based remote access to the

building data. The IAS contractor shall coordinate with the Owner’s IT department to ensure all

remote browser access (if desired by the owner) is protected with the latest Niagara N4 Software

updates and a VPN (Virtual Private Network) must be installed to protect the owner’s network

from cyber attacks.

G. Browser-based access: A remote/local user using a standard browser will be able access all

control system facilities and graphics via the WAN or direct connection, with proper username

and password. Only native Internet browser-based user interfaces (HTML5, XML, CCS3, etc.)

that do not require plug-ins (thin clients) are acceptable. The system shall be capable of supporting

an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™,

Firefox™ or Chrome™.




230900 - 6

H. The communication speed between the controllers, LAN interface devices, CSS, and operator

interface devices shall be sufficient to ensure fast system response time under any loading

condition.

I. Niagara Framework Control Systems Server (CSS): A server that maintains the systems

configuration and programming database. It shall allow secure multiple-access to the control

information.

J. Systems Configuration Database: The system architecture shall support maintaining the systems

configuration database on a server that resides on the FAC LAN. User tools for DLN and FAC

LAN management shall be provided and licensed to the Owner and shall allow unrestricted

configuring, updating, maintaining, and expanding of all current devices, configurations and

settings.

K. Database Schema shall be published and provided to the Owner to facilitate easy access to DLN

and FAC LAN data.

2.4 BUILDING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements

1. Shall be approved by the BTL as meeting BACnet Building Controller requirements.

2. Building controller shall be of scalable design such that the number of trunks and protocols

may be selected to fit the specific requirements of a given project.

3. The controller shall be capable of panel-mounted on DIN rail and/or mounting screws.

4. The controller shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the system based

on information from any objects in the system, regardless if the object is directly monitored

by the building controller module or by another controller.

5. The controller shall be capable of running up to six (6) independent control strategies

simultaneously. The modification of one control strategy does not interrupt the function or

runtime others.

6. The software program implementing the DDC strategies shall be completely flexible and

user-definable. All software tools necessary for programming shall be provided as part of

project software. Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global strategies that

cannot be modified by field personnel on-site, using a wide area network (WAN) or

downloaded through remote communications are not acceptable. Changing global

strategies using firmware changes is also unacceptable.

7. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks and support DDC

functions. All flowcharts shall be generated and automatically downloaded to controller.

Programming tool shall be supplied and be resident on workstation. The same tool shall be

used for all controllers.

8. The programming tool shall provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each

program block in real-time as program is executing. This function may be performed using

the operator’s workstation or field computer.

9. Controller shall have 6,000 Analog Values and 6,000 Binary Values.

10. Controller IP configuration can be done via a direct USB connect with an operator’s

workstation or field computer.

11. Controller shall have at a minimum a Quad Core 996Ghz processor to ensure fast

processing speeds.




230900 - 7

12. Global control algorithms and automated control functions shall execute using a 64-bit

processor.

13. Controller shall have a minimum of 1 GB of DDR3 SDRAM on a 533Mhz bus to ensure

high speed data recording, large data storage capacity and reliability.

14. Controller shall support two (2) on-board EIA-485 ports capable of supporting various

EIA-485 protocols including, but not limited to BACnet MS/TP and Modbus.

a. Ports are capable of supporting various EIA-485 protocols including, but not limited

to BACnet MS/TP and Modbus.

15. Controller shall support two (2) ports—each of gigabit speed—Ethernet (10/100/1000)

ports.

a. Ports are capable of supporting various Ethernet protocols including, but not limited

to BACnet IP, FOX, and Modbus.

16. All ports shall be capable of having protocol(s) assigned to utilize the port’s physical

connection.

B. Power Supply

1. Input for power shall be as shown on the contract documents.

2. Optional rechargeable battery for shutdown of controller including storage of all data in

flash memory.

3. On-board capacitor will ensure continuous operation of real-time clocks for minimum of

14 days.

C. Controller shall be in compliance with the following:

1. UL 916 for open energy management

2. FCC Class B

3. ROHS

4. IEC 60703

5. C-Tick Listed

D. Controller shall operate in the following environmental conditions:

1. -4 to 149 °F (-20 to 65 °C) without optional battery, or 32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C) with

optional battery.

2. 0 to 95% relative humidity (RH), non-condensing.

E. Niagara Framework

1. Controller shall utilize the Tridium Niagara Framework.

a. Niagara Framework shall be latest version.

b. All Niagara licensing shall be stored on a removable MicroSD card for fast in-field

replacement of controller.

c. The controller shall be programmable via Niagara Workplace programming tool.

d. The controller shall be programmable via a Niagara embedded Workplace

programming tool.




230900 - 8

2.5 CENTRAL PLANT AND AIR HANDLER APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each air handler and provide native

BACnet application controllers as needed for central plant control that adequately cover all

objects listed in object list. All controllers shall interface to building controller through either

MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol, or Ethernet LAN using BACnet over Ethernet or BACnet

TCP/IP. No gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained

logic program as needed for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable

using graphical programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident on operator workstation

and be the same tool as used for the building controller. No auxiliary or non-BACnet controllers

shall be used.

B. BACnet Conformance

1. Application controllers shall be approved by the BTL as meeting the BACnet Advanced

Application Controller requirements.

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a

complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the

functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be

thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall

be supplied for working with proprietary information.

3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include, as a minimum, Analog Input,

Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Multi-state

Values, Device, File, and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the

system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All

necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 12-bit resolution that accept 3K and

10K thermistors, 0–10VDC, Platinum 1000 ohm RTD, 0–5VDC, 4–20mA and dry contact

signals. Any input on a controller may be either analog or digital with a minimum of three inputs

that accept pulses. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for interface

to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary and analog outputs

on board. Analog outputs with 12-bit resolution shall support either 0–10VDC or 0–20mA. Binary

outputs shall have LED indication of status. Software shall include scaling features for analog

outputs. Application controller shall include 20VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to

external sensors.

1. All outputs must have onboard Hand-Off-Auto (HOA) switches and a status indicator light.

HOA switch position shall be monitored. Each analog output shall include a potentiometer

for manually adjusting the output when the HOA switch is in the Hand position.

2. The position of each and every HOA switch shall be available system wide as a BACnet

object property.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No batteries

shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller

up to 20 times per second (minimum of 10 times per second) and capable of multiple PID loops

for control of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and

system shall support display of all information in floating-point nomenclature at operator’s

terminal.

1. The following control blocks shall be supported:

a. Natural Log




230900 - 9

b. Exponential

c. Log base 10

d. X to the power of Y

e. Nth square root of X

f. 5th Order Polynomial Equations

g. Astronomical Clock (sunrise/sunset calculation)

h. Time based schedules

E. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed

BACnet LANs or remotely using modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by

graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application

controller shall be programmed using programming tools as described in operator’s terminal

section.

F. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section 2.10.B.)

Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application controller and include

an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be

programmable to show specific controller data in each mode, based on which button is pressed

on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room

sensor.

G. Schedules

1. The controller shall support a minimum of 3 BACnet Schedule Objects and have a real

time clock on board with battery backup to maintain time through a power loss.

H. Logging Capabilities

1. Controller shall support a minimum of 50 trendlogs. Any object in the controller (real or

calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be adjustable at the operator’s

workstation.

2. Controller shall periodically upload trended data to system server for long-term archiving

if desired. Archived data stored in (MS Jet Database or SQL) database form and shall be

available for use in third-party spreadsheet or database programs.

I. Alarm Generation

1. Alarms may be generated within the controller for any object change of value or state

(either real or calculated). This includes things such as analog object value changes, and

binary object state changes.

2. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the operator’s

terminal or off-site using remote communications.

3. Controller must be able to handle up to 25 alarm setups stored as BACnet event enrollment

objects, with system destination and actions individually configurable.

J. The controller processor shall be a 32-bit processor.

K. The packaging of the controller shall provide operable doors to cover the terminals once

installation is complete. The housing of the controller shall provide for DIN rail mounting and

also fully enclose circuit board.




230900 - 10

2.6 TERMINAL UNIT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one native BACnet fully programmable field controller for each piece of unitary

mechanical equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All

controllers shall interface to building controller through MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No

gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program

as needed for complete control of unit.

B. BACnet Conformance

1. Application controllers shall, as a minimum, support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They

shall communicate directly using this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as a

native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be approved by the BTL as meeting

the BACnet Application Specific Controller requirements and support all BACnet services

necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

a. Files Functional Group

b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard, for a

complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the

functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be



3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include, as a minimum, Analog Input,

Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File,

and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be



C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can accept 3K

and 10K thermistors, 0–5VDC, 4–20mA, dry contact signals and a minimum of 3 pulse inputs.

Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall also include support and

modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor. Controller shall include binary

outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall be

needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller 10 times

per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple devices.

Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the field over installed

BACnet LANs or remotely through modem interface. Operator shall program logic sequences by

graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying blocks together on screen. Application

controller shall be programmed using same programming tools as building controller and as

described in operator workstation section. All programming tools shall be provided and installed

as part of system.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section 2.10.B.)

Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and include an operating mode and

a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be programmable to show specific

controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of

operation for specific display requirements at intelligent room sensor.




230900 - 11

2.7 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE

A. Motorized control dampers that will not be integral to the equipment shall be furnished by the

Control System Contractor. Control damper frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel,

formed into changes and welded or riveted. Dampers shall be galvanized, with nylon bearings.

Blade edge seals shall be vinyl. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Blades

shall be 16-gauge minimum and 6 inches wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel

iron. Damper leakage shall not exceed 4 CFM per square foot, at 1 inches water gauge static

pressure.

B. Control damper actuators shall be furnished by the Control System Contractor. Two-position or

proportional electric actuators shall be direct-mount type sized to provide a minimum of 5 in-lb

torque per square foot of damper area. Damper actuators shall be spring return type. Operators

shall be heavy-duty electronic type for positioning automatic dampers in response to a control

signal. Motor shall be of sufficient size to operate damper positively and smoothly to obtain

correct sequence as indicated. All applications requiring proportional operation shall utilize truly

proportional electric actuators.

C. Control Valves: Control valves shall be 2-way or 3-way pattern as shown and constructed for

tight shutoff at the pump shut-off head or steam relief valve pressure. Control valves shall operate

satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-position valves shall be ' line' size.

Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psi at rated flow

(unless otherwise noted or scheduled on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2

inches (51 mm) shall be "screwed" configuration and 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) and larger valves

shall be "flanged" configuration. All control valves, including terminal unit valves, less than 2

inches (51 mm) shall be globe valves. Electrically-actuated control valves shall include spring

return type actuators sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above) and,

when specified, shall be furnished with integral switches for indication of valve position (open-

closed).

D. Control Valve Actuators: Actuators for VAV terminal unit heating coils shall be "drive-open;

drive-closed" type. All actuators shall have inherent current limiting motor protection. Valve

actuators shall be 24-volt, electronic type, modulating or two-position as required for the correct

operating sequence. Actuators on valves needing ' fail-safe' operation shall have spring return to

Normal position. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning in response to the signal. All

valve actuators shall be UL listed.

E. All control valves 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) or larger shall have position indication. All hot water

control valves shall be Normally-Open arrangement; all chilled water control valves shall be

Normally-Closed arrangement.

F. Intelligent Room Sensor with Touchscreen – (Microset MS4)

1. Hardware

a. Room sensor shall include:

1) Backlit touchscreen LCD digital display.

2) Temperature sensor.

3) Humidity sensor.

4) Programmable Status Light indicator.

5) CO2 sensor or BACnet MS/TP communication up to 115.2kbps.




230900 - 12

6) Temperature sensor shall be a Uni-Curve Type II thermistor with an accuracy

of +/- 0.36 °F (0.3 °C) at calibration point over the range of 32 to 158 °F or

better.

7) Humidity sensor shall have an accuracy of plus or minus three percent (+/-

3%) from ten to ninety percent (10-90%) relative humidity (RH) or better,

non-condensing.

8) The intelligent room sensor’s Status Light indicator shall have a minimum of

four (4) colors (blue, red, amber and green) that will cast a glow onto the wall

below the sensor to be used as visual indicator to the occupants of the

condition of the system. The color and on/off state of the Status Light

indicator shall be fully programmable.

9) CO2 sensor shall have an accuracy of +/- 30 ppm over the range of 0–5000

ppm or better.

10) CO2 sensor shall utilize Automatic Baseline Correction to maintain sensor

calibration without the need for manual calibration.

11) The user shall interact with the smart sensor using a touchscreen, with no

buttons allowed.

12) The intelligent room sensor shall have provisions for a tamper proof

installation requiring tools to be removed from the wall.

13) The touchscreen shall have a surface hardness of Mohs 7 or greater to prevent

being easily scratched.

14) Controller shall function as room control unit, and allow occupant to raise and

lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use; all within limits as

programmed by building operator.

2. Display Content

a. The intelligent room sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room

temperature, and outside temperature at each controller.

b. The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to add or remove from the display

time-of-day, room humidity, and indoor air temperature to customize the view for

the customer.

c. The intelligent room sensor must have the capability to show temperatures in

degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius.

d. A communication loss or improper communications wiring shall be displayed on the

LCD screen to aid in trouble shooting.

e. Information about the version of firmware shall be displayable on the LCD screen.

f. A cleaning mode will be provided to allow for the touchscreen to be cleaned without

inadvertently making changes to system parameters.

g. The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to display the status of a lighting

zone and control the on/off state of the zone from the touchscreen using a tenant-

accessible display page.

h. The intelligent room sensor shall have the ability to display the status of a window

zone (e.g., blinds) and control the on/off state of the zone from the touchscreen using

a tenant-accessible display page.

1) After Hours Override shall:

a) Override time may be set and viewed in 30-minute increments.

b) Override time countdown shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero

by occupant from the sensor.

c) Time remaining shall be displayed.




230900 - 13

d) Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied mode unless a

function button is pressed.

2) Other Modes

a) The intelligent room sensor shall also allow service technician access

to hidden functions for advanced system configuration. This

functionality shall be accessed-protected with a configurable PIN

number.

b) Field Service Mode shall allow access to common parameters as

dictated by the application’s sequence of operations. The parameters

shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no

computer or other field service tool needed.

c) If the intelligent room sensor is connected to VAV controller, Balance

Mode shall allow a VAV box to be balanced and all air flow parameters

viewed. The balancing parameters shall be viewed and set from the

intelligent room sensor with no computer or other field service tool

needed.

3. Intelligent Room Sensor shall be in compliance of the following:

a. UL Standard for Safety 916

b. FCC Part 15.107 & 109, Class B, CFR47-15

c. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)

G. Temperature sensor only – (Common Areas such as hallways, bathrooms, storage, closets or as

indicated)

1. Hardware

a. Room sensor shall include:

1) Temperature sensor.

2) Temperature sensor shall be a Uni-Curve Type II thermistor with an accuracy

of +/- 0.36 °F (0.3 °C) at calibration point over the range of 32 to 158 °F or

better.

3) Stainless Steel, tamperproof plate without local temperature adjustment.

H. Wall Mount Room Temperature sensors: Each room temperature sensor shall provide temperature

indication to the digital controller, provide the capability for a software-limited occupant set point

adjustment (warmer-cooler slider bar or switch) and limited operation override capability. Room

Temperature Sensors shall be 10,000-ohm thermistor type with a temperature range of -40 to 140

degrees F (-38 to 60 degrees C). The sensor shall be complete with a decorative cover and suitable

for mounting over a standard electrical utility box. These devices shall have an accuracy of 0.5

degrees F (.024 degrees C) over the entire range.

I. Duct-mounted and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: 10,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors

with an accuracy of ± 0.2 degrees C. Outside air sensors shall include an integral sun shield.

Duct-mounted sensors shall have an insertion measuring probe of a length appropriate for the

duct size, with a temperature range of -40 to 160 degrees F(-38 to 71 degrees C) The sensor shall

include a utility box and a gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration noise. For all mixed air and

preheat air applications, install bendable averaging duct sensors with a minimum 8 feet (2438

mm) long sensor element. These devices shall have accuracy of 0.5 degrees F (.024 degrees C)

over the entire range.




230900 - 14

J. Humidity sensors shall be thin-film capacitive type sensor with on-board nonvolatile memory,

accuracy to plus or minus two percent (2%) at 0 to 90% RH, 12 - 30 VDC input voltage, analog

output (0 - 10 VDC or 4 - 20mA output). Operating range shall be 0 to 100% RH and 32 to 140

degrees F (0 to 60 degrees C). Sensors shall be selected for wall, duct or outdoor type installation

as appropriate.

K. Carbon Dioxide Sensors (CO2): Sensors shall utilize Non-dispersive infrared technology

(N.D.I.R.), repeatable to plus or minus 20 PPM. Sensor range shall be 0 - 2000 PPM. Accuracy

shall be plus or minus five percent (5%) or 75 PPM, whichever is greater. Response shall be less

than one minute. Input voltage shall be 20 to 30 VAC or DC. Output shall be 0 - 10 VDC. Sensor

shall be wall or duct mounted type, as appropriate for the application, housed in a high impact

plastic enclosure.

L. Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current

level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch

to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point.

M. Differential Analog (duct) Static Pressure Transmitters Provide a pressure transmitter with

integral capacitance type sensing and solid-state circuitry. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1% of

full range; range shall be selected for the specific application. Provide zero and span adjustment

capability. Device shall have integral static pickup tube.

N. Differential Air Pressure Switches: Provide SPDT type, UL-approved, and selected for the

appropriate operating range where applied. Switches shall have adjustable setpoints and barbed

pressure tips.

O. Water Flow Switches: Provide a SPST type contact switch with bronze paddle blade, sized for

the actual pipe size at the location. If installed outdoors, provide a NEMA-4 enclosure. Flow

switch shall be UL listed.

P. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking

doors for mounting all devices as shown. All electrical devices within a control panel shall be

factory wired. A complete set of ' as-built' control drawings (relating to the controls within that

panel) shall be furnished within each control panel.

Q. Pipe and Duct Temperature sensing elements: 10,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with

and accuracy of ±1% accuracy. Their range shall be -5 to 250 degrees F (-20 to 121 degrees

C). Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range

expected for the point at the specified accuracy. Thermal wells with heat conductive gel shall be

included.

R. Low Air Temperature Sensors: Provide SPST type switch, with 15 to 55 degrees F (-9 to 13

degrees C), range, vapor-charged temperature sensor. Honeywell model L482A, or approved

equivalent.




230900 - 15

S. Relays: Start/stop relay model shall provide either momentary or maintained switching action as

appropriate for the motor being started. All relays shall be plugged in, interchangeable, mounted

on a subbase and wired to numbered terminals strips. Relays installed in panels shall all be DPDT

with indicating lamp. Relays installed outside of controlled devices shall be enclosed in a NEMA

enclosure suitable for the location. Relays shall be labeled with UR symbol. RIB-style relays are

acceptable for remote enable/disable.

T. Transducers: Differential pressure transducers shall be electronic with a 4-20 mA output signal

compatible to the Direct Digital Controller. Wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Unit shall be

designed to operate in the pressure ranges involved.

U. Control Power Transformers: Provide step-down transformers for all DDC controllers and

devices as required. Transformers shall be sized for the load, but shall be sized for 50 watts,

minimum. Transformers shall be UL listed Class 2 type, for 120 VAC/24 VAC operation.

V. Flow Monitoring

1. Air Flow Monitoring

a) Single Probe Air Flow Measuring Sensor

1) The single probe airflow-measuring sensor shall be duct mounted with an

adjustable sensor insertion length of up to eight inches. The transmitter shall

produce a 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC signal linear to air velocity. The sensor shall

be a hot wire anemometer and utilize two temperature sensors and a heater

element temperature. The other sensor shall measure the downstream air

temperature. The temperature differential shall be directly related to airflow

velocity.

2) Acceptable manufacturers: Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air, Ebtron Model GOLD

(basis of design). Provide full 3 year warranty.

b) Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations

1) Each device shall be designed and built to comply with, and provide results

in accordance with, accepted practice as defined for system testing in the

ASHRAE Handbook of fundamentals, as well as in the Industrial Ventilation

Handbook.

2) Airflow measuring stations shall be fabricated of 14-gauge galvanized steel

welded casing with 90 Deg. connecting flanges in configuration and size

equal to that of the duct into which it is mounted. Each station shall be

complete with an air directionalizer and parallel cell profile suppressor (3/4”

maximum cell) across the entering air stream and mechanically fastened to

the casing in such a way to withstand velocities up to 6000 feet per minute.

This air directionalizer and parallel cell honeycomb suppressor shall provide

98% free area, equalize the velocity profile, and eliminate turbulent and

rotational flow from the air stream prior to the measuring point.

3) The total pressure measurement side (high side) will be designed and spaced

to the Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition, Page 9-5. The self-

averaging manifolding will be manufactured of brass and copper components.

4) The static pressure sensing probes (low side) shall be bullet-nosed shaped, per

detailed radius, as illustrated in Industrial Ventilation Manual 16th Edition,

Page 9-5.

5) The main take-off point from both the total pressure and the static pressure

manifolds must be symmetrical.




230900 - 16

6) Total and static pressure manifolds shall terminate with external ports for

connection to control tubing. An identification label shall be placed on each

unit casing, listing model number, size, area, and specified airflow capacity.

7) Installation Considerations

a) The maximum allowable pressure loss through the Flow and Static

Pressure elements shall not exceed .065” w.c. at 1000 feet per minute,

or .23” w.c. at 2000 feet per minute. Each unit shall measure the airflow

rate within an accuracy of plus 2% as determined by U.S. - GSA

certification tests, and shall contain a minimum of one total pressure

sensor per 36 square inches of unit measuring area.

b) The units shall have a self-generated sound rating of less than NC40,

and the sound level within the duct shall not be amplified nor shall

additional sound be generated.

c) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage

of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of

the duct. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate

matching connecting ductwork.

d) Where control dampers are shown as part of the airflow measuring

station, opposed blade precision controlled volume dampers integral to

the station and complete with actuator, pilot positioner, and linkage

shall be provided.

e) Stations shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s

published requirements, and in accordance with ASME Guidelines

affecting non-standard approach conditions.

8) Acceptable manufacturers: Air Monitor Corp., Tek-Air, Ebtron Model

GTx116-P and GTx116-F (basis of design). Provide full 3 year warranty.

W. Water Flow Monitoring


following:

a. ONICON Incorporate, F-3100 series

b. Siemens

c. SeaMetrics Inc.

d. Sponsler Company, Inc.

e. Thermo Measurement Ltd.

f. Venture Measurement.

2. Description: Inline electromagnetic flow meter.

3. Construction: Carbon steel body, PTFE liner, ANSI Class 150 flange.


5. Temperature Rating: 400 deg F minimum.

6. Display: Remote mounted electronics, visual instantaneous rate of flow, with register to

indicate total volume in gallons.

7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2-1/2 percent.

X. Power Monitoring Devices

1. Current Measurement (Amps)

a. Current measurement shall be by a combination current transformer and a current

transducer. The current transformer shall be sized to reduce the full amperage of the




230900 - 17

monitored circuit to a maximum 5 Amp signal, which will be converted to a 4-20

mA DDC compatible signal for use by the Facility Management System.

b. Current Transformer - A split core current transformer shall be provided to monitor

motor amps.

1) Operating frequency - 50 - 400 Hz.

2) Insulation - 0.6 Kv class 10Kv BIL.

3) UL recognized.

4) Five Amp secondary.

5) Select current ration as appropriate for application.

6) Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

2. Current Transducer - A current to voltage or current to mA transducer shall be provided.

The current transducer shall include:

a. 6X input over amp rating for AC inrushes of up to 120 amps.

b. Manufactured to UL 1244.

c. Accuracy: +.5%, Ripple +1%.

d. Minimum load resistance 30kOhm.

e. Input 0-20 Amps.

f. Output 4-20 mA.

g. Transducer shall be powered by a 24VDC regulated power supply (24 VDC +5%).

h. Acceptable manufacturers: Veris Industries

2.8 WEB BROWSER GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

A. Web Browser Navigation: The web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface.

Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to "feel" like a single application, and

provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to

navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish requirements of this

specification. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide for navigation, and for display

of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint

controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports and reporting actions for events.

B. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address,

the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and password.

Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator's role privileges and geographic area

of responsibility.

C. Navigation: Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on appropriate level

of a navigation tree (consisting of expandable and collapsible tree control like Microsoft's

Explorer program) and/or by selecting dynamic links to other system graphics. Both the

navigation tree and action pane shall be displayed simultaneously, enabling the operator to select

a specific system or equipment and view the corresponding graphic. The navigation tree shall as

a minimum provide the following views: Geographic, Network, Groups and Configuration.

1. Geographic View shall display a logical geographic hierarchy of the system including:

cities, sites, buildings, building systems, floors, equipment and objects.

2. Groups View shall display Scheduled Groups and custom reports.

3. Configuration View shall display all the configuration categories (Operators, Schedule,

Event, Reporting and Roles).




230900 - 18

D. Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each HVAC or

mechanical/electrical subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the

corresponding button:

1. Graphics: Using graphical format suitable for display in a web browser, graphics shall

include aerial building/campus views, color building floor-plans, equipment drawings,

active graphic setpoint controls, web content and other valid HTML elements. The data on

each graphic page shall automatically refresh.

2. Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding

objects, demand strategies, and any other valid data required for setup. Changes made to

the properties pages shall require the operator to depress an ' accept/cancel' button.

3. Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems

geographical hierarchy (using the navigation tree).

4. Alarms: Shall be used to view alarm information geographically (using the navigation tree),

acknowledge alarms, sort alarms by category, actions and verify reporting actions.

5. Trends: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify colors, date

range, axis and scaling.

6. Logic - Live Graphic Programs: Shall be used to display' live' graphic programs of the

control algorithm, (micro block programming) for the mechanical/electrical system

selected in the navigation tree.

7. Other actions such as Print, Help, Command, and Logout shall be available via a drop-

down window.

E. Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to

communicate information related to set points and comfort. Animated .gifs or .jpg, vector

scalable, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. Graphics tools used

to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary and conform to the following basic

criteria:

1. Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in a minimum of

1024 by 768 pixels 24 bit True Color.

2. General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled buildings in relation

to local landmarks.

3. Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones throughout

the buildings in a range of colors, as selected by Owner. Provide a visual display of

temperature relative to their respective set points. The colors shall be updated dynamically

as a zone's actual comfort condition changes.

4. Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical

system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of

components. Selected I/O points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment

shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for

rotation or moving mechanical components to enhance usability. .

5. Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a

web browser for the following:

a. Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal unit.

b. Each building.

c. Each floor and zone controlled.




230900 - 19

F. Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation Tree displayed in the web browser GUI, an

operator (with password access) shall be able to define a Normal, Holiday or Override schedule

for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the

entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day ' Holiday' for every level in the

system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the

Navigation Tree. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in

the system with would be automatically downloaded with the ' Independence Day' Holiday. All

schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation Tree shall be

shown in a summary schedule table and graph.

1. Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the LonWorks and BACnet standards, (Schedule

Object, Calendar Object, Weekly Schedule property and Exception Schedule property) and

shall allow events to be scheduled based on:

a. Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or Override.

b. A specific date.

c. A range of dates.

d. Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last, any), Day

of Week (M-Sun, Any).

e. Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every month).

2. Schedule Categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit scheduling

categories (different types of "things" to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC

occupancy, etc.). The categories shall include: name, description, icon (to display in the

hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled.

3. Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define

functional Schedule Groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment

scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define

an ' individual tenant' group - who may occupy different areas within a building or

buildings. Schedules applied to the ' tenant group' shall automatically be downloaded to

control modules affecting spaces occupied by the ' tenant group'.

4. Intelligent Scheduling: The control system shall be intelligent enough to automatically turn

on any supporting equipment needed to control the environment in an occupied space. If

the operator schedules an individual room in a VAV system for occupancy, for example,

the control logic shall automatically turn on the VAV air handling unit, chiller, boiler

and/or any other equipment required to maintain the specified comfort and environmental

conditions within the room.

5. Partial Day Exceptions: Schedule events shall be able to accommodate a time range

specified by the operator (ex: board meeting from 6 pm to 9 pm overrides Normal schedule

for conference room).

6. Schedule Summary Graph: The schedule summary graph shall clearly show Normal versus

Holiday versus Override Schedules and the net operating schedule that results from all

contributing schedules. Note: In case of priority conflict between schedules at the different

geographic hierarchy, the schedule for the more detailed geographic level shall apply.

G. Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the Navigation

Tree, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an ' Alarms' view. Alarms, and reporting

actions shall have the following capabilities:

1. Alarms View: Each Alarm shall display an Alarms Category (using a different icon for

each alarm category), date/time of occurrence, current status, alarm report and a bold URL

link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link

shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator




230900 - 20

shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or

force a return to normal in the Events View as specified in this section.

2. Alarm Categories: The operator shall be able to create, edit or delete alarm categories such

as HVAC, Maintenance, Fire, or Generator. An icon shall be associated with each alarm

category, enabling the operator to easily sort through multiple events displayed.

3. Alarm Templates: Alarm template shall define different types of alarms and their

associated properties. As a minimum, properties shall include a reference name, verbose

description, severity of alarm, acknowledgement requirements, and high/low limit and out

of range information.

4. Alarm Areas: Alarm Areas enable an operator to assign specific Alarm Categories to

specific Alarm Reporting Actions. For example, it shall be possible for an operator to

assign all HVAC Maintenance Alarm on the 1st floor of a building to email the technician

responsible for maintenance. The Navigation Tree shall be used to setup Alarm Areas in

the Graphic Pane.

5. Alarm Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level

and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date.

6. Alarm Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of Alarm generated per

object. A ' network' view of the Navigation Tree shall expose all objects and their respective

Alarm Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of Alarm, type of

Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status.

7. Alarm Summary Counter: The view of Alarm in the Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric

counter, indicating how many Alarms are active (in alarm), require acknowledgement and

total number of Alarms in the BAS Server database.

8. Alarm Auto-Deletion: Alarms that are acknowledged and closed shall be auto-deleted from

the database and archived to a text file after an operator defined period.

9. Alarm Reporting Actions: Alarm Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically

launched (under certain conditions) after an Alarm is received by the BAS server software.

Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting Actions using the Navigation Tree

and Graphic Pane through the web browser GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows:

a. Print: Alarm information shall be printed to the BAS server's PC or a networked

printer.

b. Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most Internet

Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email

accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric

paging services, where email servers support pagers.

c. File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append

operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm

information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator.

The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU

discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm).

d. Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property value in a

hardware module.

e. SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting action sends

an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an alarm.

f. Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches

specified program in response to an event.




230900 - 21

H. Trends: As system is engineered, all points shall be enabled to trend. Trends shall both be

displayed and user configurable through the Web Browser GUI. Trends shall comprise analog,

digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log's properties shall be editable using the

Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane.

1. Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the Navigation

Tree and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system shall allow y- and x-

axis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically

display multiple trends per graph.

2. Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi-Equipment/Single Equipment

general-purpose controllers, and periodically uploaded to the BAS server if historical

trending is enabled for the object. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date

shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to

run trends are NOT acceptable.

3. Resolution. Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have

the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for

displays that have different trend intervals, the system will automatically scale the axis.

4. Dynamic Update. Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator-defined intervals.

5. Zoom/Pan. It shall be possible to zoom-in on a particular section of a trend for more

detailed examination and ' pan through' historical data by simply scrolling the mouse.

6. Numeric Value Display. It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the

numerical value displayed.

7. Copy/Paste. The operator shall have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy

the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e. CTRL+C, CTRL+V).

8. Trending data shall include the following features:

a. Software that is capable of graphing the trend-logged object data shall be included.

b. Access and ability to create, edit and view are restricted to users by user account

credentials

c. Specific and repeatable URL defines the trendlog(s) views for browser bookmarking

and email compatibility.

d. Call out of trendlog value at intersection of trend line and mouse-over vertical axis.

e. Trendlog or Energy log and companion logs can be configured to display on one of

two independent vertical scales embedded in the display.

f. Click zoom for control of data set viewed along either graph axis.

g. User-specifiable start and end dates as well as a fast scroll features that supports

click zoom of macro scale view of the data for quickly finding data set based on

visual signature.

h. User export of the viewed data set to MS Excel.

i. Web browser-based help.

j. Optional min/max ranges (Upper Control Limits, Lower Control Limits) for each

value.

I. Energy Log Information

1. AWS shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the field

equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be appended with new data,

allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall not be allowed

unless limited file size is specified. Display all energy log information in standard

engineering units.

2. All data shall be stored in database file format for direct use by third-party programs.

Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.




230900 - 22

3. AWS operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This

includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be

logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall support using

flow and temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.

4. AWS shall display data in tabular format form for both consumption and peak values. Data

shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In each format, the

user shall be able to select a specific period of data to view.

5. Web client shall display data in tabular format and graphical format. Data shall be shown

in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In each format, the user shall be able

to select a specific period of data to view.

J. Demand Limiting

1. AWS shall include demand limiting program that includes two types of load shedding. One

type of load shedding shall shed/restore equipment in binary fashion based on energy usage

when compared to shed and restore settings. The other type of shedding shall adjust

operator-selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based on energy usage when

compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be implemented independently on

each and every zone or piece of equipment connected to system.

2. Binary shedding shall include minimum of five (5) priority levels of equipment shedding.

All loads in a given priority level shall be shed before any loads in a higher priority level

are shed. Load shedding within a given priority level shall include two methods. In one,

the loads shall be shed/restored in a “first off-first on” mode, and in the other the loads are

just shed/restored in a “first off-last on” (linear) fashion.

3. Analog shed program shall generate a ramp that is independently used by each individual

zone or individual control algorithm to raise the appropriate cooling setting and lower

appropriate heating setting to reduce energy usage.

4. AWS shall be able to display the status of each and every load shed program. Status of

each load assigned to an individual shed program shall be displayed along with English

description of each load.

K. Reports

1. AWS shall be capable of periodically producing reports of trendlogs, alarm history, tenant

activities, device summary, energy logs, and override points. The frequency, content, and

delivery are to be user adjustable.

2. All reports shall be capable of being delivered in multiple formats including text- and

comma-separated value (CSV) files. The files can be printed, emailed, or saved to a folder,

either on the server hard drive or on any network drive location.

L. Security Access: Systems that Security access from the web browser GUI to BAS server shall

require a Login Name and Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined

in terms of Roles, Privileges and geographic area of responsibility as specified:

1. Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each role shall

comprise a set of ' easily understood English language' privileges. Roles shall be defined

in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges.

a. View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration Trees,

Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and Reporting Action.

b. Edit Privileges shall comprise: Setpoint, Tuning and Logic, Manual Override, and

Point Assignment Parameters.




230900 - 23

c. Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgement, Control

Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule Groups, Manual

Commands, Print and Alarm/Event Maintenance.

2. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar

expandable/collapsible navigation tree. For example, it shall be possible to assign two

HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC

Role) to different areas of the system.

M. Workstation Hardware and Accessories:

1. Provide one (1) operator’s workstation in Boiler Room or other location(s) noted on the

plans.

2. AWS Server Minimum Requirements

a. 64-bit OS

b. Windows 10 or Windows Server 2012

c. 2 GHz (or better), eight-core processors

d. 4 GB RAM or higher

e. 32 GB of hard drive space required for base installation without application data

f. Minimum 1 TB hard drive (also see criteria in Part 3 - Execution below).

g. Network interface card (10/100/1000 Mbps)

h. Wireless keyboard and mouse

i. 27” LCD monitor.

j. Wireless network card.

3. Printer

a. A separate Laser jet type printer shall be provided for hard copy data and alarm

printouts. All change of state reporting system logs, information summaries, system

malfunctions and alarms shall be printed at this terminal.

b. The minimum acceptable print speed shall be 300 characters per second. The printer

shall have a line length of at least 80 characters and the character set shall be the

standard 191 character ASCII upper case subset.

c. The printer shall be interfaced to the system by standard USB port.

N. Software

1. At the conclusion of the project, contractor shall leave with owner an electronic copy that

includes the complete software operation system and project graphics, setpoints, system

parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to completely restore the system in the

case of a computer malfunction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.




230900 - 24

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on

the project drawing set.

B. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on

the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor in

accordance with these specifications.

C. Equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that is normally wired before installation shall

be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished

and installed by the Control System Contractor.

D. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function

and system served with permanently engraved phenolic labels.

3.4 WIRING

A. All electrical control wiring to the control panels shall be the responsibility of the Control System

Contractor.

B. Excess wire shall not be looped or coiled in the controller cabinet.

C. Incorporate electrical noise suppression techniques in relay control circuits.

D. There shall be no drilling on the controller cabinet after the controls are mounted inside.

E. Careful stripping of wire while inside the cabinet is required to ensure that no wire strand

fragments land on circuit boards.

F. Use manufacturer-specified wire for all network connections.

G. Use approved optical isolation and lightning protection when penetrating building envelope.

H. Read installation instructions carefully. Any unavoidable deviations shall be approved by owner's

rep prior to installation.




230900 - 25

I. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the

Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BMS Contractor

unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring

shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national

electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.

J. All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer

recommendations.

K. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design

responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect

selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor

shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.

L. Class 2 Wiring

1. All controls wiring (including wiring for meters) shall be plenum rated, shielded cable.

2. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified.

3. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class 2 wiring

not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing

metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the

building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code

requirements.

M. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC

and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

N. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and

equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel

terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

O. BMS Line Voltage Power Source

1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel

boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26.

2. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for any

other purposes.

3. DDC terminal unit controllers may not use AC power from motor power circuits.

4. All control power shall be provided from a standby panel board.

P. BMS Raceway

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this

specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.

2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway

(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.

3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building

lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet

in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used

within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.




230900 - 26

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the Control System Contractor shall load all system software

and start-up the system. The Control System Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration,

testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to ensure that the system is

functioning in full accordance with these specifications.

B. The Control System Contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components,

routines and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a

point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation.

C. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Control System Contractor has

performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. System

acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.6 OPERATOR TRAINING

A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Control System

hardware and software has been established, the Control System Contractor shall provide on-site

operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during

normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the

system hardware, software and accessories.

B. The Control System Contractor shall provide 24 total hours of comprehensive training for system

orientation, product maintenance and troubleshooting, programming and engineering, if not

provided under a previous contract at the site using the same brand and type of controllers within

the previous 3 years.

3.7 WARRANTY PERIOD SERVICES

A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period

of eighteen months from the time of system acceptance.

B. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the BMS due to faulty materials,

methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Control

System Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

C. Maintenance of Computer Software Programs: The Control System Contractor shall maintain all

software during the warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub-vendor upgrades to software

shall be added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. New products

are not considered upgrades in this context.




230900 - 27

D. Maintenance of Control Hardware: The Control System Contractor shall inspect, repair, replace,

adjust, and calibrate, as required, the controllers, control devices and associated peripheral units

during the warranty period. The Control System Contractor shall then furnish a report describing

the status of the equipment, problem areas (if any) noticed during service work, and description

of the corrective actions taken. The report shall clearly certify that all software is functioning

correctly.

E. Service Period: Calls for service by the Owner shall be honored within 24 hours and are not to be

considered as part of routine maintenance.

F. Service Documentation: A copy of the service report associated with each owner-initiated service

call shall be provided to the owner.

3.8 WARRANTY ACCESS

A. The Owner shall grant to the Control System Contractor reasonable access to the BMS during the

warranty period. Remote access to the BMS (for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting,

via the Internet, during the warranty period) will be allowed.

3.9 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. See Division 1 for requirements. O&M manuals shall include the following elements, as a

minimum:

1. As-built control drawings for all equipment.

2. As-built Network Communications Diagram.

3. General description and specifications for all components.

4. Completed Performance Verification sheets.

5. Completed Controller Checkout/Calibration Sheets.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC, PLUMBING, AND

ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 1

SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL

CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and

devices and for submittal requirements.

2. Division 01 section 019113 Section "General Commissioning Requirements"

3. Floor plans.

4. Flow and Control Diagrams.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control; interchangeable with BMS

B. VAV: Variable air volume.

C. BMS: Building Management System; interchangeable with DDC

D. VFD: Variable Frequency Drive

1.4 GENERAL

A. Controls contactor shall have a meeting with the architect, engineer, and owner prior to

programming to discuss capabilities, schedules and sequences.

B. Controls contractor shall allocate programming hours (not less than 20 hours) for programming

of the facilities program schedules and adjustments.

C. Contractor shall provide all required control devices, meters, hardware and software to achieve

the specified sequences of operation as outlined in these specifications and as detailed on

drawings whether indicated and/or implied. Refer to drawing for general I/O points. All points

may not be listed and are indicated for general description.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 2

D. BMS shall monitor and report all control function alarm points.

E. BMS shall monitor and report status of all equipment for use in sequence of operations, trending

and verification.

F. BMS shall monitor all modulating valve and damper positions.

G. All setpoints including but not limited to temperature, time, CO, CO2, enthalpy, wet bulb,

pressure, etc. shall be adjustable.

H. All safeties shall operate whether the starters or VFD’s are in the hand or automatic mode.

I. Space Sensors

1. Space sensors shall be combination type temperature, humidity and CO2 and shall

provide local temperature adjustment in all normally occupied spaces except as noted.

Refer to plans for sensor type designation. The temperature adjustment range shall be

individually adjustable for each sensor, programmed through the BMS or the same range

can be applied to all sensors globally.

2. BMS shall permanently monitor all space sensors for temperature, CO2, humidity and

dewpoint. Dewpoint values shall be generated psychometrically utilizing space

temperature and humidity.

3. Space sensors in mechanical, electrical, IT and storage type spaces shall be temperature

only.

4. Sensors shall also provide an occupancy override function. Activation of timed override

switch on zone sensors shall only reset zone heating and cooling setpoints to “occupied”

values, but shall not affect otherwise scheduled Unoccupied operating mode of air

handling unit. This allows the user to override the Unoccupied scheduled setpoints and

put the system into an occupied setpoints mode for set duration and reset to normal

operation at the end of the period or whenever the override button is held for more than 5

seconds (adjustable). The override duration is individually adjustable for each sensor

through the BMS or the same range can be applied to all sensors globally.

5. Space sensors in public spaces such as gym, café, kitchen and corridors shall be

combination sensor type only. No display or local adjustment. If a blank combination

sensor cannot be provided install individual sensors to measure temperature, CO2 and

humidity.

J. The temperature controls contractor, equipment manufacturers, and mechanical contractor shall

provide all parts, sensors, hardware and accessories for a complete and operational system. If

alternate/additional sensors/relays or hardware is required by deviating from the basis of design,

the control contractor is to provide all required hardware, installation and communication

wiring for these devices.

1.5 SAFETIES (ALL AIR HANDLING UNITS AND DUCTWORK)

A. Supply or return duct mounted smoke detectors; upon sensing products of combustion, or signal

received from central fire alarm system, shall shut down the associated air handling system or

heat pump supply, return and relief fans as applicable with the HOA switch in both the ”hand”

and “auto” positions. Reset of smoke detector initiation shall be manual. Initiate an alarm upon



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 3

shut down via duct smoke detector. BMS shall monitor status and receive trouble alarm upon

detector activation.

B. Upon building wide shutdown of air handling units from central fire alarm system, after the fire

alarm is reset to normal mode, BMS shall automatically stage the re-start up of air handling

units to eliminate simultaneous starting. Limit the start up in blocks staggered at 5 minutes.

Maximum time to restart all equipment shall be 30 minutes (adjustable)

C. DOAS-1 only: Freeze protection sensor element (provide complete coil coverage per

manufacturer’s recommendations with a minimum of 1.0 ft of sensor for each 1.0 sq. ft. of coil

face) located on the leaving side of the reheat coil. When the temperature across the freeze stat

drops below 30˚F (coils protected with PG), the freeze stat shall trip and be reset automatically

twice. On the third trip, the air handling unit fans shall be shut down via BMS signal to the to

the starters, with the HOA switch in both the “hand” and “auto” positions. An alarm shall be

initiated at the BMS central computer and at the local control panel. Reset shall be manual on

the third trip.

D. During unoccupied (Winter/Heating Mode) When the outdoor air temperature falls below 20°F,

sensor located downstream of the hot water coil shall modulate the hot water coil control valve

to maintain unit casing temperature of 40˚F (DAOS Unit only).

E. Smoke Damper (DOAS unit):

1. Smoke dampers shall close upon activation of duct smoke detector, a signal from the

central fire alarm panel for system shut down or when unit is scheduled to be off.

2. Smoke detectors shall be furnished by Division 26, installed in the ductwork by Division

23, wired to the control system by the temperature controls contractor (provide interface

panel), and wired to the fire alarm system by Division 26 (provide control module).

3. Smoke dampers shall be reset after the fire alarm system is reset to normal mode by the

central fire alarm system.

4. Smoke dampers shall be energized open via 120V power wired by the temperature

control contractor. Coordinate circuit breaker locations with Division 26.

5. BMS shall monitor damper end switches for all smoke dampers, both open and closed.

Provide an alarm if damper position is not in the open position while building fire alarm

system is in normal safe mode.

6. The damper shall be proven open via its end switch prior to the fan being energized.

F. Supply and return duct mounted high limit pressure sensors (hard wired into safety circuits)

shall shut down both DOAS supply and retrun/exhaust fan when the duct static pressure exceeds

4” w.c. (adjustable) in supply and -2” w.c. in exhaust/return if discharge or inlet static pressures

exceed pressure classification ratings of the ductwork or fans and an alarm generated at the

BMS. Reset shall be manual at the BMS.

G. The BMS shall monitor all fans status via a current sensor. If anytime the fan is enabled and

current is not sensed, an alarm shall be initiated at the BMS central computer and at the local

panel.

H. The BMS shall monitor the discharge air temperature via a temperature sensor located in the

supply duct. If the discharge air temperature deviates more than 5˚F above or below the



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 4

setpoint for a period of 5 minutes while the unit is enabled, an alarm shall be initiated at the

BMS central computer and at the local panel.

I. Following a safety shut-down, a manually initiated restart command shall restart the system as

previously described under Normal Operating Mode.

J. It is intended that, in general, the Division 23 Contractor will be responsible for all control

sequences. Critical safety interlocks which are not directly wired by the Division 26 sub-

contractor, such as freezestats, high limit protectors, end switches, smoke dampers, etc., shall be

directly connected, through wire, so as not to depend on any digital control system “Sequence

of Operation” to perform their safety function.

1.6 CONTROL OF OUTSIDE AIR GENERAL (ALL AIR HANDLING UNITS)

A. Outside air is controlled to satisfy whichever of the following predominates:

1. The outside air volume required to satisfy the economizer cycle (Gym units only HP-16

& 17).

2. The outside air volume required to maintain a CO2 differential as described below (All

space served with a variable outside air vav box, including classroom spaces, café,

learning commons, and as indicated).

3. OA intake will be limited to a maximum of the "design OA cfm" which is shown in the

Schedule of Air Handling Units. This limit is not applicable to the economizer cycle.

4. The outside air volume required to provide make-up air for the exhaust systems

associated with each air handler and maintain a positive building pressure.

1.7 OPTIMUM START (ALL AIR HANDLING AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS)

A. Each air handling and hydronic system start up sequence shall include an optimal start routine.

BMS shall trend time frame, based on outdoor and indoor conditions, it takes respective systems

to achieve warmup/cooldown temperature setpoints. BMS shall automatically adjust startup

schedules to achieve warmup/cooldown setpoints based on trended data.

1.8 NIGHT SETBACK/UNOCCUPIED MODES (ALL AIR HANDLING AND HYDRONIC

SYSTEMS)

A. BMS shall reset all space temperature during unoccupied area to the following schedule:

1. All spaces except Tele/Data, IT: 65˚F (adj) winter, 80˚F (adj) summer.

2. If any space drops below setback temperature, respective systems shall energize and

remain in operation until space temperature rises 3˚F (adjustable) above setback set point

for 10 minutes (adjustable); in winter mode. DOAS-1 unit to remain off in heating

setback mode.

3. If any space rises above setback temperature, respective systems shall energize and

remain in operation until space temperature drops 3˚F (adjustable) below setback set

point for 10 minutes (adjustable). DOAS-1 unit to remain off in setback mode.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 5

4. Building shall utilize a minimum of two space mounted relative humidity sensors to use

in conjunction with space temperature to ensure space conditions do not exceed 60% RH

in unoccupied periods.

5. If any space exceeds 60% RH in setback mode for a period of 30 minutes, initiate on the

DOAS unit in dehumidification mode. Refer to DOAS sequence below.

1.9 CARBON DIOXIDE CONTROL GENERAL (GYM UNITS ONLY)

A. BMS shall monitor return and/or room air CO2 sensor and modulate minimum outside air

damper from units minimum to maximum scheduled (minimum outside air with one unit is 500

cfm to a maximum 1000 cfm per unit). CO2 control shall be overridden during economizer.

BMS shall continually poll space mounted CO2 sensors and override return air CO2 sensor to

maintain desired levels of outside air within the building.

B. BMS shall monitor mixed air temperature and modulate outdoor air dampers to maintain a

minimum of mixed air temperature of 50°F (adjustable). CO2 control shall be overridden during

economizer.

C. The outside air dampers shall modulate to maintain room carbon dioxide levels a maximum of

800 PPM (adjustable) above ambient CO2 levels, at all times. An alarm shall be generated if

any room CO2 sensor level rises 10% (adjustable) or more than 1200 ppm (adjustable).

D. Ambient CO2 levels to be provided by the outdoor air CO2 sensor located at the exterior for

monitoring.

E. In units with multiple CO2 sensors, if BMS fails to read a signal from any of the CO2 sensors or

the sensor fails, an alarm shall be generated and remaining sensor(s) shall maintain control of

outside air. If only a single sensor resides or failure of remaining multiple sensors, and signal or

sensor failure occurs, then the units outside air dampers shall remain at last known position and

an alarm shall be generated. Operator may override any failed CO2 sensor.

1.10 ENTHALPY ECONOMIZER (GYM UNITS ONLY HP-16 &17))

A. Provide each air handling unit with an enthalpy controlled economizer. When outside air

enthalpy is less than return air enthalpy and zone calling for cooling, a PID loop comparing

actual supply temperature to its calculated setpoint, shall utilize outside air prior to staging of

fan and compressors. Position of outside air damper shall be overridden by CO2 sensors if

indoor levels of CO2 are outside of defined range. When the outdoor enthalpy exceeds the

return air enthalpy, the economizer cycle shall be disabled, the fan and compressors shall

modulate to maintain the supply air temperature setpoint, and the outside air damper shall return

to control off the carbon dioxide sensor. Position of outside air dampers shall be overridden by

mixed air low limit and supply air setpoint. Mixed air low limit set to 50 deg F.

B. If outside air enthalpy is above return air enthalpy and CO2 levels are satisfied, outside air

dampers shall be at the position required for proper make-up air and building pressurization.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 6

1.11 FIRE ALARM INTERFACE

A. Alarm shall be initiated upon any smoke detector activation.

B. BAS shall receive a fire alarm system reset from FACP to restart all units after fire event clears.

1.12 EVENT INITIATED TRENDING

A. In the event that the temperature or humidity of any zone shall enter alarm condition, the DDC

system shall begin a trend of the parameters which affect the ability of the system to maintain

conditions.

B. The points trended shall be similar but not limited to:

DOAS and Heat Pump discharge temperature.

DOAS unit discharge humidity.

Zone supply air temperature.

Zone temperature and humidity.

Zone CO2

Dual temperature water supply and return temperature at DOAS.

Geothermal water supply and return temperature.

Outside air temperature and humidity.

KW and KWh at the panel level.

C. The BMS shall plot the variables on a single real time graphic display.

D. The BMS shall monitor these points at 1 minute intervals and periodically download the values

into Microsoft Excel.

1.13 MEASUREMENT AND VERIFICATION

A. BAS contractor shall create and implement a Measurement and Verification Plan to monitor and

report the loads identified below. The plan shall be used as a benchmark to confirm the

building is operating as a net zero facility. The plan shall at minimum include:

1. Brief project description and overview.

2. Contact info of contractor.

3. Projected total energy target: EUI 21.3 kbtu/sf/year

4. Schedule of monitoring activities.

5. Description of each energy loads to be monitored.

6. A sampling plan for quantity and frequency of data collection.

7. Sample of reports to be prepared.

a. Reports shall be submitted monthly

b. Reports each month shall aggregate the previous months to running totals.

8. Comparison against monthly and yearly energy model outputs.

9. Location and service of each meter monitored.

10. Final summary report indicating the results of 1 years monitoring as compared to the

target and any recommendations.

B. M&V plan to be submitted for review.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 7

C. M&V 1 year monitoring shall begin after owner takes full occupancy and all commissioning

activities are complete,

D. BAS to monitor building voltage, KW and KWh output of each electrical panel and point power

loads as identified on the electrical plan schedules. Coordinate with Division 26 contractor for

locations and scope of work. Division 26 contractor to provide current transducers for BAS to

read and totalize information to be used in the M and V plan. BAS vender shall integrate the M

and V plan into the BMS. Refer to electrical drawings for quantity of panels and individual

loads. Meters shall provide BACnet IP and are provided by Division 26 contractor.

E. BAS to monitor all plumbing domestic water flow meters and provided water flow and usage

totals for cold water. Refer to drawing P4.01 for quantity and service including each well

pump, fire tank, domestic water tank, concession stand and main building.

1. Each well pump total flow, 2 total, located in remote pump room, Well Service Room

G102.

2. Fire tank flow, located in remote pump room, Well Service Room G102.

3. Main domestic water tank fill, located in remote pump room, Well Service Room G102.

4. New building meter, located in Mech 039.

5. Concession stand, located in Mech 039.

F. Information obtained shall be totalized and presented on the BMS indicating total usage of all

system and individual loads. In addition, the information shall be used as comparison data

based on previous trends. Data shall be logged and trended for a minimum of 1 year. Data to be

used and populated in the energy dashboard.

G. Loads

1. Domestic Cold Water flows.

2. Geothermal loads

3. All electrical scheduled loads broken out by mechanical loads, lighting loads, kitchen

loads, IT loads, plug loads, pump house and concession stand loads.

4. PV array KW and KWh totals.

5. Each or the 8 PV invertors KW and KWh. This information is available through direct

Web download for the PV manufacturer.

1.14 ELECTRIC CABINET/UNIT HEATERS

A. On a call for heat the fan shall start through wall mounted temperature sensor provide by BAS

through manufacturer supplied packaged controls to maintain the desired space temperature

(setting range 45° - 70°F).

B. BMS shall monitor space temperature in all spaces. Submit an alarm if space temperature drops

10°F (adjustable) below unoccupied set point.

1.15 VFD STATUS

A. BMS system shall monitor VFD fault alarms and associated motor speeds.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 8

1.16 VARIABLE VOLUME REFRIGERANT HEAT PUMP UNITS

A. BMS contractor to refer to specifications section 238129 “Variable Refrigerant Volume HVAC

System” for BMS Integration through BACnet, for additional information on the interface

between the VRV Heat Pump Units and the BAS.

B. The VRV control system shall control the operation of the VRV and associated selector boxes.

BAS to initiate the VRV unit on based space temperature setpoint supplied by BAS. Cassette

units to utilize a wall mounted space sensor provided by the VRV manufactures. Ducted VRV

shall utilize a return air sensor provided by the VRV manufacture.

C. BMS shall monitor and have the ability to control the following through the BACnet interface:

1. Start/stop time of day scheduling

2. Start/stop

3. Space temperature

4. Space temperature adjustment

5. Unit alarms

6. Setback Temperature

D. When the BMS detects a point out of range, it shall override the setpoint to acceptable value.

E. VRV control system shall monitor space temperature and temperature setpoint. When space

temperature rises to 2°F (adj.) above cooling setpoint and maintains for 30 minutes, control

system shall command the unit to cooling. When the space temperature drops 2°F (adj.) below

heating setpoint and maintains for 30 minutes (adj), control system shall command the unit into

heating.

F. In rooms with cassettes style an additional combination type sensor shall be proved to monitor

temperature, humidity and CO2.

1.17 DEDICATED OUTSIDE AIR SYSTEM (DOAS-1)

A. The outside air system shall operate under the control of a local, system microprocessor based

DDC controller. Provide controller for the DOA system with custom points and sequence

programming as follows.

B. The outside air system shall be placed into the occupied/unoccupied mode based upon the user

adjustable schedule at the network controller. These systems shall be in the occupied mode

during regular school hours only or based on a scheduled event in which the gym in use to

provide exhaust of toilets outside the gym.

C. If communication is lost between the network controller and the outside air system controller,

then the outside air system shall be placed into the occupied mode until communication is

restored. Unit shall operate based on programming and last setpoint/inputs.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 9

D. Each system will be placed into a mode of operation based upon the following adjustable

temperature or humidity schedule:

1. Outside air temperature Mode of operation

a. 72 deg f or greater (adj.) Cooling mode

b. Between 55 deg f and 72 deg f (adj.) Economizer mode

c. 55 deg f or less (adj.) Heating mode

2. Common Exhaust Humidity: Mode of operation

a. Greater than 60% Dehumidification mode

E. In the occupied mode of freezestat (low limit) mode (refer to 1.5.C for auto reset and additional

requirements):

1. The supply fan and exhaust shall be off,

2. The energy recovery wheel shall be off,

3. The outside air damper and exhaust air damper shall be fully closed,

4. Face and bypass damper shall be in full face position.

5. Coils valve open and pump start to allow flow through coil.

6. Reheat coil valve open

7. Heat pump system shall be on in heating mode.

F. When placed into the occupied mode, the following shall occur in sequential order after

operation of the water-to-water heat pump system has been proved:

1. The energy recovery wheel shall start and operation shall be proved via current switch,

2. The outside air damper, exhaust air damper, supply and exhaust air smoke dampers shall

fully open and be proved via current switch,

3. The supply fan VFD and exhaust fan ECM shall start and operation shall be proved via

current switch,

4. The system shall not start if any one component does not prove operation, including the

hydronic water-to-water heat exchanger system unless a specific mode or temperature

range has the wheel or water to water unit indexed off.

G. In the occupied mode, the face and bypass dampers shall modulate to maintain discharge air

temperature (adj.) Based upon the following schedule:

1. Discharge air temperature mode of operation:

a. 68 deg f (adj.) Cooling mode

b. Varies between clg/htg setpoint economizer mode

c. 65 deg f (adj.) Heating mode

2. (note that there should be not be more than approximately 72% (adjustable) airflow

necessary across the cooling/heating coil to maintain required discharge air temperature.

Set damper actuator control accordingly.)

H. If the outside air temperature is between 55 deg f (adj.) and 72 deg f (adj.), then the energy

recovery wheel shall modulate to maintain discharge air temperature without over

heating/cooling (DAT at 70°f ± 5°f. The water-to-water heat pump system shall remain off

unless in dehumidification mode. Wheel shall be slowed to limit energy exchange during

economizer. If wheel is stopped due to too much energy transfer, wheel shall rotate every 15

minutes (adj) to limit wheel build up.

I. Dehumidification mode when in economizer: if the DOAS unit is in occupied mode and the

outside air temperature is between 60 deg f and 68 deg f and outdoor enthalpy is greater than



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 10

return/exhaust air enthalpy and the building air relative humidity is 60% or greater the wheel

shall modulate. The energy recovery wheel shall modulate to maintain the inside air relative

humidity below ±55%. If additional dehumidification is required, WWHP-1 and/or 2 shall be

utilized to provide additional dehumidification.

J. Dehumidification mode when in cooling: if the DOAS unit is in occupied mode and the outside

air temperature is above 68 deg f and the building air relative humidity is 60% or greater the

energy recovery wheel shall modulate to maximize heat recovery. WWHP-1 and/or 2 shall be

utilized to provide additional dehumidification as described below. Face and bypass damper

shall be set to pass maximum airflow of approximately 12,500 cfm or 72% of air supply across

the dual temp coil. Dual temp coil discharge air shall be set to 52.5 deg f LAT and be

controlled by coil 3 way valve. Dehumidification mode shall be terminated once exhaust air

relative humidity drops below 55%.

K. Additional dehumidification: Under this mode reheat coil to maintain unit discharge air

temperature of 68 deg F (adj) by modulating the two way control valve or varying speed of

reheat pump, P-5. Either or shall be used depending on the mode of WWHP-1 or 2. Valve to

modulate with pump off if GS temperature is above 85 degrees. If WWHP system is on in

cooling mode, utilize the reheat pump. Reheat shall be locked out when GS and GR

temperatures are below 80 deg F (adj).

L. The supply fans shall be controlled by the VFD based on field-mounted duct pressure setpoint.

Fan supply static pressure optimization shall be utilized by polling of associated VAV/CAV box

damper positions and resetting of pressure setpoint as allowed. DDC system determines VAV

box with greatest damper open position once every ten minutes. Unit's supply air static pressure

setpoint decreased or increased by 0.1 wg increments to satisfy calling VAV/CAV box. Setpoint

is 0.75 wg when unit is first started. Determine in the field with the tab contractor the static

pressure setpoint to obtain acceptable airflow as designed.

M. Monitor DOAS supply and exhaust fan airflow through manufacture supplied airflow

transducers.

N. The exhaust fan shall be controlled by the ECM controller based on a supply fan offset. Offset

shall vary depending on maintaining a neutral to slightly positive overall building pressurization

set up by balancer as well as accounting for kitchen make up. Offset shall be initially set at

1500 cfm based on units fan selection. Offset shall increase in proportion with kitchen make up

as monitored by kitchen make up air vav boxes serving HP-11(TB-64), 12(TB-63) and 13(TB-

65) as follows:

1. Initial offset: 1500 cfm, TB-63 and 65 at minimum airflow of 705 cfm each. When

kitchen is unoccupied these VAV operate between 705 cfm minimum to 1210 cfm max

depending on CO2 in Café per VAV box SOO below.

2. Kitchen occupied, EF-1 and 2 off. 1500 cfm offset, TB-64 at 200 cfm.

3. Kitchen occupied EF-1 on, EF-2 off: TB-64 at 600 cfm. TB-63 and 65 at 1210 cfm

each. Unit offset is increased to 3110 cfm

4. Kitchen occupied EF-1 and 2 on: TB-63, 64 and 65 no change, Unit offset increased to

3710 cfm.

5. Kitchen occupied EF-1 off, EF-2 on: TB-64 at 600 cfm, TB 13 63 and 65 at minimum

airflow at 705 cfm each. DOAS unit offset respectively 2100 cfm.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 11

O. Toilet exhaust control: the toilet exhaust flow rate is set 50% higher than code required to allow

for reduction in exhaust airflow. DOAS unit shall not drop below 50% flow under normal

operating conditions. Coordinate with test and balance contractor.

P. Hardware interlock supply fan, exhaust fan, and isolation dampers with emergency

HVAC/ventilation kill button.

Q. The coil is a partial flow coil with face and bypass damper control for freeze protection and

dehumidification control. Low temperature cutout shall be located on the discharge of the coil

and shall activate when the leaving air temperature falls below 35 deg f. The supply and exhaust

fans shall stop, outside air and exhaust air dampers shall close.

R. Low temperature sensor ERW frost alarm located on the discharge of the energy recovery

wheel, when the leaving air temperature falls below 35 deg f (adj) the wheel and pressure

differential across wheel increases 0.2 in wg (adj) above clean setting (0.75 in wg design) shall

slow or stop to prevent freezing of exhaust air stream. When temperature rises to 40 deg f (adj.)

System shall return to normal operation.

S. A manual reset low limit installed downstream of the chilled/hot water coil shall stop the

operation of the system if the discharge temperature falls below 35 deg f.

T. A smoke detector shall be located in supply and return. If smoke is detected, then the system

shall shutoff, smoke damper close and an audio/visual alarm shall activate. Upon correction of

problem, the system shall be reset and shall return to normal operation. Coordinate with fire

alarm system. Any activation of the building's fire alarm system shall shutdown the OA unit

completely.

U. Building purge: the outside air unit shall start or stop using optimal start and/or stop software.

Initially implement the unit to operate 2 hours minimum before occupancy due to State of CT

recommendations to control IAQ during the pandemic. This can be reset once the pandemic

concerns are over and State of CT has revised their requirements. The start or stop time shall be

calculated based on history for a building purge cycle to be completed prior to the outside air

unit being scheduled on or off.

V. Purge mode: all VAV and CAV boxes without CO2 sensors shall be at minimum. VAV boxes

shall be open to 100% maximum airflow value under purge mode. All zones with differential

CO2 levels less than 800 ppm shall be closed. All VAV boxes with differential CO2 levels in

excess of 800 ppm (adj) shall open 100% until the differential level is below 700 ppm (adj). The

OA unit shall operate to maintain duct static pressure setpoint. The outside air unit shall enter

occupied mode when the building purge is completed with all spaces CO2 levels satisfied or a

maximum purge time of 2 hrs (adj). Once purge completed system reverts to normal operation.

W. During the pandemic and until the State of CT changes the guidelines, the DOAS unit shall

reenter the purge mode to operate 1 hour after occupancy schedule to purge the building. Once

the guidelines are revised this mode can be disabled. Provide a user toggle to disable this mode

of operation.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 12

1.18 DOAS UNIT AFTER HOURS AND SUMMER OPERATION

A. There are two modes on operation for summer use and afterhours activities. There are 4

dampers located in the return/exhaust duct that operate as isolation dampers. These dampers are

two position with end switches. Under normal operation these dampers shall be proven open

prior starting of DOAS unit. Damper shall always be open unless in summer mode or after

hours mode.

B. Dampers are broken up as follows:

1. SD-1: Smoke damper serving main floor area B

2. ID-1: Isolation damper serving lower level B

3. ID-2: Isolation serving lower and main level A.

4. ID-3: Isolation damper serving upper level A kindergarten

C. After hour mode:

1. Schedule to be programmed for events as needed.

2. SD-1 closed. End switch under this mode bypassed.

3. ID-1, 2 and 3 closed.

4. Supply vav boxes not associated with the café or learning commons area shall be closed

or at a minimum position to allow the DOAS fans to operate. All classroom wings shall

be isolated. Only one supply and exhaust fan are required to operate under this condition.

The other fans shall have speed signal at zero. Fans operate under pressure control.

Offset between supply and exhaust fan shall be 500 cfm (adj).

D. Summer Mode:

1. Schedule to be programmed based on admin occupancy.

2. SD-1 closed. End switch under this mode bypassed.

3. ID-1 closed.

4. ID-2 open.

5. ID-3 closed.

6. Supply vav boxes not associated with the café or learning commons area shall be closed

except as noted below.

7. Admin area vav boxes operate under normal mode.

8. Music and Art to operate with vav boxes at 50% flow (adj).

9. PK Classrooms to operate at 50% flow (adj)

10. Space served by VRF units AC2-1, 2-2 and 2-10 shall operate as normal

11. VRF system shall operate in occupied mode.

12. All classroom wings shall be isolated. Only one supply and exhaust fan are required to

operate under this condition. The other fans shall have speed signal at zero. Fans operate

under pressure control. Offset between supply and exhaust fan shall be 500 cfm (adj).

1.19 NURSES ISOLATION AND WAITING EXHAUST FAN (EF-3)

A. The fan shall be enabled and disabled based on a predetermined unit operating schedule or

through local occupancy or vacancy sensors. The fan shall start and stop on command from the

BMS panel when the starter "hand-off-auto" switch is in the "auto" position. The exhaust fan

shall be started and stopped manually when the starter "hand-off-auto" switch is in either the



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 13

"hand" or "off" position. The automatic control damper shall be interlocked to open when the

fan starts.

B. When fan is running the VRF units, AC2-4, return isolation damper shall be closed. TB-46 shall

be at full airflow.

C. The BMS shall monitor the fan status via a current sensor. If anytime the fan is enabled and

current is not sensed, an alarm shall be initiated at the BMS head end and at the local panel.

D. In unoccupied mode and Nurses area requires heating or cooling based on setback temperatures,

EF-3 shall be off and AC2-4 return isolation damper shall be open, TB-46 shall be closed. Unit

shall operate as described under setback controls.

1.20 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST

A. Interlock of exhaust fan with kitchen hood controls. Exhaust fan shall be coordinated with the

fire suppression controller via dry contacts and relays (furnished by fire suppression vendor).

B. Exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the associated make up air VAV boxes for kitchen and

café heat pumps to provide hood make up air. BMS shall monitor status of each device and

initiate an alarm to BAS if any device fails to operate. Failure of either exhaust fan of make up

shall shut down the all other operating units except during a hood fire suppression activation in

which the hood exhaust fan(s) shall remain on and make up shall be shutdown via a dry contact

in the fire suppression controller to signal the BMS to shut down the make up air and heat

pumps.

C. Fan shall be controlled via a wall or hood mounted on/off switch or via hood temperature

sensor. Sensor supplied with kitchen hood. Upon activation of any on/off switch or temperature

sensor, the associated exhaust fan shall be energized via the BMS after isolation motorized

damper opened and proven open. If damper does not prove open fan shall remain off and an

alarm generated. BMS shall monitor status of fan for operation and runtime and shall act as a

permissive based on user occupancy schedule. If fan is running after occupied hours the BMS

shall deactivate fan and make up.

D. Upon activation of the exhaust fan, make up air VAV boxes, TB-63, 64 and 65, shall go to

airflows scheduled under DOAS sequence above. If heat pumps are off, they can stay off and

VAV box will discharge air out through the return duct for make up. If heat pumps are on, they

shall operate under their respective sequence. The air quantity shall be determined during the

testing and balancing process.

1.21 DISHWASHER HUMIDITY EXHAUST (EF-2)

A. Exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the associated make up air VAV boxes for kitchen and

café heat pumps to provide room make up air. BMS shall monitor status of each device and

initiate an alarm to BAS if any device fails to operate.

B. Fan shall be controlled via a wall mounted humidity sensor and shall operate upon rise in space

relative humidity above 60%. Upon activation the associated exhaust fan shall be energized via



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 14

the BMS after isolation motorized damper opened and proven open. If damper does not prove

open fan shall remain off and an alarm generated. BMS shall monitor status of fan for operation

and runtime and shall act as a permissive based on user occupancy schedule. If fan is running

after occupied hours the BMS shall deactivate fan and make up.

C. Upon activation of the exhaust fan, make up air VAV boxes, TB-63, 64 and 65, shall go to

airflows scheduled under DOAS sequence above. If heat pumps are off, they can stay off and

VAV box will discharge air out through the return duct for make up. If heat pumps are on, they

shall operate under their respective sequence. The air quantity shall be determined during the

testing and balancing process.

1.22 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING

A. The BMS shall provide control for the site and exterior lighting. Provide six (6) lighting control

points on the owner specified BMS schedule. Coordinate with the work of Division 26 and

Lighting Contactor Schedule. BMS shall control normal site lighting circuits, on/off, based on

exterior photocell (provided by BMS contractor) for turning on/off and user defined occupancy

schedules to turn on/off. Extend control from lighting panels or contactors. Refer to Electrical

drawings for locations of panels.

B. The BMS shall provide control for the interior corridors, café and learning commons lighting.

Provide eighteen (18) lighting control points on the owner specified BMS schedule. Coordinate

with the work of Division 26. BMS shall control lighting circuits, on/off, based on user defined

occupancy schedules to turn on/off. Extend control from lighting panels or contactors. Refer to

Electrical drawings for locations of panels.

1.23 LEAK DETECTOR MONITORING

A. The BMS shall monitor the water leak detector(s) located in all fan coil auxiliary drain pans.

B. Upon water detection, an alarm shall be initiated at the BMS, the associated fan coil unit shall

be shut down and condenser water supply control valve shall be closed.

1.24 LEAK DETECTOR MONITORING IN MERs

A. The BMS shall provide spot type leak detectors in each mech room per the schedule below.

monitor the water leak detector(s) located in all fan coil auxiliary drain pans.

1. Mech 004: (1) behind HP-8

2. Mech 024: (1) between HP-3&5, (1) between HP-11&12, (1) behind HP-4

3. Mech 028: (1) at door between HP-1&2.

4. Mech 039: (1) between HP-31&P-1, (1) between HP-14&30, (1) between HP-16&17, (1)

between water heater heat pumps and water storage tanks.

5. Mech 104: (1) behind HP-26

6. Mech 122: (1) between HP-23&25, (1) by door of Elect 120, (1) adjacent to DOAS-1 at

dual temp coil.

7. Mech 138: (1) at door between HP-18&33



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 15

B. Upon water detection, an alarm shall be initiated at the BMS, the associated units within the

MER shall be shut down and condenser water supply control valve shall be closed.

1.25 GLYCOL FEED TANK

A. BMS shall monitor current of glycol fill pump and initiate an alarm upon pump activation.

Alarm is to verify duration of pump running with respect to possible leak in glycol.

B. BMS to monitor system pressure and initiate an alarm above normal operating pressures.

C. BMS shall monitor low level contacts and initiate an alarm upon activation.

1.26 IT ROOM AIR CONDITIONING HEAT PUMP

A. Space air conditioning units shall be started locally through unit supplied thermostats and

controls to maintain space set point. Units controls shall sequence evaporator fan and

refrigeration cycle to maintain space set point.

B. BAS shall monitor space temperature of each room. Report an alarm if space temperature rises

3˚F above set point (74˚F adj).

1.27 DOMESTIC WATER METERING

A. BAS to monitor water flow meters provided under plumbing scope of work. Refer to

measurement and verification heading for additional requirements.

1.28 MASTER VENTILATION SHUT-OFF SWITCH

A. Provide a master ventilation system (DOAS-1) shut-off switch, located in the Principals Office.

This switch shall make it possible to shut off the DOAS unit. Switch shall be labeled, with an

engraved nameplate; “Mansfield Building Master Ventilation Shut-Off”. Exact switch location

shall be coordinated with Facility.

B. Provide a switch, tied into the BMS, upon activation of the switch, an alarm shall be generated

at the BMS, the unit shall be disabled, all unit fans shall be off, and the smoke dampers, exhaust

air, and outside air dampers shall be closed. The dual temperature coil shall be closed to coil

and heat pump system serving coil shall be deenergized.

C. All units and other systems; including but not limited to air water heat pumps: geothermal

system; safeties shall remain operational.

D. Units shall be restarted manually through the BMS.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 16

1.29 WELL AND FIRE PUMP WATER SERVICE ROOM VENTILATION SYSTEM (EF-6 and 7)

A. The service room ventilation fan shall be enabled and disabled from the nearest BMS control

panel. Upon a rise in space temperature above the setpoint (85 def F initial) in the room, the

exhaust fan shall start. The associated automatic control damper and the outside air intake damper

shall be interlocked to open when the fan starts.

B. The BMS control system shall monitor the fan status via a current sensor. If anytime the fan is

enabled and current is not sensed, an alarm shall be initiated at the BMS central computer and at

the local panel.

1.30 KILN EXHAUST FAN (EF-4)

A. Kiln exhaust fan shall be started and stopped through interlock with kiln controller. BAS to moni-

tor runtime and status.

B. When called to energize, DOAS exhaust damper close and kiln exhaust fan shall energize to

100% flow. Associated VAV box in Art classroom TB-2 shall open to match up to 80% of ex-

haust flow CFM if closed or under CO2 control.

C. When kiln is de-energized, the exhaust fan shall be off, isolation damper closed, DOAS isolation

damper open and VAV box under normal control.

1.31 CONDENSATE STORM EJECTOR PUMPS

A. BMS shall pick up the general alarm point from the panel furnished with each of the three

pumps/tanks. General alarm shall signal an alarm at the BMS.

1.32 FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MONITOR

A. The BMS shall monitor the differential pressure across the filters.

B. Alarms shall be provided as follows:

1. Filter Change Required: Filter differential pressure exceeds a user definable limit (adj.).

1.33 HUMIDITY CONTROL

A. Seasonal Switchover:

1. The temperature and humidity setpoint for DOAS-1 in winter shall be 65°F/ 20% RH (no

humidification control in winter). Beginning on March 1st of each year, the temperature

and humidity setpoint shall be reset upward 1/2° and 4% respectively per week until the

summer setpoints of 75°F/ 60% RH are met. The effective average return air temperature

and humidity setpoints shall be based on the calculated reset values between 65°F/ 20%

RH and 72° F/ 60% RH.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 17

2. The temperature and humidity setpoint for DOAS-1 in summer shall be 75° F/ 60% RH.

Beginning on October 15th each year, the temperature and humidity setpoint shall be reset

downward 1/2° and 4% respectively per week until the winter setpoints of 65°F/ 20% RH

are met. The effective average return air temperature and humidity setpoints shall be

based on the calculated reset values between 75°F/ 60% RH and 65° F/ 20% RH.

1.34 WATER-TO-WATER HEAT PUMP SYSTEM

A. The system shall operate under the control of a local, stand-alone, microprocessor based BAS

controller field installed adjacent to units. If communication is lost between the BAS and the

controller, then the controller shall be placed into the occupied mode until communication is re-

stored.

B. In the unoccupied mode or economizer mode:

1. WWHP-1 and 2, shall be off unless dehumidification in economizer mode is required,

refer to DOAS SOO.

2. pump shall be off.

3. the control valve shall be closed to coil.

4. Heat pump isolation valves closed

C. When placed into the occupied mode, the following shall occur in sequential order prior to start-

ing the DOAS air handling system:

1. the main building geothermal pumps shall be operating be proven via current switch.

2. Lead control load and source valves shall be in the opened position and proven open.

3. Lead WWHP-1 or 2 shall start as required after proof of flow through differential

pressure switch and operation shall be proved via leaving water temperature.

4. the system shall not start if any one component does not prove operation.

D. The load pumps, P-3 or 4, shall operate continuously during occupied periods when in cooling

mode or heating mode or upon any call for heating or cooling and shall stage in speed depend-

ing on which WWHP is on to match the flow rate of the respective heat pump. Speed control to

be set by balancer. One heat pump on pump at half speed, two heat pumps on pumps a full

speed. Change of speed and opening of lag heat pump isolation valves shall occur simultane-

ously. Match speed of pump and valve opening to maintain flow sufficient flow through both

heat pumps.

E. If current sensors indicate pump issue (or failure), then an alarm shall be generated. A thirty

second time delay relay shall be provided for the pumps to prevent false alarms. After the cause

of the alarm has been eliminated, the system shall be capable of resetting and restarting the

pump. If no status verified start the lag pump.

F. The heat pump chillers shall operate to produce heating or cooling water as required for system

operation.

1. WWHP: chilled water: 42° to 52° LWT

2. WWHP: hot water: 110° to 120° LWT

G. WWHP’s shall operate in a lead/lag fashion with staged compressors. If after 15 minutes (adj.),

the supply setpoint is still more than 2 deg f (adj.) From setpoint, then another compressor of



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 18

the heat pump chiller shall operate to assist in reaching supply temperature, etc. Once setpoint is

reached, the compressor(s) shall stage on/off as specified.

H. If lead WWHP or pump does not prove operation, then the lag WWHP or pump shall activate

according to the sequence and an alarm shall be generated.

I. There shall be a 5 minute adjustable time delay before an additional compressor can be staged

on or off.

J. Rotate lead/lag heat pumps and pumps based on user defines schedule. Initially set at once per

week.

1.35 OUTSIDE AIR VARIABLE VOLUME TERMINAL UNITS

A. The VAV unit shall include DDC controller which includes the space CO2 or thermostat (de-

pending on SOO) and occupancy sensor inputs.

B. Outside air shall be introduced directly into spaces or ducted into heat pump return air ductwork

as indicated.

C. Each VAV air terminal labeled (TB-#) shall be allowed to modulate from minimum to maxi-

mum of cfm values indicated on the plans based on measured indoor and outdoor CO2 levels.

D. This contractor shall provide demand control ventilation system as specified and sequenced.

E. The VAV air terminal set point shall be determined via information provided from the demand

control ventilation programming. The DDC system shall receive indoor and outdoor CO2 from

the local CO2 sensors. As the differential CO2 level increases, the zone the VAV box shall in-

crease from minimum to maintain set point of 800 ppm (adj.) in the space. Where more than

one indoor C02 value is available per VAV box zone, the DDC system shall operate to maintain

all zones with the differential level specified - this generally will occur where outside air is sup-

plied to heat pump return air ductwork.

F. VAV boxes that serve more than one space shall operate if any of the space occupancy or va-

cancy sensors in the space served is activated.

G. Spaces with multiple occupancy/vacancy sensors shall be wired with sensors in parallel so any

one sensor shall active the ventilation mode.

H. An alarm shall be generated at the BAS when the zone CO2 exceeds setpoint by 10% or more

from the design value.

I. An alarm shall be generated at the BAS when the VAV terminal unit outdoor airflow cfm varies

by 10% or more from the airflow cfm setpoint.

J. Each air terminal unit with minimum and maximum airflow equal on the schedules shall be

constant volume (CAV) VAV boxes shall be set to the cfm value indicated on the plans. This

includes TB-16, 18, 32, 40, 45, 53, 57, 59 and 62 or as scheduled)



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 19

K. When the space is occupied the terminal shall be opened to the set value, when the space is un-

occupied the terminal shall be closed. All CAV terminals in public spaces (corridors, etc.) Shall

maintain constant airflow at all times unless otherwise indicated.

L. On HP unit systems with VAV outside air ducted into the return side of the HP, the VAV box

shall control either as indicated in other SOO’s for building make up/pressurization or based on

space CO2 levels.

M. TB-3 VAV terminal unit shall operate as an outside air delivery terminal unit and to provide

space cooling during the winter. Normal operation when Music room HP is in cooling mode,

VAV operates to control CO2 as described above. Winter mode when Music room heating

mode VAV box modulates first based on CO2/occupancy levels to specified value of 40 cfm.

Upon rise in space temperature above setpoint VAV box modulates up to maximum CFM value

indicated to maintain space temp. If discharge air of DOAS is greater than room setpoint, VAV

box only operates based on CO2 levels as to not over heat the rooms. Rooms each have dedi-

cated space sensors. The temperature shall be averaged between the two spaces and used as the

controlling settings.

N. Classrooms with toilets (TB-35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 42, 50, 51 and 52 or as indicated on the draw-

ings): When space is unoccupied the VAV box can go closed. Under occupancy the minimum

position is set by the second airflow number in the minimum box for the select VAV box to

maintain minimum make up for toilet exhaust.

O. Interlock TB-33 to full flow whenever HP-6 is in operation. VAV shall be closed when HP-6 is

off.

1.36 SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP UNIT WITH UNITARY CONTROLLER (HP-4, 15, 19, 20, 24,

28 & 32)

A. Each unit shall operate under the control of a local, stand-alone, microprocessor based DDC

controller field installed with unit.

B. Provide DDC controller within the unit cabinet to interface with the building DDC controls sys-

tem specified. Controller must be installed within the unit cabinet.

C. Each zone and associated unit shall be placed into the occupied/unoccupied mode based upon

the user adjustable schedule at the network controller. HP-4, 15, 24, 32 shall not have a setback

temperature as these control IT/AV type spaces. Units are occupied 24/7.

D. If communication is lost between the network controller and the heat pump controller, then the

heat pump controller shall be placed into the occupied mode until communication is restored.

E. During occupied mode, the heat pump shall operate as required between heating and cooling to

satisfy space thermostat/sensor setpoint /- 1.0 deg f. During compressor operation, geothermal

control valve shall be open. The unit shall automatically change over from heating to cooling.

When space(s) temperature is satisfied, fan/compressor shall be off.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 20

F. During the unoccupied mode, the heat pump shall not operate unless the space temperature falls

below unoccupied heating setpoint (adj.) Or rises above the unoccupied cooling set point (adj.).

G. Provide a pushbutton override on all sensors. If the network controller is in the unoccupied

mode when a pushbutton override button is activated, then the activated heat pump shall be

placed into occupied mode. This does not include the outside air systems. When the pushbutton

override is activated then the heat pump shall be placed into operation for 1 hours (adj.).

H. Control valve shall open before compressor energizes and remain open a minimum 30 secs after

compressor cycles off.

I. The unit's DDC controller shall be programmable and include all points and programming as

described herein.

1.37 GYM SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMPS (HP-16 & 17)

A. Gym is controlled by 2 heat pumps and shall operate in a lead lag fashion or individually to

handle the loads (user selectable). Two sensors are utilized to either average the space tempera-

ture or control individual heat pumps by exposure to adequately address the load conditions.

B. Lead and lag HP’s shall be rotated on a weekly basis.

C. During occupied mode, the heat pump shall operate as required between heating and cooling to

satisfy space thermostat/sensor setpoint /- 1.0 deg f. During compressor operation, geothermal

control valve shall be open. The unit shall automatically change over from heating to cooling.

When space(s) temperature is satisfied, fan/compressor shall be off.

D. HP’s are variable flow, variable speed compressor. Under light load conditions HP’s shall op-

erate a reduced speed to maintain the load. Units controller shall incrementally increase fan

speed and compressor loading to satisfy space temperature setpoint as provide by BAS.

E. Each unit shall operate under the control of a local, stand-alone, microprocessor based DDC


F. Provide DDC controller within the unit cabinet to interface with the building DDC controls sys-


G. Units shall be placed into the occupied/unoccupied mode based upon the user adjustable sched-

ule at the network controller.

H. Space occupancy sensors are installed as part of the space lighting and shall include dual output

for lighting and HVAC. Wiring shall be provided between the sensor HP’s DDC controller pro-

vided by the ATC.

I. When building is in occupied mode and the space is occupied based on room occupancy sensor

or sensors, the heat pumps shall control to maintain space temperature setpoint.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 21

J. When building is in occupied mode and the space is unoccupied based on room occupancy sen-

sor, the associated heat pump shall be off and reset space temperature setpoint to temporary un-

occupied mode.

K. Occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint shall be 3 deg f (adj.) above occupied cooling and

3 deg (adj.) below occupied heating temperature setpoint. After the space is unoccupied for 2

hours the setpoint shall automatically reset to the unoccupied heating and cooling setpoints stat-

ed in the night setback sequences.

L. If the space reaches occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint within the 2 hours, the heat

pump shall return to regular occupied mode until space temperature is satisfied and then return

to temporary unoccupied mode if room remains unoccupied.

M. Outside air is controlled through a minimum damper when one of two heat pumps are on. Out-

side air flow station shall vary the outside air from 500 to 1000 cfm with one unit on and 500 to

2000 cfm with two units on based on CO2 levels.

N. Employ an enthalpy economizer as described above.

O. Speed of relief fan, RF-1 shall vary to maintain a slight positive pressure in the gym. Initially

set at 0.02 in wg. First stage of pressure control shall be to open RF-1 isolation damper to allow

gravity relief of air prior to starting and controlling RF-1. Provide a slight differential offset be-

tween modes.

P. Control valve shall open before compressor energizes and remain open a minimum 30 secs after


Q. Provide a pushbutton override on all sensors. If the network controller is in the unoccupied




R. Control valve shall open before compressor energizes and remain open a minimum 30 secs after


S. The unit's DDC controller shall be programmable and include all points and programming as

described herein.

1.38 SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP AND TERMINAL UNIT OCCUPANCY SENSOR CONTROL

(HP-2, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 30, 31 & 33)







ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 22


the user adjustable schedule at the network controller.

D. If communication is lost between the network controller and the heat pump controller, then the


E. Space occupancy sensors are installed as part of the space lighting and shall include dual output

for lighting and HVAC. Wiring shall be provided between the sensor and the VAV box's DDC

controller provided by the ATC.

F. Outside air VAV box shall operate as described under its respective SOO described elsewhere.

G. When building is in occupied mode and the space is occupied based on room occupancy sen-

sor(s), the heat pump shall control to maintain space temperature setpoint.

H. When building is in occupied mode and the space is unoccupied based on room occupancy sen-

sor, the associated heat pump shall be off and reset space temperature setpoint to temporary un-

occupied mode. Where one unit controls more than one room, all spaces occupancy sensors

must sense no occupancy.

I. Occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint shall be 3 deg f (adj.) above occupied cooling and

3 deg (adj.) Below occupied heating temperature setpoint. After the space is unoccupied for 2


ed in the heat pump sequences.

J. If the space reaches occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint within the 2 hours, the heat



K. Many heat pumps operate with more than one occupancy sensor. If one space is unoccupied

based on room occupancy sensor, the associated heat pump shall ignore the space temperature

sensor in the average space temperature calculation used to determine operation of the unit.

L. Any time a heat pump is required to be engaged in unoccupied mode either by elevated/lowered

space temperature or from an override button, the heat pump loop pumping system must be en-

abled and operate under its control sequence.

M. HP-14 and 33: Units serving more than one space shall be able to have a user selectable option

at the BAS to select which sensor is the controlling sensor for HP operation or shall utilize av-

eraging of the spaces for unit control.

N. Control valve shall open before compressor energizes and remain open a minimum 30 secs after


O. Provide a pushbutton override on all sensors. If the network controller is in the unoccupied






ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 23

P. The unit's DDC controller shall be programmable and include all points and programming as

described herein.

1.39 HP UNITS WITH VARIABLE ZONE DAMPERS (HP-1, 3, 5, 7, 8, 18, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, 27

& 29)






the user adjustable schedule at the network controller and room occupancy sensor(s).

D. Occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint shall be 3 deg f (adj.) above occupied cooling and

3 deg (adj.) below occupied heating temperature setpoint. After the space is unoccupied for 2


ed in the heat pump sequences.

E. If the space reaches occupancy sensor unoccupied mode setpoint within the 2 hours, the heat



F. Variable zone heat pumps operate with more than one occupancy sensor. If one space is unoc-

cupied based on room occupancy sensor, the associated heat pump shall ignore the space tem-

perature sensor in the average space temperature calculation used to determine operation of the

unit.

G. If communication is lost between the network controller and the heat pump controller, then the


H. Each space sensor shall be polled to determine hp unit operation (heating or cooling). Unit shall

operate based on majority polling of the space sensors.

I. Outside air VAV box shall operate as described under its respective SOO described elsewhere.

J. Each space including a zone damper shall have space sensor which either modulates or operates

in two position depending on minimum flow requirements of the HP, the airflow to the space as

required to maintain setpoint between min and max airflow values. Utilize HP leaving air tem-

perature to determine the zone damper operational control for systems heating or cooling status.

K. When space mode matches HP unit operation mode, damper to modulate as necessary to main-

tain space setpoint. If HP unit operation is opposite of space conditions, damper should close to

prevent over cooling/overheating of the space. Refer to below for minimum damper positions

to satisfy minimum HP airflow requirements.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 24

L. Prior to starting the HP, the zone dampers shall be open in the minimum position or position for

satisfying space temperature to ensure minimum flow is met.

M. If space is unoccupied, damper to remain at last position and hp controller to ignore the temper-

ature sensor. Damper may be overridden in unoccupied mode in order to maintain minimum

fan speed if another space is still calling for heating or cooling.

N. Variable speed compressor shall control to maintain discharge air temperature based on unit

heating or cooling mode. Cooling initial discharge air control shall be 57 deg f (adj). Heating

mode shall be maximum as per unit scheduled on drawings.

O. In general, fan speed will be controlled by duct static pressure (locate static pressure sensors

2/3rds downstream of HP) to distribute air to all dampers between minimum and maximum fan

speeds allowed by HP. Initially set duct SP at 0.5” wg. Balancer to establish final values at

both maximum airflow and minimum airflow. These values shall be programmed in as a per-

centage of total and/or actual fan speed to not allow ECM to go below minimum fan speed.

Minimum fan speed is 25 % of nominal unit tonnage. (ie. 10 ton unit is nominal 4000 cfm.

Minimum fan speed is 1000 cfm) As all zones are satisfied, unit shall receive effective set point

and actual space temperature to slow down and turn the unit off. Once HP is off HP shall re-

main off for a period of 5 minutes (adj) or minimum required for anti-short cycle of the unit be-

fore being allowed to be turned back on based on call from space sensor.

P. Control valve shall open before compressor energizes and remain open a minimum 30 secs after


Q. Provide a pushbutton override on all sensors. If the network controller is in the unoccupied




R. The unit's DDC controller shall be programmable and include all points and programming as

described herein.

S. The main largest zone or zones shall have minimum damper positions to prevent fan airflow be-

low that of fan minimum speed as scheduled. If the largest zone can satisfy minimum fan speed

and the other zones are satisfied then the other zones shall be closed. If the largest zone(s) are

not sufficient for minimum fan flow and the other spaces are satisfied, open up the other zones

in same percentage to establish the minimum fan speed. The following HP and associated

dampers identify min/max settings and operation for each HP system as a guide but can be mod-

ified based on field conditions to satisfy space loads and HP operation limits:

T. HP-1:

1. Two zone dampers and DOAS box control.

2. Music rooms ZD1-1 go closed based on temperature control.

3. ZD-1-2 set to min value as scheduled.

4. Unit operates between min/max flows.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 25

U. HP-3:

1. 5 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to max 775 cfm. A minimum of 2 required to be

65% open for minimum flow of 1000 cfm.

2. Or all at 25% open.

3. Flow established by balancer based on static pressure at min setpoint.

V. HP-5:

1. 2 zone dampers with minimum of 0/620 cfm and 0/900 cfm respectively for a minimum

flow of 400 cfm. Proportional airflow of one or the other open.


W. HP-7:



2. Or all at 33% open.


X. HP-8:



2. Flow established by balancer based on static pressure at min setpoint

Y. HP-18:

1. 4 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to max 655 cfm. A minimum of 1required to be


2. Or all at 25% open


Z. HP-21:

1. 3 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to max 700, 710 or 750 cfm per schedule. A

minimum of 1 required to be 100% open for minimum flow of 600 cfm.



AA. HP-22:

1. 3 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to max 750 or 765 cfm as scheduled. A




BB. HP-23:







ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 26

CC. HP-25:




DD. HP-26:

1. 4 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to max 740, 755 or 760 cfm as scheduled. A


2. 1 zone damper at 0/170. Corridor damper to operate between min and max only and be

closed if satisfied.

3. Or all at 45% open except corridor damper.


EE. HP-27:

1. 2 zone dampers with minimum of 0/730 and 0/730 cfm respectively for a minimum flow

of 400 cfm. Proportional airflow of one or the other open.


FF. HP-29:

1. 4 zone dampers with minimum of 0 cfm to 270, 285, 335 or 480 cfm as scheduled. A

minimum of 2 smaller zones required to be 100% open or one largest zone for minimum




1.40 BIPOLAR, NEEDLE POINT AND UVGI

A. UVGI system in each HP shall operate whenever the HP is in operation. Door switches either

on the HP access panels or in a duct mounted access panel shall deactivate the system whenever

the service doors are open to prevent exposure to maintenance personal. Provide additional

power off switch with signage adjacent to the unit light switch to manually deenergize UVGI

system.

B. Bipolar ionization system located in the HP supply duct shall operate whenever the HP is in

operation. BMS to send a permissive to activate the system once flow is proven. BMS to

monitor status and run hours to determine tube replacement. Typically, after 2 years.

C. Needlepoint ionization system located in the VRF cassettes return shall operate whenever the

VRF is in operation. Interlock and power from VRF unit control circuit. BMS to monitor

status through unit dry contacts.

1.41 VRF AND AIR TO WATER HEAT PUMP DRAIN PAN SENSOR AND CONDENSATE

PUMPS:

A. Monitor high level condensate of each VRF unit and initiate an alarm upon high condensate

condition. Unit shuts down on internal controls.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 27

B. Monitor water condensate sensors provided with heat pumps in drain pan to monitor clogged

condensate condition and shut down heat pump upon alarm condition.

C. In units with condensate pumps, wire the pump high limit overflow switch to shut down the

heat pump unit or units if more than one connected to a common condensate pump.

D. Sensors shall shut down unit and alarm to BMS to prevent condensate from over flowing drain

pan.

1.42 INITIAL GEOTHERMAL SYSTEM STARTUP

A. During the initial system startup (at the beginning of each season if building left unoccupied for

long extended period), monitor the geothermal water supply temperature (the water temperature

exiting the well field along with the building winter supply temperature). The circuits to the

well field should be manually opened (individually) and slowly to prevent the geothermal sup-

ply temperature from being less than the internal, building dew point temperature (to prevent

sweating during initial building system startup, when building still has high internal dewpoint).

B. During initial system startup, with building at minimal internal load and well field at initial use,

the capacity of the well field can produce geothermal supply temperatures less than the building

dewpoint. Caution should be utilized during initial system startup.

C. Failure to start the system slowly could result in piping sweating and thus ceiling tile(s) may re-

quire replacement.

1.43 GEOTHERMAL WATER SYSTEM

A. System is configured with 66 wells piped in 7 circuits. After initial startup, system shall remain

energized 24/7 and lead pump shall control based on satisfying the lowest of three system dif-

ferential pressure setpoints. In response to an automatic or manual call for mechanical cool-

ing/heating from the DDC system, the geothermal water bypass valve shall open, and the lead

geothermal water pump shall start.

B. Lead water supply pump shall energize on a lead/standby sequence as outlined below:

1. Lead pump shall be alternated in a lead lag configuration controlled by the BAS

workstation. The lead lag configuration will be selectable to alternate pumps using one of

the following conditions as selected through the Workstation.

a. Weekly

b. Monthly

c. Run Hours

d. Manual

2. The lag pump will be enabled with status confirmed before lead pump is disabled when

lead pump is rotated under normal conditions.

3. Pump Control Sequence

a. The control system shall operate the pump to maintain the system differential

pressure at setpoint of 10 psi (adj) via vfd modulation. Upon a call for pump

operation the pump bypass valve shall first open to establish minimum pump flow



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 28

of 25% (adjustable). Value may be set lower depending on stability of pump and

minimum flow to satisfy 24/7 loads. VFD shall ramp to maintain pressure

differential setting determined by balancer. Upon a drop in differential modulate

bypass valve closed prior to increasing pump speed. Once valve is closed and

pressure differential continues to drop increase pump speed to maintain setpoint.

Follow reverse order on increase in system differential.

b. Pump Failure

1) If the lead pump fails at any time the next pump in rotation will become lead

and an alarm will be received at the delta controls workstation.

2) A pump can also be taken out of service through the controls workstation at

any time. This will take the pump out of the normal lead lag sequence.

C. The DDC system shall monitor temperature sensors located at the supply and return to the

wells.

D. The DDC system shall monitor flow and total system BTU through system flow meter. Flow

values to be used to confirm minimum safe pump operation.

1.44 DOMESTIC WATER RECIRCULATION SYSTEM

A. Domestic water recirculation system shall be started and stopped based on building occupancy

schedule and remain under control of hot water recirculation return temperature. Upon on rise

in return temp 2 deg F above 110 deg F, pump shall be off. Pump shall be off for a minimum of

15 minutes (adj) before it can restart. Upon a drop in recirculation temp to 5 degrees below

setpoint reenergize pump.

B. BAS shall monitor status and run times.

1.45 DOMESTIC WATER HEATING SYSTEM

A. System is configured with two water to water heat pumps that serve two domestic water tanks.

B. Water to water heat pumps shall operate in a lag/lag fashion with dedicated hot water pumps

and be sequenced on to maintain stored domestic water temperature of 140 deg F. Heat pump

supply temperature shall be set to 150 deg F.

C. Upon a call for heat pump to operate (tank temperature drops below 138 deg F), open up

isolation valve and enable lead heat pump and heat pump to operate after proven open. Heat

pump shall operate under internal controls after flow verified to satisfy setpoint. Failure of lead

heat pump or pump shall initiate and alarm and start the lag heat pump. Deactivate heat pump(s)

and close isolation valve(s) once domestic water tank temperature rises 5 deg (adj) above

setpoint.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 29

D. Lead water to water heat pump shall energize on a lead/standby sequence as outlined below:

1. Lead heat pump shall be alternated in a lead lag configuration controlled by the BAS

workstation. The lead lag configuration will be selectable to alternate heat pumps using

one of the following conditions as selected through the Workstation.

a. Weekly

b. Monthly

c. Run Hours

d. Manual

2. The lag heat pump will be enabled with status confirmed before lead heat pump is

disabled when lead pump is rotated under normal conditions.

E. If after 30 minutes (adj) and domestic water storage tank is not at setpoint or is domestic water

storage tank is more than 10 deg F (adj) from setpoint, energize lag heat pump system. BAS

shall lock out the back up electric heating elements located in the storage tanks when heat

pumps are operating. If after 30 minutes (adj) and domestic water tank temperature is not up to

temp with two heat pumps operating, the backup electrical elements may be enabled to operate.

Provide a manual toggle at the BAS to lockout the electric elements from operating.

F. Provide a manual out of service toggle if a heat pump is out of service to allow the electric back

to energize with only one heat pump in operation.

G. Monitor supply and return water temperature on each heat pump.

1.46 DRYER EXHAUST (EF-5)

A. Dryer exhaust shall operate via stand alone pressure switch control. BAS to monitor operation,

runtime. Isolation damper is gravity and shall close when fan is off.

1.47 EMERGENCY GENERATOR

A. BAS shall monitor generator general alarm and report an alarm to the BAS upon detection.

1.48 STANDBY POWER

A. The generator is sized to handle the emergency lighting loads, kitchen freezer, kitchen cooler,

BAS controls, lead geothermal pump and partial building heating.

B. Upon loss in power BAS shall receive a signal from the standby power transfer switch dry

contact to confirm power loss. Connection to dry contact shall be by BAS in coordination with

Division 26.

C. Upon a power failure the BAS shall send a signal to not allow any heat pumps to restart. All

associated units shall be off.

D. If outside temperatures are above 50 deg F (adj), the building heat pumps and VRF systems

shall be off except for IT loads and kitchen cooler and freezer. IT room heat pump shall be



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 30

kept off for 10 minutes until after the generator starts and stabilizes then can be cycled based on

load but are subject to the max amperage allowed.

E. After loss of power is confirmed and generator power restored for 10 minutes (adj), BAS shall

enable lead geothermal pump and pump shall control as per normal sequence.

F. Under power failure the DOAS and Domestic hot water system shall be off. Geothermal pumps

shall be operational to maintain water to kitchen condensers and IT loads.

G. Outside temperature below 50 deg F (adj) the building heat pumps and VRF systems shall

operate under a rolling progression to maintain night setback temperatures to keep building

from freezing. BAS shall limit the number of units in a group that can operate to not over tax

the generator. The limit shall be based on a maximum of nominal amperage that can operate

simultaneously. Generator has 70 kW of capacity available for HP heating operation.

Maximum capacity at 480 volts is 84 amps. Maximum capacity at 208 volt single phase is 336

amps. Heat pumps shall be arranged to not exceed the total amperage available. Only operate

HPs at 460 volts together and HPs at 208 volts together. VRF system is the exception as the

condensing units are 480 and the indoor units 208. Refer to schedule for MCA values

associated with each unit.

H. Once normal power is restored, heat pumps and VRF systems shall be brought on in a staged

pattern to limit the electric demand and operate to the specific occupancy schedule at the time of

power restoration.

I. Manual override of equipment operation shall not be allowed such as to exceed the maximum

tonnage allowed for generator to operate.

1.49 FIRE PUMP TANK

A. Fire pump operation and safety alarms are programmed into the fire alarm system.

B. BAS to monitor hi level, low level of tank and general alarm.

1.50 WELL PUMPS AND TANK

A. BAS to monitor status and run time of each pump as well as the alarms. Alarms to include hi

level, low level, pump failure and general alarm.

1.51 SEPTIC EJECTOR PUMPS AND TANK

A. BAS to monitor status and run time of each pump as well as the alarms. Alarms to include hi

level, low level, pump failure and general alarm.



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 31

1.52 RECIRCULATION PUMPS

A. During occupied periods the two domestic water recirculation pumps shall operate under control

of strap on aquastat. BAS to act as a permissive to only allow pump operation during 1 hour

before occupancy to reestablish system temperature and off at a time set by building facilities to

allow for maintenance.

1.53 RADON EXHAUST

A. Provide a ¾” control conduit through the roof that is capped above and below the roof for the

future addition of a radon fan. There is no control scope of work required for fan operation or

control as the system is a passive system. Conduit is for future fan if required. Seal roof

penetration water tight.

1.54 DASHBOARD

A. Provide one 42” monitor under FFE outside of the admin area on the main level for building

dashboard. BMS shall collect all the data from the meters and present in a dashboard for

building occupants to observe. System shall be web based and enabled to allow information to

be accessed remotely through any web enabled device. Dashboard to update in intervals of 15

minutes. Dashboard shall display the following at minimum:

1. Perspective of the building.

2. Total electricity generated by PV on an hourly basis, daily basis, weekly, monthly,

running basis, point in time basis, yearly basis in graphically format, total Kwh generated

lifetime.

3. Total electricity generated by each or the 12 PV invertors on a hourly basis, daily basis,

weekly, monthly, running basis, point in time basis, yearly basis in graphically format,

total Kwh generated lifetime. This information is available through direct Web download

for the PV manufacturer.

4. Total building electrical generation from utility service.

5. Amount of energy by system type on a panel level of the mechanical, lighting and plug

loads.

6. Graphical representation of daily PV production vs actual utility supply

7. Comparison of total production annually vs consumed annually.

8. Total electricity generated by lighting, receptacle, IT, mechanical, total, misc loads such

as concession and Pump House on a hourly basis, daily basis, weekly, monthly, running

basis, point in time basis, yearly basis in graphically format, total Kwh generated lifetime

Lighting, receptacle, IT, mechanical, total, misc loads such as concession and Pump

House. Some loads may need to be subtracted from shared loads across transformers.

9. 27 Qty of total electrical meter points



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS


230993 - 32

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)




HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 1

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and

specialties for the following:

1. Glycol geothermal water piping.

2. Dual temperature water piping

3. Makeup-water piping.

4. Condensate-drain piping.

5. Air-vent piping.

6. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.

7. Chemical Treatment

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic

piping.

2. Division 23 Section “Ground Loop Heat Pump piping” for geothermal HDPE (PE) piping

specifications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Dual Temperature Water Piping: 125 psig at 250 deg F.

2. Above grade Glycol Geothermal Water Piping: 125 psig at 250 deg F

3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.

4. Condensate-Drain Piping: 100 deg F.

5. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

6. Safety Valve Inlet and Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which

it is attached.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 2


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.

2. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

pressure independent combination automatic flow-control valves.

3. Air control devices.

4. Chemical treatment.

5. Hydronic specialties.

6. Pressure-seal fittings.

B. CTHPB Submittals:

1. Product Data or solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed

statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation

indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at ¼ scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,

supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of

the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion

joints and loops.


2. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD or Revit version

as required by the Owner) version or AutoCAD Version 2018 if not specified.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at

Project site.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty

valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for

preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 3

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve include flowmeter, probes, hoses,

flow charts, and carrying case.



1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe

couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.




D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,

products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME

label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

E. Comply with the current International Mechanical Code.

F. All grooved joint couplings, and fittings, shall be the products of a single manufacturer.

Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

1. All castings used for coupling housings and fittings shall be date stamped for quality

assurance and traceability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



following:

1. Elkhart Products

2. Mueller Streamline

3. Nibco

4. Cambridge-Lee Industries

5. Cerro Flow Products

B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

C. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 4

D. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

E. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze

casting.

2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed

fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, prelubricated

EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and

nuts.

F. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

G. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


the following:

a. Stadler-Viega.

2. Housing: Copper.

3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM.

4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools.

5. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.



following:

1. Wheatland Tube Company

2. NORCA Industrial Company

3. WELDBEND

4. Zekelman Industries

5. U.S. Steel Tubular Products

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article and on the drawings schedule.

C. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article and on the drawings schedule.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article and on the drawings schedule.

E. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article.

F. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised

ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

G. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 5

H. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

I. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the

following:

a. Victaulic Company.

b. Engineer approved equal

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S,

Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or

shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,

locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-

responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved

pipe and fittings.

a. Rigid Type: Housings (12” and down) shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern

bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with

ASME B31.1 and B31.9 upon visual metal-to-metal pad contact with no torque

requirement. Designs that permit spaces at bolt pads or require a torque per written

manufacturer’s installation instructions not permitted.

1) 2” through 8” Sizes: Victaulic Style 107H with Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket

with red color code for water services from -30 deg F to +250 deg F.

b. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are

required. Three (3) flexible couplings may be used in lieu of each flexible

connector at major equipment for vibration attenuation. Couplings shall be placed

in close proximity to the vibrating source per published guidelines.

1) 2” through 8 Sizes: Victaulic Style 177 with Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket

with red color code for water services from -30 deg F to +250 deg F.

4. Requirements for alternate manufacturer than specified:

a. For coupling nuts requiring torqueing, all couplings shall be marked/tagged in a

contrasting color once torqued to the manufacturer’s specified rating. This will

provide visual indication the coupling has been installed according to the

manufacturer’s requirement.

b. A torque wrench shall be accessible on site for use by the

architect/engineer/construction manager to verify nuts have been torqued

according to the manufacturer’s requirements.

J. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in

which they are installed.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company

2. JM Eagle



HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 6

3. National Pipe and Plastics

B. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article.

C. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe;

ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system

manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper

with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working

temperatures and pressures.

H. Grooved Joint Lubricants: Lubricate gasket in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations with a lubricant supplied by the coupling manufacturer that is compatible

with the gasket elastomer and fluid media. Basis of Design: Victaulic Vic-Lube.

I. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

c. Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product

requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice

for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-

Scale Environmental Chambers."


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 7

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


following:

a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

b. IPEX Inc.

c. KBi.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


following:

a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

b. IPEX Inc.

c. KBi.

d. NIBCO INC.

2. MSS SP-107, CPVC union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-cement-

joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.


c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Jomar International Ltd.

e. Matco-Norca, Inc.

f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.


c. Matco-Norca, Inc.


e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 8

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-

joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


following:


b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.


2. Description:

a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


following:

a. Elster Perfection.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.

c. Matco-Norca, Inc.



2. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66

b. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.

c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved

e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

f. 6” Long

2.7 VALVES

A. Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in

Division 230523 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements

specified in Division 230900 Section.

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


following:




HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 9

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

c. Flow Design Inc.

d. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Bronze, ball type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Plug: Resin.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


following:


b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

c. Flow Design Inc.

d. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

6. Seat: PTFE.

7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.


9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.



E. Brass, Y-pattern globe, Balancing Valves:


following:

a. Tour and Andersson

b. Macon

c. Bell and Gossett

2. Body: Brass, globe type.

3. End Connections: Threaded or socket.


5. Handle Style: Hand wheel, with memory stop to retain set position.


7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F

F. Steel, Y-pattern globe, Balancing Valves:


following:

a. Tour and Andersson

b. Macon

c. Bell and Gossett











HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 10

2. Body: steel body, globe pattern

3. End Connections: Flanged.


5. Handle Style: handwheel, with memory stop to retain set position.



G. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:


following:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.


2. Body: Bronze or brass.


4. Seat: Brass.


6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

8. Inlet Strainer: stainless steel, removable without system shutdown.

9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

H. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:


following:

a. Amtrol, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.


2. Body: Bronze or brass.


4. Seat: Brass.


6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

8. Inlet Strainer: stainless steel, removable without system shutdown.

9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating

pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 11

2.8 AIR CONTROL DEVICES


following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

3. Spirotherm

4. Honeywell

5. Callefi

6. Patterson

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2(DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.


7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F (116 deg C).

D. Bladder Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 240 deg F (116

deg C) maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports

installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 1.

2. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain

required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

4. ASTM rated.

5. Provide tank purge valve (service valve). Combination full port ball type isolation valve

and drain valve used to connect the system to the expansion tank. This valve allows the

tank to be drained for easy servicing or tank replacement without having to drain the

system.

E. Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum

working pressure and 275deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged

connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.

4. Size: Match system flow capacity, minimum size shall be same as pipe in which installed.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 12

5. Air separation shall be coalescing type. Vortex and centrifugal type are not acceptable.

2.9 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT


following:

1. J.L.Wingert

2. Neptune

3. The John Wood Company

4. GTP

B. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inchfill

opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill

cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system

pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity shall be 5 gallon.

2. The feeder shell shall be constructed of 10-gauge steel minimum.

3. Tank heads shall be a minimum 10-gauge steel.

4. The feeder shall be rated at 200 psi and 200°f.

5. The tank shall have a wide mouth, 3-1/2” opening so that chemical addition can be

performed without the need of a funnel. The tank shall have a dome bottom out design,

epoxy coating inside and out.

6. The cap shall be constructed of cast iron with an epoxy-coated underside to prevent

corrosion and shall use a ring gasket seal.

7. The feeder shall be provided with legs to elevate the feeder off the floor. The legs shall

have holes to allow mounting by anchor bolts.

2.10 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-stabilizer

additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions.

2.11 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.


B. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for

NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 13


percent free area.


C. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer

maintenance.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.


percent free area.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Glycol Geothermal piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or pressure

seal joints.

B. Glycol Geothermal piping, aboveground at heat pumps, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the

following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; type E, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel

flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; type E, grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and

grooved, mechanical joints.

3. Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

4. If using Schedule 40 steel piping all piping shall be insulated.

C. Dual Temperature Piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:


seal joints.

D. Dual Temperature Piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; type E, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel

flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; type E, grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and

grooved, mechanical joints.

E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:


seal joints.

F. Condensate-Drain Piping: indoor shall be the following:


seal joints.

2. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 14

G. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the

service in which blowdown drain is installed.

H. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

I. Safety Valve Inlet and Outlet Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping

specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings

for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply and return mains, and at supply

and return connections to each piece of equipment.

B. Install balance/flow measuring device at each branch connection to return main feeding more

than one piece of equipment and at each piece of equipment.

C. Install balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal where multiple

units are served by one control valve.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to

the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS


systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate

friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 15

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple

with cap, at low points in piping system mains, branches and elsewhere as required for system

drainage.

M. Pitch horizontal mains up at 1" per 40 ft in direction of flow. Install manual air vents at all high

points where air may collect. If vent is not in accessible location, extend air vent piping to

nearest code acceptable drain location with vent valve located at nearest accessible location to

pipe.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric or concentric reducer fittings. When eccentric fitting is used,

install with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to

the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 230523 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions at final connections to equipment and coils shall

be within 12” of the equipment and coil to allow for service and removal. No piping trim,

specialties, valves, air vents, test ports, etc. shall be located upstream of the final connection

union.

R. Install flanges or grooved joint couplings, in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections

of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. Flanges or grooved couplings at final connections to

equipment and coils shall be within 12” of the equipment and coil to allow for service and

removal. No piping trim, specialties, valves, air vents, test ports, etc. shall be located upstream

of the final connection union.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-

line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown

connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers

smaller than NPS 2.

T. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 16

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

HVAC Piping."

W. Trap each cooling coil and drain pans with trap seal of sufficient depth to prevent conditioned

air from moving through piping. Extend drain piping to approved drain location. Construct trap

with plugged tee for cleanout purposes. Pitch pipe down at 1/4" per one foot for proper

drainage.

X. Install drains throughout systems to permit complete drainage of entire system.

Y. Do not install piping over electrical panelboards, switchgear, switchboards or motor control

centers.

Z. Contractor shall verify existing piping prior to making connections to existing systems. The

contractor shall not assume that pipe labels correctly identify supply and return lines

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for

maximum spacing of supports.

B. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1/2 inch (13 mm).



HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 17







14. NPS 14: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm).

15. NPS 16: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm).

16. NPS 18: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/8 inches (28 mm).

17. NPS 20: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).







F. HDPE and Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's

written instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with

the fewest practical rigid anchor points.

G. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.

H. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and < 12’ above finished floor; shall be provided with

plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall be same throughout the project;

yellow, orange or red.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION





assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 18

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut







G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes

and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service


I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings

according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings. The gasket

style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as

specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer.

Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area

from pipe end to groove. A Victaulic factory trained field representative shall provide on-site

training for contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and

installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically review

the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

K. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting. Pipe air vent discharge to floor drain.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.

Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting. Pipe air vent

discharge to floor drain.

C. Install piping from air separator to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 19

D. Install air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with full-port ball valve; extend

full size to nearest floor drain.

E. Install di-electric fittings where dissimilar metals are joined together.

F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system, in upright position with top of funnel

not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from

main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install

NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size,

full-port, ball valve.

G. Install bladder tanks. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly

charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be line size, reduce at the control valve (if

required), increase immediately after the control valve to line size, and reduce immediately at

the terminal equipment to the connection size. Line size is defined as the branch piping size

indicated on the documents to the equipment.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are

installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according

to Division 230519 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment

needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water

characteristics:

1. pH: 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maximum 100 ppm. Modify this value if closed system

contains glycol.

5. Corrosion Inhibitor:

a. Molybdate: 200 to 300 ppm.

b. Sodium Nitrate Plus Molybdate: 100 to 200 ppm each.

6. Soluble Copper: Maximum 0.20 ppm.

7. Tolyiriazole Copper and Yellow Metal Corrosion Inhibitor: Minimum 10 ppm.

8. Total Suspended Solids: Maximum 10 ppm.

9. Ammonia: Maximum 20 ppm.

10. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maximum 20 ppm.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 20

11. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maximum 1000 organisms/ml.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maximum 100 organisms/ml.

c. Nitrate Reducers: 100 organisms/ml.

d. Sulfate Reducers: Maximum 0 organisms/ml.

e. Iron Bacteria: Maximum 0 organisms/ml.

B. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and

detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a

minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first

year of operation.

D. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations:

1. Geothermal Water Piping: Minimum 20 percent propylene glycol.

2. Dual temperature Piping: Minimum 20 percent propylene glycol.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains

installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's design pressure but not less than 100 psi. Test pressure shall not exceed

maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test.

Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of

specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in

ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 1 hour, examine piping, joints,

and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.


HYDRONIC PIPING


232113 - 21

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

3.10 AIR ELIMINATION

A. The Contractor's attention is specifically directed to the problem of proper air elimination. In

installing water piping systems and all equipment, the Contractor shall carefully plan the actual

installation in such a manner that high points and air pockets be kept to a minimum and that

they are properly vented where they are unavoidable. All air elimination devices called for on

the drawings and in these specifications shall be provided and properly installed. In addition,

this Contractor shall furnish and install all other air elimination devices which may be required

due to job conditions. The liability of the Contractor under the guarantee provisions of the

contract is intended to cover his responsibility for a proper, continuous and automatic air

elimination to assure even and balanced distribution of water to all equipment.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Where indicated in the equipment or commissioning specifications, engage a factory-authorized

service representative, to perform startup service as per functional test sheets and requirements

of Section 019113 – General Commissioning Requirements.

B. Complete installation and startup checks and functional tests according to Section 019113 –

General Commissioning Requirements and manufacturers written instructions.

C. Operational Test: After electrical system has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit

operation. Rectify malfunctions, replace defective parts with new one and repeat the start up

procedure.

D. Verify that equipment is installed and commissioned as per requirements of section 019113 and

manufacturers written instructions/requirements.



GROUND-LOOP HEAT-PUMP PIPING


232113.33 - 1

SECTION 232113.33 - GROUND-LOOP HEAT-PUMP PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping for vertical, direct-buried, ground-loop, heat-pump systems that

operate between 30 and 104 deg F.

B. Concrete vault



pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ground-Loop, Heat-Pump Piping: 160 psig.

2. Concrete vault


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pipe and fittings.

2. Joining method and equipment.

3. Propylene glycol solution.

4. Valves

5. Pressure & Temperature test ports & gauges

B. Evidence of completion of a certified training program offered by the International Ground

Source Heat Pump Association as well as evidence that all technicians on the job site have at-

tended a heat fusion training/retraining school within the past 12 months. Certification proof

shall also be maintained at the job site.

C. Certification letter from pipe and fittings manufacturer, along with a certification document

from the resin supplier, verifying compliance with IGSHPA standards.

D. Logs indicating strata encountered for first bore hole drilled, the bore hole nearest the center of

the loop field, and the bore hole at each corner of the loop field.

E. Detailed pressure test procedure from polyethylene pipe manufacturer with acceptance test

criteria.




232113.33 - 2

F. Loop field installation, flushing and pressure test logs for each zone.

G. As Built Drawings: Provide two (2) dated copies of as-built drawings indicating exact location

of each bore hole and center of each piping main in relation to nearby corner of building.

Drawings shall be neat and presentable.


A. Field quality-control test reports.

1.6 INSTALLATION PERSONNEL AND TRAINING REQUIRED

A. The loop contractor must have a current IGSHPA accreditation having completed an IGSHPA

training course in the fundamentals of design, installation, and operation of geothermal systems,

and having passed the IGSHPA accreditation examination.

B. Ground heat exchanger fabricators must have completed a heat fusion school in which each

participant has performed a heat fusion procedure under direct supervision of an IGSHPA

Association Certified Heat Fusion Technician or DOT certified heat fusion technician. The

fusion technician must be thoroughly familiar with heat fusion procedures, and have had formal

training and testing at an IGSHPA approved heat fusion training session under direct

supervision of an IGSHPA approved Instructor.

C. Certified technicians must attend a retraining school annually. A single failure of a fusion joint

will void the verification, and the technician must be retested to demonstrate satisfactory

performance.

D. Local and State Laws and ordinances as they pertain to buried pipe systems shall be strictly

followed or a variance obtained.

1.7 DESIGN METHODS AND COMPLIANCE

A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect the site from any damage resulting

from the drilling operation. No drilling waste or ground water shall be introduced to any

existing body of water, stream, river, lake, pond, or in any manner which violates local, State

and Federal laws and regulations.

B. Contractor is responsible for obtaining potable water as necessary to perform the work.

C. Local and State laws and ordinances as they pertain to geothermal vertical bore construction

shall be strictly followed.

D. The manufacturer of GSHPA equipment must provide design standards for minimum ground

heat exchanger lengths.




232113.33 - 3

E. The manufacturer's design procedure must follow a recognized methodology such as presented

in:

1. Closed-Loop/Ground-Source Heat Pump Systems: Installation Guide, IGSHPA

Publication, Oklahoma State University.

2. Data Design Manual for Closed-Loop/Ground-Source Heat Pump Systems, ASHRAE.

F. The ground heat exchanger design must be clearly documentable as complying with

manufacturer's standards.

G. Soil thermal values shall be used in calculating loop length.

H. Thermal properties of the soil/rock formation shall be determined by performing a thermal

conductivity (in-situ) test.

1.8 PERMITS

A. All permits, fees, licenses, etc., required for this project shall be obtained by the GLHE

Contractor.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: GLHE Contractor shall submit a written warranty with operation and

maintenance data. Warranty shall provide for repair and/or replacement of pipe and fittings due

to failure in workmanship within the specified warranty period. Warranty period shall be five

(5) years form date of Substantial Completion and shall cover both materials and labor as

required for pipe, fittings, backfilling material, trenching, etc. Note that this warranty shall be

provided in addition to the 50 year pipe and fitting material warranty provided by the

manufacturer. Both the installation warranty and the 50 year pipe manufacturer warranty shall

be transferable.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Centennial Plastics

2. Vylon Pipe

3. Geothermal-Pipe

4. Charter Plastics

5. REHAU

B. PE Pipe: The acceptable pipe and fitting materials for the underground portion of the ground

heat exchanger is polyethylene, minimum SDR 11 (200 psi).

1. All pipe and heat fused materials shall be manufactured from virgin polyethylene

extrusion compound material in accordance with ASTM D-2513, Section 4.1 and 4.2.

Pipe shall be manufactured to outside diameters, wall thickness, and respective tolerances




232113.33 - 4

as specified in ASTM, D-3035 or F-714. Fittings shall be manufactured to diameters,

wall thickness, and respective tolerances as specified in ASTM D-3261 for butt-fusion

fittings, ASTM D-2683 for socket-fusion fittings and ASTM F-1055 for electro-fusion

fittings.

2. The material shall have a Hydrostatic Design Basis of 1600 psi (11.03 MPa) at 73°F

(23°C) per ASTM D-2837. The material shall be listed in PPI TR4 as PE 4710 piping

formulation. The material shall be a high-density polyethylene compound having a mini-

mum cell classification of PE4455754C per ASTM D-3350.

3. Dimensions:

a. Pipe with a diameter of 2 inches (nominal) and smaller shall be manufactured in

accordance with ASTM D-3035 with a maximum dimension ratio of 11 (minimum

wall dimension).

b. Pipe 3 inches (nominal) and larger shall be manufactured in accordance with

ASTM D-3035 or F-714 with a maximum dimension ratio of 11 (minimum wall

dimension).

c. Table of Working Pressure Ratings of water filled pipe at 73.4°F for DR-PR PE

4710 Plastic Pipe. SDR 9 piping indicated to adapt to the existing test wells that

were drilled with SDR9 piping. All new piping to be SRD11 (200 psi).

Dimension Ratio Pressure Rating, psi

9 250

11 200

4. Sufficient information shall be permanently marked on the length of the pipe as defined

by the appropriate ASTM pipe standard.

5. Manufacturer shall supply a notarized document confirming compliance with the above

standards.

C. Fittings:

1. The only acceptable methods for joining buried polyethylene pipe systems are:

a. Heat fusion process

b. Stab-type fittings quality controlled to provide a leak-free union between pipe ends

that is stronger than the pipe itself.

2. Polyethylene pipe shall be heat fused by butt, socket, sidewall or electro-fusion in

accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s procedures.

3. Polyethylene fusion transition fittings with threads must be used to adapt to copper.

4. Polyethylene fusion transition fittings with threads or barbs must be used to adapt to high

strength hose. Barbed fittings utilizing mechanical clamps are not permitted to be

connected directly to polyethylene pipe, with the exception of stab-type fittings as

described above. All mechanical connections must be accessible.

D. The pipe and fittings of the buried system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for ground

source heat pump service. The warranty period shall be 50 years.




232113.33 - 5

2.2 POLYETHYLENE U-BEND ASSEMBLY

A. The polyethylene u-bend assembly shall be manufactured from a polyethylene extrusion grade

material having a minimum cell classification of PE345434C per ASTM D-3350 and shall fully

comply with the ISGHPA standard 1C "Ground Heat Exchanger Materials". The u-bend shall

be factory assembled and pressure tested to 100 psi prior to insertion into the vertical bore. The

u-bend pipe diameter shall be 3/4 inch (19 mm), 1 inch (25.4 mm), 1 ¼ inch (31.8mm) or 1-1/2

inch (38.1 mm) IPS-OD as determined from below:

U-Bend Pipe Diameter Completed Bore Depth

1-1/4 in. (31.8 mm) Polyethylene 250 - 500 ft (76.20 - 152.4 m)

B. U-bend piping shall have factory printed lengths on the sidewall to indicate length of the pipe at

any point. The printing shall read zero on one end and the actual heat exchanger total length on

the other end.

C. U-bend pipe shall be factory assembled, fusing two continuous lengths of pipe to a U-bend

fitting at one end. Manufacturer shall hydrostatically test the assembled U-bend piping at the

greater of 125 psi or 1 ½ times the maximum working pressure for a period of four hours. Pipe

shall be capped on each end prior to shipment.

D. U-type fittings shall be shop fabricated under quality-controlled conditions of the same material

designation. These fittings shall be factory fused to the pipe. No field fusions of pipe installed

within a bore, encapsulated by grout or cement, will be acceptable.

2.3 GEOTHERMAL MANIFOLD

A. This specification designates the requirements for the geothermal manifold including pipe,

fittings and valves.

B. Piping: Shall be constructed of CPChem Performance Driscoplex 5300 Climate Guard™ High

Density Polyethylene DR 15.5 pipe having a cell classification of 345444 with a UV stabilizer

of C. Pipe shall be constructed in an offset, over and under, for supply and return lines. All

joints to be heat fused. The entire piping system to be tested using 100 psi. The main supply

and return pipe to be shipped with cap butt welded to pipe.

C. Fittings: P/T Plugs: Shall be constructed of solid brass and have a dual seal core of Nordel,

good up to 350º F for water. Plugs shall be rated zero leakage from vacuum to 1000 psig and

are capable of receiving a pressure or temperature probe. Butterfly Valve: Shall be constructed

of a cast iron body, 416 stainless steel stem with a lever shut off system. 90º Elbows: Shall be

molded out of high density polyethylene resins in accordance with the requirements of ASTM

3261. Branch and Service Saddles: Shall be molded out of high density polyethylene resins in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM 3261. Refer to drawings for additional details.

2.4 BOREHOLE BACKFILL – THERMALLY ENHANCHED BETONITE GROUT

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Black Hills Bentonite, L.L.C




232113.33 - 6

2. Wyo-Ben, Inc

B. Thermally-enhanced bentonite grout shall be used to seal and backfill each vertical u-bend well

bore of the closed-loop ground heat exchanger to insure proper thermal contact with the earth

and to ensure the environmental integrity of each vertical bore column. The grouting material

shall remain in a plastic state (moldable) throughout the life of the system and shall not generate

heat during the hydration process. No other backfill material shall be accepted.

C. Submittals: Manufacturer's published product submittal information sheets which shall include

mixing instructions, minimum thermal conductivity performance, permeability, percent solids,

grout weight, linear shrinkage potential and unit yield along with verification of the required

listing(s).

D. Quality assurance: Grouting compound (bentonite-based and silica sand additive) shall be

certified and listed by NSF (National Sanitation Foundation International) to ANSI/NSF

Standard 60, "Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects".

E. Product:

1. The thermal conductivity of the grouting compound must be 1.2 Btu/hr-ft-°F or greater as

determined when tested in accordance to ASTM D-5334, “Standard Test Method for

Determination of Thermal Conductivity of Soils and Soft Rock by Thermal Needle Probe

Procedure” per International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (IGSHPA) Standard

2B.1.2.1. The reported thermal conductivity value shall be verified by an independent

company which has a minimum of 5 years experience in measuring thermal conductivity

using this method. A copy of the verification report shall be supplied upon request from

the engineer. The Bentonite-based grouting material shall have a minimum solids content

of 20%.

2. The grout mixture shall also have a maximum permeability rate of less than 8.0 x 10-8

cm/s as determined by using ASTM D-5084, "Measurement of Hydraulic Conductivity of

Saturated Porous Materials using a Flexible Wall Permeameter, Method C - test with

increasing tailwater level", per IGSHPA Standard 2B.1.2.2, with a 5 psi confinement

pressure (to simulate an approximate sample depth of 5 foot). The reported permeability

shall be verified by an independent, lab which has been certified by AMRL (American

Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials, Materials Reference

Laboratory) and validated by the US Army Corps of Engineers to perform ASTM D-

5084 at the time of verification as found on the Internet at

“http://www.wes.army.mil/SL/MTC/ValidatedLabsList.htm” per IGSHPA Standard

2B.1.2.3. A copy of the report shall be supplied upon request from the engineer.

Credentials of the independent laboratory shall also be supplied upon request from the

engineer.

3. The installed grouting material shall be fully set into a putty consistency within a

minimum of 4 hours after being pressure pumped in the vertical bore annulus.

4. Bentonite and thermal enhancement compound shall be pre-manufactured and pre-

packaged prior to delivery to the job site.

F. Backfill below Surface Seal: Natural or manufactured sand specified in Section 312000 "Site

Earthwork."

G. Providing State regulation allows and in the event that a geological formation is encountered

that prevents the grouting material from forming a solid seal, either a 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) or 3/4




232113.33 - 7

inch (19 mm) granular bentonite material may be used through that specific formation zone.

Upon completion of that specific zone, the grout slurry shall continue to be used until reaching

the surface of the vertical bore.

2.5 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION

A. Propylene Glycol: Minimum 99 percent propylene glycol with corrosion inhibitors and

environmental stabilizer additives to be mixed with water to protect the piping circuit and

connected equipment from physical damage from freezing or corrosion.

B. Solution Mixture: Refer to Antifreeze Solution Fill Section (Part 3) of this specification.

C. Quantity: Sufficient solution for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one

year from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Dilution Water: Chloride content shall be less than 25 ppm, sulfate less than 25 ppm, and

hardness less than 100 ppm.

2.6 CONCRETE VAULT

A. Two piece 3000 gallon concrete vault with 30” manway, ladder, manway extension, manhole

cover and H20 rated with 18” of soil cover.

B. Joint seal of butyl rubber mastic conforming to the latest AASHTO specification M-198. Meets

federal specification SS-S-002 (210-A).

C. Field cored holes for piping penetrations.

D. Coated exterior with Bay Oil Epoxy.

E. Reinforcing steel deformed bars conforming to the latest ASTM specification A615.

F. 6” thick concrete sides and bottom with 8” thick top. 4000 psi at 28 days concrete compressive

strength. Each section is monolithic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 BORE HOLES

A. The vertical bores can be advanced by either mud-rotary, air-rotary, air-percussion, or sonic

coring method, whichever is most feasible based on geological conditions.

B. The diameter of the vertical bore shall not be greater than 6 inches (152.4 mm) and shall not be

less than 4.5 inches (114.3 mm). The final diameter shall be determined by the drilling

contractor's available equipment.




232113.33 - 8

C. The completed bore depth shall be 495 ft., with an acceptable deviation of not greater

than +/- 5%. The completed depth shall be determined by the placement of the u-bend pipe. The

distance from the bottom of the u-bend to the surface shall constitute the completed bore depth.

3.2 BETONITE GROUT

A. Each bore hole shall be grouted within three (3) hours of being drilled and within two (2) hours

of insertion of U-bend pipe into the borehole.

B. Thermally enhanced bentonite grouting material shall be mixed according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

C. Grout material shall be pressure pumped through a one (1) inch, one and one-quarter (1-1/4)

inch or a one and one-half (1-1/2) inch inside diameter tremie pipe and placed in the bore

column from the bottom to the top. Grouting process shall conform to the manufacturer's

instructions and "Grouting for Vertical Geothermal Heat Pump Systems -- Engineering Design

and Field Procedures Manual", as published by the IGSHPA, Oklahoma State University

(OSU), 2000. Completed grouted surface shall be placed at ground level to ensure complete fill

of the bore column.

D. Retract the tremie pipe as the bore is filled with grout.

E. Since some settling may occur after initial placement of the grout material, the Drilling

Contractor shall monitor the borehole and continue adding grout as required to ensure complete

bore sealing to grade. Grout shall be allowed to slightly mound at grade to ensure complete

filling of the bore annulus. INSTALLER shall monitor each borehole and continue adding

grout as required for a period of no less than thirty (30) minutes and no longer than three (3)

hours.

F. Inspection:

1. Since there usually is a direct correlation between thermal conductivity and permeability,

only thermal conductivity shall be field inspected. The grouting manufacturer shall

provide testing of site mixed grouting material in accordance to ASTM D-5334 to verify

thermal conductivity. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three, sample analysis

for this project.

2. At a minimum, sampling shall be taken once at the beginning of the project, once at

approximately one-third of completion, and finally at approximately two-thirds of

completion. In the event that the analysis indicates a thermal conductivity value below

the minimum specified value, corrective action shall be taken to increase thermal

conductivity value back to minimum specified requirement. A written report will be

submitted defining corrective action taken.

G. Vault Installation

1. Install tank level and plumb on a 12” thick compacted gravel base.

2. Terminate access manhole flush with finish grade.

3. Seal vault joints and pipe penetrations water tight.

4. Provide sleeve seals at piping penetrations.




232113.33 - 9


A. Install PE piping in boreholes according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM F 645.

1. Clean PE pipe and fittings and make heat-fusion joints according to ASTM D 2657.

Minimize number of joints.

2. All fusion joints and loop lengths shall be checked to verify that no leaks have occurred

due to fusion joining or shipping damage.

B. Prior to installation into the borehole, the u-bend shall be filled with water and pressurized to

100 psi and monitored for five minutes to verify leak free integrity.

C. Join the pipe and fittings using the butt or socket fusion process. NO OTHER PIPE JOINING

METHOD IS ACCEPTABLE. Saddle fused joints are only allowed on the above ground valve

vault pipe headers. Make vertical loop takeoff tee fittings using tees on header piping 1-1/4” and

above. Use bell reduction fittings at all pipe reductions to eliminate trapped air. Use reducing

socket tees when fabricating socket type reducing headers. Allow joints to cool for three (3)

hours before exposure to cold joint testing or pressure testing.

D. Any kinks or sharp bends in the piping are not acceptable for change of directions. Also, only

continuous length pipe is acceptable for change of direction (no butt or socket fusion joints).

Consult pipe manufacturer for minimum bend radius.

E. Care should be taken to make sure the total system pressure, operating plus surge, does not

exceed the pressure rating of a specific DR or Schedule of Pipe.

F. To ensure long-term performance, pipe should be installed strictly in accordance with accepted

engineering design methodology for water source heat pump applications and in accordance

with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. When installed down-hole, as in a vertical loop, ample precautions should be taken to make sure

the ballast used to facilitate the insertion process does not impinge, gouge or cut into the pipe.

H. To facilitate drilling of vertical bore holes, portable slush pits or small trenches shall be used.

All drilling fluid and bentonite residue shall be removed from the site. If trenches are used for

slush pits, they shall be backfilled and compacted.

I. Prior to installation, each vertical pipe loop shall be filled with water and hydrostatically tested

in the field prior to insertion on the vertical bore hole. The duration of the test and acceptance

criteria shall be specified in the pipe manufacturer’s written pressure testing instructions.

Exercise suitable safety precautions during testing, to guard against injury to personnel near

lines being tested, in case of pipe system component or joint failure under pressure. Results of

all tests shall be recorded and supplied to the Owner upon completion of the project.

J. Lateral pies shall be purchased in such lengths and installed in such manner as to minimize the

number of fusion joints required.

K. Lateral piping supply and return lines or bundles shall be separated to minimize thermal

interference between the two. The number of points where supply and return lines cross one

another shall be minimized.




232113.33 - 10

L. Slope lateral piping to provide venting. Slope pipe upward in direction of flow.

M. Open ends of all lateral pipe shall be sealed to prevent the entry of contaminants until final

connections are made.

N. Purge, flush, and pressure test all piping before backfilling boreholes (refer to Adjusting

Cleaning & Air Purging Section of this Specification). Test all piping for compliance with

International Mechanical Code section 1210.10 “Tests”. Coordinate witnessing of testing with

owners rep and commissioning agent.

O. After installation of loop pipe in borehole, fill piping loop with antifreeze solution, and pump

backfill into borehole to discharge at base of borehole.

P. Identification of below grade piping: 1. Each pipe shall be permanently indent marked with the manufacturer’s name, nominal

size, pressure rating, relevant ASTM standards, cell classification number and date of

manufacture. Each fitting shall be identified with the manufacturer’s name, nominal size,

pressure rating, relevant ASTM standards and date of manufacture.

2. Provide underground plastic tape pipe markers. Install tape 6-18 inches below finished

grade, immediately above all horizontal pipe runs.

3. Attach coated 14 GA copper wire along entire length of all underground polyethylene

pipe and terminate in the building mechanical room.

Q. Ground Loop Heat Exchanger Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfilling necessary

to install the required mechanical work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and

backfilling work in the same area. Grade the bottom of the tranches accurately to provide

uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point

along its entire length.

R. All horizontal outdoor piping shall be buried a minimum of 60 inches deep unless shown

otherwise on the plans. If the soil contains sharp rocks, dig the trench 12- inches deeper than

required and install a base of 12-inches of suitable backfill before placing the pipe. Provide

rounded corners at changes of direction and at trench tees.

S. The full length of each pipe section shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed. Keep pipe interior clean

and dry during laying operations. When work is not in progress, plug the ends or close them by

another acceptable method. Do not lay pipe in water and keep water out of trench until joining

is complete. Provide valves, plugs or caps, as required, where pipe ends are left for future

connections.

T. Extend ground loop piping from wells to pipe vault. All piped penetrations to be cored and

pipes sealed with sleeve seals.

U. Extend piping and connect to water-source, ground-loop, heat-pump piping systems at outside

face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building water-source, ground-loop,

heat-pump piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps. Make connections

to building water-source, ground-loop, heat-pump piping systems when those systems are

installed.




232113.33 - 11

V. Deposit suitable granular sand backfill material under the pipe in 6-inch layers and thoroughly

compact. Provide a minimum of 4-inch sand bed or 1/8 of pipe outside diameter, whichever is

greater. Provide tamped granular sand backfill in 6-inch layers to minimum 12-inches above top

of pipe. Be careful not to disturb the pipe. Carry backfilling simultaneously on both sides of

pipe to eliminate the possibility of lateral displacement.

W. After piping is installed, tested, flushed, purged, inspected and approved while still under

pressure, deposit suitable backfill material in layers and thoroughly compact. Ensure that no

sharp rocks come into contact with any pipe walls. Coordinate the laying of the header piping

with all existing new site utilities as well as landscape plans.

X. Landscape work, pavement, flooring, pre-grading and similar exposed finish work that is

disturbed or damaged by excavation shall be repaired and restored to their original condition

and elevation by the Geothermal Loop Heat Exchange Contractor.

Y. Wall sleeves are specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

Z. Mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

AA. Extreme care shall be taken not to crush, cut or otherwise damage the pipe. No field fusions

shall be utilized to repair damaged u-bend pipe.

BB. Retractable weighting devices shall not be utilized. If weighting of the u-bend is required to aid

in the installation, steel or iron bars may be attached at the base of the u-bend pipe to overcome

buoyancy. Any weights must be prepared as to prevent damage to the pipe.

CC. Prior to installation of the pipe into the bore, a temporary 1” to 1 ½ HDPE tremie pipe shall be

attached to the U-bend, so that the discharge end of the tremie is near the base of the u-bend to

ensure complete borehole grouting.

DD. After installation into the bore, both ends of u-bend pipe shall then be taped or capped to

prevent the introduction of soils or other debris. Do not purge or otherwise drain water from

pipe.

3.4 ANTIFREEZE SOLUTION FILL

A. Fill system with required 20% propylene glycol and water to provide 18 deg F freezing

temperature.

B. Test the dilute solution using gas chromatography to verity concentration of propylene glycol,

and forward report to Architect.

3.5 CONNECTIONS





232113.33 - 12

3.6 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND AIR PURGING:

A. The GLHE Contractor shall be responsible for flushing, purging, cleaning, and filling all of the

outside piping. Outside piping is defined as geothermal heat pump loop piping external to the

building and installed as part of this Contract.

B. Flushing, Testing, and Cleaning:

1. Cleanliness: During installation, trash, soil and small animals shall be kept out of the

pipe. Ends of the pipe shall be capped until the pipe is joined to the circuit.

2. Piping Tests: Fill piping 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize

piping. Use potable water only.

3. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times the pipe working-pressure

rating allowing for static pressure of borehole depth.

4. Increase pressure in 50-psigincrements and inspect each joint between increments. Hold

at test pressure for 30 minutes. Slowly increase to next test pressure increment and hold

for 30 minutes. After testing at maximum test pressure, reduce pressure to 30 psig. Hold

for 90 minutes, and measure pressure at 30-minute intervals. Repair leaks and retest until

no leaks exist.

5. Prepare reports of testing activity. Flow rates and pressure drops will be compared to

calculated values to assure that there is no blockage or kinking of any pipe.

C. Air Purging:

1. The hydronic system shall be purged of all air by bleeding air from all high spots and

circulating water through the system for minimum of 48 hours.

2. Prior to backfilling, the complete loop field piping system shall be purged of air and flow

tested to ensure proper water flow in all portions of the heat exchanger. A portable

temporary purging unit shall be utilized and consist of the following: Purge Pump-high

volume and high head; open reservoir, filter assembly with bypass; connecting piping and

connection hoses.

3. Using the purging unit described above, flush and purge each Geothermal Loop Heat

Exchanger zone until free of air, dirt and debris. A minimum velocity of 2- feet/second is

required in all pipe sections to remove the air. The flush and purge water velocity shall

not exceed 7-feet/second. This flushing and purging operation should be conducted with

the water source heat pump piping isolated with shut off valves. Do not flush and purge

through the heat pump units. Coordinate with the building Mechanical Contractor (do not

allow the acid solution used to purge and flush the indoor metal pipe system to the heat

pump units to become mixed with the solution in the GLHE).

4. Utilizing the purging unit, conduct a pressure and flow test on the completed Geothermal

Loop Heat Exchanger to ensure the system is free of blockage. If the flow test indicates

blockage, locate the blockage systematically clamping off loops with a pinch-tool or

using the shut-off valves, remove the blockage, then repurge and conduct the pressure

and flow test again until all portions of the system are flowing. The flow test must be

observed and approved by the Owner.

5. The Geothermal Loop Heat Exchanger inspection report is to be filled out by the

Contractor and is to be witnessed by the Owner.

D. System Startup:

1. Prior to heating and cooling system startup by the building Mechanical Contractor,

ensure all valves are in correct position and GLHE is unblocked and leak free prior to




232113.33 - 13

system startup. The GLHE Contractor shall be present at and coordinate with the building

Mechanical Contractor during building mechanical system startup.



HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Sustainable Design Intent: Comply with project requirements intended to achieve sustainable

design, measured and documented according to the CT High Performance Building Standard

(CTHPS) Mandatory Requirements and minimum required sustainable strategies, as indicated

on the Sustainable Matrix. Refer to Section 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN

REQUIREMENTS for mandatory and targeted strategies.





1.3 SUMMARY


1. Separately coupled, horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.

2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

3. Automatic condensate pump units.

4. Inline ECM Pumps

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated

capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and

accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages.



HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 2


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and



A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that pumps will

withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

Piping and Equipment." Include the following:



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product

Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces

and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe

openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 3

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

1.14 WARRANTY


replace components of pumps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period: minimum 36 months from substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Match centrifugal pump impellers and casings so that at specified operating conditions, the

impeller diameter is not more than 90% of the maximum diameter impeller which can

satisfactorily operate in the casing.

B. Pumps must operate stably without pulsation, vibration or internal recirculation. Pump

operating characteristics at the design point must be such that a variation of 10% in head results

in not more than 15% variation in GPM and does not affect the stability of operation of the

pump.

C. Motor sizes scheduled are minimum for the specific pumps indicated on pump schedules.

When submitting pumps other than those specifically selected, size motors so that when

operating at rated RPM, the pump motor brake horsepower does not exceed the nominal motor

rating despite variations in pumping head or when operated singly or in parallel with other

pumps serving the same system.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 4

2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL

PUMPS


following:


2. Patterson Pump Co.; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Co.

3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,

in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor

shafts mounted vertically.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and

outlet, replaceable bronze or stainless steel wear rings, and flanged connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel; statically and dynamically

balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket with stainless steel parts and

spring. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Axially split spacer coupling.

E. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing with lifting eyebolt and supporting

lugs in motor enclosure.


NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, drip proof.

F. Capacities and Characteristics:


2.3 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


following:


2. Patterson Pump Co.; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Co.

3. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation.










HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 5

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,

end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump

and motor shafts horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage

tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged

connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw.

3. Pump Shaft: Steel or stainless steel, with copper-alloy or bronze shaft sleeve.

4. Seal: mechanical seal with a ceramic seat, carbon washer, Buna-N elastomers, and

stainless steel metal parts.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.

EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;

removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from

ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and

motor. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a steel drip-rim baseplate with integral drip

channels incorporated on each side. Each channel shall include an NPT connection and plug.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.


NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Open, drip proof.

H. Capacities and Characteristics:


2.4 INLINE SELFCONTAINED PUMPS

A. The pumps shall be a wet rotor inline pump, in cast iron construction specifically designed for

quiet operation. Suitable standard operations at 230° F and 175 PSIG working pressure. The

pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.

B. Pump shall be equipped with a water-tight seal to prevent leakage.

C. Pump volute shall be of a cast iron design for heating systems. The connection style on the cast

iron pumps shall be flanged.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 6

D. Motor shall be a synchronous, permanent-magnet (PM) motor and tested with the pump as one

unit. Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable.

E. Each motor shall have an Integrated Variable Frequency Drive tested as one unit by the

manufacturer.

F. Integrated motor protection shall be verified by UL to protect the pump against over/under

voltage, over temperature of motor and/or electronics, over current, locked rotor and dry run (no

load condition).

G. Pump shall have MODBUS or BACnet connections built into the VFD as standard options AS

required by building automation system specified under section 230900 and 230993.

H. Analog inputs, such as 0-10V and 4-20mA, are standard inputs built into the VFD.

I. Pumps shall be UL 778 listed and bear the UL Listed Mark for USA and Canada with on-board

thermal overload protection.

J. Pumps shall be UL 778 listed and bear the UL Listing Mark for USA and Canada with on-board

thermal overload protection.

K. Each pump shall be factory performance tested before shipment.

L. Capacities and Characteristics:


2.5 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS


following:

1. Beckett Corporation.

2. Hartell Pumps Div.; Milton Roy Co.

3. Little Giant Pump Co.

4. Mepco, LLC.

5. Liberty

B. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, safety

overflow switch and automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a

72-inch-minimum, electrical power cord with plug or 3-conductor lead wires for hard wired

application, and 2-high level switch lead wires.

C. Packaged units shall be plenum rated.

D. Capacities and Characteristics:







HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 7

2.6 SEPARATORS FOR MECHANICAL SHAFT SEALS

A. Provide a separate high efficiency stainless steel centrifugal separator with inlet and discharge

shut-off valves in the copper water tubing connections to each of the pumps mechanical shaft

seals.

B. Bolt each separator securely to a steel angle mounting bracket bolted to the pump casing.

C. The separator tubing and valve assembly shall be of copper and have a pressure rating equal or

greater than the pumps.

D. The separator shall be manufactured by the John Crane Company or approved equal specifically

to protect mechanical shaft seals by removing abrasive solids.

2.7 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.

3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers.

4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.

5. Drain plug.

6. Factory-fabricated support.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before

pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 8

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open

drain.

E. Equipment Mounting: Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete inertia equipment

bases. Comply with requirements for seismic and vibration isolation devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases.


install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of concrete base.






6. Install on concrete base.

F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring

hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529

"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor

shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between

motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill

baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in

place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

D. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge side of all pumps.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 9

E. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of inline pumps.

F. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of base mounted pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of all pumps between pump casing

and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or

install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

I. Install check valve and ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

J. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

K. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

L. Install seal separators and isolation valves outside the insulated pump box enclosure.

M. Install all offsets and spool pieces to allow installation of insulated pump box enclosures.

N. Pipe each pump base drain, with Type L copper, to nearest floor drain without causing a

tripping hazard.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE











5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.


HYDRONIC PUMPS


232123 - 10

3.7 COMMISSIONING







operation. Rectify malfunctions, replace defective parts with new one and repeat the startup

procedure.





REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include

pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Filter dryers.

5. Strainers.

6. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and

fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil

traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show

interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.

2. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties,

and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation

difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper

operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.




REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 2

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior

and exterior are clean when installed.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These

items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper

socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

F. Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Socket ends.


REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 3

3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-

long assembly.

4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig.


2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or

angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


B. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.



C. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.



D. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.



REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 4


5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.



8. Manual operator.

F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled

by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene.




G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Superheat: Adjustable.

6. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

7. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.


H. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


6. Equalizer

7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location

with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.

8. End Connections: Socket.

9. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.



I. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



J. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.


REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 5

3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.




K. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm.

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.




L. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and

neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



M. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential

measurement.

6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.



N. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495.

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. End Connections: Socket or threaded.



2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.



REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 6

2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT

A. Suction Lines for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-

temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-

copper fittings with brazed joints.

2. NPS 1-5/8 and Larger: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with brazed joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-

copper fittings with soldered joints.

1. Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if

they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor

suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.

E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do

not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line

pressure at bulb location.





REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 7

G. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe

safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or

at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

I. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an

integral assembly for device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in

the suction line at the compressor.

K. Install flexible connectors at compressors.


A. Route and size refrigerant piping per manufacturers requirements

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.


and service areas.



otherwise.


F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Refer to Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 230993

"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring,

and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and

fittings.


REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 8

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and

specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or

panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical

injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from

compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve

stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply

heat near expansion-valve bulb.

Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between

pipes for insulation installation.

R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and

Tube."

1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper

pipe.

2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

D. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M.


REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 9

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service



A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports

for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper

pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the

pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of

test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount

of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are

achieved.


REFRIGERANT PIPING


232300 - 10

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum

holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating

suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow

rates and pressures are established.



GLYCOL FEED SYSTEMS


232520 - 1

SECTION 232520 - GLYCOL FEED SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Glycol Feed systems and accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories

for each type glycol feed system.

B. Shop Drawings: indicating feed system dimensions and connections. Include wiring diagrams

with power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Pump layout and connections.

D. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other

anchorages.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data for pumps.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that pumps will

withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

B. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of


C. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from

the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."


GLYCOL FEED SYSTEMS


232520 - 2


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product

Requirements."



intended use.


A. Store systems in dry location. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings

during storage.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.8 WARRANTY



period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Glycol Feed System

manufactured by one of the following manufacturers:

1. Neptune Chemical Products.

2. Axiom

3. Wessels Company

4. J.L. Wingert Co.


2.2 GLYCOL FEED SYSTEM

A. General: Provide Glycol Feed System designed to add glycol solution to a closed loop heating

and cooling system. The system shall automatically maintain pressure in the closed loop by


GLYCOL FEED SYSTEMS


232520 - 3

adding glycol to make up for any losses in the system. A pressure switch with adjustable high

and low set points controls the addition of glycol. Provide pressure switch to suite the

application.

B. A pressure gauge shall be mounted in the discharge piping.

C. Glycol make-up pump package shall be fully automatic and autonomous, complete with low

level cut-off and alarm arrangement, valves, strainer, with pressure control, reducing valve and

gauge, translucent polyethylene solution container with lid, magnetic starter, two (2) motors and

controls.

D. Panel – A 115 volt control panel with NEMA 4X enclosure consisting of the following shall be

provided:

1. Hand-Off-Auto selector switch with running light and magnetic starter for feed pump. In

AUTO, the pump is operated by the skid-mounted differential (adjustable) pressure

switch and interlocked to a low level float switch mounted in the side of the tank.

2. Level switch also energizes a low level audible alarm with silence push button for alarm

acknowledgement.

3. Panel shall also be equipped with an 8’ power cord with grounded plug. Panel shall be

mounted to the tank frame and positioned at eye level for ease of operation. Panels

mounted on tank lids or mounted below the tank are unacceptable.

4. All electrical components pressure switch, level switch, and pump) shall be wired in

conduit to control panel. Loose, exposed, unprotected wire is unacceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in to verify actual locations of piping connections before glycol feeder pump

installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to Division 23 Section

"Common Work Results for HVAC."


install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.






B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in Division 03.


GLYCOL FEED SYSTEMS


232520 - 4

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install feeder per manufactures instructions providing with required access for periodic

maintenance of the system and accessories.

B. Independently support connecting piping so weight of piping is not supported by feeder.

C. Provide manual shut-off valves at the connections to the feeder.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE











3.5 DEMONSTRATION


operate and maintain the Glycol Feed System.

3.6 COMMISSIONING







operation. Rectify malfunctions, replace defective parts with new one and repeat the startup

procedure.





ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS


232913 - 1

SECTION 232913 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND ENCLOSED

CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following types:

1. Variable frequency controllers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include dimensions and manufacturer's

technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,

equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Nameplate legends.

c. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.

d. Listed and labeled for series rating of overcurrent protective devices in

combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices in combination controllers.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required

working clearances, and required area above and around enclosed controllers where pipe and

ducts are prohibited. Show enclosed controller layout and relationships between electrical

components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of

support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

E. Field quality-control test reports.




232913 - 2

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

G. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have

been installed and arrange to demonstrate that dip switch settings for motor running overload

protection suit actual motor to be protected.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project

site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and

repairs.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed controllers of a single type through one source from a

single manufacturer.



intended use.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

controllers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent surfaces and

other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances.


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive

substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,

dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable

materials from inside controllers; install electric heating of sufficient wattage to prevent

condensation.




232913 - 3


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical

service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written

permission.

B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full

load without derating, under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Local Site Conditions.

2. Humidity: Less than 90 percent (noncondensing) at 104 deg F.

3. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including

conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and

required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control

circuits to which they connect.

C. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and

characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and

load.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Spare Fuses: Furnish one spare for every five installed, but no fewer than one set of three

of each type and rating.

1.9 WARRANTY


replace components of variable frequency drives and controllers that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.





232913 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS


following:

1. ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary, Model ACH580

2. Yaskawa

3. Emerson, Model Varidyne 2

B. All variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall meet IEE standard 519.

C. All variable frequency drives shall be able to communicate with the Building Management

System (BAS) controls through Bacnet.

D. Description: NEMA ICS 2, pulse-width-modulated, variable frequency controller; listed and

labeled as a complete unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1,

Design B, 3-phase, induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection

used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

F. Isolation Transformer: Match transformer voltage ratings and capacity to system and motor

voltages; and controller, motor, and load characteristics.

G. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage

range.

H. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Input frequency tolerance of 50/60 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.

3. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

4. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.

5. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0 times the base

load current for 3 seconds.

6. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.

7. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

8. Ambient Temperature: Local Site Conditions.

I. Isolated control interface allows controller to follow control signal over an 11:1 speed range.

1. Electrical Signal: 4 to 20 mA at 24 V.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

3. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

4. Deceleration: 2 to minimum of 22 seconds.

5. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.




232913 - 5

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.

2. Under- and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and overcurrent trips.

3. Motor Overload Relay: Adjustable and capable of NEMA 250, Class 10 performance.

4. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at a natural

frequency of the combination.

5. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

6. Loss-of-phase protection.

7. Reverse-phase protection.

8. Short-circuit protection.

9. Motor overtemperature fault.

L. Multiple-Motor Capability: Controller suitable for service to multiple motors and having a

separate overload relay and protection for each controlled motor. Overload relay shall shut off

controller and motors served by it when overload relay is tripped.

M. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of power

after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction. Restarting

during deceleration shall not damage controller, motor, or load.

N. Power-Interruption Protection: Prevents motor from re-energizing after a power interruption

until motor has stopped.

O. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators shall indicate the following conditions:

1. Power on.

2. Run.

3. Overvoltage.

4. Line fault.

5. Overcurrent.

6. External fault.

P. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with manual

speed control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

Q. Indicating Devices: Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in

controller door and connected to indicate controller output current, voltage, and frequency.

R. Electronic Bypass: Provide electronic bypass on units as indicated in the VFD schedule. The

bypass enclosure door and VFD enclosure must be interlocked such that input power is turned

off before either enclosure can be opened. The VFD and Bypass as a package shall have a UL

listed short circuit rating of 100,000 amps and shall be indicated on the data label. A complete

factory wired and tested bypass system consisting of an output contactor and bypass contactor,

and VFD input fuses are required. Bypass designs, which have no VFD only fuses, or that

incorporate fuses common to both the VFD and the bypass will not be accepted. Door

interlocked padlockable circuit breaker that will disconnect all input power from the drive and

all internally mounted options. NOTE, bypass not required when there are redundant pieces of

equipment; i.e. back up pumps, etc.




232913 - 6

S. The Bypass system shall NOT depend on the VFD for bypass operation. The bypass shall be

completely functional in both Hand and Automatic modes even if the VFD has been removed

from the enclosure for repair / replacement.

T. Bypass Controller: NEMA ICS 2, full-voltage, nonreversing reduced voltage enclosed

controller with starting capability in manual-bypass mode. Provide motor overload protection

under both modes of operation with control logic that allows common start-stop capability in

either mode.

U. Bypass Controller shall be solid state reduced voltage starter.

V. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch with lockable handle.

W. Isolating Switch: Non-load-break switch arranged to isolate variable frequency controller and

permit safe troubleshooting and testing, both energized and de-energized, while motor is

operating in bypass mode.

X. Remote Indicating Circuit Terminals: Mode selection, controller status, and controller fault.

Y. EMI / RFI filters. All VFDs shall include EMI/RFI filters. The VFD shall comply with

standard EN 61800-3 for the First Environment, restricted level with up to 100’ of motor cables.

No Exceptions. Certified test lab test reports shall be provided with the submittals.

Z. The VFD shall have 5% equivalent impedance internal reactors to reduce the harmonics to the

power line and to add protection from AC line transients. The 5% equivalent impedance may

be from dual (positive and negative DC bus) reactors, or 5% AC line reactors. VFDs with only

one DC reactor shall add an AC line reactor.

AA. The VFD shall include a coordinated AC transient protection system consisting of 4-120 joule

rated MOV’s (phase to phase and phase to ground), a capacitor clamp, and 5% equivalent

impedance internal reactors.

BB. The VFD shall include a fireman’s override input. Upon receipt of a contact closure from the

fireman’s control station, the VFD shall operate in one of two modes: 1) Operate at a

programmed predetermined fixed speed or operate in a specific fireman’s override PID

algorithm that automatically adjusts motor speed based on override set point and feedback. The

mode shall override all other inputs (analog/digital, serial communication, and all keypad

commands), except customer defined safety run interlock, and force the motor to run in one of

the two modes above. “Override Mode” shall be displayed on the keypad. Upon removal of the

override signal, the VFD shall resume normal operation.

CC. VFD’s shall be coordinated and sized to provide the rated motor amps; indicated on the

reviewed shop drawings; for the equipment served.

DD. Provide variable speed controllers whether indicated or implied in the specifications, schedules,

plans, sequences of operation and flow and control diagrams for all motors >10hp.




232913 - 7

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless

otherwise indicated to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type.

C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factory-

applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with

control circuit open.

D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.

F. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output

contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.

G. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays for Bypass Controllers: Solid-state sensing circuit with

isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase

reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage; with adjustable

response delay.

H. All accessories required for proper operation at the local site ambient conditions.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard white paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosed

controllers before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers for compliance with requirements,

installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.




232913 - 8

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of

supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load;

and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.

B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel

channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with

Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controller, components, variable frequency drives, and control wiring

according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage

Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that

have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Conduit installation requirements are specified in other Division 26 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of conduit, fittings, and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




232913 - 9

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the

following:

1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test

and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of solid-state

controllers.

3. Report results in writing.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration

and Training."

3.10 COMMISSIONING








procedure.





METAL DUCTS


233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL





C. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

3. Section 230700 “HVAC Insulation”.


A. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Comply with all requirements of the International Mechanical Code, latest adopted version.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.


3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. CT High Performance Building Submittals:

1. Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment."

2. Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 2

3. Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."

4. Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.4 -

"Ventilation System Start-up."

5. For adhesives and sealants, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

6. For adhesives and sealants, documentation indicating that products comply with the

testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'

"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources

Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings:


2. Drawings shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic (AutoCAD or Revit version

as required by the Owner) version or AutoCAD Version 2018 if not specified.

3. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

4. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings, and sheet metal shop standards. Edited to

specification and job specific requirements. Sheet metal shop standards shall be

submitted for review prior to the submission of sheet metal shop drawings. Any sheet

metal shop drawings submitted prior to the submission and review of the sheet metal

shop standards shall be returned “not reviewed.”

5. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

6. Shop drawings shall be submitted in 3/8” scale.

7. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts.

8. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

9. Fittings and fitting construction edited to specification and job specific requirements.

10. Reinforcement and spacing.

11. Seam and joint construction.

12. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

13. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

14. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

15. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

16. Schedule indicating ductwork material, service, location (interior, exterior), and sealing

method.

17. Submittals with multiple manufacturers listed for a single product will not be reviewed

shall be returned “not reviewed.”


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 3

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:



c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.


C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural

Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding

Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARDS

A. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible” Latest Edition.

B. Minimum duct gauge shall be 24 for all rigid ductwork.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 4

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-


Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Refer to specification

sections below and the details on the drawings for more information regarding acceptable

elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction.

E. Sheet metal shop duct identification labels/tags shall not be installed on the inside surface of

ductwork or fittings.

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Round and flat oval ductwork shall be pre-fabricated spiral seam round or spiral flat oval by a

listed manufacturer in indicated below.

B. Where round and flat oval ductwork is exposed, ductwork manufacturer shall thoroughly clean

exterior surfaces of all products and provide packaging to protect exterior finish of ductwork.

C. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


following:

a. Lindab Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. SEMCO Incorporated.

D. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of

the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

E. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.






METAL DUCTS


233113 - 5

F. Spiral Seams: Spiral lockseam (smooth) according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2" Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

RL-2, 3, 4, 5, and snaplock seam types RL-6A, 6B, 7, 8 are not acceptable. SMACNA form M

Metallic duct (semi rigid) is not acceptable.

G. Tees and Laterals: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5,"90 Degree Tees and Laterals," 45 degree lateral taps and tees,

(the use of 90 degree taps and fittings are not acceptable) for static-pressure class, applicable


SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

H. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types


Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable


SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Refer to specification

sections below and the details on the drawings for more information regarding acceptable

elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction.

I. Sheet metal shop duct identification labels/tags shall not be installed on the inside surface of

ductwork or fittings.

2.4 FLUSH FLAT SEAM RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class, except use sheet metal

2 gauge numbers heavier than required for classification with normal standing seam

construction.

B. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-


Metal and Flexible." Install ducts with longitudinal seams at lop of ducts.

C. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types


Flexible," Chapter 2, "Rectangular Duct Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable


SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Transverse joints

Thru 18" Flush seam end slip, maximum 96" on centers. Stiffened with

internal vertical stays.

19" thru 30" Flush seam end slip, maximum 48" on centers. Stiffened with



METAL DUCTS


233113 - 6

31" thru 42" Flush seam end slip, maximum 36" on centers. Stiffened with


43" thru 70" Top-angle reinforced standby "S" slip.1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/4

edge. Sides and bottom-bar stiffened full "S" slip 1-1/4 x 3/8"

bar, spaced 36" on centers. Stiffened with internal vertical

stays.

E. Reinforcing: Install vertical stays for interval reinforcement at transverse joints and at 2 foot

intervals along run of duct, as follows:

1. Ducts up to 60 inches wide: Provide 1 vertical stay at mid-point of duct section.

2. Ducts 61 inches to 90 inches wide: Provide 2 vertical stays at third points of duct section.

3. Ducts over 90 inches wide: Provide 3 vertical stays at quarter points of duct section.

4. Vertical Stays: 10 USSG galvanized steel, free of burrs and rough edges, with both ends

bent and fastened to the top and bottom of ducts section.

2.5 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: G60

C. Galvannealed or Mill Phosphatized: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Finished for surfaces indicated to be field painted: galvannealed or mill phosphatized.

D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for

exposed ducts.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in

the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 4

as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for

concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;

galvanized.

1. Where galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate

the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

H. Tie Rods: Tie rod material shall match the duct material. 3/8-inch minimum diameter.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 7

2.6 DUCT LINER

A. Coated Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B,

ASTM 1104 < 3%, and with NAIMA AH124, “Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard.”


following:

a. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Company - Quiet R Rotary Duct Liner

b. CertainTeed – ToughGard T Textile Duct Liner

c. Knauf – Sonic XP Duct Liner with ECOSE Technology

B. Material shall be a Glass fiber coated with a black pigmented fire resistant coating fascia.

Material shall be 1", 1.5" or 2" thick as called out on the drawings and have a 1.5 lbs/ft3 density

minimum. Material shall meet or exceed applicable testing requirements set forth herein and

shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 90. When tested according to ASTM E84,

product shall have a Flame Spread Rating of no more than 25 and Smoke Developed Rating of

no more than 50. Product shall be UL 723 Class 1 product. Material shall be secured to

substrate with adhesive and mechanical fasteners.

C. Absorptive material shall be adhered by 100% covering of a fire retardant adhesive. In

addition, use non-ferrous mechanical fasteners such as welded pins and speed clips, 12" on

center maximum. Attach the pins to substrate with adhesive and screws. The pins shall be cut

off flush, washers shall be used and installation made so that no gaps or loose edges occur in the

material. Apply a brushcoat of adhesive to washers, extending onto material surface a

minimum of 2". Fasteners shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

Article S2.11

D. Absorptive fiberglass material shall have the following minimum sound absorption coefficients

when tested in accordance with ASTM C423 procedures utilizing ASTM E795 mounting

type "A":

Octave Band Center Frequency, Hz.

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC

1" thick 0.15 0.25 0.45 0.68 0.79 0.81 0.55

1.5" thick 0.16 0.36 0.61 0.83 0.90 0.92 0.70

2.0” thick 0.20 0.53 0.79 0.94 0.95 0.97 0.80

Thermal Performance: Type I, Flexible:

1" thick 0.26 Btu x in./h x ft2 x °F at 75 deg F mean temperature, R=4.0

1.5" thick 0.27 Btu x in./h x ft2 x °F at 75 deg F mean temperature, R=6.0

2.0” thick 0.26 Btu x in./h x ft2 x °F at 75 deg F mean temperature, R=8.0

E. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the

interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating.

Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for

use in HVAC systems.

F. Adhesives:

1. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with

ASTM C 916. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 8

G. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CH-10.

2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

H. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive

coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers

of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing downstream that do not receive metal

nosing.

3. Completely seal all cut and factory edges not covered by nosing.

4. Butt transverse joints without gaps, provide metal nosing and coat joint with adhesive.

5. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.

6. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

7. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts.

8. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not

exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

9. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have

either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge

facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.

b. Intervals of lined duct preceded by unlined duct.

c. Upstream edges of all transverse joints and edges of all upstream transverse joints

between butted edges of lining.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to dampers, turning vane assemblies, or

other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are

optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight

seal.

2. Tape Width: 6 inches.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 9

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch

wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized steel rods, washers and nuts.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." Minimum threaded rod shall be 3/8”.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 10

C. Wire, steel cables and cable clutches are not acceptable for hanging ductwork.

D. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct

materials and of appropriate length.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Electrogalvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

F. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and 12’ or less above finished floor; shall be provided

with plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall be same throughout the

project; yellow, orange or red.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

indicated on the Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 11

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated, smoke rated interior partitions and exterior walls, seal

penetration with fire rated sealant.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." using

“Advance Level” protection requirements.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ALL (NON-EXTERNALLY INSULATED) EXPOSED

DUCTWORK/FITTINGS

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. For acoustically lined ductwork, trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and

uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

F. Wire, steel cables and cable clutches are not acceptable for hanging ductwork.

G. Spiral seams shall align when round spiral seam ductwork sections are joined.

H. Sheet metal shop duct identification labels/tags shall be removed. Sheet metal shop duct

identification labels/tags shall not be installed on the inside surface of ductwork or fittings.

I. Provide flush seam ductwork for all ductwork where un-insulated and exposed in finished

spaces or where required to maintain clearances.

J. Non-acoustically lined ductwork shall be internally sealed.

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN

HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and

sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 12

B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals

of 20 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, and as indicated on

Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom

of duct.

C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and


3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal all duct seams and joints to comply with ASHRAE 90.1-2013 6.4.4.2.1 (unless otherwise

noted) which is more stringent than SMACNA requirements. All duct types shall be sealed at a

minimum seal class per the table below:

Duct location

Duct Type

Supply Exhaust Return

≤2 in.wc >2” in.wc

Outdoors A A A A

Unconditioned

Space A A A A

Conditioned Space

(includes return air

plenums)

A A A A


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." Refer to specification sections and drawings for all

acceptable hanging and support methods.

B. Building Attachments: Stud wedge type expansion, female wedge type expansion or structural-

steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints or ductwork hangers.



C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 12inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Wire, steel cables and cable clutches are not acceptable for hanging ductwork.

F. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 13

G. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

H. All hanger rod and channel ends; exposed and < 12’ above finished floor; shall be provided with

plastic caps and plastic channel safety end caps. Color shall be same throughout the project;

yellow, orange or red.

3.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic

forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint

Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." and ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and

seismic loads.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to

structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:


anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling.

Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during

drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications

conduit, and gas lines.







5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for

applications exposed to weather.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 14

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts and plenums that are visible through registers and grilles and that

do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting"

and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Test the following systems in accordance with the methods outlined in SMACNA's

"HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 90 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

b. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg and less: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 90 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

2. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

3. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

4. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

5. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Following duct cleaning indicated in the sections below Under “DUCT CLEANING”:

a. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

b. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and

Restoration of HVAC Systems."

1) Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter

media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 15

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with

Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal and external surfaces and components including mixing box,

coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 16

3.11 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC."

3.12 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with G90 galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated on the Duct

Material Schedule on the drawings.

B. Static Pressure Classes:

1. Refer to Duct Pressure Class schedule on drawings for duct pressure and leakage class

requirements.

C. Liner:

1. Install acoustical liner as indicated on drawings, as noted, or specified elsewhere.

2. Minimum of 20’ upstream and downstream of all fans, air handling units, heat pumps,

DOAS units, etc. except those serving, kitchens, showers, outside air plenums, outside air

ducts and dishwasher room exhaust ducts.

3. Minimum 10’ downstream of all VAV boxes.

4. In all supply and return ductwork run outs up to RGD in classrooms

5. In all transfer ducts.

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

2. PVC-Coated Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

3. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows" and the requirements

indicated in specification section 233300 Air Duct Accessories. Single wall vanes

are not acceptable. RE 2 is only acceptable where space does not permit the use of

radius type RE 1 elbows.

c. Elbow types RE 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are not acceptable.

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-


METAL DUCTS


233113 - 17

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or welded.

d. Adjustable elbows are not acceptable.

e. Elbows for exposed ductwork, elbows shall be segmented for all sizes to match the

appearance of the spiral ductwork.

F. Branch Configuration:


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch:

1) 45-degree entry with clinch lock.

2) Self-adhesive duct takeoffs are not acceptable.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch:

1) Bellmouth

2) Conical.

3) Self-adhesive/”high efficiency” duct takeoffs are not acceptable.

4) Rectangular 45-degree entry with clinch lock with transition to round

attached.

5) Transitioning rectangular to round tap with and without integral volume

dampers and gasket are not acceptable.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing ducts only.

a. 45-degree lateral fitting.

b. 90 degree taps and fittings are not acceptable.

G. Offset, Transition and Obstruction Configuration:


Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-7, "Offsets and Transitions and Figure 4-8 “Obstructions”

a. Offsets type 1 is not acceptable.

b. All offsets shall be use radius elbows; mitered elbow offsets are not acceptable.

c. Concentric transitions shall be limited to 40°. Angle may need to be greater based

on job conditions. Each instance shall be reviewed.

d. Eccentric transitions shall be limited to 20°. Angle may need to be greater based on

job conditions. Each instance shall be reviewed.

e. Obstruction Figure D is not acceptable; Figure B shall be utilized as space allows.

If space does not allow radius elbow offsets, each instance shall be reviewed.

3.13 COMMISSIONING







METAL DUCTS


233113 - 18



procedure.





AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES


233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Fire Damper

4. Smoke dampers.

5. Flange connectors.

6. Turning vanes.

7. Remote damper operators.

8. Duct-mounted access doors.

9. Flexible connectors.

10. Flexible ducts.

11. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted smoke

detectors.


A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control-damper installations.

d. Smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and

remote damper operators.

e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.




233300 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted

access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and





1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

1.7 WARRANTY



1. Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" latest

edition for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,

stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with International Mechanical Code

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" latest

edition for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks,

stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.




233300 - 3

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: G60

3. Finished for surfaces indicated to be field painted: galvannealed.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2

finish for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for

concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Material shall match components, minimum 3/8-inch.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. Nailor Industries Inc.

3. Pottorff.

4. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 1000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.063-inch thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically

attached and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch thick aluminum sheet

with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Aluminum.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.








233300 - 4

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

3. Electric actuators.

4. Chain pulls.

5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Material: Aluminum.

7. Screen Type: Insect.

8. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Single Blade Dampers. Maximum width of single blade shall be 14”, use opposed blade damper

for height exceeding 14”. Pre-manufactured dampers shall be part of an assembly complete with

damper, frame, axle and bearings. The damper frame shall be installed internal to the duct and

fastened with the appropriate hardware. The installation shall not interfere with the operation of

the damper blade(s).


following:

Rectangular Air Balance AC-111

Greenheck MBD-10

Ruskin MD25

Round Air Balance AC-112

Greenheck MBDR50

Ruskin MDRS25

C. Multiple Blade Dampers. Opposed blade damper shall be used where duct height exceeds 14”.

Approved products for pre-manufactured devices are as follows:

Opposed Blade Air Balance AC-2

Greenheck MBD-15

Ruskin MD35OB

D. Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: Except for outdoor air

1. Linkage outside airstream.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

3. Frames:

a. Hat shaped.

b. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.

c. Mitered and welded corners.

d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

b. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

c. Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 0.064 inch thick.




233300 - 5

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

6. Bearings:

a. Zero leak bearings at both ends of operating shaft and positive locking quadrants.

b. Dampers in ducts shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at

both ends of operating shaft.

7. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

9. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without

vibration.

1) Locking quadrants shall be similar to Rossi Everlock, Windgate SURE-LOC

HD, or Elgen.

b. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-

plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

c. Include standoffs for insulated ductwork.

E. Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: For outdoor air


following:

a. McGill AirFlow LLC.

b. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

c. Ruskin Company.

d. Linkage outside airstream.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

3. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for

attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

b. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.

c. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

6. Bearings:

a. Zero leak bearings at both ends of operating shaft and positive locking quadrants.

b. Dampers in ducts shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at

both ends of operating shaft.

7. Jamb Seals: Cambered aluminum.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

9. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without

vibration.

1) Locking quadrants shall be similar to Rossi Everlock, Windgate SURE-LOC

HD, or Elgen.

b. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-

plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

c. Include standoffs for insulated ductwork.

F. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.




233300 - 6

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

G. Damper Hardware:

1. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

H. All dampers shall be furnished with an elevated platform/standoff for insulated duct mounting.

I. Provide dampers in all branch ducts and duct splits whether indicated or not on the drawings.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:



3. Ruskin Company DIBDX, IBDT, DIBDXGA

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where

blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel;

with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.060-inch thick and of length to suit application. Sleeve thickness

shall not be less than the gauge of the connecting duct.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must

comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as necessary for proper installation.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165°F rated, fusible links.

K. Grille Access Fire Dampers shall be provided where sidewall grilles are mounted to a fire rated

wall.

L. Provide dampers; as required by all local and state codes; in ducts whether indicated or not on

the drawings.







233300 - 7

2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS


following:



3. Ruskin Company. Model SD60

B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel;

with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In

place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade

connectors.

E. Leakage: Class I.

F. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

G. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.060-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall

or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking. Sleeve thickness shall not be less

than the gauge of the connecting duct.

H. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action as indicated in operational sequences.

I. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load


2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control

for HVAC."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear

trains.

4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.

Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or

adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating

of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed

to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal

operation at minus 40 deg F.

6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running

torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz or 24 volts coordinated with ATC

contractor.

8. All actuators shall be furnished with normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC)

contacts.




233300 - 8

J. Grille Access Smoke dampers shall be provided where sidewall grilles are mounted to a smoke

rated wall.

K. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary end switches for signaling.

2. Auxiliary position indicator switched for signaling when installed as part of a smoke

control/evacuation system.

3. Test and reset switches, remote mounted.

L. Provide dampers; as required by all local and state codes; in ducts whether indicated or not on

the drawings.

2.7 FLANGE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and

components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.8 TURNING VANES


following:


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufacturers Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel;

support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows"

unless otherwise noted.

D. Vane Construction: Turning vanes shall be double wall construction of minimum 24 gauge

galvanized metal for 4 1/2” radius vanes and minimum 26 gauge galvanized metal for 2” radius

vanes. Each vane shall be securely riveted or welded to minimum 22 gauge runner or directly to

duct.




233300 - 9

E. Turning vanes shall have 2" inside radius spaced 2-1/8" apart through 24" wide duct. Vanes in

elbows larger than 24" shall have a 4 1/2" radius and be spaced 3 1/4" apart.

F. Vanes shall be installed in sections to reduce unsupported length for duct depths exceeding 60".

2.9 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS


following:

1. Metropolitan Air

2. Young Regulator

3. DuroDyne

B. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.

C. Tubing: Brass.

D. Cable: Stainless steel.

E. Cable operated dampers (COD) shall be provided where indicated on plans, and/or where

required due to damper location above/behind finished construction, where access to damper

would require access door in finished construction.

F. Provide cable operated dampers in branch duct serving diffusers in inaccessible ceiling

locations whether indicated or not on the drawings.

G. Cable shall terminate within the face of each diffuser/register/grille. Damper shall be adjustable

through the face of the diffuser/register/grille with standard Philips head tool.

H. Furnish all required duct penetration seal plates, gaskets, bearings, retainers, and cable to duct

mounting clamps.

I. Cable lengths shall be coordinated to allow damper to be placed at the branch duct take-off

immediately off the main. Dampers shall be located as far as possible from the terminal

outlet/diffuser.

2.10 DUCT AND PLENUM MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS (0.5-2.0 in w.g.)


following:

1. Acudor

2. Buckley

3. Ruskin

4. Ventfabrics Incorporated




233300 - 10

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct" unless otherwise noted.

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge.

d. Latches: similar to Ventfabrics, Inc. No. 100 for small doors and No. 310 where

physical access is possible. Window latch/sash type hardware is specifically

prohibited. Use multiple latches (minimum 4) where the door swing for a hinged

door is restricted by the hung ceiling or some other obstruction.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less up to 12 Inches: Two hinges and one latch.

b. Access Doors up to 20 Inches: Two hinges and two latches.

c. Access Doors up to 24 Inches: Three hinges and two latches with outside and

inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger than 24 Inches: Three hinges and two latches with outside

and inside handles.

4. Access doors shall be rated to maintain the fire/smoke rating of the equipment/duct in


2.11 DUCT AND PLENUM MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS (3.0 in w.g.)


following:

1. Acudor

2. Buckley

3. Ruskin

4. Ventfabrics Incorporated

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct" unless otherwise noted.

1. Door:



pressure class.









a. Access Doors Less up to 12 Inches: Two hinges and one latch.




233300 - 11

b. Access Doors up to 20 Inches: Two hinges and three latches.

c. Access Doors up to 24 Inches: Three hinges and four latches with outside and

inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger than 24 Inches: Three hinges and four latches with outside

and inside handles.



2.12 DUCT AND PLENUM MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS (4.0-10 in w.g.)


following:

1. Nailor

2. Arrow

3. Air Balance

B. Duct and Plenum Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors

and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct" unless otherwise noted.

1. Door:



pressure class.









a. Access Doors Less up to 12 Inches: Two hinges and three latches.

b. Access Doors up to 20 Inches: Three hinges and four latches.

c. Access Doors up to 24 Inches: Three hinges and six latches with outside and

inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger than 24 Inches: Four hinges and six latches with outside and

inside handles.



2.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:


2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Ventfabrics, Inc.




233300 - 12

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to 2

strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick

aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.


F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.




G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.




2.14 FLEXIBLE DUCTS


following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Type 3M

2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. F296

3. Buckley Type 3M

4. Thermaflex M-KC

5. QuietFlex HPD Flexduct

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by

helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 5.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

4. Flame/Smoke Spread: 25/50.

5. R-value=6.0 minimum unless otherwise noted.

C. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Stainless steel strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.




233300 - 13

2.15 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.


following:

a. Ventlok #699

b. Or approved equal

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in

aluminum ducts.

C. Install motorized dampers at the discharge of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible

to the exhaust outlet unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts whether indicated or not. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct

liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing

at hat channel. Install damper in acoustically lined ducts in such a manner to avoid damage to

liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Provide volume dampers in each branch duct serving all inlets and outlets whether indicated or

not.

G. Install volume damper as close to main as possible, maximum 2 duct widths from branch

takeoff.

H. Install ribbon tag tied on to air control device for the purpose of visibly identifying control

device locations.

I. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated and as required.




233300 - 14

J. Install smoke dampers according to UL listing.

K. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

6. Adjacent to smoke dampers. Access doors for access to smoke dampers shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

9. Control devices requiring inspection.

10. Elsewhere as indicated.

L. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

M. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 12 by 12 inches

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 12 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 20 by 16 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 24 by 24 inches.

5. Body Access: 24 by 24 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 24 by 24 inches.

N. Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

O. Locate all duct balancing dampers above accessible ceilings, or provide cable operated dampers.

P. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

Q. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with

loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

R. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Flexible duct sections shall not exceed 4'-0" fully extended.

B. Flexible ductwork shall not be used for offsets or elbows.




233300 - 15

C. Joints shall be made with a minimum 2" overlap lined with mastic and sealed with metal

clamps.



following:

a. 3M Scotch Seal EC800 mastic

b. Ductmate – 5511M Sealant

c. RCD - #7 Mastic

D. Flexible ductwork shall only be used for branch duct to diffuser connections when indicated as

an acceptable connector on the mechanical drawing details.

E. Connections from branch duct to diffuser necks shall be rigid sheet metal unless otherwise

noted on the drawing details.

F. Flexible ductwork shall be supported in accordance with SMACNA Figure 3-10 and 3-11

“Flexible Duct Supports”. A minimum of two (2) 1” wide metal straps shall be used. Wire

hanging is not acceptable.

3.3 TEST CONNECTIONS

A. On the discharge duct from each air handling unit downstream at least 5'-0" from unit if duct is

accessible, or closer to unit if necessary, install a #699 Ventlock instrument test hold device for

balancing and testing of system.

3.4 ACCESS DOORS IN WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Furnish access doors complying with the specified requirements in Access Doors and Panels.

B. At each control and balancing damper in ductwork, volume box, and at each fire damper when

located above ceiling or inside the wall not accessible by removal of grille or from the airshafts,

furnish an access door for installation by the general contractor. Access doors shall be 18" x

18"(minimum) unless otherwise indicated on plans. In plenum ceilings, provide felt between the

door and frame to make an air tight seal.

C. All access panel locations shall be shown on the Coordination Drawings.

D. Access doors shall be rated to maintain the fire/smoke rating of the wall/ceiling/construction in



A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.





233300 - 16

3. Operate smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.



HVAC POWER VENTILATORS


233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.

2. In-line centrifugal fans.

3. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.



characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



connection.





233423 - 2

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with



1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators for



A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the

items involved:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.


4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.




B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.




233423 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY



period.

1. Warranty Period: minimum 18 months from substantial.

2. Refer to specification section 23000 “General Provisions” for additional warranty

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS


following:


2. Loren Cook Company.

3. Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains and grease collector. Upblast kitchen exhaust fans shall be UL

762 listed.

2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

4. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

E. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass

insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof

opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange

2. Overall Height 12 inches

3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation.

4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.







233423 - 4

2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the

following:



3. Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges,

and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on

outside of fan housing.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Accessories:

1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.

2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

3. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard

for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.

2.3 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR

A. Motor enclosures: Open type

B. Motor to be a DC electronic commutation type motor (ECM) specifically designed for fan

applications. AC induction type motors are not acceptable.

C. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the fan load and

pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase.

D. Internal motor circuitry to convert AC power supplied to the fan to DC power to operate the

motor.

E. Motor shall be speed controllable down to 20% of full speed (80% turndown). Speed shall be

controlled by either a potentiometer dial mounted at the motor or by a 0-10 VDC signal.

F. Motor shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,

"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.







233423 - 5

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of

Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using scheduled vibration isolators. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are

specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and

Equipment."

C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Section 077200

"Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and scheduled vibration

isolators. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."









233423 - 6


1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"

for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

C. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC power ventilators.

Refer to section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



AIR TERMINAL UNITS


233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished

specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

1. Air terminal units.

2. Liners and adhesives.


B. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and




connection.


3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:


2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.

2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.


AIR TERMINAL UNITS


233600 - 2




B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

1.5 WARRANTY


replace components of air terminal units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS


following:

1. Environmental Technologies, Inc.


3. Price Industries.

4. Titus.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a

protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch-thick, coated, antimicrobial foil faced

fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071 and ASTM 1104 < 3%,, and

having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of

50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84. No non

coated fiberglass acoustical lining allowed.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

4. Access Doors: Provide removable panel for access with latches on the bottom of the

terminal box for interior inspection with airtight gasket.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.






AIR TERMINAL UNITS


233600 - 3



E. Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in

Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

F. VAV manufacturer to provide airflow transducer, damper, 120 volt service switch and

minimum 40 vA power transformer for controls.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Hot dipped galvanized, all-thread rods and nuts.

C. Steel cables and cable clutches are not acceptable for hanging Terminal Air Units.

D. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for

units with aluminum casings.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows and ARI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and

maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."


AIR TERMINAL UNITS


233600 - 4

B. Building Attachments: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and


1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for terminal units or seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

E. Steel cables and cable clutches are not acceptable for hanging Terminal Air Units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

B. Make connections to air terminal units with rigid ductwork.

C. Connect air terminal unit to main supply duct with a duct matching the inlet size of the terminal

box unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.



1. Contractor to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections, and to assist in testing.


1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.



3. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



AIR TERMINAL UNITS


233600 - 5

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Controls contractor, balancer and mechanical contractor to perform startup service.


2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES


233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square diffusers.

2. Perforated grilles and diffusers.

3. Louver face grilles and diffusers.

4. Linear bar grilles and diffusers.

5. Linear slot diffusers.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, unique number identifier, and accessories furnished.

3. Register, grille, and diffuser layout: Submit floor plans with all diffusers, grilles, registers

and air terminal devices indicated, and tagged with the unique number identifier indicated

in the submitted Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule mentioned above. Indicate air

patterns for all air terminal devices, baffles, pattern controllers, and vanes.

4. This layout shall be used by the air balance contractor in their balance report. Balance

report notations and register, grille, and diffuser tags shall be coordinated with these

plans.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied standard

or custom color finishes for selection by Architect.




233713 - 2


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:


2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.


4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,


5. Duct access panels.

B. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 WARRANTY



1. Warranty Period: minimum 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:


following:

a. Nailor Industries Inc.

b. Price Industries.

c. Krueger.

d. Titus.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.


4. Finish: custom color as selected by Architect.

5. Rectangular and Square Face Size: 24 by 24 inches and 12 by 12 inches unless otherwise

noted on schedule.

6. Face Style: Cone style and Plaque style as indicated on schedule.

7. Mounting: Concealed and T-bar.

8. Pattern: Fixed.

9. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.

b. Safety chain.

c. Sectorizing baffles.

d. Plaster frames.







233713 - 3

B. Perforated Grilles and Diffusers:


following:



c. Krueger.

d. Titus.


3. Material: aluminum.


5. Face Size: 24 by 24 inchesand 12 by 12 inches unless otherwise noted on schedule.

6. Face Style: Flush.

7. Mounting: Concealed and T-bar.

8. Accessories:

a. Equalizing grid.

b. Safety chain.

c. Sectorizing baffles.

d. Plaster frames.

C. Louver Face Grilles and Diffusers:


following:



c. Krueger.




5. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches and 12 by 12 inches

6. Mounting: Concealed and Lay-in.

7. Accessories:

a. Square to round neck adaptor.

b. Equalizing grid.

c. Safety chain.

d. Sectorizing baffles.

e. Plaster frames.

2.2 LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS

A. Linear Bar Grilles and Diffusers:


following:



c. Krueger.

d. Titus.
















233713 - 4

5. Mounting: Concealed bracket, Spring clip and Lay-in for floor applications. Provide

concealed plaster frame for mounting in sheetrock sidewall applications.

B. Linear Slot Diffusers:


following:



c. Krueger.

d. Titus.


3. Material - Shell: Aluminum.

4. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.

5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.

6. Finish - custom color as selected by Architect.

7. Mounting: Concealed and Lay-in for tiled ceiling grid applications. Provide concealed

plaster frame for mounting in sheetrock ceiling and sidewall applications.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,

"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume,

noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated,

as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of

panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for

a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.







233713 - 5

D. Provide supplemental supports for all registers, grilles, diffusers as required for concealed

mounting. Surface screws/attachments are not acceptable.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns on the drawings or as

directed in the shop drawings, before starting air balancing.

B. Adjust patterns for all the register, grille and diffuser baffles, pattern controllers, and vanes of

adjustable outlets to those indicated on the drawings or in the registers, grilles and diffusers

shop drawing for proper distribution without drafts.



HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS


233723 - 1

SECTION 233723 - HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Louvered-penthouse ventilators.


A. Delegated Design: Design ventilators, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria

indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Ventilators shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent

deformation of ventilator components, noise or metal fatigue caused by ventilator blade rattle or

flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to

act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward

or outward.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

connections, or other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For louvered-penthouse ventilators specified

to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate

AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, ventilator

attachments to curbs, and curb attachments to roof structure.

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water

intrusion.




233723 - 2

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of

the items involved:

1. Structural members to which roof curbs and ventilators will be attached.

2. Sizes and locations of roof openings.




1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming or as

otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel unless

otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors made

from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain without failure a load equal to 4

times the loads imposed for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined

by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.




233723 - 3

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark

units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances

made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter

sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and

secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

2.3 LOUVERED-PENTHOUSE VENTILATORS


following:

1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corporation.

2. Aerovent.



B. Construction: All-welded assembly with 4-inch-deep louvers, mitered corners, and aluminum

sheet roof.

C. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Extruded aluminum, of thickness required

to comply with structural performance requirements, but not less than 0.080 inch for frames and

0.080 inch for blades.

1. AMCA Seal: Mark units with the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with

fully recessed mullions at corners.

D. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid

fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to fit

roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 16 inches.

E. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.

F. Aluminum clear anodized finish








233723 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

D. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.

Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during installation.

E. Label gravity ventilators according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification

for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying

a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry,

or dissimilar metals.

G. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no

evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the

factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.



ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS


234300 - 1

SECTION 234300 – ELECTRONIC AIR CLEANERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ultraviolet Germicidal Irradiation (UVGI)

2. Bio Polar Ionization

3. Filter gages.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions; operating

characteristics; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final

pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished

specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Submittals:

1. Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment."

C. Shop Drawings: For each electronic air cleaner. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and


1. Show filter assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.

2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and

anchorages.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and housing to include in emergency,





234300 - 2




1. Provide one complete set(s) of prefilters for each filter bank.

2. Provide one complete replacement set of UVC lamps per unit.

3. Provide one complete set of replacement bio polar tubes per each unit.




B. UL 867-2013 Ozone Standard for Electrostatic Air Cleaners including ozone chamber test

required as of December 21, 2007.

C. IP66 Enclosures

D. UL 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment.

E. UL 2043 Standard for Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and

Their Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces.

F. OPA 2807-10, OPA 2808-10

G. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air

Quality"; Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and

Startup."

2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and with ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for

methods of testing and rating air-filter units.

H. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

I. Comply with ARI 850.

J. Comply with UL 867.

1.8 WARRANTY



period.

1. Warranty Period: minimum 18 months from substantial completion for UVGI.

Additional lifetime warranty on parts excluding lamps.

2. Warranty Period: minimum 18 months from substantial completion for Bi-Polar

Ionization.




234300 - 3

3. Refer to specification section 23000 “General Provisions” for additional warranty

requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ULTTRAVIOLET GERMICIDAL IRRADATION (UVGI)

A. Description: Factory-fabricated UVGI.



the following:

a. Fresh Aire

b. Sterile Aire

c. UVR REsources.

B. Fully packaged UVGI system with supports, lamps, holders, control panel, lamp shields for in

unit mounting, mounting hardware and warning labels,

C. High output UVC lamps.

D. Scalable design of unit or duct mounting.

E. Lifetime warranty of parts excluding lamps.

F. Single lamp for up to 3 tons

G. Dual lamp for unit greater than 3 tons.

H. All lamp sizes to be confirmed based on actual equipment being provided.

I. Power Pack: Self-contained, prewired unit with 120-V ac, single-phase, 60-Hz power. include

overload protection, on-off switch, interlock switches, pilot light showing operating status,

timer and access door interlock.

J. Safety Accessories: Door interlock switch, enameled high-voltage and UV light warning signs

and contacts for enable-disable control by building automation system.

2.2 BI POLAR IONIZATION SYSTEM

A. Description: Factory-fabricated Bi Polar ionization System.



the following:

a. Atmos Air

b. Bio Clamtic

c. Plasma Air





234300 - 4

B. Fully packaged system including ionization tubes, controller and tube supports in single housing

for supply duct mounting.

C. Controller: Integral to unit with adjustable output control power disconnect switch, IP54 rated.

Rated for 120 volts/single phase, 60 Hz, internally fused, junction box wiring with cord and

plug.

D. Power consumption less than 55 watts.

E. Housing: 22 gauge powder coated steel.

F. ETL, UL and CCSA listed.

G. 2 year rated replaceable ionization tubes.

H. Accessories: Air Pressure switch, mounting bracket, timer, remote operating panel for units

over 8 feet above floor.

2.3 NEEDLE POINT BI POLAR IONIZATION SYSTEM

A. Description: Factory-fabricated Bi Polar ionization System.



the following:

a. Plasma Air

B. Needlepoint brush type ionizers producing an equal amount of positive and negative ions

neutralizing harmful pollutants and odors. This self-balancing unit is highly versatile to be

installed at the fan inlet of VRF ductless split systems. Includes dry contacts which indicate

ionizer functionality to a BAS (Building Automation System).

C. Self contained potted enclosure with molded flange and mounting holes.

D. 24, 120 or 208 vac to match unit voltage.

E. Power consumption less than 1 watt.

F. Fuse protected with inline with 500mA cartridge fuse.

2.4 FILTER GAGES

A. Diaphragm type, with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white

background, and front recalibration adjustment.



the following:

a. Airguard.

b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.






234300 - 5

2. Diameter: 4-1/2 inches

3. Scale Range for Filter Media Having a Recommended Final Resistance of 0.5-Inch wg or

Less: 0- to 0.5-inch wg.

4. Scale Range for Filter Media Having a Recommended Final Resistance of 0.5- to 1-Inch

wg or Less: 0- to 1.0-inch wg.

5. Scale Range for Filter Media Having a Recommended Final Resistance of 1.0- to 2.0-

Inch wg or Less: 0- to 2.0-inch wg.

B. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gage connections, and mounting bracket.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter

holding frames to substrate.

B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.

D. Operate electronic air cleaners for 24 hours as part of startup before filters are put into

operation.

E. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Install filter gages

on filter banks with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Mount

filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and

level inclined gages.

F. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.

G. Install bipolar ionization systems in ductwork per manufactures requirements. Provide access

for inspection and service.

H. Install needle point ionization in the fan inlet for per manufactures requirements. Connect

power source to the VRF system and operate unit only when VRF unit is in operation.

I. Install UVGI systems after cooling coil in the heat pumps. Downstream of the dual temp coil in

the DOAS units. Wire up safety interlocks to shut off the UVGI units to the access doors or

panel to shut down upon accessing interior of unit.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections.




234300 - 6

B. Tests and Inspections: Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.

C. Air filter gauges will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-

distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new prefilter and final-filter media.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain electronic air cleaners. Refer to section 017900 "Demonstration

and Training."



DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS


237433 - 1

SECTION 237433 - DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Refer to specification section 232913 “Variable Frequency Motor Controllers and Enclosed

Controllers” for VFD requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes factory-packaged units capable of supplying up to 100 percent outdoor air and

providing energy recovery, preheat, cooling and heating.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

3. Unit dimensions and weight.

4. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Fan construction and accessories.

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Filters with performance characteristics.

9. Diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

10. Trap dimensions including calculations.

B. CT High Performance Building Submittals:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with

applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Product Data for Prerequisite IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with

ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

3. Product Data for Credit IEQ 1: Documentation indicating that units are equipped with a

direct outdoor airflow-measuring device capable of measuring the minimum outdoor




237433 - 2

airflow with accuracy within 15 percent of the design minimum airflow rate, as defined

by ASHRAE 62.1.

4. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

5. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."

6. Product Data for Credit IEQ 5: Documentation indicating that units include minimum

MERV 13 filters rated according to ASHRAE 52.2.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation indicated to comply with performance



1. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment

mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for



A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural

and mechanical elements.

2. Support location, type, and weight.

3. Field measurements.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.









E. Startup service reports.

F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.




237433 - 3


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.




1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.




B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to

ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace components of units that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Trane custom is the basis of the design, Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Daiken

2. Ingenia

3. Trane Custom




237433 - 4

4. Ventrol


A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation.

C. Cabinet Thermal Performance:

1. Maximum Overall U-Value: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

2. Include effects of metal-to-metal contact and thermal bridges in the calculations.

D. Cabinet Surface Condensation:

1. Cabinet shall have additional insulation and vapor seals if required to prevent

condensation on the interior and exterior of the cabinet.

2. Portions of cabinet located downstream from the cooling coil shall have a thermal break

at each thermal bridge between the exterior and interior casing to prevent condensation

from occurring on the interior and exterior surfaces. The thermal break shall not

compromise the structural integrity of the cabinet.

E. Maximum Cabinet Leakage: 0.5 percent of the total supply-air flow at a pressure rating equal

to the fan shut-off pressure.

F. Cabinet Deflection Performance:

1. Walls and roof deflection shall be within 1/200 of the span at the design working pressure

equal to the fan shut-off pressure. Deflection limits shall be measured at any point on the

surface.

2. Floor deflections shall be within 1/240 of the span considering the worst-case condition

caused by the following:

a. Service personnel.

b. Internal components.

c. Design working pressure defined for the walls and roof.

G. Electrical components, devices, and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.3 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Type: Double wall insulated.

2. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

3. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.

4. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.

5. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,

apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat

and thermosetting topcoat.




237433 - 5



B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Type: Foam Injected with Thermal Break

2. Insulation Value: Minimum of R-13

3. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II.

4. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of

same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Fabricate windows in all access doors of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety

glass with an air space between panes and sealed with interior and exterior rubber

seals.

d. Size: At least 24 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height

of 72 inches for all areas requiring access for service or sized as needed to remove

largest interior component such as fans. For access to coils doors shall be no

smaller than 18” wide.

3. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors.

b. Access Section: Doors.

c. Coil Sections: Doors.

d. Damper Section: Doors.

e. Wheel: Doors

f. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.

g. Mixing Section: Doors.

4. Service Light: Marine LED (100-W equivalent) vaporproof fixture with switched

junction box located outside adjacent to door.

a. Locations: Each section accessed with door except wheel.

D. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from

humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with

ASHRAE 62.1.

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2. Integral part of floor plating.

3. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation

and moisture-tight seal.

4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.




237433 - 6

5. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from

top coil.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: 8” high Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural

channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs, size to allow for

proper condensate drain trap.

2.4 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Direct drive fan array system

1. The fan array system shall consist of multiple, direct driven, arrangement with a

minimum plenum fans as scheduled. Fans shall have a sharply rising pressure

characteristic extending through the operating range and continuing to rise beyond the

peak efficiency to ensure quiet and stable operation. Fans shall have a non-overloading

design with self-limiting horsepower characteristics and shall reach a peak in the normal

selection area. All fans shall be capable of operating over the minimum pressure class

limits as specified in AMCA's standard 2408-69.

2. The fan array shall consist of multiple fan and motor "cells", spaced in the air way tunnel

cross section to provide a uniform air flow and velocity profile across the entire air way

tunnel cross section and components contained therein.

3. The fan array shall produce a uniform air flow profile and velocity profile within the

airway tunnel of the air handling unit not to exceed the specified cooling coil and/or filter

bank face velocity when measured at a point 12" from the intake side of the fan array

intake plenum wall, and at a distance of 48" from the discharge side of the fan plenum

wall.

4. Each fan/motor assembly shall be removable through an access door located on the side

of the fan wall array.

5. Plenum fans shall have factory connected direct drive ECM or induction fan motor.

Manufacturers that offer belt drive fans in lieu of direct drive fans shall not be acceptable.

6. Furnish spring loaded or gravity damper assembly at the inlet of each fan to prevent

positive supply fan chamber from flowing to negative inlet chamber when individual fan

motor fails or is cycled off.

7. Air handling cabinet shall be furnished with inward swinging door to assure air tight door

seal of positive pressure system.

8. Each fan array system shall be configured with airflow monitoring as a total airflow of

each fan section. Include a transducer for each fan array to directly read cfm with an

analogue output to the building automation system without external convertors.

B. Plenum fans

1. The fan construction shall be in accordance with the class required or specified in the

project fan schedule.

2. The manufacturer shall certify the sound power level ratings in the eight octave bands

and shall have sound power levels in compliance with DIN EN ISO 3745 AND ISO

13347-3.

3. The fans shall have been statically and dynamically balanced by the fan manufacturer. An

IRD or PMC analyzer shall have been used to measure velocity, the final balanced

reading shall not exceed 0.1 inches/second. Balancing and vibration tests shall have been

done according to G6.3 DIN ISO 1940 Part 1.




237433 - 7

4. All fans shall be certified to bear the AMCA® rating seal for air and sound, according to

standards AMCA 210-99

5. The fans shall be compliant and listed to ErP 2015, CE and UL/CSA.

6. The bearings shall be designed for continuous intensive operation and shall be rated for a

minimum L-10 life 40,000 hours at the maximum speed for its class.

7. The fan wheel shall be aluminum or high performance composite.

8. The fan and motor assembly shall conform to EN61800-5-1;CE standards and have

approval 1004-7+60730;c22.2 Nr.77+ and CAN/CSA-E60730-1

C. ECM motors

1. RPM modulation controls are built into the ECM motors. RPM modulation does not

require a VFD.

2. Motors shall be IP54 and rated for outdoor use.

3. Motors under 1.7Hp, shall be designed for 60 Hz, single phase. Motors 1.7 Hp and over

shall be 3 phase 460V.

4. Motor insulation class shall be of Type F.

5. The motors shall have self-regulating temperature control. The motor will slow down if

the temperature gets too high and use power from the mains to heat itself if the

temperature is too cold.

6. Motors shall have reverse polarity and locked motor protection

7. The motors shall have a built in soft-start feature and line under-voltage/phase failure

detection.

8. The fan and motor shall have an Integrated PID controller, AM-MODBUS-W, AM-

Premium-W, A-G-247NW Hand held controller and Control input 0-10 VDC/PWM.

9. The motor shall have EMC interference immunity and emission according to EN 61000-

6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 respectively.

10. The motor shall have some moisture resistance and condensation holes for moisture to

escape the motor.

11. Each fan shall motor be supplied with an expansion data card or transducer, which

indicates airflow in Cubic Feet per Minute. Data card shall provide a digital CFM

readout, and a (4-20 ma) (0-10 volt) output control signal for use in the BMS. BACnet

input as an option.

D. Fan array system electrical

1. Furnish a complete electrical cabinet with hinged doors as an integral design of the AHU.

Single point 460/3/60 power block to each fan array shall be located within the electrical

cabinet. All individual fan disconnects, overloads and switching must be located within

the cabinet.

2. Fan Array designs shall be in accordance with specific system requirements. Please see

system requirements before electrical design of Fan Array System is to commence.

3. Fan Array Electrical designs shall be in accordance with the NEC, UL 508A, and Local

Codes.

4. The unit shall be completely factory-wired, requiring only field wiring to the line side of

the main power disconnect switches at the electrical control panel.

5. Disconnect switch for each fan Motor with circuit Protection

6. All motors in the Fan array shall be provided with individual Motor Protection for

thermal overload protection. All motor circuit protectors shall be mounted and located in

a remote motor circuit protector panel as needed that is separate from the main enclosure.

Motor circuit protector enclosure must be located and mounted at a minimal distance

from motors in the Fan array.

LIST OF CONSULTANTS - Connecticut...LIST OF CONSULTANTS Architect TSKP STUDIO, LLC 146 Wyllys...

Documents

Transcript of LIST OF CONSULTANTS - Connecticut...LIST OF CONSULTANTS Architect TSKP STUDIO, LLC 146 Wyllys...